Division 1 Rules For Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water Cooled Plants

DIVISION 1
RULES FOR INSPECTION AND

TESTING OF COMPONENTS OF
LIGHT-WATER COOLED PLANTS
SUBSECTION IWA A99
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

IWA-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1200 Jurisdiction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1300 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1310 Components Subject to Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1320 Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
IWA-1400 Owner’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-1500 Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-1600 Referenced Standards and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IWA-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

IWA-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IWA-2110 Duties of the Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IWA-2120 Qualification of Authorized Inspection Agencies, Inspectors, and Supervisors . . . . . . 14
IWA-2130 Access for Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2200 Examination Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2210 Visual Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2211 VT-1 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
IWA-2215 Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2216 Remote Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2220 Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2221 Magnetic Particle Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2222 Liquid Penetrant Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2223 Eddy Current Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2230 Volumetric Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2231 Radiographic Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2232 Ultrasonic Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2233 Eddy Current Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IWA-2240 Alternative Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2300 Qualifications of Nondestructive Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2310 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2311 Written Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2312 NDE Methods Listed in ANSI /ASNT CP-189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2313 NDE Methods Not Listed in ANSI /ASNT CP-189 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2314 Certification and Recertification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2315 Personnel Requirements For Eddy Current Examination of Steam Generator
Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
IWA-2316 Alternative Qualifications of VT-2 Visual Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-2317 Alternative Qualifications of VT-3 Visual Examination Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2320 Qualification Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2321 Vision Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2322 Near-Distance Test Chart Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2323 Level III Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
IWA-2330 Level I Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2340 Level III Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2350 Limited Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2360 Level I and Level II Training and Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2370 Level III Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
IWA-2380 NDE Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2400 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2410 Application of Code Edition and Addenda. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2420 Inspection Plans and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2425 Inspection Plan and Schedule Supporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2430 Inspection Intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
IWA-2431 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2432 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2440 Application of Code Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2441 Section XI Code Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2442 Annulled Section XI Code Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2443 Code Cases for Other Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2500 Extent of Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2600 Weld Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2610 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2620 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2630 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IWA-2640 Other Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IWA-2641 Layout of Component Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
IWA-3000 Standards for Examination Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

IWA-3100 Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3200 Significant Digits for Limiting Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3300 Flaw Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3310 Surface Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
IWA-3320 Subsurface Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3330 Multiple Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3340 Nonplanar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3350 Parallel Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3360 Laminar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3370 Radiographic Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3380 Multiple Nonaligned Coplanar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IWA-3390 Multiple Aligned Separate Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IWA-3400 Linear Flaws Detected by Surface or Volumetric Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
IWA-4000 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

IWA-4100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4110 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4120 Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IWA-4130 Alternative Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4131 Small Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4131.1 Applicability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

IWA-4131.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4132 Items Rotated From Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4133 Mechanical Clamping Devices Used as Piping Pressure Boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
IWA-4140 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4141 Owner’s Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4142 Repair /Replacement Organization’s Quality Assurance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4143 Stamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4150 Repair /Replacement Program and Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
IWA-4160 Verification of Acceptability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4170 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4180 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4200 Items for Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4220 Code Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4221 Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
IWA-4222 Reconciliation of Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4223 Reconciliation of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224 Reconciliation of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.1 Identical Material Procured to a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construction
Code, Section III, or Material Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.2 Identical Material Procured to an Earlier Construction Code Edition or Addenda
or Material Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.3 Use of a Different Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
IWA-4224.4 Substitution of Material Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4225 Reconciliation of Parts, Appurtenances, and Piping Subassemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226 Reconciliation of Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226.1 Design to All Requirements of a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construction
Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4226.2 Design to Portions of the Requirements of a Later Edition or Addenda of the
Construction Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4300 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4311 Material, Design, or Configuration Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4320 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4321 Class 1 Mechanical Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
IWA-4330 Rerating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4332 Flaw Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4333 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4334 Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4400 Welding, Brazing, Defect Removal, and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
IWA-4420 Construction Code Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4421 Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422 Defect Removal and Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.1 Defect Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2 Nondestructive Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2.1 Defect Removal Without Welding or Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4422.2.2 Defect Removal Followed by Welding or Brazing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4430 Alternatives to Construction Code Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
IWA-4440 Welding and Welder Qualification (Including Welding Operators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4450 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4451 Helical-Coil Threaded Inserts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

IWA-4451.1 Class 1, 2, and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4460 Metal Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461 Thermal Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.1 P-No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.2 P-Nos. 3, 4, 5A, 5B, 5C, 6, 7, 9A, 9B, 9C, 10A, 10B, 10C, 10E through 10K,
and 11A Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IWA-4461.3 P-Nos. 8 and 43 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4461.4 Alternative to Mechanical Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4462 Mechanical Removal Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4500 Examination and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4520 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
IWA-4530 Preservice Inspection and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4540 Pressure Testing of Class 1, 2, and 3 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4550 Class MC and Metallic Portions of Class CC Containments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4600 Alternative Welding Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IWA-4610 General Requirements for All Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611 Defect Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611.1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4611.2 Examination Following Defect Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4620 Similar Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4622 Welding Qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IWA-4623 Welding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4623.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4623.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4624 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IWA-4630 Dissimilar Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
IWA-4632 Welding Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
IWA-4634 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4640 Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4642 Welding Procedure Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
IWA-4644 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4650 Butter Bead — Temper Bead Welding for Class MC and for Class CC
Metallic Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4652 Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
IWA-4652.2 Procedure Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4652.3 Performance Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4652.4 Production Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IWA-4653 Welding Technique. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4654 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4655 Welding Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IWA-4660 Underwater Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

IWA-4661 Scope and General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4662 Additional Variables for Dry Underwater Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4663 Additional Variables for Wet Underwater Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
IWA-4664 Filler Metal Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
IWA-4665 Alternative Procedure Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666.1 Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4666.2 Volumetric Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4700 Heat Exchanger Tubing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4710 Plugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4711 Explosive Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
IWA-4711.2 Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
IWA-4711.3 Plugging Procedure Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4711.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712 Fusion Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.1 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.2 Welding Qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
IWA-4712.3 Plugging Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4712.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4712.5 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4720 Sleeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.1 Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.2 Sleeving Procedure Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
IWA-4721.3 Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4721.4 Sleeving by a Combination of Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4721.5 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722 Explosive Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722.2 Explosive Welding Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
IWA-4722.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723 Fusion Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723.2 Fusion Welding Qualification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
IWA-4723.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724 Brazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724.2 Brazing Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4724.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
IWA-4725 Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IWA-4725.2 Expansion Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
IWA-4725.4 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

IWA-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5110 Periodic System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5120 System Pressure Tests for Repair /Replacement Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5200 System Test Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5210 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5211 Test Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5212 Pressure and Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IWA-5213 Test Condition Holding Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5214 Preservice Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5220 Test Pressurization Boundaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5221 System Leakage Test Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5222 System Hydrostatic Test Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
IWA-5240 Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5241 Noninsulated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5242 Insulated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5243 Components With Leakage Collection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5244 Buried Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5245 Elevated Temperature Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
IWA-5250 Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5260 Instruments for System Hydrostatic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5261 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5262 Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5263 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5264 Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5265 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5300 Test Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-5400 Pressure Testing of Class 1, 2, and 3 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
IWA-6000 Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

IWA-6100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6200 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6210 Owner’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6220 Preparation of Abstract of Examination Required by Form NIS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6230 Summary Report Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6240 Summary Report Submittal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
IWA-6300 Retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6310 Maintenance of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6320 Reproduction and Microfilming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6330 Construction Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-6340 Inservice Inspection Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
IWA-9000 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figures
IWA-3310-1 Surface Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . . . . 26
IWA-3320-1 Subsurface Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . 27
IWA-3330-1 Multiple Planar Flaws Oriented in Plane Normal to Pressure Retaining Surface . . . 28
IWA-3340-1 Nonplanar Elliptical Subsurface Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IWA-3350-1 Parallel Planar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IWA-3360-1 Laminar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

ARTICLE IWA-1000
SCOPE AND RESPONSIBILITY
A99 IWA-1100 SCOPE subject to review by the regulatory and enforcement

authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site.
This Division provides requirements for inservice
inspection and inservice testing of light-water cooled
nuclear power plants. The requirements identify the IWA-1320 CLASSIFICATIONS A99
areas subject to inspection, responsibilities, provisions
for accessibility and inspectability, examination methods (a) Application of the rules of this Division shall
and procedures, personnel qualifications, frequency of be governed by the group classification criteria of the
inspection, record keeping and report requirements, regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site
procedures for evaluation of inspection results and as follows.
subsequent disposition of results of evaluations, and (1) The rules of IWB shall be applied to those
repair /replacement activity requirements, including pro- systems whose components are classified ASME Class 1.
curement, design, welding, brazing, defect removal, (2) The rules of IWC shall be applied to those
installation, examination, and pressure testing. systems whose components are classified ASME Class 2.
(3) The rules of IWD shall be applied to those
systems whose components are classified ASME Class 3.
IWA-1200 JURISDICTION (4) The requirements of IWE shall be applied to
components classified ASME Class MC and to metallic
The jurisdiction of this Division covers individual shell and penetration liners classified ASME Class CC.
components and complete plants that have met all the (5) The requirements of IWF shall be applied to
requirements of the Construction Code, commencing supports classified ASME Class 1, 2, 3, or MC.
when the Construction Code requirements have been (6) The requirements of IWL shall be applied to
met, irrespective of physical location. When portions reinforced concrete and post-tensioning systems classi-
of systems or plants are completed at different times, fied ASME Class CC.
jurisdiction of this Division shall cover only those (b) Optional construction of a component within a
portions for which all of the construction requirements system boundary to a classification higher than the
have been met. Prior to installation, an item that has minimum class established in the component Design
met all requirements of the Construction Code may be Specification (either upgrading from Class 2 to Class
corrected using the rules of either the Construction 1 or from Class 3 to Class 2) shall not affect the
Code or this Division, as determined by the Owner. overall system classification by which the applicable
rules of this Division are determined.
(c) Where all components within the system bound-
IWA-1300 APPLICATION ary or isolable portions of the system boundary are
IWA-1310 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO classified to a higher class than required by the group
INSPECTION AND TESTING classification criteria, the rules of IWA-1320(a) may
be applied to the higher classification, provided the
Components identified in this Division for inspection rules of the applicable Subsection are applied in their
and testing shall be included in the inservice inspection entirety.
plan. These components include nuclear power plant (d) The portion of piping that penetrates a contain-
items such as vessels, containments, piping systems, ment vessel, which is required by Section III to be
pumps, valves, core support structures, and storage constructed to Class 1 or 2 rules for piping and which
tanks, including their respective supports. The selection may differ from the classification of the balance of
of components for the inservice inspection plan is the piping system, need not affect the overall system
11
ARTICLE IWA-1000
IWA-1100 SCOPE tanks, including their respective supports. The selection

of components for the inservice inspection plan is
This Division provides requirements for inservice
subject to review by the regulatory and enforcement
inspection and inservice testing of light-water cooled
authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site.
nuclear power plants. The requirements identify the
areas subject to inspection, responsibilities, provisions
for accessibility and inspectability, examination methods
and procedures, personnel qualifications, frequency of
inspection, record keeping and report requirements, IWA-1320 CLASSIFICATIONS
procedures for evaluation of inspection results and
(a) Application of the rules of this Division shall
subsequent disposition of results of evaluations, and
be governed by the group classification criteria of the
repair /replacement activity requirements, including pro-
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site
curement, design, welding, brazing, metal or concrete
as follows.
removal, installation, examination, and pressure testing.
(1) The rules of IWB shall be applied to those
systems whose components are classified ASME Class
1 (Quality Group A).
IWA-1200 JURISDICTION (2) The rules of IWC shall be applied to those
The jurisdiction of this Division covers individual
2 (Quality Group B).
components and complete plants that have met all the
(3) The rules of IWD shall be applied to those
requirements of the Construction Code, commencing
when the Construction Code requirements have been
3 (Quality Group C).
met, irrespective of physical location. When portions
(b) Optional construction of a component within a
of systems or plants are completed at different times,
system boundary to a classification higher than the
jurisdiction of this Division shall cover only those
minimum class established in the component Design
portions for which all of the construction requirements
Specification (either upgrading from Class 2 to Class
have been met. Prior to installation, an item that has
1 or from Class 3 to Class 2) shall not affect the
met all requirements of the Construction Code may be
overall system classification by which the applicable
corrected using the rules of either the Construction
rules of this Division are determined.
Code or this Division, as determined by the Owner.
(c) Where all components within the system bound-
ary or isolable portions of the system boundary are
classified to a higher class than required by the group
IWA-1300 APPLICATION classification criteria, the rules of IWA-1320(a) may
be applied to the higher classification, provided the
IWA-1310 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO
rules of the applicable Subsection are applied in their
INSPECTION AND TESTING
entirety.
Components identified in this Division for inspection (d) The portion of piping that penetrates a contain-
and testing shall be included in the inservice inspection ment vessel, which is required by Section III to be
plan. These components include nuclear power plant constructed to Class 1 or 2 rules for piping and which
items such as vessels, containments, piping systems, may differ from the classification of the balance of
pumps, valves, core support structures, and storage the piping system, need not affect the overall system
11
IWA-1320 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-1600
classification that determines the applicable rules of (m) the retention and maintenance of all basic calibra-
this Division. tion blocks used for ultrasonic examination of the
(e) If systems safety criteria permit a system to be components;
nonnuclear safety Class and an Owner optionally classi- (n) documentation of a Quality Assurance Program
fies and constructs that system, or a portion thereof, in accordance with the following:
to Class 2 or Class 3 requirements, the application of (1) Title 10, Code of Federal Regulations, Part
the rules of IWA-1320(a) is at the option of the Owner 50; or
and is not a requirement of this Division. (2) ASME NQA-1, Parts II and III, Basic Require-
ments and Supplements.
(o) recording of regions in ferritic steel components
IWA-1400 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITY where acceptance standards have been modified as
required in IWB-3410.2;
The responsibilities of the Owner of the nuclear (p) recording of regions in components where flaws
power plant shall include the following:
or relevant conditions exceeding the acceptance stan-
(a) determination of the appropriate Code class(es) dards have been evaluated by analysis to allow continued
for each component1 of the plant, and identification of operation as permitted by IWB-3132.3, IWB-3142.4,
the system boundaries for each class of components
IWC-3122.3, IWC-3132.3, IWE-3122.3, IWF-3112.3,
subject to inspection and the components exempt from IWF-3122.3, and IWL-3212. Any continued operation
examination requirements; time or cycle limits inherent in the analysis shall also
(b) design and arrangement of system components
be recorded.
to include allowances for adequate access and clearances
for conduct of the examination and tests;
(c) preparation of plans, schedules, and inservice
IWA-1500 ACCESSIBILITY
inspection summary reports, and submittal of these
plans and reports to the enforcement and regulatory Provisions for accessibility shall include the following
authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site; considerations:2
(d) preparation of written examination instructions (a) access for the Inspector, examination personnel,
and procedures, including diagrams or system drawings and equipment necessary to conduct the examinations;
identifying the extent of areas of components subject (b) sufficient space for removal and storage of struc-
to examination; tural members, shielding, and insulation;
(e) verification of qualification to the required level (c) installation and support of handling machinery
of responsibility of personnel who perform the examina- (e.g., hoists) where required to facilitate removal, disas-
tions; sembly, and storage of equipment, components, and
(f) possession of an arrangement with an Authorized other materials;
Inspection Agency to provide inspection services; (d) performance of examinations alternative to those
(g) performance of required examinations and tests; specified in the event structural defects or indications are
(h) recording of examination and test results that revealed that may require such alternative examinations;
provide a basis for evaluation and facilitate comparison (e) performance of necessary operations associated
with the results of subsequent examinations; with repair /replacement activities.
(i) evaluation of examination and test results;
(j) performance of repair /replacement activities in
accordance with written programs and plans; IWA-1600 REFERENCED STANDARDS
(k) maintenance of adequate inspection, examination, AND SPECIFICATIONS
test, flaw evaluation, and repair /replacement activity
records such as radiographs, diagrams, drawings, calcu- When standards and specifications are referenced in
lations, examination and test data, description of proce- this Division, their revision date or indicator shall be
dures used, and evidence of personnel qualifications; as shown in Table IWA-1600-1.
(l) retention of all inspection, examination, test, and
repair /replacement activity records and flaw evaluation 2 Design considerations other than access provisions may be needed
calculations for the service lifetime of the component for specific system components to render inservice inspections practi-
or system; cal (such as surface finish of components subject to crud or corrosion
product buildup, material selection to minimize activation in service,
and shielding from irradiation effects).
1 Classification criteria are specified in 10 CFR 50.
12
ASME B&PVC sec11$$u10 04-15-99 08:36:58 pd: sec11

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Table IWA-1600-1
TABLE IWA-1600-1 98
REFERENCED STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Standard or Revision Date

Specification or Indicator
ACI 201.1 R-68 1984
ANSI/ASNT CP-189 1995
ANSI/AWS D 3.6 1989
APHA 427 1981, 15th Edition
APHA 4500-S2− 19th Edition
ASME QAI-1 1995
ASME NQA-1 1989
ASME/ANSI OM (Part 1) 1987
ASME/ANSI OM (Part 4) 1987 with OMa-1988
ASNT SNT-TC-1A 1984
ASTM D 95 1970
ASTM D 512 1981
ASTM D 974 1987
ASTM D 992 1978
ASTM D 3867 1979
ASTM D 4327 1988
ASTM E 29 1967
ASTM E 185 1982
ASTM E 380 1972
ASTM E 1065 1987A
ASTM E 1324 1990
13

ARTICLE IWA-2000
EXAMINATION AND INSPECTION
IWA-2100 GENERAL performed in accordance with written qualified proce-

dures and by personnel employed by the Owner or
A99 IWA-2110 DUTIES OF THE INSPECTOR the Owner’s agent and qualified in accordance with
(a) The Inspector shall review the inspection plan IWA-2300.
and, as necessary, the implementation schedule (IWA- (h) The Inspector may require, at any time, requalifi-
2420) prior to the start of preservice inspection and cation of any procedure or operator if the Inspector
each inspection interval. The review shall cover any has reason to believe that the requirements are not
features that are affected by the requirements of this being met.
Division, as applicable, and shall include the following: (i) The Inspector shall certify the examination rec-
(1) examination categories and items ords after verifying that the requirements have been
(2) test and examination requirements met and that the records are correct.
(3) examination methods (j) The Inspector shall verify that repair /replacement
(4) percentage of parts selected for examination activities are performed in accordance with the require-
(5) inservice test quantities ments of the Owner’s Repair /Replacement Program.
(6) disposition of test results (k) The Inspector shall review the Quality Assurance
Program for repair/replacement activities and its imple-
(7) test frequency
mentation.
(8) system pressure tests
(9) sequence of successive examinations
Shop and field preservice examinations are exempt from
prior review.
(b) The Inspector shall review any revisions to the
inspection plan and, as necessary, the implementation
schedule during the preservice inspection or the inspec-
tion interval.
(c) The Inspector shall submit a report to the Owner IWA-2120 QUALIFICATION OF
documenting review of the items identified in IWA- AUTHORIZED INSPECTION
2110(a) and (b). AGENCIES, INSPECTORS, AND
(d) The Inspector shall verify that the required exami- SUPERVISORS
nations and system pressure tests have been performed (a) The inspection required by this Division shall
and the results recorded. be performed:
(e) The Inspector shall verify that the required visual (1) where the plant is in the United States, by an
examinations have been performed and the results rec- Inspector employed by a State or Municipality of the
orded. United States or an Inspector regularly employed by
(f) The Inspector shall perform any additional inves- an insurance company authorized to write boiler and
tigations necessary to verify that all applicable require- pressure vessel insurance in the United States;
ments of IWA-2110 have been met. (2) where the plant is in Canada, by an Inspector
(g) The Inspector shall verify that the nondestructive employed by a Canadian Province or, if authorized by
examination methods used follow the techniques speci- the Province in which the plant is located, by an
fied in this Division and that the examinations are Inspector regularly employed by an insurance company
14
ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-2120 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-2213
licensed to write boiler and pressure vessel insurance meeting Table IWA-2210-1 is required. Measurements
in that Province; of the near-distance test chart shall be made once
(3) by an Inspector employed by other enforcement before initial use with an optical comparator (10X or
authorities in the United States or Canada having juris- greater) or other suitable instrument to verify that the
diction over the designated plant. height of a representative lower case character, for the
(b) The Authorized Inspection Agency, including its selected type size, meets the requirements of Table
staff of Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector Supervi- IWA-2210-1.
sors and the Inspectors, shall meet the requirements of (c) Remote examination may be substituted for direct
ASME QAI-1. examination. The remote examination procedure shall
(c) The Authorized Inspection Agency shall be ac- be demonstrated to resolve the selected test chart char-
credited by ASME in accordance with the provisions acters.
set forth in ASME QAI-1. (d) Alternatives to the direct visual examination dis-
tance requirements of Section V may be used as
specified in Table IWA-2210-1.
IWA-2130 ACCESS FOR INSPECTOR (e) It is not necessary to measure illumination levels
on each examination surface when the same portable
The Owner shall arrange for an Inspector to have light source or similar installed lighting equipment is
access to all parts of the plant as necessary to make demonstrated to provide the illumination specified in
the required inspections. The Owner shall keep the Table IWA-2210-1 at the maximum examination dis-
Inspector informed of the progress of the preparatory tance.
work necessary to permit inspections and shall notify (f) The adequacy of the illumination levels from
the Inspector at a time reasonably in advance of when battery powered portable lights shall be checked before
the components will be ready for inspection. and after each examination or series of examinations,
not to exceed 4 hr between checks. In lieu of using
a light meter, these checks may be made by verifying
IWA-2200 EXAMINATION METHODS that the illumination is adequate (i.e., no discernable
(a) The three types of examinations used during degradation in the visual examination resolution of the
inservice inspection are defined as visual, surface, and procedure demonstration test chart characters.
volumetric. The examination method to be used is
specified in Tables IWB-, IWC-, IWD-, IWE-, IWF-, IWA-2211 VT-1 Examination
and IWL-2500-1. If a component must be examined
in a high radiation area, remotely controlled equipment VT-1 examinations are conducted to detect disconti-
may be advisable. nuities and imperfections on the surfaces of components,
(b) When preparation of a surface for nondestructive including such conditions as cracks, wear, corrosion,
examination is required, the preparation shall be by a or erosion.
mechanical method. Such surfaces shall be blended
into the surrounding area as may be required to perform IWA-2212 VT-2 Examination
the examination. The wall thickness shall not be reduced
below the minimum thickness required by design. Non- (a) VT-2 examinations are conducted to detect evi-
mandatory Appendix D may be used for such surface dence of leakage from pressure retaining components,
preparation. with or without leakage collection systems, as required
during the conduct of system pressure test.
(b) VT-2 examinations shall be conducted in accord-
ance with IWA-5000. For direct examination, the Table
98 IWA-2210 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
IWA-2210-1 maximum examination distance shall apply
Visual examinations shall be conducted in accordance to the distance from the eye to the surfaces being
with Table IWA-2210-1 of Section V, Article 9 and examined.
the following;
(a) A written procedure and report of examination
IWA-2213 VT-3 Examination
results is required.
(b) For procedure demonstration, a near-distance vi- VT-3 examinations are conducted to determine the
sion test chart containing text with lower case characters general mechanical and structural condition of compo-
without an ascender or descender (e.g., a, c, e, o) nents and their supports by verifying parameters such
15
TABLE IWA-2210-1 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
Maximum Procedure
Minimum Maximum Direct Demonstration Lower
Visual Illumination, Examination Case Character Height,
Examination fc Distance, ft in.
VT-1 50 2 0.044
VT-2 15 6 0.158
VT-3 50 4 0.105
as clearances, settings, and physical displacements; and IWA-2222 Liquid Penetrant Examination
to detect discontinuities and imperfections, such as loss
Liquid penetrant examination shall be conducted in
of integrity at bolted or welded connections, loose or
accordance with Section V, Article 6.
missing parts, debris, corrosion, wear, or erosion. VT-
3 includes examinations for conditions that could affect
operability or functional adequacy of snubbers and IWA-2223 Eddy Current Examination
constant load and spring type supports.
Eddy current examination for detection of surface
flaws shall be conducted in accordance with Appen-
IWA-2215 Replication dix IV.
Surface replication methods may be used for VT-1
and VT-3 examinations when the surface resolution is
at least equivalent to that of direct visual observation. IWA-2230 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION
A volumetric examination indicates the presence of
IWA-2216 Remote Visual Examination discontinuities throughout the volume of material and
may be conducted from either the inside or outside
In addition to the requirements of Section V, Article surface of a component.
9, when remote visual examination is substituted for
direct visual examination, the remote visual examination
system shall have the capability of distinguishing and IWA-2231 Radiographic Examination
differentiating between the colors applicable to the
requirements of VT-1 and VT-3 for the component Radiographic techniques, employing penetrating radi-
examinations being conducted. ation such as X-rays, gamma rays, or thermalized
neutrons, may be utilized with appropriate image-re-
cording devices, such as photographic film or papers,
IWA-2220 SURFACE EXAMINATION electrostatic systems, direct-image orthicons, or image
converters. For radiographic examinations employing
(a) A surface examination indicates the presence of
either X-ray equipment or radioactive isotopes and
surface discontinuities. It may be conducted by a mag-
photographic films, the procedure shall be as specified
netic particle, a liquid penetrant, or an eddy current
in Article 2 of Section V.
method.
(b) Any linear indication that exceeds the allowable
linear surface flaw standards shall be recorded. IWA-2232 Ultrasonic Examination
Ultrasonic examination shall be conducted in accord-
IWA-2221 Magnetic Particle Examination ance with Appendix I.
(a) Magnetic particle examination shall be conducted
in accordance with Section V, Article 7.
IWA-2233 Eddy Current Examination
(b) Magnetic particle examination of coated materials
shall be conducted in accordance with Section V, Article Eddy current examination shall be conducted in
7, Appendix I. accordance with Section V, Article 8, Appendix II.
16
98 IWA-2240 ALTERNATIVE EXAMINATIONS (b) Training, qualification, and certification of ultra-

sonic examination personnel shall also comply with
Alternative examination methods, a combination of
the requirements of Appendix VII.
methods, or newly developed techniques may be substi-
(c) Training, qualification, and certification of visual
tuted for the methods specified in the Construction
examination personnel shall comply with the require-
Code or this Division, provided the Inspector is satisfied
ments of Appendix VI.
that the results are demonstrated to be equivalent or
(d) The visual examination training and experience
superior to those in the Construction Code
hours specified in CP-189 shall be applied to the
combined certification of an individual for VT-1, VT-
2, and VT-3 visual examination. Certification in only
IWA-2300 QUALIFICATIONS OF
one of the VT techniques is a limited certification, and
NONDESTRUCTIVE
the requirements of IWA-2350 apply.
EXAMINATION PERSONNEL
98 IWA-2310 GENERAL
A99
IWA-2313 NDE Methods Not Listed in 98
(a) Personnel performing nondestructive examina- ANSI /ASNT CP-189 A99
tions (NDE) shall be qualified and certified using a
Personnel using NDE methods not addressed in
written practice prepared in accordance with
ANSI /ASNT CP-189 shall be qualified as defined in
ANSI /ASNT CP-189, Standard for Qualification and
ANSI /ASNT CP-189 or the ACCP and the Employer’s
Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel, as
written practice.
amended by the requirements of this Division. Certifica-
tions based on SNT-TC-1A, ANSI N45.2.6, or earlier
editions of ANSI/ ASNT CP-189 are valid until recerti- IWA-2314 Certification and Recertification A99
fication is required. Recertification shall be in accord-
(a) Personnel shall be qualified by examination and
ance with the edition of ANSI /ASNT CP-189 referenced
shall be certified in accordance with ANSI /ASNT CP-
in IWA-1600 as amended by the requirements of this
189, except that the ASNT Level III certificate is not
Division. Outside agencies, as defined in Appendix VII,
required. Levels I, II, and III personnel shall be recerti-
may be used to qualify NDE personnel; however, the
fied by qualification examinations every 5 years.
Employer shall be solely responsible for the certification
(b) Personnel qualified in accordance with the ACCP
of Levels I, II, and III personnel. Nondestructive and
shall be recertified by examination every 5 years.
visual examination personnel qualified and certified in
(c) An ACCP certificate with current endorsements
accordance with the requirements of this Division are
obtained by examination satisfies the General and Prac-
qualified and certified to perform examinations in ac-
cordance with the requirements of previous Editions tice Examination requirements for Levels I and II NDE
and Addenda. personnel.
(b) As an alternative to a personnel qualification
program based on CP-189, the ASNT Central Certifica- IWA-2315 Personnel Requirements For Eddy
tion Program (ACCP) may be used. The supplemental Current Examination of Steam
requirements of this Division shall apply to qualification Generator Tubing
of personnel in accordance with the ACCP.
Personnel performing analysis or evaluation of data
shall be qualified by examination to perform analysis
IWA-2311 Written Practice of multifrequency data and to use multiparameter signal
(a) The Employer shall prepare a written practice combination techniques. The qualification shall include
in accordance with ANSI /ASNT CP-189. a practical examination that includes techniques used
(b) The written practice shall specify the duties and and the types of flaws that may be found during
responsibilities of the Principal Level III. examination of steam generator tubing.
98 IWA-2312 NDE Methods Listed in ANSI /ASNT IWA-2316 Alternative Qualifications of VT-2 98
CP-189 Visual Examination Personnel
(a) Qualifications shall be based on the methods, (a) In lieu of the requirements of IWA-2310 through
techniques, procedures, and equipment used for the IWA-2314, VT-2 visual examination personnel may be
NDE required by this Division. qualified by satisfying the following requirements:
17

(1) at least 40 hr plant walkdown experience, such TABLE IWA-2322-1

as that gained by licensed and nonlicensed operators, NEAR-DISTANCE ACUITY TEST DISTANCES
local leak rate personnel, system engineers, quality AND CHARACTER HEIGHTS
control personnel, and nondestructive examination per-
Test Maximum Lower Case
sonnel Distance, Character Height,
(2) at least 4 hr of training in the Section XI in. in.
requirements and plant-specific procedures for VT-2
12 0.022
visual examination 13 0.024
(3) the vision test requirements of IWA-2321 14 0.025
(b) These alternative qualification requirements shall 15 0.027
be described in the Employer’s written practice. 16 0.029
NOTE:
The test distances (eye to chart) and corresponding character heights
provide a visual angle of 6.25 minutes, which is equivalent to a Snellen
fraction of 20/25.
98 IWA-2317 Alternative Qualifications of VT-3
Visual Examination Personnel
(a) In lieu of the requirements of IWA-2310 through
IWA-2314, VT-3 visual examination personnel may be
qualified by satisfying the following requirements: IWA-2322 Near-Distance Test Chart
(1) at least 40 hours plant experience, such as Qualification
that gained by plant personnel involved in installation,
maintenance, or examination of pumps, valves, and A measurement of one of the near-distance test chart
supports, quality control personnel, and nondestructive characters shall be made once before initial use, with
examination personnel an optical comparator (10X or greater) or other suitable
(2) at least 8 hr of training in the Section XI instrument, to verify that the height of a representative
requirements and plant-specific procedures for VT-3 lower case character, without an ascender or descender
visual examination (e.g., a, c, e, o), for the selected type size, meets the
(3) the vision test requirements of IWA-2321 requirements of Table IWA-2322-1. This measurement
(b) The alternative qualification requirements shall shall be documented and traceable to the test chart.
be described in the Employer’s written practice.
IWA-2323 Level III Personnel A99
The qualifications of Level III NDE personnel shall

IWA-2320 QUALIFICATION EXAMINATIONS be evaluated using written examinations and a Demon-
stration Examination. The written examinations shall
IWA-2321 Vision Tests
cover the Basic, Method, Specific, and Practical areas
The following tests shall be administered annually of knowledge as defined in IWA-2323(a), (b), (c),
to NDE personnel: and (d). The Demonstration Examination shall be in
(a) Personnel shall demonstrate natural or corrected accordance with ANSI /ASNT CP-189, Level II Practi-
near-distance acuity of 20 /25 or greater Snellen fraction, cal Examination rules.
with at least one eye, by reading words or identifying (a) The Basic Examination shall consist of at least
characters on a near-distance test chart, such as a 50 questions (required only once if certification is
Jaeger chart, that meets the requirements of IWA-2322. sought in more than one method):
Equivalent measures of near-distance acuity may be (1) Twenty to 30% of the questions shall cover
used. In addition, personnel performing VT-2 or VT- ANSI /ASNT CP-189.
3 visual examinations shall demonstrate natural or (2) Thirty to 50% of the questions shall be similar
corrected far-distance acuity of 20 /30 or greater Snellen to the Level II questions published by ASNT for the
fraction or equivalent with at least one eye. NDE methods referenced in ANSI /ASNT CP-189.
(b) Personnel shall demonstrate the capability to dis- (3) Twenty to 30% of the questions shall cover appli-
tinguish the colors applicable to the NDE methods for cable materials, products, and fabrication technology.
which certified and to differentiate contrast between (b) The Method Examination shall consist of at least
these colors. 65 questions:
18

(1) Twenty to 40% of the questions shall cover tions and when recording data. These activities shall
fundamentals and principles of the method and shall be conducted under the guidance of Level II or Level
be similar to published ASNT Level III questions. III personnel. Level I personnel shall not evaluate or
(2) Thirty to 50% of the questions shall cover appli- accept the results of a nondestructive examination.
cations and establishment of procedures and techniques
and shall be similar to published ASNT Level III questions.
(3) Twenty to 30% of the questions shall cover IWA-2340 LEVEL III EDUCATION
the capability to interpret codes, standards, and specifi-
cations for the method. Level III candidates shall have high school or equiva-
(c) The Specific Examination shall contain at least lent education.
30 questions covering equipment, techniques, proce-
dures, and administration of the Employer’s written
practice. The Specific Examination shall also cover the IWA-2350 LIMITED CERTIFICATION 98
NDE requirements of this Division, including acceptance
standards and referenced codes and standards. Limited certification in a method is permitted for
(d) The Practical Examination shall be in accordance personnel who are restricted to performing examinations
with ANSI /ASNT CP-189 rules. of limited scope, i.e., limited operations or limited
(e) An ASNT Level III certificate with current en- techniques within the method. Topics that are not
dorsements obtained by examination for the applicable relevant to the limited certification may be deleted from
method satisfies the Basic and Method Examination the ANSI /ASNT CP-189, Appendix VI, or Appendix
requirements. VII training outline and may be accompanied by a
(f) When an outside agency administers the examina- corresponding reduction in training hours, examination
tion and only a pass or fail grade is issued, the Employer content, and number of examination questions. Only
shall assign a grade of 80% for a pass grade. questions related to the limited training are required.
(g) Level III personnel shall be recertified using the In addition, the required experience may be reduced
written Method, Specific, and Practical Examinations by a corresponding amount. The specific methods and
and the Demonstration Examination. Alternatively, techniques covered by limited certification and the
Level III personnel may be recertified using only the training, examination, and experience requirements for
written Method and Specific Examinations, provided limited certification shall be defined in the written
the following conditions are met: practice and documented in the individual’s certification
(1) The Level III candidate was previously certified records.
or recertified using all the written examinations and
the Demonstration Examination.
(2) The Level III candidate is not being recertified IWA-2360 LEVEL I AND LEVEL II
due to interrupted service as defined in the Employer’s TRAINING AND EXPERIENCE
written practice.
(a) A candidate may be qualified directly to Level
(3) The Level III candidate is not being certified
II with no time as a Level I provided the required
by a new Employer.
training and experience consists of the sum of the
(h) For initial certification, the grades for the Basic,
hours required for Level I and Level II certification.
Method, Specific, Practical, and Demonstration Exami-
(b) NDE training course outlines and materials shall
nations shall be averaged to determine the overall grade.
be approved by a Level III. Previous training and
For recertification, the grades of applicable examinations
experience may be accepted if verified by a Level III.
administered in accordance with IWA-2323(g) shall be
averaged to determine the overall grade. The method of verification shall be documented in the
(i) An ACCP certificate with current endorsements candidate’s certification records.
obtained by examination satisfies the Basic Method,
Practical, and Demonstration examination requirements
for Level III NDE personnel. IWA-2370 LEVEL III EXPERIENCE
Candidates for Level III certification shall meet one
of the following criteria:
IWA-2330 LEVEL I RESPONSIBILITIES
(a) Graduate of a 4-year accredited engineering or
Level I personnel shall use written procedures when science college or university with a degree in engi-
performing specific setups, calibrations, and examina- neering or science, plus 1 year experience in NDE in
19

an assignment comparable to that of a Level II in the (3) identification of drawings showing items which
examination method. require examination;
(b) Completion with a passing grade of at least the (4) list of examination procedures;
equivalent of 2 full years of engineering or science (5) description of alternative examinations and
study at a university, college, or technical school, plus identification of components to be examined using
2 years experience in an assignment comparable to that alternative methods;
of a Level II in the examination method. (6) identification of calibration blocks used for
(c) Four years experience in an assignment compara- ultrasonic examination of components.
ble to that of a Level II in the examination method.
IWA-2425 INSPECTION PLAN AND A99

SCHEDULE SUPPORTING
IWA-2380 NDE INSTRUCTOR DOCUMENTS
NDE Instructors shall meet the requirements of Ap- Supporting documents necessary for inspection plan
pendix VII. and schedule implementation such as diagrams or system
drawings showing boundaries and system classifications,
procedures, specifications, and other documents required
for implementation of the inservice examinations and
IWA-2400 INSPECTION PROGRAM tests shall be available at the plant site.
IWA-2410 APPLICATION OF CODE EDITION

AND ADDENDA
IWA-2430 INSPECTION INTERVALS
The Code Edition and Addenda for preservice inspec-
(a) The inservice examinations and system pressure
tion and for initial and successive inservice inspection
tests required by IWB, IWC, IWD, IWE, and inservice
intervals shall be in accordance with 10CFR50, Section
examinations and tests of IWF shall be completed
50.55a.
during each of the inspection intervals for the service
lifetime of the plant. The inspections shall be performed
in accordance with the schedule of Inspection Program
A of IWA-2431, or optionally, Inspection Program B
A99 IWA-2420 INSPECTION PLANS AND
of IWA-2432. It is not required that the inspection
SCHEDULES
intervals of IWB, IWC, IWD, IWE, and IWF conform
Inspection plans and schedules shall be prepared for to the same inspection program.
the preservice inspection, the first inservice inspection (b) The inspection interval shall be determined by
interval, and subsequent inservice inspection intervals. calendar years following placement of the plant into
(a) Each inspection plan shall include the following: commercial service.
(1) Inspection period and interval dates; (c) For components inspected under Program A, the
(2) the Edition and Addenda of this Division that following shall apply:
apply to the required examinations and tests; (1) Each inspection interval may be extended by
(3) the classification and identification of the com- as much as 1 year. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th inspection
ponents subject to examination and test; intervals may be reduced by as much as 1 year.
(4) Code Cases proposed for use and the extent Adjustments shall not cause successive intervals to be
of their application. altered by more than 1 year from the original pattern
(b) An implementation schedule for performance of of intervals. No credit shall be given for examinations
examinations and tests shall be prepared for each inspec- conducted during the first year of commercial service.
tion plan. The schedule shall include the following: (2) That portion of an inspection interval described
(1) identification of the components selected for as an inspection period may be reduced or extended
examination and test, including successive exams from by as much as 1 year to enable an inspection to
prior periods; coincide with a plant outage. This adjustment shall not
(2) the Code requirements by category and item alter the rules and requirements for scheduling inspec-
number for each component and the examination or tion intervals.
test to be performed and the extent of the examination (d) For components inspected under Program B, the
or test; following shall apply:
20

(1) Each inspection interval may be reduced or coincide with a plant outage. This adjustment shall
extended by as much as one year. Adjustments shall not alter the requirements for scheduling inspection
not cause successive intervals to be altered by more intervals.
than one year from the original pattern of intervals. If (4) The inspection interval for which an examina-
an inspection interval is extended, neither the start and tion was performed shall be identified on examination
end dates nor the inservice inspection program for the records.
successive interval need be revised. (e) In addition to IWA-2430(c) and (d), for plants
(2) Examinations may be performed to satisfy the that are out of service continuously for 6 months or
more, the inspection interval during which the outage
requirements of the extended interval in conjunction
occurred may be extended for a period equivalent to
with examinations performed to satisfy the requirements
the outage and the original pattern of intervals extended
of the successive interval. However, an examination accordingly for successive intervals.
performed to satisfy requirements of either the extended (f) The inspection frequency for inservice testing of
interval or the successive interval shall not be credited pumps and valves shall be in accordance with the
to both intervals. requirements of IWP and IWV.
(3) That portion of an inspection interval described (g) The inspection intervals for items installed by
as an inspection period may be reduced or extended repair /replacement activities shall coincide with re-
by as much as one year to enable an inspection to maining intervals, as determined by the calendar years
20.1

of plant service at the time of the repair /replacement (e) Superseded Code Cases approved for use in
activities. accordance with IWA-2441(a) through (d) may continue
(h) The inspection program of IWA-2431 may be to be used.
replaced by the inspection program of IWA-2432, and (f) The use of any Code Case and revisions to
vice versa, during the first 3 years of the service lifetime previously approved Code Cases are subject to accept-
of the plant. ance by the regulatory and enforcement authorities
(i) The inspection intervals for inservice examination having jurisdiction at the plant site.
of heat exchanger tubing shall be in accordance with
the requirements of IWB-2413.
(j) The inspection intervals for inservice examination IWA-2442 Annulled Section XI Code Cases
of Class CC components shall be in accordance with
Code Cases approved for use in accordance with
the requirements of IWL-2400.
IWA-2441 may be used after annulment for the duration
of that Inspection Plan.
IWA-2431 Inspection Program A
The inspection intervals shall comply with the follow- IWA-2443 Code Cases for Other Sections
ing, except as may be modified by IWA-2430(c):
1st Inspection Interval — 3 years following initial start In the course of preparation.
of plant commercial service
2nd Inspection Interval — 7 years following the 1st
inspection interval IWA-2500 EXTENT OF EXAMINATION
3rd Inspection Interval — 13 years following the 2nd
inspection interval Requirements for examination of welds apply only to
4th Inspection Interval — 17 years following the 3rd welds joining items and not welds correcting flaws in base
inspection interval material (including core closure welds in casting), unless
Successive Inspection Intervals — follow IWA-2432 otherwise stated.
IWA-2432 Inspection Program B

IWA-2600 WELD REFERENCE SYSTEM
The inspection intervals shall comply with the follow-
ing, except as modified by IWA-2430(d): IWA-2610 GENERAL
1st Inspection Interval — 10 years following initial A reference system shall be established for all welds
start of plant commercial service and areas subject to surface or volumetric examination.
Successive Inspection Intervals — 10 years following Each such weld and area shall be located and identified
the previous inspection interval by a system of reference points. The system shall
permit identification of each weld, location of each
weld centerline, and designation of regular intervals
IWA-2440 APPLICATION OF CODE CASES along the length of the weld.
IWA-2441 Section XI Code Cases

(a) Code Cases to be used during a preservice or IWA-2620 PIPING
inservice inspection shall be identified in the Inspec-
tion Plan. Requirements for piping are provided in III-4300.
(b) Code Cases shall be applicable to the Edition The rules of III-4300 may also be applied to piping
and Addenda specified in the Inspection Plan. not within the scope of III-1100.
(c) Code Cases shall be in effect at the time the
Inspection Plan is filed with the regulatory and enforce-
ment authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site
IWA-2630 VESSELS
except as provided in IWA-2441(d).
(d) Code Cases issued subsequent to filing the Inspec- The requirements of Appendix A of Article 4 are
tion Plan may be proposed for use in amendments to acceptable for vessels examined in accordance with
the Inspection Plan. Article 4 of Section V.
21
IWA-2640 OTHER COMPONENTS (b) Longitudinal (Vertical) Welds. Longitudinal welds

shall be laid out from the center line of circumferential
A reference system for component welds is given
welds at the top end of the weld. The examination
in IWA-2641. A different system may be used provided
surface shall be identified as clockwise or counterclock-
it meets the requirements of IWA-2610. wise as viewed from the top of the component.
(c) Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds. The external reference
circle shall have a sufficient whole number of inches
radius so that the circle falls on the vessel external
IWA-2641 Layout of Component Reference surface beyond the weld fillet. The internal reference
Points circle shall have a sufficient whole number of inches
radius so that the circle falls within 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
The layout of the weld shall consist of placing of the weld centerline. Zero deg. point on the weld
reference points on the center line of the weld. The shall be the top of the nozzle. The 0 deg. point for
standard spacing of the reference points shall be 12 welds of nozzles centered in heads shall be located at
in. (305 mm). All points shall be identified with their the 0 deg. axis of the vessel. Angular layout of the
numbers: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, etc. The numbers of points, weld shall be made clockwise on the external surface,
distance apart, and starting point shall be recorded on counterclockwise on the internal surface. Zero, 90, 180,
the reporting form. The weld center line shall be the and 270 deg. lines shall be marked on all nozzle welds
divider for the two examination surfaces. examined; 30 deg. increment lines shall be marked on
(a) Circumferential (Girth) Welds. The standard start- nozzle welds greater than 4 in. (102 mm) radius; 15
ing point shall be component 0 deg. The reference deg. increment lines shall be marked on nozzle welds
points shall be numbered clockwise as viewed from greater than 12 in. (305 mm) radius; 5 deg. increment
the top of the component. The examination surfaces lines shall be marked on nozzle welds greater than 24
shall be identified as above or below the weld. in. (610 mm) radius.
22
ARTICLE IWA-3000
STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION EVALUATION
IWA-3100 EVALUATION be rounded to the nearest 0.1 in. (2 mm) or 1⁄16 in.
(1.6 mm), respectively.
(a) Evaluation shall be made of flaws detected during
an inservice examination as required by IWB-3000 for
Class 1 pressure retaining components, IWC-3000 for
Class 2 pressure retaining components, IWD-3000 for IWA-3300 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION
Class 3 pressure retaining components, IWE-3000 for
(a) Flaws detected by the preservice and inservice
Class MC pressure retaining components, or IWF-3000
examinations shall be sized by the bounding rectangle
for component supports.
or square for the purpose of description and dimen-
(b) If acceptance standards for a particular compo-
sioning. The dimensions of a flaw shall be determined
nent, Examination Category, or examination method
by the size of a rectangle or square that fully contains
are not specified in this Division, flaws that exceed the
the area of the flaw.
acceptance standards for materials and welds specified in
(1) The length ø of the rectangle or one side of
the Section III Edition applicable to the construction
the square shall be drawn parallel to the inside pressure
of the component shall be evaluated to determine
retaining surface of the component.
disposition. Such disposition shall be subject to review
(2) The depth of the rectangle or one side of the
by the regulatory and enforcement authorities having
square shall be drawn normal to the inside pressure
jurisdiction at the plant site.
retaining surface of the component and shall be denoted
as a for a surface flaw and 2a for a subsurface flaw.
(3) The aspect ratio of a flaw shall be defined by
IWA-3200 SIGNIFICANT DIGITS FOR a /ø. The flaw aspect ratio shall not exceed 0.5. (See
Fig. IWA-3320-1, Flaw #3, as an example.)
LIMITING VALUES
(b) Flaws shall be characterized in accordance with
(a) All observed or calculated values of dimensions IWA-3310 through IWA-3390, as applicable.
of component thickness and of flaws detected by nonde- (c) The clad thickness dimension may be taken from
structive examinations to be used for comparison with the manufacturer’s drawings.
the evaluation standards of IWB-3000, IWC-3000, IWD- (d) Flaws detected by the inservice examinations
3000, or IWE-3000, whether obtained as decimals or (IWB-2500) of steam generator tubing (Examination
converted from fractions, shall be expressed to the Category B-Q) shall be described as a percentage of
nearest 0.1 in. (2 mm) for values 1 in. (25 mm) and wall thickness. The depth is the maximum radial dimen-
greater, and to the nearest 0.05 in. (1.3 mm) for values sion of the flaw. The wall thickness t is the nominal
less than 1 in. (25 mm). Rounding-off of values shall wall thickness, and the tube radius r is the mean radius
be performed in accordance with the Rounding-off as given by the specification to which the tubes were
Method of ASTM Recommended Practice E 29 and purchased. These flaws shall be compared with the
Metric Practice Guide E 380. standards of IWB-3521.
(b) Interpolation of percentage values for acceptance
standards, as required for intermediate flaw aspect ratios
in the tables of allowable flaw standards, shall be
IWA-3310 SURFACE PLANAR FLAWS
rounded to the nearest 0.1%.
(c) Interpolation of decimal or fractional dimensions (a) A continuous indication shall be considered as
specified in the tables of allowable flaw standards shall a surface planar flaw if the detected area of the flaw
23
is oriented primarily in any single plane, other than (b) The rules of IWA-3310 and IWA-3320 shall be
parallel to the surface of the component, and any portion applied to characterize the projected areas of the flaws
of the flaw penetrates a surface of the component, as as surface or subsurface flaws, respectively.
shown in Fig. IWA-3310-1. (c) The dimensions a and ø of such flaws shall be
(b) A subsurface indication shall be considered a those of a rectangle that contains the projected area
surface flaw if any portion of the flaw is less than of the flaw as shown in Fig. IWA-3340-1.
0.4d from the surface of the component nearest the
flaw. If the nearest surface of the component is clad,
S shall be measured to the clad–base metal interface. IWA-3350 PARALLEL PLANAR FLAWS
S is measured as shown in Fig. IWA-3310-1. The
(a) Discontinuous indications whose areas are ori-
thickness of the cladding used to establish the clad–
ented primarily in parallel planes, and other than parallel
base metal interface may be the nominal clad thickness
to the surface of the component, shall be considered
specified on design drawings of the component.
single planar flaws if the adjacent planes are within a
distance S, where S is determined as shown in Fig.
IWA-3350-1.
IWA-3320 SUBSURFACE PLANAR FLAWS (b) The dimensions a and ø of such flaws shall be
A continuous indication shall be considered a subsur- those of the square or rectangle that contains the detected
face planar flaw if the detected area of the flaw is area of all flaws within the flaw–plane adjacency limits
oriented primarily in any single plane other than parallel of IWA-3350(a), as shown in Fig. IWA-3350-1.
to the surface of the component, and if the distance
S from the flaw to the nearest surface of the component
is as shown in Fig. IWA-3320-1. If the nearest surface IWA-3360 LAMINAR FLAWS
of the component is clad, S shall be measured to the (a) Planar indications oriented within 10 deg. of a
clad–base metal interface. The thickness of cladding plane parallel to the surface of the component shall
used to establish the clad–base metal interface may be be considered laminar flaws, except where noted other-
the nominal clad thickness specified on design drawings wise in referenced figures of IWB-3500.
of the component. (b) The area of a laminar flaw shall be 0.75 times
the area of the square or rectangle that contains the
detected area of those flaws that either overlap or are
IWA-3330 MULTIPLE PLANAR FLAWS within a distance S of 1 in. (25 mm) of one another
(a) Discontinuous indications shall be considered sin- as shown in Fig. IWA-3360-1.
gle planar flaws if the distance between adjacent flaws
is equal to or less than the dimension S, where S is
determined as shown in Fig. IWA-3330-1. IWA-3370 RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
(b) The rules of IWA-3310 and IWA-3320 shall be (a) An indication detected by radiographic examina-
applied to characterize multiple planar flaws as surface tion shall be considered to be a linear flaw unless
or subsurface planar flaws, respectively. the indication can be characterized as surface planar,
(c) The dimensions a and ø of such multiple planar subsurface planar, or laminar by supplemental exami-
flaws shall be those of the square or rectangle that nation.
contains the detected area of all flaws within the (b) The supplemental examination of IWA-3370(a)
proximity limits defined in IWA-3330(a). may be by additional radiography, ultrasonic examina-
tion, or other methods provided they comply with the
rules of IWA-2240.
IWA-3340 NONPLANAR FLAWS
(a) A continuous indication whose detected area is
IWA-3380 MULTIPLE NONALIGNED
not oriented in a single plane (such as two or more
COPLANAR FLAWS
intersecting inclined planes, curvilinear geometry, or
combinations of nonplanar geometry) shall be resolved (a) Discontinuous indications that are coplanar and
into two planar flaws by projection of the flaw area nonaligned in the through-wall direction of the section
into planes normal to the maximum principal stresses, thickness t, and with at least one indication characterized
as shown in Fig. IWA-3340-1. as a surface flaw, shall be considered single planar
24
surface flaws if the separation distances S1 and S2 that are aligned to reduce the net section thickness
between the individual flaws are equal to or less than may be treated as separate and individual planar flaws
the dimensions specified in Flaw #1 of Fig. IWA- if the following requirements are met.
3380-1. (1) The a dimensions for the flaw aspect ratio,
(b) The dimensions a and ø of the combined single a /ø of the individual flaws do not exceed the allowable
flaw of IWA-3380(a) shall be defined by the size of flaw standards for the respective Examination Category
the bounding square or rectangle that contains the applicable to the component.
individual nonaligned flaws as delineated in Fig. IWA- (2) The additive flaw depth dimensions within the
3380-1. bounding parallel planes shown in Fig. IWA-3390-1
(c) Discontinuous indications that are coplanar and are not in excess of the following limits:1
nonaligned in the through-wall direction of the section (a) two surface flaws (one a1 on the inner and
thickness and characterized as subsurface flaws shall the other a2 on the outer surface of the component),
be considered single planar subsurface flaws if the (a1+a2) ≤ (as+a′s) /2 within planes A–A′ and B–B′;
separation distances S1, S2, S3, and S4 are equal to or (b) two subsurface flaws, (a1+a2) ≤ (ae+a′e) /2
less than the dimensions specified in Flaw #2 of Fig. within planes C– C′ and D–D′;
IWA-3380-1. (c) two surface and one subsurface flaws:
(d) The dimensions a and ø of the combined single (1) (a1+a3) ≤ (as+ae) /2 within planes E–E′
flaw of IWA-3380(c) shall be defined by the size of and F–F′
the bounding square or rectangle that contains the (2) (a1+a2+a3) ≤ (as+ ae+a′s) /3 within planes
individual nonaligned flaws as delineated in Fig. IWA- F–F′ and G–G′
3380-1. (3) (a2+a3) ≤ (a′s+ae) /2 within planes G–G′
(e) Flaw interaction within a group containing a and H–H′
greater number of individual flaws than shown in Fig.
IWA-3380-1 shall be governed by the same criterion
of IWA-3380(a) or (c). However, in all cases, the initial IWA-3400 LINEAR FLAWS DETECTED BY
characterization of flaw interactions shall not require SURFACE OR VOLUMETRIC
a recharacterization even if the bounding square or EXAMINATIONS
rectangle reduces the separation distance S to another (a) Linear flaws detected by surface (PT /MT) or
adjoining flaw to within the flaw interaction distance. volumetric (RT) examination methods shall be consid-
ered single linear surface flaws provided the separation
distance between flaws is equal to or less than the
IWA-3390 MULTIPLE ALIGNED SEPARATE dimension S, where S is determined as shown in Fig.
FLAWS IWA-3400-1.
(b) The overall length ø of a single and discontinuous
(a) Discontinuous flaws, as shown in Fig. IWA- linear flaw shall be determined as shown in Fig. IWA-
3390-1, that are coplanar in the through-wall direction 3400-1.
of the section thickness, that are located within two
parallel planes 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) apart (i.e., normal to 1 The flaw depth dimensions as and ae are the allowable flaw
the pressure retaining surface of the component), and standards for surface and subsurface flaws, respectively.
25
Fig. IWA-3310-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWA-3310-1 SURFACE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

PRESSURE RETAINING SURFACE
Illustrative Flaw Configurations and Determination of Dimensions a and ø
26
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fig. IWA-3320-1
FIG. IWA-3320-1 SUBSURFACE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

Illustrative Flaw Configurations and Determination of Dimensions 2a and ø Where S Is ≥ 0.4a
27
FIG. IWA-3330-1 MULTIPLE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

28
29
FIG. IWA-3340-1 NONPLANAR ELLIPTICAL SUBSURFACE FLAWS

Illustrative Flaw Configurations and Determination of Dimensions 2a and ø
Fig. IWA-3340-1
Fig. IWA-3350-1
30
1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWA-3350-1 PARALLEL PLANAR FLAWS

Illustrative Flaw Configurations and Determination of Dimensions a, 2a, and ø
FIG. IWA-3360-1 LAMINAR FLAWS
31
FIG. IWA-3380-1 NONALIGNED COPLANAR FLAWS IN PLANE NORMAL TO

Illustrative Flaw Configurations
32
FIG. IWA-3390-1 MULTIPLE ALIGNED PLANAR FLAWS
33
FIG. IWA-3400-1 LINEAR SURFACE FLAWS

Illustrative Flaw Configurations and Determination of Length ø
34
ARTICLE IWA-4000
REPAIR /REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES
IWA-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1400(a) as Code Class 1, 2, 3, MC, or CC, and their
associated supports.
A99 IWA-4110 SCOPE
(b) The requirements of this Article do not apply
(a) The requirements of this Article apply regardless to the following, except as provided in IWA-4120(c)
of the reason for the repair /replacement activity1 or through (g):
the method that detected the condition requiring the (1) valve operators, controllers, position indicators,
repair /replacement activity. pump impellers, pump drivers, or other accessories and
(b) This Article provides requirements for repair / devices unless they have been classified as Code Class
replacement activities1 associated with pressure re- 1, 2, or 3 pressure retaining items in accordance with
taining components and their supports, including appur- IWA-1320;
tenances, subassemblies, parts of a component, core (2) instruments or permanently-sealed, fluid-filled
support structures, metal containments and their integral tubing systems furnished with instruments, but do apply
attachments, and metallic portions of Class CC contain- to instrument, control, and sampling piping when classi-
ments and their integral attachments. Repair /replace- fied as Code Class 1, 2, or 3 in accordance with
ment activities include welding, brazing, defect removal, IWA-1320;
and removing, adding, and modifying items or systems. (3) rupture disk material (the requirements of this
These requirements are applicable to procurement, de- Article do apply to the portion of a rupture disk holder
sign, installation, examination, and pressure testing of that forms the pressure boundary);
items within the scope of this Division. (4) orifice plates not exceeding 1⁄2 in. nominal
(c) This Article provides requirements for repair / thickness that are used only in flow-measuring service;
replacement activities performed on concrete contain- (5) other than component supports or core supports,
ments and post-tensioning system items for concrete material that is not associated with the pressure retaining
containments as specified in IWL-4000. function of a component, such as shafts, stems, trim,
spray nozzles, bearings, bushings, springs, wear plates,
IWA-4120 Applicability seals, packing, gaskets, valve seats, and ceramic insulat-
ing material and special alloys used as seal material
(a) The requirements of this Article apply to items in electrical penetration assemblies;
classified by the Owner in accordance with IWA- (6) component support items such as gaskets, seals,
bushing, springs, compression spring end plates, bear-
1 The term repair /replacement activity includes those activities pre- ings, retaining rings, washers, wear shoes, shims, slide
viously known as repair, replacement, modification, or alteration.
Those previous terms no longer have a unique meaning or significance plates, and hydraulic fluids. Requirements, if any, for
and are combined in the term repair /replacement activity. Reasons these items shall be stated in the Owner’s Requirements.
for repair /replacement activities may include the following: (c) When repair /replacement activities are performed
(a) discrepancies detected during inservice inspection, maintenance,
or service on items identified in IWA-4120(b), the Owner shall
(b) regulatory requirements change determine if installation of these items affects any
(c) design changes to improve equipment service inspection or test required by IWA-4530.
(d) changes to improve reliability
(e) damage (d) If items in IWA-4120(b)(6) are replaced in snub-
(f ) failure during service bers, the snubbers shall be examined and tested in
(g) personnel exposure accordance with IWA-4530.
(h) economics
(i) end of service life (e) If items identified in IWA-4120(b) require weld-
(j) addition of new items or systems ing to the pressure retaining portion of a component
35

or to a component support such installation shall comply (b) Repair /replacement activities shall be performed
with the requirements of this Article. and documented in accordance with the requirements
(f) Applicable Construction Code requirements, such of IWA-4142 and the technical requirements of IWA-
as design requirements for Class 1 valve stems, Owner 4400 and IWA-4520. A Repair /Replacement Plan, pres-
responsibilities for assuring adequacy of intervening sure testing, services of an Authorized Inspection
elements in the component support load path, and Agency, and completion of NIS-2 forms are not re-
nondestructive examination of springs for Class 1 com- quired.
ponent supports, shall be met for items identified in (c) If an item to be subjected to a repair /replacement
IWA-4120(b). activity does not satisfy the requirements of this Divi-
(g) Appendix J provides guidance in determining sion, the evaluation and corrective provisions of IWA-
applicability of this Article. 4160 apply.
(d) The tests of IWA-4530(b), (c), or (d) shall
be performed for repair /replacement activities of affect-
ing pump, valve, or snubber performance parameters.
IWA-4130 ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS (e) Use of these alternative requirements, including
specifying the size of Class 1 items to which
IWA-4131 Small Items these requirements will be applied, shall be docu-
IWA-4131.1 Applicability. When repair /replacement mented by the Owner in the Repair/Replacement
activities involve the following items, the alternative program.
requirements of IWA-4131.2 may be used.
(a) Class 1 piping, tubing (except heat exchanger
tubing, and sleeves and welded plugs used for heat IWA-4132 Items Rotated From Stock
exchanger tubing), valves, fittings, and associated
supports, no larger than the smaller of (1) or (2) For snubbers and pressure relief valves rotated from
below: stock and installed on components (including piping
(1) NPS 1 (DN25); or systems), the following requirements may be used in
(2) the size and design such that, in the event lieu of those of IWA-4000, provided the rotation is
of postulated failure during normal plant operating only for testing the removed items:
conditions, the reactor can be shut down and cooled (a) Items being removed and installed shall be of
in an orderly manner, assuming makeup is provided the same design and construction.
by normal reactor coolant makeup systems operable (b) Items being removed shall have no evidence of
from on-site emergency power. failure at the time of removal.
(b) Class 2 and 3 piping, tubing (except heat ex- (c) Items being rotated shall be removed and installed
changer tubing, and sleeves and welded plugs used for only by mechanical means.
heat exchanger tubing), valves, and fittings, NPS 1 (d) Items being installed shall previously have been
(DN25) and smaller, and associated supports. in service.
(e) Preservice inspections and pressure tests shall be
IWA-4131.2 Requirements. For repair /replacement performed as required by IWA-4500.
activities involving items identified in IWA-4131.1, the (f) The Owner shall track the items to ensure trace-
following requirements may be used in lieu of those ability of inservice inspection and testing records.
of IWA-4000. (g) Use of an NIS-2 form is not required.
(a) Items shall be procured in accordance with the (h) Testing of removed snubbers and pressure relief
requirements of IWA-4142 and the technical require- valves, including required sample expansions, shall
ments of IWA-4200. For Section III items, the require- be performed in accordance with Subsections IWF
ments of NA-3700 or NCA-3800 need not be met, and IWV.
provided the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program
provides measures to assure that material is furnished
in accordance with the material specification and
IWA-4133 Mechanical Clamping Devices Used as
the applicable material requirements of Section III. A
Piping Pressure Boundary
Repair /Replacement Plan, possession of a Certifi-
cate of Authorization, and an agreement with an Author- Mechanical clamping devices used to replace piping
ized Inspection Agency are not required for the pressure boundary shall meet the requirements of Ap-
organization constructing or fabricating these items. pendix IX.
36

IWA-4140 RESPONSIBILITIES 4142. These provisions may not be used to manufacture

complete pumps, valves, vessels, or tanks.
IWA-4141 Owner’s Responsibilities
(b) Application of the ASME NA symbol stamp is
It is the responsibility of the Owner to provide or neither required nor prohibited for installation.
cause to be provided the following:
(a) Repair /Replacement Program and Plans required
by IWA-4150;
IWA-4150 REPAIR / REPLACEMENT
(b) specification requirements for repair /replacement
PROGRAM AND PLAN
activities.
(a) Repair /replacement activities shall be completed
in accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program.
IWA-4142 Repair /Replacement Organization’s
The Program is a document or set of documents that
Quality Assurance Program
defines the managerial and administrative control for
(a) The organization that performs repair /replace- completion of repair /replacement activities.
ment activities shall establish a Quality Assurance (b) The Edition and Addenda of Section XI used
Program for control of their activities in accordance for the Repair /Replacement Program shall correspond
with the Repair /Replacement Program and Plans. The with the Edition and Addenda identified in the inservice
Quality Assurance Program shall comply with either inspection program applicable to the inspection interval.
of the following: Alternatively, later Editions and Addenda of Section
(1) IWA-1400(n), when the Owner is the Repair / XI, or specific provisions within an Edition or Addenda
Replacement Organization. later than those specified in the Owner’s Inservice
(2) When the Repair /Replacement Organization is Inspection Program may be used. When provisions
other than the Owner, the Repair /Replacement Organi- of later Editions and Addenda are used, all related
zation’s Quality Assurance Program shall be docu- requirements shall be met. The later Edition and Ad-
mented and shall comply with the applicable quality denda shall have been accepted by the enforcement
assurance program criteria of 10CFR50 Appendix B and regulatory authorities having jurisdiction at the
supplemented as necessary to be consistent with the plant site.
Owner’s Quality Assurance Program; NQA-1, Parts II (c) A Repair /Replacement Plan shall be prepared
and III, Basic Requirements and Supplements; or NCA- in accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program
4000. The Repair /Replacement Organization’s Quality whenever a repair /replacement activity is to be per-
Assurance Program shall be documented in sufficient formed. Repair /Replacement Plans shall include the
detail for the Owner to assure that the requirements essential requirements for completion of the repair/
of this Article will be met for the activities to be replacement activities. Repair /Replacement Plans are
performed. The program shall be reviewed and accepted not required for the design phase of a repair /replacement
by the Owner. activity, including repair /replacement activities that re-
(b) When the performance of repair /replacement ac- quire design only. A Repair/Replacement Plan shall
tivities is split between the Owner and a Repair / identify the following:
Replacement Organization, each organization’s Quality (1) applicable Code Edition, Addenda, and Cases
Assurance Program shall comply with IWA-4142(a)(1) of Section XI;
or (a)(2) for their respective activities. The Owner (2) Construction Code Edition, Addenda, Cases,
shall be responsible for establishing interfaces and for and Owner’s Requirements used for the following:
assuring that the requirements of this Article are met (a) construction of the item to be affected by
by the combination of the two Quality Assurance the repair /replacement activity
Programs. (b) construction of the item to be installed by
the repair /replacement activity
(c) performance of the repair /replacement activ-
IWA-4143 Stamping
ities
(a) Application of the ASME NPT symbol is neither (3) The following items, when applicable to the spe-
required nor prohibited for the fabrication of parts, cific repair/replacement activity, shall be documented.
appurtenances, piping subassemblies, and supports to (a) a description of any flaws and nondestructive
be used by the Owner when performed at the Owner’s examination methods used to detect those flaws
facilities by a Repair/Replacement Organization with (b) the flaw removal method, the method of
a quality assurance program that complies with IWA- measurement of the cavity created by removing a flaw,
37
and, when required by IWA-2600, requirements for Requirements, and this Article, be maintained by the
reference points Owner, as applicable:
(c) the applicable weld procedure, heat treat- (1) Design Specification
ment, nondestructive examination, tests, and material (2) Design Report
requirements (3) Overpressure Protection Report
(d) the applicable examination, test, and accept- (4) Manufacturer’s Data Report
ance criteria to be used to verify acceptability (5) Material Certification
(4) description of the repair/replacement activities (6) Evaluation required by IWA-4160 or IWA-
to be performed; 4311
(5) intended life of the item after completion of (7) Repair /Replacement Program and Plans
the repair /replacement activity, when less than the (8) Report of Reconciliation
remainder of the previous design life of the item; (c) Revisions or updates to existing reports, records,
(6) whether application of the ASME Code Symbol and specifications shall be traceable to and from the
Stamp is required in accordance with IWA-4143; original record or report to provide a record of the
(7) documentation in accordance with IWA-4180 current status of the item. The review and certification
and IWA-6000. requirements for these revisions or updates shall be in
(d) The Repair /Replacement Program, Plans, and accordance with the Owner’s Requirements and the
evaluations required by IWA-4160 shall be subject to Construction Code.
review by enforcement and regulatory authorities having (d) Form NIS-2 shall be completed for all repair /
jurisdiction at the plant site. replacement activities.
IWA-4160 VERIFICATION OF IWA-4200 ITEMS FOR REPAIR/

ACCEPTABILITY
REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES
If an item does not satisfy the requirements of this IWA-4210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Division, the Owner shall determine the cause of unac-
ceptability. Prior to returning the item to service the In course of preparation.
Owner shall evaluate the suitability of the item subjected
to the repair /replacement activity. If the requirements for
the original item are determined to be deficient, appro- IWA-4220 CODE APPLICABILITY
priate corrective provisions shall be included in the Own-
er’s Requirements and Design Specification, as applica- IWA-4221 Construction Code and Owner’s
ble. Any such corrective provisions shall be consistent Requirements
with the Construction Code or Section III, in effect at (a) An item to be used for repair /replacement activi-
that time. The report of the evaluation shall be made part ties shall meet the applicable Owner’s Requirements.
of the record (IWA-4180). Alternatively, revised Owner’s Requirements may be
used, provided they are reconciled in accordance with
IWA-4222. A Report of Reconciliation shall be pre-
IWA-4170 INSPECTION pared.
The services of an Authorized Inspection Agency (b) An item to be used for repair/replacement activi-
shall be used. The Owner shall notify the Authorized ties shall meet the Construction Code specified in
Inspection Agency prior to starting a repair /replacement accordance with (1), (2), or (3) below.
activity and keep the Inspector informed of progress (1) When replacing an existing item, the new item
so that necessary inspections may be performed. shall meet the Construction Code to which the original
item was constructed.
(2) When adding a new item to an existing system,
the Owner shall specify a Construction Code that is
IWA-4180 DOCUMENTATION
no earlier than the earliest Constrution Code used for
(a) The reports and records required by IWA-6000 construction of any originally installed item in that
shall be completed for all repair /replacement activities. system.
(b) The following reports and records shall, to the (3) When adding a new system, the Owner shall
extent required by the Construction Code, Owner’s specify a Construction Code that is no earlier than the
38
IWA-4221 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4224.3
earliest Construction Code used for other systems that requirements of the earlier Construction Code are recon-
perform a similar function. ciled.
(c) As an alternative to (b) above, the item may
meet all or portions of the requirements of different
Editions and Addenda of the Construction Code, or
Section III when the Construction Code was not Section IWA-4224 Reconciliation of Material
III, provided the requirements of IWA-4222 through IWA-4224.1 Identical Material Procured to a Later
IWA-4226, as applicable, are met. Construction Code Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code, Sec-
Cases may also be used. A Report of Reconciliation, tion III, or Material Specification
if required, shall be prepared. All or portions of later (a) Materials, including welding materials, may meet
different Construction Codes may be used as listed the requirements of later dates of issue of the material
below: specification and later Editions and Addenda of the
(1) Piping, piping subassemblies, and their sup- same Construction Code or Section III when the Con-
ports: B31.1 to B31.7 to Section III. struction Code was not Section III, provided the materi-
(2) Pumps, valves, and their supports: from B31.1 als are the same specification, grade, type, class, or
to Draft Code for Pumps and Valves for Nuclear Power alloy, and heat-treated condition, as applicable.
to Section III. (b) Differences in the specified material tensile and
(3) Vessels and their supports: Section VIII to yield strength shall be compared and evaluated. If the
Section III. replacement material has a lower strength, a comparison
(4) Atmospheric and 0-15 psig (0–103 kPa) storage shall be made of the allowable stresses. If the tensile
tanks and their supports: Section VIII, API 620, or or yield strength is reduced and allowable stresses are
API 650 to Section III. reduced, the effect of the reduction on the design shall
be reconciled. For welding materials, any reduction in
specified tensile strength shall be evaluated to ensure
IWA-4222 Reconciliation of Code and Owner’s that the strength of the filler metal meets or exceeds
Requirements the strength of the base materials.
(a) Code Requirements and Owner’s Requirements
may be technical or administrative. IWA-4224.2 Identical Material Procured to an
(1) Only technical requirements that could affect Earlier Construction Code Edition or Addenda or
materials, design, fabrication, or examination, and affect Material Specification
the pressure boundary, or core support or component (a) Materials, including welding materials, may meet
support function, need to be reconciled. the requirements of earlier dates of issue of the material
(2) Administrative requirements, i.e., those that do specification and earlier Editions and Addenda of the
not affect the pressure boundary or core support or same Construction Code, provided the materials are
component support function, need not be reconciled. the same specification, grade, type, class, or alloy, and
Examples of such requirements include quality assur- heat-treated condition, as applicable.
ance, certification, Code Symbol Stamping, Data Re- (b) Differences in the specified material tensile and
ports, and Authorized Inspection. yield strength shall be compared and evaluated. If the
(b) The administrative requirements of either the replacement material has a lower strength, a comparison
Construction Code of the item being replaced or the shall be made of the allowable stresses. If the tensile
Construction Code of the item to be used for replacement or yield strength is lower and allowable stresses are
shall be met. lower, the effect of the reduction on the design shall
be reconciled. For welding materials, a lower specified
tensile strength shall be evaluated to ensure that the
A99 IWA-4223 Reconciliation of Components strength of the filler metal meets or exceeds the strength
of the base materials.
(a) Reconciliation of later Editions or Addenda of (c) Material examination and testing requirements
the Construction Codes or alternative Codes as permitted from the Construction Code of the component shall
by IWA-4221 is not required. The Owner shall evaluate be met.
any changes in weight, configuration, or pressure-tem-
perature rating in accordance with IWA-4311. IWA-4224.3 Use of a Different Material
(b) An earlier Edition and Addenda of the same (a) Use of materials of a specification, grade, type,
Construction Code may be used, provided all technical class, or alloy, and heat-treated condition, other than
39

IWA-4224.3 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4321
that originally specified, shall be evaluated for suitability beyond the design-related issues defined in IWA-4223,
for the specified design and operating conditions in IWA-4224, and IWA-4225, shall be performed.
accordance with IWA-4311. (a) Material, fabrication, and examination require-
(b) Material examination and testing requirements ments (e.g., NX-2000, NX-4000, and NX-5000 of Sec-
shall be reconciled to the Construction Code require- tion III) shall be reviewed to reconcile the details
ments of the component. applicable to design with the design of the replace-
ment item.
IWA-4224.4 Substitution of Material Specifications
(b) All requirements related to the later portions shall
(a) When an SA or SB Specification is identified
be met, or any differences between the later design
as being identical, or identical except for editorial
provisions and the previous design shall be reconciled.
differences, to the corresponding ASTM A or B Specifi-
cation, either specification may be used.
(b) When an SFA Specification is identified as being IWA-4300 DESIGN
identical, or identical except for editorial differences,
to the corresponding AWS specification, either specifi- IWA-4310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
cation may be used. IWA-4311 Material, Design, or Configuration
Changes
IWA-4225 Reconciliation of Parts, When a change is made to the design or configuration
Appurtenances, and Piping of an item or system, including material substitution,
Subassemblies the change shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Parts, appurtenances, and piping subassemblies (a) When an analysis is available, the change shall
may be fabricated to later Editions and Addenda of be evaluated to determine if a reanalysis is required.
the Construction Code and later different Construction If no reanalysis is performed, an evaluation shall be
Codes, as permitted by IWA-4221(b), provided materials performed and documented. The evaluation or reanalysis
are reconciled in accordance with IWA-4224. The shall document that the proposed change meets the
Owner shall evaluate any changes in weight, configura- Owner’s Requirements, and the Construction Code or
tion, or pressure-temperature rating in accordance with alternative provisions of this Division. The evaluation
IWA-4311. or reanalysis shall be traceable in accordance with
(b) An earlier Edition and Addenda of the same IWA-4180(c).
Construction Code may be used, provided all technical (b) When an analysis is unavailable (e.g., proprietary
requirements of the original Construction Code of the design, standard B16.5 flanges or fittings, standard
component being replaced are met, except as permitted B16.34 valve), an evaluation or a new analysis shall
by IWA-4224. Failure to meet the technical requirements be performed to document that the proposed change
of the original Construction Code may not be accepted meets the Owner’s Requirements and the Construction
by reconciliation. Code or alternative provisions of this Division. The
evaluation or new analysis shall be maintained in the
same manner as a Design Report in accordance with
IWA-4226 Reconciliation of Design Requirements IWA-4180(b) and IWA-4311(a).
IWA-4226.1 Design to All Requirements of a Later (c) Analyses shall be reviewed and certified in ac-
Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code. When cordance with the requirements of the Construction
an item is designed to all requirements of a later Code and Owner’s Requirements. Evaluations shall be
Edition or Addenda of the Construction Code, or Section certified as required for analyses.
III when the Construction Code was not Section III, (d) For any design or configuration change that devi-
reconciliation beyond the design-related issues defined ates from the Owner’s Requirements, Design Specifica-
in IWA-4223, IWA-4224, and IWA-4225 is not re- tion, or Design Report, the affected documents shall
quired. be revised or updated in accordance with IWA-4180(c).
A99
IWA-4226.2 Design to Portions of the Require-
ments of a Later Edition or Addenda of the Construc- IWA-4320 PIPING
tion Code. When an item is designed to portions of
IWA-4321 Class 1 Mechanical Joints
the requirements of a later Edition or Addenda of the
Construction Code, or Section III when the Construction (a) Flanged joints may be used in Class 1 piping
Code was not Section III, the following reconciliation systems.
40

(b) Expanded joints shall not be used in Class 1 as practical to the original nameplate. This nameplate
piping systems. shall contain the revised ratings and a reference to the
(c) Threaded joints in which the threads provide the rerating documentation.
only seal shall not be used in Class 1 piping systems. (f) An ASME Certificate of Authorization is not
If a seal weld is employed as the sealing medium, the required.
stress analysis of the joint shall include the stresses in
the weld resulting from the relative deflections of the
mated parts. IWA-4332 Flaw Evaluation A99
(d) Flared, flareless, and compression-type tubing Inservice flaws that were previously evaluated and
fittings may be used for tubing sizes not exceeding 1 accepted by the analytical evaluation provisions of
in. O.D. within the limitations of applicable standards IWB-3000, IWC-3000, or IWE-3000, or known wall
and requirements of IWA-4321(d)(2) and (3). In the thinning, shall be evaluated or analyzed in accordance
absence of such standards or specifications, the Owner with IWA-4311.
shall determine that the type of fitting selected is
adequate and safe for the Design Conditions in accord-
ance with the following requirements. IWA-4333 Examination A99
(1) The fitting pressure-temperature ratings shall
be reconciled with the specified design and operating If rerating results in a design condition for which the
conditions. Construction Code or Owner’s Requirements requires a
(2) Fittings and their joints shall be suitable for different examination than was originally performed,
the tubing with which they are to be used, in accordance that examination shall be performed.
with the minimum wall thickness of the tubing and
method of assembly recommended by the manufacturer.
(3) Fittings shall not be used in services that IWA-4334 Pressure Test Requirements A99
exceed the manufacturer’s maximum pressure-tempera- Rerated items shall be subjected to a system leakage
ture recommendations. test in accordance with IWA-5000 for the new service
condition if the resulting test pressure would be higher
than the pressure of previous pressure tests.
A99 IWA-4330 RERATING
The provisions of this paragraph shall apply for
rerating whether or not there is accompanying physi- IWA-4400 WELDING, BRAZING, DEFECT A99
cal work. REMOVAL, AND
INSTALLATION
A99 IWA-4331 General Requirements IWA-4410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A99
(a) The applicable design requirements of the Con- (a) Welding, brazing, defect removal, and installation
struction Code and Owner’s Requirements shall be met. activities shall be performed in accordance with IWA-
Later Editions and Addenda of the Construction Code 4420 or IWA-4430, and the other requirements of this
or a later, different Construction Code, either in its Subarticle, except that the requirements of IWA-4700
entirety or portions thereof, and Code Cases may be shall be used for heat exchanger tube plugging or
used, provided the requirements of IWA-4221 are met. sleeving.
(b) Overpressure protection shall be evaluated in (b) Welding electrodes, flux, and other welding mate-
accordance with the Construction Code and Owner’s rial shall be stored and handled in accordance with a
Requirements. written procedure. Absorption of moisture by fluxes
(c) The rerating shall be evaluated or analyzed in and cored, fabricated, or coated electrodes shall be
accordance with IWA-4311. The Owner’s Requirements minimized. When electrode storage and baking condi-
shall be reviewed and revised or updated when nec- tions are not specified by this Division, the precautions
essary. and recommendations of the electrode manufacturer
(d) Form NIS-2 shall be completed for the rerating. shall be followed. Alternative welding material control
(e) If a nameplate with pressure or temperature rating procedures may be used if accepted by the Inspector.
is attached to the item or piping system, the Owner (c) Procedures for welding material control shall be
or his designee shall attach a new nameplate as close included in the Repair /Replacement Program.
41

IWA-4420 CONSTRUCTION CODE (b) After removal of defects detected by volumetric

REQUIREMENTS examination, volumetric examination of the defect re-
moval area shall be performed. The volumetric examina-
A99 IWA-4421 Construction Code and Owner’s
tion method that detected the defect shall be used.
Requirements
(c) The acceptance criteria of either the Construction
(a) Welding, brazing, defect removal, and installation Code or Section XI shall be met.
activities shall be performed in accordance with the (d) Indications detected as a result of excavation that
Owner’s Requirements and the Construction Code of are not associated with the defect being removed shall
the component or system, except as provided in (b) be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with the
and (c) below. The requirements of IWA-4460 shall Construction Code or Section XI.
be used in lieu of Construction Code requirements for
mechanical and thermal metal removal. The require- IWA-4422.2.2 Defect Removal Followed by
ments of IWA-4422 shall be used in lieu of Construction Welding or Brazing
Code requirements for examination of defect re- (a) Surface examination of the defect removal area
moval areas. is required prior to welding, except as provided below.
(b) Later Editions and Addenda of the Construction (1) A surface examination is not required when
Code or a later different Construction Code, either in the defect is eliminated by removing the full cross-
its entirety or portions thereof, and Code Cases may section of the weld or base material.
be used, provided the substitution is as listed in IWA- (2) When surface examination of the excavation
4221(b). Filler material requirements shall be reconciled, cannot be performed or will not provide meaningful
as required, in accordance with IWA-4224. results, surface examination of the excavation is not
(c) Revised Owner’s Requirements may be used, required. The acceptability of any remaining portion
provided they are reconciled in accordance with IWA- of the defect may be established by evaluation in
4222. A Report of Reconciliation shall be prepared. accordance with IWA-4422.1(b) in lieu of the surface
examination. Alternative NDE methods may be used
to characterize any remaining portion of the defect.
IWA-4422 Defect Removal and Examination (3) If final volumetric examination will be per-
formed on the completed repair, the final volumetric
A99 IWA-4422.1 Defect Removal
examination method is the same as the method used
(a) The defect removal process shall be in accordance
to detect the defect, and the volume to be examined
with IWA-4421, except that thermal removal processes
includes the location of the original defect, surface
shall be in accordance with IWA-4460. A defect is
examination of the defect removal area is not required.
considered removed when it has been reduced to an
(b) The acceptance criteria of either the Construction
acceptable size. The component shall be acceptable for
Code or Section XI shall be used for the excavation.
continued service if the resulting section thickness
(c) Surface examination of defect removal areas is
created by the cavity is at least the minimum required
not required for brazed joints.
thickness. If the resulting section thickness is less than
(d) Indications detected as a result of excavation that
the minimum required thickness, the component shall be
are not associated with the defect being removed shall
corrected by repair/replacement activities in accordance
be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with the
with this Article.
Construction Code or Section XI.
(b) Alternatively, the defect removal area and any
(e) Examination following welding or brazing shall
remaining portion of the defect may be evaluated
be in accordance with IWA-4520.
and the component accepted in accordance with the
appropriate flaw evaluation provisions of Section XI,
or the design provisions of the Owner’s Requirements
and either the Construction Code or Section III.
IWA-4422.2 Nondestructive Examination IWA-4430 ALTERNATIVES TO

CONSTRUCTION CODE
IWA-4422.2.1 Defect Removal Without Welding
REQUIREMENTS
or Brazing
(a) After removal of defects detected by visual or In lieu of the requirements of IWA-4420, the require-
surface examination, surface examination of the defect ments of IWA-4600 may be used for alternative welding
removal area shall be performed. methods.
42

IWA-4440 WELDING AND WELDER welders at the discretion of the Repair /Replacement
QUALIFICATION (INCLUDING Organization;
WELDING OPERATORS) (3) evidence that the Quality Assurance Program is
acceptable to the Owner’s Authorized Nuclear Inservice
(a) All welding shall be performed in accordance
Inspector.
with Welding Procedure Specifications that have been
qualified by the Owner or Repair /Replacement Organi-
zation in accordance with the requirements of the codes
IWA-4450 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
specified in the Repair /Replacement Plan.
(b) As an alternative to QW-201, a procedure qualifi- Fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
cation record (PQR) qualified by one Owner may be manufacturer’s recommendations.
used by another Owner. When this alternative is used,
the following requirements shall be met:
IWA-4451 Helical-Coil Threaded Inserts
(1) The Owner who performed the procedure quali-
fication test shall certify, by signing the PQR, that IWA-4451.1 Class 1, 2, and 3. Internal threads in
testing was performed in accordance with Section IX. pressure-retaining items may be replaced with helical-
(2) The Owner who performed the procedure quali- coil threaded inserts in accordance with the following
fication test shall certify, in writing, that the procedure requirements.
qualification was conducted in accordance with a Quality (a) The helical-coil threaded insert shall satisfy the
Assurance Program that satisfies the requirements of design requirements of the Construction Code for the
IWA-1400. specified loading to be applied to the threaded connec-
(3) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall tion. For materials not listed in the Construction Code,
be responsible for obtaining any additional supporting primary stresses shall not exceed the lesser of 2⁄3 of
information needed for WPS development. the minimum specified yield strength or 1⁄4 of the
(4) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall minimum specified tensile strength of the applicable
document, on each resulting WPS, the parameters appli- material.
cable to welding. Each WPS shall be supported by all (b) The supplier shall be evaluated for compliance
with NCA-3800 or 10CFR50, Appendix B.
necessary PQRs.
(c) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall be supplied
(5) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall
with a Certified Material Test Report that provides
accept responsibility for the PQR by documenting the
traceability to the item, material specification, grade or
Owner’s approval of each WPS that references the PQR.
class, mechanical properties, and heat-treated condition.
(6) The Owner accepting the completed PQR shall
(d) Helical-coil threaded inserts shall be installed in
demonstrate technical competence in application of the accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
received PQR by completing a performance qualification
using the parameters of a resulting WPS.
(7) The Owner may accept and use a PQR only
IWA-4460 METAL REMOVAL PROCESSES
when it is received directly from the Owner that certified
the PQR. IWA-4461 Thermal Removal Processes
(c) All welders shall be qualified by the Repair / Thermal removal processes include oxyacetylene cut-
Replacement Organization in accordance with the ting, carbon arc gouging, plasma cutting, metal disinte-
requirements of the codes specified in the gration machining (MDM), and electrodischarge ma-
Repair /Replacement Plan. chining (EDM).
(d) Welders need not be employed directly by the
Repair /Replacement Organization, provided the use of IWA-4461.1 P-No.1. When thermal removal pro-
such welders is controlled by the Quality Assurance cesses are used on P-No. 1 materials, surface oxides
Program of the Repair /Replacement Organization. This shall be removed by mechanical processing prior to
Program shall include the following: welding on cut surfaces.
(1) requirements for complete and exclusive ad- IWA-4461.2 P-Nos. 3, 4, 5A, 5B, 5C, 6, 7, 9A, A99
ministration and technical supervision of all welders 9B, 9C, 10A, 10B, 10C, 10E Through 10K, and 11A
by the Repair /Replacement Organization; Materials
(2) requirements for contractual control that pro- (a) When preheat is less than that specified in Table
vides the necessary authority to assign and remove IWA-4461.1-1, material shall be removed by a mechani-
43

A99 TABLE IWA-4461.1-1

MINIMUM PREHEAT TEMPERATURE, °F
P-Nos. 10A,
P-No. 4 and P-Nos. 5A, 10B, 10C, and
P-No. 1 P-No. 1 (Group 3), P-Nos. 9A, 5B, 5C, and 10E Through
(Groups 1 and 2) P-No. 3, and P-No. 11A 9B, and 9C P-No. 6 P-No. 7 10K
200 [Note (1)] 200 250 300 None 200 [Note (1)]
required
NOTE:
(1) Applies only to material with a nominal section thickness of 3⁄4 in. and greater.
cal method from all thermally processed areas, in etched with a suitable etchant, and visually examined
accordance with the following: at 10X. All sectioned surfaces shall be free of cracks.
(1) When welding is to be performed, at least (e) Corrosion testing of the thermally cut surface
1/32 in. of material shall be removed from the cavity and heat affected zone shall be performed if the cut
to be welded. surface is to be exposed to corrosive media. Alterna-
(2) When welding is not to be performed, at least tively, corrosion resistance of the thermally cut surface
1⁄ in. of material shall be removed and the area shall may be evaluated. The Owner shall specify the accept-
16
be faired into the surrounding area. ance criteria.
(3) Resulting irregularities shall be removed to a
smooth surface by a mechanical method. This surface
shall show no visual evidence of irregularities. The IWA-4462 Mechanical Removal Processes
depth of material to be removed as required by IWA- (a) If a mechanical removal process is used in an
4461.2(a)(1) or (2) shall be measured from the smooth area where welding is not to be performed, the area
surface. shall be faired into surrounding area.
(b) When preheat is applied in accordance with Table (b) Where welding is to be performed, the cavity
IWA-4461.1-1, material shall be removed to bright shall be ground smooth and clean with beveled sides
metal by a mechanical method. and edges rounded to provide suitable accessibility for
IWA-4461.3 P-Nos. 8 and 43 Materials. If thermal welding.
removal processes are used on P-No. 8 and P-No. 43
materials, at least 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) of material shall
be mechanically removed from the thermally pro- IWA-4500 EXAMINATION AND TEST
cessed area. IWA-4510 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
IWA-4461.4 Alternative to Mechanical Processing. (In course of preparation.)
Mechanical processing of thermally cut surfaces for
materials identified in IWA-4461.2 and IWA-4461.3 is
not required when using a thermal metal removal
IWA-4520 EXAMINATION
process qualified as follows:
(a) The qualification test shall consist of two coupons (a) Welding or brazing areas and welded joints made
of the same P-No. material to be cut in production. for installation of items shall be examined in accordance
(b) The qualification coupons shall be cut using the with the Construction Code identified in the Repair /
maximum heat input to be used in production. Replacement Plan.
(c) The thermally cut surface of each coupon shall (b) These examinations may be performed concur-
be visually examined at 10X and shall be free of rently with the preservice inspections required by
cracks. The Owner shall specify surface roughness IWA-4530.
acceptable for the application and shall verify that the (c) Alternative examination methods, a combination
qualification coupon meets that criterion. of methods, or newly developed techniques may be
(d) Each qualification coupon shall be cross sec- substituted for the methods specified in the Construction
tioned, and the exposed surfaces shall be polished, Code or in this Division, provided the Inspector is
44

satisfied that the results are demonstrated to be equiva- (4) flange seating surface when less than half the
lent or superior to those of the specified method. flange axial thickness is removed and replaced
(5) pressure vessel welding when the remaining
wall thickness, after metal removal, is at least 90% of
the minimum design wall thickness
IWA-4530 PRESERVICE INSPECTION AND
(6) components or connections NPS3 1 and smaller
TESTING
(7) tube-to-tubesheet welds when such welds are
(a) When portions of items requiring preservice or made on the cladding
inservice inspection are affected by repair /replacement (8) seal welds
activities, or for items being installed, including welded (9) welded joints between non-pressure-retaining
joints made for installation of items, preservice inspec- items and the pressure-retaining portion of the compo-
tions shall be performed in accordance with IWB-2200, nents
IWC-2200, IWD-2200, IWE-2200, IWF-2200, or IWL- (10) valve discs or seats, except as required by
2200 prior to return of the system to service. The IWA-4530(b)
preservice inspection may be performed either prior to
or following the pressure test required by IWA-4540.
(b) Prior to returning a valve to service, a preservice
test shall be performed in accordance with IWV-1000
when the Owner determines that the repair /replacement
activity affects its performance parameters. IWA-4550 CLASS MC AND METALLIC
(c) During the first inservice test performed after a PORTIONS OF CLASS CC
pump is put into service, a new set of reference values CONTAINMENTS
shall be determined in accordance with IWP-1000 when Items subjected to repair /replacement activities shall
the Owner determines that the repair /replacement activ-
be tested in accordance with IWE-5000.
ity affects its performance parameters.
(d) For repair /replacement activities on a snubber,
preservice examinations and tests shall be performed
in accordance with IWF-5200, prior to returning the
snubber to service.
IWA-4600 ALTERNATIVE WELDING
METHODS
A99 IWA-4540 PRESSURE TESTING OF CLASS 1,
(a) When welding under water, the alternative re-
2, AND 3 ITEMS
quirements of IWA-4660 may be used in lieu of the
(a) Unless exempted by (b) below, repair/replacement welding and nondestructive examination requirements
activities performed by welding or brazing on a pressure- of the Construction Code or Section III.
retaining boundary shall include (a)(1) or (a)(2) below. (b) When postweld heat treatment is not to be per-
(1) A system hydrostatic test shall be performed formed, the following provisions may be used.
in accordance with IWA-5000 prior to, or as part of, (1) The welding methods of IWA-4620, IWA-
returning to service. 4630, or IWA-4640 may be used in lieu of the welding
(2) The following requirements shall be met. and nondestructive examination requirements of the
(a) The nondestructive examination methodol- Construction Code or Section III, provided the require-
ogy and acceptance criteria of the 1992 Edition or later ments of IWA-4610 are met.
of Section III shall be met prior to return to service. (2) For welding of Class MC metal containments
(b) The Owner’s Requirements shall be met and their integral attachments and metallic liners of
prior to return to service. Class CC containments and their integral attachments,
(c) A system leakage test shall be performed the welding methods of IWA-4620 or IWA-4650 may be
in accordance with IWA-5000. used, provided the requirements of IWA-4610 are met.
(b) The following are exempt from any pressure test:
(1) cladding
(2) heat exchanger tube plugging and sleeving 3 NPS (Nominal Pipe Size) — a designation assigned for the purpose
(3) piping, pump, and valve welding or brazing of convenient specification of pipe size. The actual inside and outside
that does not penetrate through the pressure boundary dimensions are listed in applicable ANSI Standards.
45

IWA-4610 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR the Owner’s Requirements and either the Construction
ALL MATERIALS Code or Section III.
(b) The original defect shall be removed:
(a) The area to be welded plus a band around the
(1) when welding is to be performed in accordance
area of at least 1-1⁄2 times the component thickness or
with IWA-4620; or
5 in. (127 mm), whichever is less, shall be preheated
(2) when welding is required in accordance with
and maintained at a minimum temperature of 350°F IWA-4630 or IWA-4640, and the defect penetrates the
(177°C) for the SMAW process and 300°F (149°F) for base material.
the GTAW process during welding. The maximum (c) The Repair /Replacement Program and Plans, and
interpass temperature shall be 450°F (232°C). Thermo- associated evaluation, shall be subject to review in
couples and recording instruments shall be used to accordance with IWA-4150(d).
monitor the process temperatures. Their attachment and
removal shall be in accordance with Section III. IWA-4611.2 Examination Following Defect Re- A99
(b) The welding procedure and the welders or weld- moval
ing operators shall be qualified in accordance with (a) After final grinding, the affected surfaces, includ-
Section IX and the additional requirements of this ing surfaces of cavities prepared for welding, shall be
Subarticle. examined by the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant
(1) Procedure Qualification method to ensure that the indication has been reduced
(a) The test assembly material for the welding to an acceptable limit in accordance with IWA-3000.
procedure qualification test shall be of the same P- This examination is not required when defect elimination
Number and Group Number, including a postweld heat removes the full thickness of the weld and back side
treatment that is at least equivalent to the time and of the weld joint is not accessible for removal of
temperature already applied to the material being examination materials.
welded. (b) Indications detected as a result of the excavation
(b) The techniques described for the following that are not associated with the defect being removed
shall be evaluated for acceptability in accordance with
welding procedures shall be used in the preparation of
IWA-3000.
the procedure qualification coupons.
(2) Performance Qualification. If the weld is to
be performed where physical obstructions impair the
IWA-4620 SIMILAR MATERIALS
welder’s ability to perform, the welder shall also demon-
strate the ability to deposit sound weld metal in the IWA-4621 General Requirements
positions required, using the same parameters and simu- (a) Repair /replacement activities on P-Nos. 1, 3,
lated physical obstructions as are involved in the repair / 12A, 12B, and 12C2 base materials and associated
replacement activity. welds may be performed without the specified postweld
(c) The neutron fluence in the weld area shall be heat treatments, provided the requirements of IWA-
taken into account when establishing the weld metal 4621(b) and (c) and IWA-4622 through IWA-4624
composition limits. are met.
(b) The maximum area of an individual weld based
on the finished surface shall be 100 sq in. (64,500 mm2),
A99 IWA-4611 DEFECT REMOVAL and the depth of the weld shall not be greater than
IWA-4611.1 General Requirements one-half of the base metal thickness.
(a) Defects shall be removed or reduced in size in (c) Peening may be used except on the initial and
accordance with this Paragraph. The component shall final weld layers.
be acceptable for continued service if the resultant
section thickness created by the cavity is at least the IWA-4622 Welding Qualifications
minimum design thickness. If the resulting section
(a) The test assembly cavity depth shall be at least
thickness is less than the minimum design thickness,
one-half the depth of the weld installed during the
the component shall be corrected by repair /replacement
repair/replacement activity but not less than 1 in.
activities in accordance with this Article. Alternatively,
(25 mm). The test assembly thickness shall be at least
the defect removal area and any remaining portion of
the flaw may be evaluated and the component accepted 2 P-Nos. 12A, 12B, and 12C designations refer to specific material
in accordance with the appropriate flaw evaluation classifications originally identified in Section III and subsequently
provisions of Section XI or the design provisions of reclassified in a later Edition of Section IX.
46

twice the test assembly cavity depth. The test assembly metal temperature of the item to be repaired. The
shall be large enough to permit removal of the required location and orientation of the test specimens shall be
test specimens. The test assembly dimensions sur- similar to that required in IWA-4622(d)(1), but shall
rounding the cavity shall be at least the test assembly be in the base material.
thickness, but not less than 6 in. (152 mm). The (c) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal of the
qualification test plate shall be prepared in accordance procedure qualification shall meet the requirements as
with Fig. IWA-4622-1. determined in IWA-4622(b).
(b) The test assembly base material for the welding (d) Charpy V-notch tests of the heat affected zone
procedure qualification test shall meet the impact test (HAZ) of the procedure qualification shall be made at
requirements of the Construction Code and Owner’s the same temperature as the base metal test in IWA-
Requirements. If such requirements are not in the 4622(b). Number, location, and orientation of the test
Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements, they specimens shall be as follows:
shall be determined by impact tests of the procedure (1) The specimens shall be removed from a loca-
qualification base material at or below the lowest service tion as near as practical to a depth of one-half the
46.1

FIG. IWA-4622-1 QUALIFICATION TEST PLATE
47
thickness of the deposited weld metal. The coupons second layer shall be deposited with a 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm)
for heat affected zone impact specimens shall be taken diameter electrode. Subsequent layers shall be deposited
transverse to the axis of the weld and etched to define with a welding electrode no larger than 5⁄32 in. (4 mm)
the heat affected zone. See Fig. IWA-4622-1. The diameter. Bead deposition shall be performed in a
notch of the Charpy V-notch specimen may be cut manner shown in Fig. IWA-4623.1-1, Step 3. The
approximately normal to the material surface in such completed weld shall have at least one layer of weld
a manner as to include as much heat affected zone as reinforcement deposited and then this reinforcement
possible in the resulting fracture. When the material shall be removed by mechanical means, making the
thickness permits, the axis of a specimen shall be finished surface of the weld substantially flush with
inclined to allow the root of the notch to align parallel the surface surrounding the weld.
to the fusion line. (e) The weld area shall be maintained at a tempera-
(2) The Charpy V-notch test shall be performed ture of 450°F–550°F (232°C–288°C) for a minimum
in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall be in of 2 hr after completion of the weld in P-No. 1
accordance with SA-370, Fig. 11, Type A. A test shall materials. For P-No. 3 materials, the holding time shall
consist of a set of three full-size 10 mm × 10 mm be a minimum of 4 hr.
specimens. The lateral expansion and /or absorbed en-
ergy, as applicable, and the test temperature, as well IWA-4623.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding. The pro-
as the orientation and location of all tests performed cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4623.2(a)
shall be reported in the Procedure Qualification Record. through (c):
(e) The average of the three HAZ impact tests shall (a) The weld metal shall be deposited by the auto-
be equal to or greater than the average of the three matic or machine gas tungsten-arc weld process using
base metal tests. cold wire feed.
(b) The cavity shall be buttered with the first six
layers of weld metal as shown in Fig. IWA-4623.2-1,
IWA-4623 Welding Procedure Steps 1 through 3, with the weld heat input for each
IWA-4623.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding. The pro- layer controlled to within 610% of that used in the
cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4623.1(a) procedure qualification test. Subsequent layers shall be
through (e): deposited with a heat input equal to or less than that
(a) The weld metal shall be deposited using low used for layers beyond the sixth in the procedure
hydrogen electrode meeting the coating moisture content qualification (see Fig. IWA-4623.2-1, Step 4). The
requirements of SFA-5-5. The maximum bead width completed weld shall have at least one layer of weld
shall be four times the electrode core diameter. reinforcement deposited and then this reinforcement
(b) All covered electrodes from hermetically sealed shall be removed by mechanical means, making the
containers shall immediately be used or placed into finished surface of the weld substantially flush with
holding or drying ovens operating between 225°F the surface surrounding the weld.
(107°C) and 300°F (149°C). Covered electrodes from (c) The weld area shall be maintained at a minimum
other than hermetically sealed containersshall be baked temperature of 300°F (149°C) for a minimum of 2 hr
and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s after completion of the weld repair in P-No. 1 materials.
recommendations. After baking and before the elec- For P-No. 3 materials, the holding time shall be a
trodes are allowed to cool below 225°F (107°C), they minimum of 4 hr.
shall be transferred to holding or drying ovens operating
between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (117°C).
IWA-4624 Examination
(c) Electrodes removed from the holding ovens in
IWA-4623.1(b) for a period in excess of 8 hr for (a) The initial layer shall be examined by the mag-
E70XX electrodes or 4 hr for E80XX and E90XX netic particle method after grinding or machining. Each
electrodes shall be reprocessed in accordance with subsequent layer shall be examined by the magnetic
IWA-4623.1(b). Electrodes shall not be rebaked more particle method if a final volumetric examination will
than once. not be performed.
(d) The cavity shall be buttered using a 3⁄32 in. (b) The weld shall be nondestructively examined after
(2.4 mm) diameter electrode as shown in Fig. IWA- the completed weld has been at ambient temperature for
4623.1-1, Step 1. The weld bead crown surface shall at least 48 hr. The nondestructive examination of the
be removed by grinding or machining before depositing welded region shall include both volumetric [except as
the second layer (see Fig. IWA-4623.1-1, Step 2). The permitted in IWA-4624(a)] and surface examination.
48
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fig. IWA-4623.1-1
FIG. IWA-4623.1-1 TEMPER BEAD WELDING AND WELD TEMPER BEAD REINFORCEMENT
49
Fig. IWA-4623.2-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWA-4623.2-1 AUTOMATIC OR MACHINE (GTAW) TEMPER BEAD WELDING
50
(c) Areas from which weld attached thermocouples 3 weld joints. The maximum bead width shall be four
have been removed shall be ground and examined by times the electrode core diameter.
a surface examination method. (b) All covered electrodes used for qualification test
and welding shall be from freshly opened, hermetically
sealed packages or heated ovens maintained between
IWA-4630 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (177°C). Electrodes with-
drawn from hermetically sealed containers or ovens for
IWA-4631 General Requirements
longer than 8 hr shall be discarded or shall be baked once
(a) Repair /replacement activities on welds that join in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
P-No. 8 or P-No. 43 material to P-No. 1, 3, 12A, 12B, and placed immediately back into the holding ovens.
and 12C material may be made without the specified If withdrawn again for longer than 8 hr, they shall be
postweld heat treatment, provided the requirements of discarded.
IWA-4631(b) and IWA-4632 through IWA-4634 are (c) The electrodes may be maintained in heated
met. ovens in the work area. The oven temperature shall be
(b) Repair /replacement activities in accordance with maintained between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (177°C).
this paragraph are limited to those along the fusion Electrodes exposed to the atmosphere for more than 8
line of a nonferritic weld to ferritic base material where hr shall be discarded or shall be baked once in accord-
1⁄ in. (3.2 mm) or less of nonferritic weld deposit ance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
8
exists above the original fusion line after defect removal. placed immediately back into the holding ovens. Elec-
If the defect penetrates into the ferritic base material, trodes exposed to the atmosphere for more than 8 hr
welding of the base material may be performed in after being baked once shall be discarded.
accordance with IWA-4633 provided the depth of the (d) All areas of the ferritic base material, exposed
weld in the base material does not exceed 3⁄8 in. The or not, on which weld metal is to be deposited, shall
repair /replacement activity performed on a completed be covered with a single layer of weld deposit using
joint shall not exceed one-half the joint thickness. The 3⁄
32 in. (2.4 mm) diameter electrodes. The weld bead
surface of the completed weld shall not exceed 100 crown surface shall be removed by grinding or machin-
sq in. (64,500 mm2). ing before depositing the second layer. The second
layer shall be deposited with 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) diameter
electrodes. Subsequent layers shall be deposited with
IWA-4632 Welding Procedure Qualification
welding electrodes no larger than 5⁄32 in. (4 mm) in
(a) The test assembly cavity depth shall be at least diameter. (See Fig. IWA-4633.1-1).
one-half the depth of the weld installed during the (e) After at least 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) of weld metal
repair/replacement activity but not less than 1 in. has been deposited, the weld area shall be maintained
(25 mm). The test assembly thickness shall be at least in the range of 450°F–550°F (232°C–288°C) for 4 hr
twice the test assembly cavity depth. The test assembly minimum.
shall be large enough to permit removal of the required (f) Subsequent to the above heat treatment, the bal-
test specimens. The test assembly dimensions sur- ance of the welding may be performed at a maximum
rounding the cavity shall be at least the test assembly interpass temperature of 350°F (177°C).
thickness, but not less than 6 in. (152 mm). The
qualification test place shall be prepared in accordance IWA-4633.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding. The pro-
with Fig. IWA-4622-1. cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4633.2(a)
(b) The ferritic base material and HAZ shall meet through (e):
the requirements of IWA-4622. (a) The weld shall be made using A-No. 8 weld
metal (QW-442) for P-No. 8 to P-No. 1 or P-No. 3
weld joints or F-No. 43 weld metal (QW-432) for
IWA-4633 Welding Procedure
either P-No. 8 or P-No. 43 to P-No. 1 or P-No. 3
IWA-4633.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding. The pro- weld joints.
cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4633.1(a) (b) The weld metal shall be deposited by the auto-
through (f): matic or machine gas tungsten arc weld process using
(a) The weld metal shall be deposited using A-No. cold wire feed.
8 weld metal (QW-442) for P-No. 8 to P-No. 1 or P- (c) The cavity shall be buttered with the first six
No. 3 weld joints or F-No. 43 weld metal (QW-432) layers of weld metal as shown in Fig. IWA-4633.2-1,
for either P-No. 8 or P-No. 43 to P-No. 1 or P-No. Steps 1 through 3, with the weld heat input for each
51
FIG. IWA-4633.1-1 TEMPER BEAD WELDING AND WELD TEMPER BEAD REINFORCEMENT OF DISSIMILAR
METAL WELDS OR BUTTERING
52
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Fig. IWA-4633.2-1
FIG. IWA-4633.2-1 AUTOMATIC OR MACHINE (GTAW) TEMPER BEAD WELDING OF

DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS OR BUTTERING
53
IWA-4633.2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4643.2
layer controlled to within 610% of that used in the IWA-4643 Welding Procedure
procedure qualification test. Subsequent layers shall be
IWA-4643.1 Shielded Metal-Arc Welding. The pro-
deposited with a heat input equal to or less than that
cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4643.1(a)
used for layers beyond the sixth in the procedure
through (g):
qualification (see Fig. IWA-4633.2-1, Step 4). The
(a) The welds shall be made using A-No. 8 weld
completed weld shall have at least one layer of weld
metal (QW-442) for austenitic stainless steel cladding
reinforcement deposited and then this reinforcement
or F-No. 43 weld metal (QW-432) for either austenitic
shall be removed by mechanical means, making the
stainless steel or nickel base cladding.
finished surface of the weld substantially flush with
(b) The maximum bead width shall be four times
the surface surrounding the weld.
the electrode core diameter.
(d) After at least 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) of weld metal
(c) All covered electrodes used for the qualification
has been deposited, the weld area shall be maintained
test and welding shall be from freshly opened, hermeti-
at a minimum temperature of 300°F (149°C) for a
cally sealed packages or heated ovens maintained be-
minimum of 2 hr in P-No. 1 materials. For P-No. 3
tween 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (177°C). Electrodes
materials, the minimum holding time shall be 4 hr.
withdrawn from hermetically sealed containers or ovens
(e) Subsequent to the above heat treatment, the bal-
for longer than 8 hr shall be discarded or shall be
ance of the welding may be performed at maximum
baked once in accordance with the manufacturer’s rec-
interpass temperature of 350°F (177°C).
ommendations and placed immediately back into the
holding ovens. If withdrawn again for longer than 8
hr, they shall be discarded.
IWA-4634 Examination (d) The electrodes may be maintained in heated
The weld as well as the preheated band shall be ovens in the work area. The oven temperature shall be
examined by the liquid penetrant method after the maintained between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (177°C).
completed weld has been at ambient temperature for at Electrodes exposed to the atmosphere for more than 8
least 48 hr. The weld shall be volumetrically examined. hr shall be discarded or shall be baked once in accord-
ance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
placed immediately back into the holding ovens. Elec-
trodes exposed to the atmosphere for more than 8 hr
IWA-4640 CLADDING after being baked once shall be discarded.
IWA-4641 General Requirements (e) All areas of the base material on which weld
metal is to be deposited shall be covered with a single
Repair /replacement activities on austenitic stainless layer of weld deposit using 3⁄32 in. (2.4 mm) diameter
steel and nickel base cladding on P-No. 1, 3, 12A, electrodes. The weld bead crown surface of the first
12B, and 12C base materials when the ferritic material layer shall be removed by grinding or machining before
is within 1 ⁄ 8 in. of being exposed may be performed by depositing the second layer. The second layer shall be
welding without the specified postweld heat treatments deposited with 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) diameter electrodes.
provided the requirements of IWA-4642 through IWA- Subsequent layers shall be deposited with electrodes
4644 are met. no larger than 5⁄32 in. (4 mm) diameter.
(f) After completion of welding or when at least
3⁄
16 in. (4.8 mm) of weld metal has been deposited,
IWA-4642 Welding Procedure Qualifications the weld area shall be maintained at a temperature of
450°F– 550°F (232°C–288°C) for a minimum of 2 hr in
(a) When the weld involves two different P-Number
P-No. 1 materials. For P-No. 3 materials, the minimum
or Group Number materials, the test assembly shall
holding time shall be 4 hr.
duplicate the combination.
(g) Subsequent to the above heat treatment, the bal-
(b) The test assembly base material shall be at least
ance of the welding, if any, may be performed at a
12 in. × 12 in. × 2 in. (305 mm× 305 mm × 51 mm)
maximum interpass temperature of 350°F (177°C).
thick, with a clad surface area of at least 8 in. × 8
in. (203 mm × 203 mm) in the area from which the IWA-4643.2 Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding. The pro-
bend test specimens will be removed. cedure shall include the requirements of IWA-4643.2(a)
(c) The guided bend test acceptance standards de- through (e):
scribed in Section IX for cladding shall also be applica- (a) The welds shall be made using A-No. 8 weld
ble to the HAZ of the base material. metal (QW-442) for austenitic stainless steel cladding
54
IWA-4643.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4652.1
or F-No. 43 weld metal (QW-432) for either austenitic other than hermetically sealed containers shall be baked
stainless steel or nickel base cladding. at the electrode manufacturer’s recommended baking
(b) The weld metal shall be deposited by the auto- temperature. After baking and before cooling below
matic or machine gas tungsten-arc weld process using 225°F (107°C), the electrodes shall be transferred to
cold wire feed. the holding or drying ovens and maintained at 225°F–
(c) The cavity shall be buttered with the first six 350°F (107°C and 177°C).
layers of weld metal as shown in Fig. IWA 4643.2-1, (2) The electrodes shall be maintained in heated
Steps 1 through 3, with the weld heat input for each ovens or heated portable containers in the work area
layer controlled to within 610% of that used in the until used. The oven temperature shall be maintained
procedure qualification test. Subsequent layers shall be between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F (177°C). Electrodes
deposited with a heat input equal to or less than that shall be used within 2 hr after removal from the holding
used for layers beyond the sixth in the procedure or drying ovens or heated portable containers. Electrodes
qualification (see Fig. IWA-4643.2-1, Step 4). removed from heated ovens for more than 2 hr, but
(d) After completion of welding, or when at least less than 4 hr, shall be returned to a holding oven and
3⁄
16 in. (4.8 mm) of weld metal has been deposited, held at a temperature between 225°F (107°C) and 350°F
the weld area shall be maintained at a minimum tempera- (177°C) for at least 8 hr before use. Electrodes removed
ture of 300°F (149°C) for a minimum of 2 hr in P- from heated ovens or heated portable containers for a
No. 1 materials. For P-No. 3 materials, the holding period in excess of 4 hr shall be rebaked in accordance
time shall be a minimum of 4 hr. with IWA-4651(c)(1) before use. Electrodes shall not
(e) Subsequent to the above heat treatment, the bal- be rebaked more than once.
ance of the welding, if any, may be performed at a (d) Welding materials shall be controlled so that they
maximum interpass temperature of 350°F (177°C). are identified as acceptable material until consumed.
(e) Welding material contaminated with oil, grease,
water, or other foreign material shall not be used.
(f) All welding material shall conform to the material
The weld as well as the preheated band shall be testing requirements of NE-2000 for Class MC or CC-
examined by the liquid penetrant method and deposited 2500 for Class CC. For each lot of covered electrodes,
weld metal and HAZ shall be examined by the ultrasonic weld metal tests shall be made in accordance with test
method, after the completed weld has been at ambient requirements of NE-2431.1 for Class MC or CC-2612.1
temperature for at least 48 hr. for Class CC, and the coupons shall be tested in
the as-welded condition. Impact test requirements and
acceptance criteria shall be as required by the Construc-
IWA-4650 BUTTER BEAD — TEMPER BEAD tion Code and Owner’s Requirements for the component
WELDING FOR CLASS MC AND base metal to be welded.
FOR CLASS CC METALLIC (g) Controlled peening of welds may be performed
LINERS to minimize distortion, provided it is also used on the
welds made to qualify the welding procedure and the
IWA-4651 General Requirements
production test assembly. Peening shall not be used
(a) Repair /replacement activities on P-No. 1, Gr. on the initial layer of the weld metal or on the final
No. 1 and 2 material may be made without the specified layer. If peening is used, it shall be considered as an
postweld heat treatment, provided the requirements of essential variable in the welding procedure.
IWA-4651(b) through (h) and IWA-4652 through IWA- (h) Fabrication and welding shall be sequenced to
4655 are met. minimize the effects of restraint.
(b) The shielded metal-arc welding process (SMAW)
using low hydrogen electrodes meeting the coating
moisture content requirements of SFA-5.5 shall be used.
(c) The following requirements apply to low hydro-
IWA-4652 Welding Qualification
gen electrodes.
(1) After receipt from the electrode manufacturer IWA-4652.1 General Requirements. The welding
and before use, all covered electrodes from hermetically procedure and welders shall be qualified in accordance
sealed containers shall be immediately used or placed with Section IX and the additional requirements of
into holding or drying ovens operating between 225°F Section III, except as modified or supplemented by
(107°C) and 350°F (177°C). Covered electrodes from IWA-4652.2 through IWA-4652.4.
55
FIG. IWA-4643.2-1 AUTOMATIC OR MACHINE (GTAW) TEMPER BEAD WELDING OF CLADDING
56
IWA-4652.2 Procedure Qualification. Welding pro- throat thickness, and for groove welds, the nominal
cedure qualification tests shall be performed in accord- thickness is the depth of the weld groove.
ance with Section IX for groove welds and the additional (5) restraint on the weld joint. The restraint shall
requirements of NE-4000 for Class MC or CC-4000 be maintained on the production test assembly for a
for Class CC. Impact test requirements and acceptance minimum of 48 hr after the completed weld has reached
criteria shall be as required by the Construction Code ambient temperature.
and Owner’s Requirements for the component base (6) weld sequencing (both fabrication steps and
material. order of bead sequence);
(7) weld position (see Section IX);
IWA-4652.3 Performance Qualification. The weld- (8) water backing and water temperature within
ers shall be qualified on a radiographically examined specified tolerances, as applicable;
groove weld test in accordance with Section IX and (9) actual weld electrode size to be used for the
by performance of the production test required by IWA- butter bead layer and the temper bead layer;
4652.4. The welder shall use the production Welding (10) range of electrode sizes to be used to complete
Procedure Specification and simulate typical physical the weld joint;
obstructions. (11) preheat and preheat maintenance within toler-
ances specified in the Welding Procedure Specification;
(12) peening, as applicable;
IWA-4652.4 Production Test. In addition to the (13) guides, templates, and fixtures used for weld
procedure qualification test requirements of IWA- placement, as applicable;
4652.2, one production test is required prior to any (14) maximum temper bead edge clearance (dimen-
welding. A production test simulates welding using the sion S) as shown in Figs. IWA-4652.4-1 and IWA-
variables listed in IWA-4652.4(a) and (b). A production 4652.4-2 and the minimum temper bead edge clearances;
test assembly may consist of one or more production (15) maximum weave width for the butter bead
tests. The variables listed in IWA-4652.4(a) and (b) layer.
shall be evaluated by performing a production test. (c) The production test shall be of sufficient size to
The production test assembly shall be evaluated by
permit removal of the test specimens required in IWA-
performing the examinations required by IWA-
4652.4(d).
4652.4(d).
(d) The production test shall be evaluated as follows:
(a) The production test base material that represents
(1) visual examination in accordance with IWA-
the pressure boundary shall be of the same material
2000 (VT-3) for compliance with the Welding Procedure
specification, type, class, group number, or grade as
Specification;
the pressure boundary material to be welded. All other
(2) surface examination and acceptance of the
material shall be of the same P-Number as those to
welds in the completed test assembly in accordance
be used in the repair /replacement activity. When the
with Subsection NE for Class MC or Subsection CC
original material is no longer manufactured, material
similar to the original material specification may be for Class CC;
substituted. Electrodes used for the production test shall (3) Examination of two cross sections for each
be the same specification and classification as those production test is required. The cross sections shall be
used for the weld and shall be treated as required by polished and suitably etched and examined at 10X
IWA-4651(c). magnification. Cross sections containing cracks or other
(b) The production test shall simulate the repair/ deleterious conditions shall be cause for rejection of
replacement weld. The following parameters shall be the production test.
recorded: (4) A minimum of two micro-hardness traverses
(1) all essential and supplementary essential vari- shall be taken from one cross section for each production
ables listed for the process in Section IX; test. The traverses shall be taken from areas of maximum
(2) nominal pressure boundary base metal anticipated hardness including the toe of the butter bead
thickness; layer as shown in Fig. IWA-4652.4-1. The indentation
(3) maximum nominal attachment base metal spacing of the heat affected zone (HAZ) microhardness
thickness; traverse shall consist of not less than ten indentations.
(4) weld joint geometry (including joint design Hardness values for the traverse shall be recorded. The
and fit up tolerances) and the maximum nominal weld maximum hardness for the pressure boundary HAZ
thickness. For fillet welds, the nominal thickness is the shall not exceed 400 KHN (500 g load).
57
FIG. IWA-4652.4-1 TEMPER BEAD TECHNIQUE
58
FIG. IWA-4652.4-2 ILLUSTRATION OF THE TEMPER BEAD TECHNIQUE FOR REINFORCEMENT OF EXISTING
FILLET WELDS
IWA-4653 Welding Technique 4652.4-2. The technique described in this paragraph

shall be performed in the production test and actual
Welding shall be in accordance with the following:
work.
(a) Prior to welding, the area to be welded shall be
(f) No postweld heat treatment is required.
examined by magnetic particle or liquid penetrant meth-
ods in accordance with Subsection NE for Class MC
or Subsection CC for Class CC.
(b) All surfaces to be welded and the surrounding IWA-4654 Examination
areas shall be clean and free of scale, rust, moisture, (a) The completed weld shall be visually examined
or other surface contaminants. (VT-1) in accordance with IWA-2200.
(c) The minimum preheat temperature specified in (b) The completed weld and a band 1 in. on either
the Welding Procedure Specification and the production side of the weld shall be examined by the magnetic
test (IWA-4652.4) shall be maintained during tack particle method not less than 48 hr after the completed
welding and until completion of the weld. weld has reached ambient temperature. The acceptance
(d) The maximum interpass temperature shall be criteria of Subsection NE for Class MC or Subsection
500°F. CC for Class CC shall be met.
(e) Welding shall consist of the application of a
butter bead layer, followed by temper beads or a temper
bead layer. Butter bead and alternate temper bead
IWA-4655 Welding Techniques
placement is shown in Fig. IWA-4652.4-1, detail (a).
Similar application of the temper bead technique for (a) Defects contained wholly in the weld metal shall
the reinforcement of fillet welds is shown in Fig. IWA- be corrected in accordance with NE-4400 for Class
59
IWA-4655 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4663.1
MC or CC-4540 for Class CC, except as noted in (4) A change in the nominal background gas com-
IWA-4655(b). position.5
(b) Improper application of the temper bead or defects (5) For SMAW and FCAW, use of a larger diame-
in the butter bead or temper bead shall be corrected ter electrode than that used in qualification.
by application of a new butter bead and temper bead (6) For P-No. 1 material, a decrease in the mini-
as shown in Fig. IWA-4655-1. mum distance from the point of welding to the wetted
(c) The repair technique for undercut greater than surface in any direction, when the minimum distance
1⁄
32 in. (0.8 mm) is shown in Fig. IWA-4655-2. is less than 6 in.
(7) For P-No. 1 material, the supplementary essen-
tial variables of Section XI apply to non-impact-tested
base metal when the minimum distance from the point
IWA-4660 UNDERWATER WELDING of welding to the wetted surface in any direction is
less than 6 in.
IWA-4661 Scope and General Requirements (b) Additional nonessential variables:
(a) These requirements4 are for dry or wet underwater (1) For SMAW and FCAW, an increase in time
welding. of electrode exposure to the underwater environment.
(b) The terms and definitions of ANSI/AWS D3.6, (2) A change in the method of protecting, removing
“Specification for Underwater Welding,” shall be used. moisture from, or otherwise conditioning bare filler
(c) Welding of P-No. 1, P-No. 8, and P-No. 4X metal and bare electrodes in the underwater envi-
materials may be performed under water provided the ronment.
welding procedures and welders or welding operators IWA-4662.2 Performance Qualification. Welders
are qualified in accordance with Section IX as modified and welding operators for dry underwater welding shall
by IWA-4662, IWA-4663, or IWA-4665, as applicable. be qualified in accordance with Section IX and the
(d) Dry underwater welding may be performed with variables listed below. When a welder or welding
GMAW, GTAW, PAW, SMAW, or a combination of operator has not welded with a process in a dry
these processes. underwater environment for at least six months, the
(e) Wet underwater welding may be performed with qualifications for that underwater process shall expire.
GMAW (FCAW-type only), SMAW, or a combination (a) A change in welding mode (i.e., dry chamber,
of these processes. dry spot, or habitat).
(b) A change in the SFA specification AWS filler
metal classification, or if not conforming to an AWS
IWA-4662 Additional Variables for Dry filler metal classification, a change in the manufacturer’s
Underwater Welding trade name for the electrode or filler metal.
(c) Addition or deletion of supplementary coatings
IWA-4662.1 Procedure Qualification. Welding pro- for the filler metal or a change in the type of any
cedure specifications for dry underwater welding shall supplementary coatings.
be qualified in accordance with the requirements of (d) A change in depth beyond that qualified in accord-
Section IX for groove welds. The following variables ance with Table IWA-4662.1-1.
also apply. (e) For SMAW and GMAW, use of a larger diameter
(a) Additional essential variables: electrode than that used during performance qualifi-
(1) A change in the method for underwater trans- cation.
port and storage of filler material (e.g., from sealed
packages to exposed).
(2) Addition or deletion of waterproof or supple- IWA-4663 Additional Variables for Wet
mentary coatings for the filler metal or a change in Underwater Welding
the type of any waterproof or supplementary coatings.
IWA-4663.1 Procedure Qualification. Welding pro-
(3) A change in depth beyond that qualified in
cedure specifications for wet underwater welding shall
accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-1.
be qualified to the requirements of Section IX for
groove welds, except that for P-No. 1 base metals, the
4 ANSI/AWS D3.6, “Specification for Underwater Welding,” contains
additional technical information that the Owner or user may find
useful. Additional variables or controls may be considered for specific 5 Background gas is gas that displaces water and is not necessarily
applications. intended to shield the arc. The gas may or may not be breathable.
60
FIG. IWA-4655-1 WELDING TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROPER TEMPER BEAD SPACING
61
FIG. IWA-4655-2 EXAMPLE OF WELD UNDERCUT WELDING TECHNIQUE
62
TABLE IWA-4662.1-11
DEPTH LIMITATIONS FOR UNDERWATER WELDING Mn + Si Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
CE p C − + +
QUALIFICATION 6 5 15
Max. Depth Min. Depth NOTE: The chemical analysis for carbon equivalent calcula-
Type of Welding Qualified2 Qualified3 tions for the production base material may be obtained from
the mill test certificate or chemical analysis. If it is not practi-
Dry Welding D plus 33 ft D minus 33 ft
cal to obtain chemical analysis for Cr, Mo, V, Ni, and Cu, the
Wet Welding with A-No. 8 Fil- D plus 10 ft D minus 33 ft carbon equivalent may be determined by using 0.1 for the term
ler Metals
3 4
Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
Wet Welding with F-No. 4X Fil- D D minus 33 ft + .
5 15
ler Metals
Wet Welding with Other A-No. D plus 33 ft D minus 33 ft4 FIG. IWA-4663.1-1 CARBON EQUIVALENCY
8 and F-No. 4X Filler Metals CALCULATION
GENERAL NOTES:
(1) D is qualification test depth.
(2) For the maximum depth qualified, depth shall be measured from
the lower extremity of the test weldment with a tolerance of plus
or minus 9 in.
(3) For the minimum depth qualified, depth shall be measured from polarity) to electrode positive (reverse polarity), or
the upper extremity of the test weldment with a tolerance of plus
or minus 9 in. vice versa.
(4) Welds at depths less than 10 ft require qualification at the produc- (10) A change from wet backside to dry backside
tion weld minimum depth. for backing thickness less than 1⁄4 in. (6 mm).
(11) For P-No. 1 base metal carbon equivalents as
calculated in accordance with Fig. IWA-4663.1-1, an
increase in the carbon equivalent beyond that of the
supplementary essential variables of Section IX apply procedure qualification test coupon.
to nonimpact-tested base metal. The following variables (12) An increase in the time of electrode exposure
also apply. to water at qualification depth.
(a) Additional essential variables: (13) For P-No. 1 base materials, a change from
(1) A change in the method for underwater trans- multipass per side to single pass per side.
port and storage of filler material (e.g., from sealed (b) Additional nonessential variable: a decrease in
packages to exposed). included angle, a decrease in root opening, or an
(2) Addition or deletion of waterproof or supple- increase in root face.
mentary coatings for the filler metal or a change in
the type of any waterproof or supplementary coatings.
(3) A change in electrode diameter beyond the IWA-4663.2 Performance Qualification. Welders
range used in qualification. and welding operators for wet underwater welding shall
(4) A change in depth beyond that qualified in be qualified in accordance with Section IX and the
accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-1. variables listed below. For P-No. 1 base metals, if
(5) A change in the SFA specification AWS filler mechanical bend testing is attempted in lieu of radio-
metal classification, or, if not conforming to an AWS graphic examination and the coupons fail the require-
filler metal classification, a change in the manufacturer’s ments of QW-302.1, immediate retesting may be by
trade name for the electrode or filler metal. radiographic examination in accordance with QW-302.2.
(6) Addition of welding positions other than those When a welder or welding operator has not welded
qualified in accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-2. with a process in a wet underwater environment for
(7) A change from upward to downward, or vice at least six months, the qualifications for welding with
versa, in the progression specified for any pass of a that process underwater shall expire.
vertical weld. (a) A change in the SFA specification AWS filler
(8) A change from the stringer bead technique to metal classification, or, if not conforming to an AWS
the weave bead technique, or vice versa. For P-No. 8 filler metal classification, a change in the manufacturer’s
and P-No. 4X base metals, this variable applies only trade name for the electrode or filler metal.
to the vertical position. (b) Addition or deletion of waterproof or supplemen-
(9) A change from ac to dc, or vice versa, and, tary coating for the filler metal or a change in the
in dc welding, a change from electrode negative (straight type of any waterproof or supplementary coatings.
63
TABLE IWA-4662.1-2
PROCEDURE AND PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION — TYPE POSITION LIMITATIONS
Position and Type of Weld Qualified [Note (1)]

Qualification Test Plate Pipe
Plate or Pipe
Weld Positions Groove Fillet Groove Fillet
Plate-groove 1G F F F F
2G H H H H
3G V V
4G O O
Pipe-groove 1G F F F F
2G H H H H
5G F,V,O F,V,O F,V,O F,V,O
6G All All All All
NOTE (1): Positions of welding:
F p Flat
H p Horizontal
V p Vertical
O p Overhead
(c) A change from salt or borated water to fresh with the SFA specification most nearly matching that
water. material (e.g., for ferritic covered electrodes, SFA-5.1).
(d) Use of a larger diameter electrode than that used (b) The coupon shall be tested as follows:
during performance qualification. (1) The ferrite number shall be directly measured
(e) A change in depth beyond that qualified in accord- for austenitic stainless steel, QW-442, A-No. 8 filler
ance with Table IWA-4662.1-1. metal.
(f) Addition of welding positions other than those (2) One all-weld-metal specimen shall be tension
qualified in accordance with Table IWA-4662.1-2. tested.
(g) A change in polarity or type of power source (3) As-deposited chemical composition shall be
(e.g., rectifier, motor-generator, inverter). determined in accordance with the applicable SFA
(h) A change from stringer bead to weave technique. specification or the SFA specification most nearly
(i) A change in the welder’s view from beneath to matching the material.
above the water surface. (4) For ferritic weld metal, Charpy V-notch ab-
(j) A decrease in the included angle, a decrease in
sorbed energy shall be determined in accordance with
root opening, or an increase in the root face.
IWA-4665(b), and, when applicable, the Construction
Code.
IWA-4664 Filler Metal Qualification (c) Acceptance criteria:
(1) The ferrite number shall meet the requirements
Each filler metal heat, lot, waterproof coating type,
and supplementary coating type to be used in production of the Construction Code.
shall be tested in accordance with the following require- (2) The ultimate tensile strength shall meet the
ments. minimum tensile strength specified for either of the
(a) An all-weld-metal coupon shall be prepared using base metals to be joined.
the production welding procedure at a depth such that (3) The chemical composition shall meet the appli-
the depth of the production weld will be within the cable SFA specification requirements for the as-depos-
depth limitations of Table IWA-4662.1-1. ited chemical composition. For material that does not
(1) For material that conforms to an SFA specifi- conform to an SFA specification, the chemical composi-
cation, the coupon shall be prepared in accordance with tion shall meet the requirements specified in the WPS.
the applicable SFA specification. (4) Charpy V-notch absorbed energy shall meet
(2) For material that does not conform to an SFA the requirements of IWA-4665(c) and, when applicable,
specification, the coupon shall be prepared in accordance the Construction Code.
64
IWA-4665 Alternative Procedure Qualification (c) Ultrasonic, eddy current and visual surface indica-
Requirements tions shall be evaluated using the surface examination
acceptance criteria of the Construction Code, Section
(a) As an alternative to the bend test requirement
III, or this Division.
of Section IX, Charpy V-notch tests may be used when
(d) Personnel performing visual examinations shall
qualifying procedures for wet underwater welding of
be qualified in accordance with IWA-2200 for perform-
P-No. 1 base material.
ance of VT-1 visual examinations and shall have re-
(b) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal and heat
ceived additional training in examination of weldments
affected zone (HAZ) of the procedure qualification shall
for fabrication conditions, including dimensional re-
be performed at 32°F. Number, location, and orientation
quirements and fabrication flaws.
of the test specimens shall be as follows.
(1) The specimens shall be removed from a loca- IWA-4666.2 Volumetric Examination. In lieu of
tion as near as practical to a depth of one-half the any required volumetric examination, the following
thickness of the deposited weld metal. The coupons apply:
for HAZ impact specimens shall be taken transverse (a) When practical, a volumetric examination shall
to the axis of the weld and etched to define the HAZ. be conducted with an ultrasonic examination procedure.
The notch of the Charpy V-notch specimen shall be The ultrasonic examination shall be conducted in accord-
cut approximately normal to the material surface in ance with Section V, Article 5. Indications shall be
such a manner as to include as much HAZ as possible evaluated using the volumetric acceptance criteria of
in the resulting fracture. When the material thickness the Construction Code, Section III, or this Division.
permits, the longitudinal specimen axis shall be perpen- (b) When ultrasonic volumetric examination is not
dicular to the fusion line. practical, a nondestructive surface examination shall be
(2) The Charpy V-notch test shall be performed performed on the root pass and on the finished weld.
in accordance with SA-370. Specimens shall be in When it is impractical to perform a surface examination
accordance with SA-370, Fig. 11, type A. A test shall on either the root or the finished weld, the provisions
consist of a set of three full-size 10 mm x 10 mm of IWA-4666.1 apply.
specimens. The absorbed energy and the test tempera-
ture, as well as the orientation and location of the
tests performed, shall be reported in the Procedure
IWA-4700 HEAT EXCHANGER TUBING
Qualification Record.
(c) The averages of the three weld metal impact IWA-4710 PLUGGING
tests and the three HAZ impact tests shall each be at
IWA-4711 Explosive Welding
least 25 ft. lbs.
(d) Charpy V-notch tests of the weld metal are not If explosive welding is used to weld plugs to Class
required for austenitic (A-No. 8) or nickel-base (F-No. 1 heat exchanger tubes or heat exchanger tubesheet
4X) filler material. bore holes, the requirements of IWA-4711.1 through
IWA-4711.4 shall be met. These requirements may be
used for Class 2 and Class 3 heat exchangers.
IWA-4711.1 General Requirements
When it is impractical to perform the nondestructive
(a) Material used in manufacturing plugs shall be
examinations required by this Division or the Construc-
produced in compliance with requirements of a SA
tion Code because of the underwater environment, the
or SB material specification or any other material
following alternative requirements apply.
specification that has been approved for Section III.
IWA-4666.1 Surface Examination. In lieu of any (b) Each plug shall be traceable to a Certified Material
required surface examination, the following apply: Test Report that indicates the mechanical properties
(a) When practical, a surface examination shall be and chemistry.
conducted with an ultrasonic or eddy current surface (c) Records shall be maintained by the Owner, and
examination procedure qualified for the underwater shall include the following:
environment. (1) plugging procedure
(b) When ultrasonic and eddy current surface exami- (2) welding procedure qualifications
nation is not practical, the surface shall be visually (3) welding operator performance qualifications
examined with a procedure meeting the requirements (4) material certifications
of IWA-2200. (5) location of all plugged tubes or holes
65
IWA-4711.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4711.2.1
(6) results of heat exchanger examinations required (12) any change in the nominal plug configuration;
by this Subparagraph (13) a change of 10% or more in the nominal or
(7) specific tubes or holes plugged by each welding average clearance (stand-off) between the tube or hole
operator and the plug. Stand-off shall be determined by consider-
(d) Records of the procedure and welder qualification ing the nominal plug diameter in the bonding area and
shall include the results of all tests required by IWA- the nominal, or, if the tubes of the heat exchanger had
4711.2, and shall be certified by the Repair /Replacement been expanded, the average value of tube inside diame-
Organization. The Procedure Qualification Records shall ters in the bonding area. Such average values should
include a description of all essential and nonessential be determined by measuring a sufficient number of
variables [IWA-4711.2.1(a) and (b)]. The operator per- production tubes of equal size, which have been simi-
formance qualification record shall also list the proce- larly expanded.
dure number and revision that was used for testing; (b) Nonessential Variables
the record of operator experience shall be kept current. (1) a change in the P-Number of tubesheet material
for tube plugging (when plug is not joined to tubesheet);
IWA-4711.2 Welding Qualification (2) a change in the tubesheet cladding (when the
IWA-4711.2.1 Procedure Qualifications. The plug is not joined to the cladding) when the explosive
Welding Procedure Specification for plugging shall be charge is installed within one tube diameter of the
qualified as a new procedure specification and shall be cladding metal;
completely requalified if any of the essential variables (3) for tube plugging, a change in the tube-to-
listed below are changed. Nonessential variables may be tubesheet seal welding procedure when the explosive
changed without requalification, provided the Welding charge is installed within one tube diameter of the
Procedure Specification is amended to show these tube-to-tubesheet seal weld [see IWA-4711.2.1(c)(3)].
changes. (c) Test Assembly
(a) Essential Variables (1) The procedure qualification shall be made on
(1) a change in the P-Number classification (Sec- a test assembly that simulates the conditions to be used
tion IX, QW-422) of any of the materials being joined. in production with respect to position, tube hole pattern,
This includes the tube, plug, tubesheet, or tubesheet and the essential variables listed in this Subparagraph.
cladding. If the plug is to be joined to any part of (2) The test assembly tubesheet thickness shall be
the tubesheet cladding, this cladding must be duplicated as thick as the production tubesheet, except that it need
in the procedure qualification. Materials not listed under not be l in. greater than the length of the explosive plug.
a P-Number require separate qualification. (3) When the explosive charge in the heat ex-
(2) a decrease in the nominal design tube wall changer is to be placed less than one tube diameter
thickness of 10% or more (if the plug is welded to from cladding or a tube-to-tubesheet weld, the qualifica-
the tube); tion test assembly shall also contain cladding or tube-
(3) a change in the tubesheet hole pattern; to-tubesheet welds, as applicable.
(4) a decrease in the proximity of two simultane- (4) The minimum number of explosive welds re-
ously detonated parts; quired for procedure qualification shall be 10 welds
(5) any increase in the number of plugs to be made consecutively.
simultaneously detonated; (d) Examination of Test Assembly
(6) a change in detail controlling explosive densi- (1) When cladding or welds are required per IWA-
ties and charge-to-mass ratios; 4711.2.1(c)(3), such cladding and tube-to-tubesheet
(7) a change in the type of explosive; welds shall be examined by the liquid penetrant method
(8) a change of 10% or more in the explosive and shall comply with the acceptance standards of
charge mass; NB-5000.
(9) a decrease of 15% or more in the tubesheet (2) Each plug weld and tube-to-tubesheet weld
ligament; (when applicable) shall be sectioned longitudinally to
(10) the deletion of cleaning of the tube, plug, or reveal four cross-sectional faces, 180 deg. apart. After
hole contact surfaces, or a change in the cleanliness polishing and etching the four faces, each explosive
requirements (including surface oxide removal) for such weld joint area shall be metallographically examined
surfaces prior to explosive welding; at 50X or greater magnification for the length of
(11) a change of whether or not the tubes had been the explosive bond. The bonding shall be considered
expanded into contact with the tubesheets in the areas acceptable if there is a minimum of five times the
where bonding occurs; nominal tube wall thickness of continuous bond between
66
IWA-4711.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4712.2
the plug and tube or tubesheet on each cross-sectioned (f) nondestructive examination
face. Each tube-to-tubesheet weld examination (if appli- (g) method of verifying that both ends of the same
cable) shall be considered acceptable if it is free from tube or tubesheet bore hole are to be plugged
explosively produced cracks as determined visually
using 10X magnification. IWA-4711.4 Examination. The final nondestructive
(3) Suitable mechanical tests may also be used to examination shall be made visually in accordance with
add further assurance that the bond length is adequate. IWA-2200, looking for proper installation and correct
Details of such tests should also be included in the location.
Procedure Qualification Record.
(4) Ligament distortion caused by explosive weld-
ing is unacceptable when the adjacent tube I.D. is
reduced below the diameter of the tube plug. IWA-4712 Fusion Welding
(5) The procedure shall be considered qualified if The requirements of IWA-4712.1 through IWA-
all 10 of the required, consecutively made explosive 4712.5 shall be met when manual, machine, or automatic
welds are found to be acceptable. welding is used to join plugs to Class 1 heat exchanger
IWA-4711.2.2 Performance Qualifications. Tube tubes of P-Nos. 8 and 4x material or tubesheet holes
plugging by explosive welding shall be performed by of austenitic stainless steel or nickel base material.
welding operators who have first been qualified in
accordance with the following requirements. IWA-4712.1 Material Requirements
(a) Required Tests. The welding operator shall pre- (a) Material shall be in accordance with the require-
pare (if applicable), install, and detonate consecutively ments of an SA, SB, SFA, or any other material
a minimum of five plugs in conformance with an specification accepted for use by Section III. Material
explosive plug Welding Procedure Specification. Ac- produced to a weld filler metal chemistry shall meet
ceptance of these plug welds qualifies the operator the filler material requirements of NB-2000.
for welding with all other explosive plug welding (b) Material shall be traceable to a Certified Material
procedures. Test Report (CMTR).
(b) Examination of Test Assembly. The five plugs
IWA-4712.2 Welding Qualifications. Welding Pro-
shall be examined in accordance with the requirements
cedure Specifications (WPS) and welders or welding
of IWA-4711.2.1(d). All five welds must meet these
operators shall be qualified in accordance with Section
acceptance standards for performance qualification to
IX and the additional requirements and exceptions of
be accepted.
this Subparagraph.
(c) Renewal of Qualification. Renewal of qualifica-
(a) Procedure Qualification
tion of an explosive plug welding operator’s perform-
(1) Welds shall be made using the shielded metal-
ance is required when the operator has not used the
arc welding (SMAW), gas tungsten-arc welding
process for six months or longer, or when there is
(GTAW), or gas metal-arc welding (GMAW) process.
specific reason to question his ability to make quality
Short-circuiting arc GMAW shall not be used.
welds in accordance with the procedure. Renewal of
(2) A separate qualification is required for any
qualification shall be identical to the initial qualification,
change in the P-Number, A-Number, or F-Number of
except that only one tube plug explosive weld need
the plug, tube, sleeve, filler metal, or cladding. A
be made.
separate qualification is also required when the material
IWA-4711.3 Plugging Procedure Specification. The has no P-Number, A-Number, or F-Number. If the
written plugging procedure specification shall delineate plug is welded to the cladding, the cladding shall be
all the requirements of the repair /replacement activity, considered base material.
including the following: (3) The following essential variables, in addition
(a) safety requirements to those specified by Section IX, apply and shall be
(b) plug material, dimensions, and certification re- listed on the WPS:
quirements (a) a change of more than 1⁄16 in. in the extension
(c) essential and nonessential variables of the explo- or recess of either the tube relative to the tubesheet
sive welding process or the plug relative to the material being joined (tube,
(d) preparation or cleaning of the plug, tube, and sleeve, or tubesheet) (see Fig. IWA-4712.2-1);
tubesheet bore hole, if required (b) 10% change in the plug thickness at the
(e) detonation of the charge weld location;
67
FIG. IWA-4712.2-1 EXAMPLES OF EXTENSION AND RECESS OF TUBE AND PLUG
68
(c) 10% change in the nominal wall thickness (d) An addition or deletion of preplaced metal
of the tube or sleeve, when the plug is welded to the inserts.
tube or sleeve; (5) Essential variables for welding operators shall
(d) decrease of 10% or more in the specified be in accordance with Section IX, QW-360.
width of the ligament between tube holes when the (6) Renewal of qualification is required when the
specified width is less than 3⁄8 in. (10 mm) or three welder or welding operator has not performed plugging
times the specified tube wall thickness, whichever is using the process for which he is qualified for 6 months
greater. or longer, or when there is a specific reason to question
(4) The tubesheet in the test assembly shall be at his ability to make quality welds in accordance with
least as thick as the production tubesheet, but need the WPS. Renewal of qualification shall be identical
not exceed 11⁄2 in. (38 mm). to the initial qualification, except that only one weld
(5) The welding of the procedure qualification test need be made.
assembly shall simulate the welding position of the
IWA-4712.3 Plugging Procedure. Each plug opera-
production tubesheet. tion shall be performed in accordance with a procedure
(6) In lieu of the examination and test requirements delineating the requirements of the complete repair /
of Section IX, five consecutive welds of the test assem- replacement activity, including the following:
bly shall be examined using a liquid penetrant method (a) plug material, dimensions, and material certifica-
in accordance with IWA-2200 and shall meet the accept- tion requirements;
ance standards of NB-5350. These welds shall then be (b) the preparation necessary for the joint to be
cross sectioned longitudinally through the center of plugged, including examination requirements and a
each plug. The thickness of the assembly may be means for removal of surface oxide;
reduced to facilitate sectioning. One section of each (c) requirements for preparation (sizing) of the tube
plug shall be polished, etched with a suitable etchant, or tubesheet hole I.D. prior to setting plugs, including
and visually examined at 10X magnification. The weld examination requirements;
throat and minimum leakage path shall not be less (d) requirements for inserting the plug into position
than that required by the Construction Code and Owner’s for welding, including examination requirements;
Requirements. The welds shall be free of cracks and (e) the qualified WPS;
lack of fusion. Porosity shall not reduce the weld (f) requirements for final examination.
throat below the required minimum thickness in the
leakage path. IWA-4712.4 Examination. Final examination of heat
(b) Performance Qualification exchanger plugs and welds shall consist of a VT-1
(1) The test assembly for performance qualification visual examination.
for welders and welding operators shall be the same IWA-4712.5 Records. Records shall be maintained
as for any welding procedure qualification in accordance by the Owner in accordance with IWA-4180 and IWA-
with the requirements of IWA-4712.2(a) 6000, and shall include the following:
(2) For welders and welding operators, five consec- (a) Welding Procedure Specification (WPS)
utive acceptable welds shall be made and examined in (b) Procedure Qualification Record (PQR)
accordance with IWA-4712.2(a)(6). The performance (c) performance qualification records
qualification shall be made in accordance with a WPS (d) Certified Material Test Reports (CMTR)
that has been qualified in accordance with the require- (e) location of plugged tubes or tubesheet holes
ments of IWA-4712.2(a). (f) results of examinations required by IWA-4712
(3) Welders and welding operators shall be tested
under conditions that simulate the weld area access.
Such simulated conditions shall include radiation protec-
IWA-4720 SLEEVING
tion gear.
(4) Essential variables for welders shall be as IWA-4721 General Requirements
follows:
IWA-4721.1 Sleeves. The sleeves shall meet the
(a) A change from one welding process to any
requirements of IWA-4200. The exemptions of IWA-
other welding process.
4130 shall not apply.
(b) A change in F-number of filler material.
(c) A change in P-number of either of the base IWA-4721.2 Sleeving Procedure Specification.
materials. Each sleeving operation shall be performed in accord-
69
IWA-4721.2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4722.2.1
ance with a sleeving procedure specification (SPS) that IWA-4721.3.2 Sleeving Performance Qualifi-
defines the following: cation
(a) sleeve and tube materials and dimensions; (a) Sleeve attachment processes shall be performed
(b) requirements for preparation of the tube inside by welders, brazers, or equipment operators that have
surface prior to insertion of the sleeve, including exami- been qualified in accordance with this Subsubarticle.
nation requirements and acceptance criteria; (b) Manual process qualification shall be performed
(c) requirements for inserting the sleeve into position, under conditions simulating the restricted access of the
including examination requirements and acceptance cri- production joint.
teria; (c) Renewal of performance qualification is required
(d) the essential and nonessential variables of IWA- when the welder, brazer, or equipment operator has
4721.3 and the welding or brazing process used; not used the process for more than 6 months, or when
(e) required sleeve attachment dimensions; there is any reason to question his ability to make
(f) requirements for final examination and acceptance quality attachments in accordance with SPS. Renewal of
criteria; qualifications shall be identical to the initial qualification
(g) the sequence of operations. except that only one sleeve attachment shall be made.
IWA-4721.4 Sleeving by a Combination of Pro-
cesses. If a combination of processes is used for sleeve
IWA-4721.3 Qualification installation, either at opposite ends of a single sleeve
IWA-4721.3.1 Sleeving Procedure Specification or as a sequence of processes in a single attachment,
Qualification. The SPS shall be qualified in accordance IWA-4722, IWA-4723, IWA-4724, or IWA-4725, as
with this Subsubparagraph, and shall be requalified applicable, apply to each process used. The SPS shall
for any change in an essential variable. Nonessential require that the processes used during production sleev-
variables may be changed without requalification pro- ing be performed in the same sequence as used during
vided the SPS is amended to show the changes. qualification.
(a) The following essential variables apply to all IWA-4721.5 Records. The following records, in
sleeve installation processes, in addition to those listed addition to those required by IWA-4180 and IWA-
for each sleeve attachment process in IWA-4722, IWA- 6000, shall be maintained by the Owner:
4723, IWA-4724, and IWA-4725: (a) SPS;
(1) a change in the P-Number classification of any (b) procedure qualification for the attachment process;
of the materials being joined. This includes the tube, (c) performance qualification for each welder, brazer,
sleeve, tubesheet, or equivalent P-Number for tubesheet and equipment operator;
cladding. Materials not having a P-Number classification (d) location records of all sleeved tubes and sleeves;
require a separate qualification. (e) results of all required sleeve installation examina-
(2) a change of 10% or more in nominal tube or tions.
sleeve design wall thickness in the area of the joint;
(3) deletion of tube cleaning prior to sleeve in-
sertion; IWA-4722 Explosive Welding
(4) a change in sleeve attachment location from IWA-4722.1 General Requirements. When explo-
within the tubesheet to beyond the tubesheet or vice sive welding is used for sleeve attachment, the require-
versa; ments of IWA-4722.2 through IWA-4722.4 shall be met.
(5) a change in sleeve attachment location from
IWA-4722.2 Explosive Welding Qualification
within the sludge pile to beyond the sludge pile or
vice versa; IWA-4722.2.1 Procedure Qualification
(6) the addition or deletion of postweld or post- (a) Essential Variables
braze heat treatment; (1) a decrease in the distance between the two
(7) a change of more than 10% in the nominal closest simultaneously detonated charges;
tube or sleeve diameter. (2) a decrease in the distance between the two
(b) The following nonessential variable applies to closest individually detonated charges;
all sleeve installation processes, in addition to those (3) an increase in the number of sleeves to be
listed for each sleeve attachment process in IWA-4722, simultaneously welded;
IWA-4723, IWA-4724, and IWA-4725: a change in (4) a change of 10% or more in the explosive
the method of tube cleaning prior to sleeve insertion. density or charge-to-mass ratio;
70
IWA-4722.2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS IWA-4723.2.1
(5) a change in the type of explosive; (3) Each tube-to-tubesheet weld shall be examined
(6) a change of 10% or more in the explosive at 10X or greater magnification. The weld shall be
charge mass; acceptable if it is free from explosively produced cracks.
(7) for sleeve attachment within the tubesheet, a (4) Ligament distortion caused by explosive weld-
decrease of 15% or more in the tubesheet ligament; ing is unacceptable when the adjacent tube I.D. is
(8) for sleeve attachment within the tubesheet, a reduced below the diameter of the tube sleeve or
change from a tube that is expanded into contact with minimum diameter specified in the SPS, whichever is
the tubesheet in the area of the weld to a tube that less. Ligament distortion shall not adversely affect the
is not expanded, or vice versa; structural integrity of the tubesheet assembly.
(9) any change in the sleeve design configuration; (5) The procedure shall be qualified if five consecu-
(10) a change of 10% or more in the nominal or tive explosive welds are found to be acceptable.
average clearance (stand-off) between the tube and the
IWA-4722.2.2 Performance Qualification. Explo-
sleeve.
sive welding shall be performed by welding operators
(b) Nonessential Variables
that have been qualified in accordance with the fol-
(1) a change in the P-Number of the tubesheet
lowing:
material when sleeve is not joined to tubesheet;
(a) The welding operator shall prepare, install, and
(2) a change in the tubesheet cladding material
weld a minimum of five sleeve attachments in confor-
when the sleeve is not joined to the cladding and the
mance with an SPS. Acceptance of five consecutive
explosive charge is installed not less than one tube
sleeve welds qualifies the operator for welding using
diameter from the cladding;
any other qualified explosive SPS.
(3) a change in the tube-to-tubesheet joint configu-
(b) The five sleeve welds shall be examined in
ration when the explosive charge is installed not less
accordance with, and meet the acceptance standards
than one tube diameter from the tube-to-tubesheet
of, IWA-4722.2.1(e).
seal weld.
(c) Test Assembly. The procedure shall be qualified IWA-4722.3 Sleeving Procedure Specification. The
using a test assembly that simulates the conditions that SPS shall delineate the requirements of the explosive
will be encountered in production with respect to the welding process.
essential variables.
(d) Test Assembly Within Tubesheet IWA-4722.4 Examination. A final examination of
(1) The test assembly tubesheet thickness shall be the welded sleeve attachment shall confirm that the
at least as thick as the production tubesheet, except attachment is in the correct location and conforms to
that it need not be more than 1 in. greater than the the Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements.
length of the sleeve attachment.
(2) When the explosive charge in the heat ex- IWA-4723 Fusion Welding
changer is to be placed less than one tube diameter
from cladding or a tube-to-tubesheet weld, the qualifica- IWA-4723.1 General Requirements. When fusion
tion test assembly shall contain cladding or tube-to- welding is used for sleeve attachment, the requirements
tubesheet welds, as applicable. of IWA-4723.1.1 through IWA-4723.4 shall be met.
(e) Examination of Test Assembly IWA-4723.1.1 Procedure Qualification. Welds
(1) When cladding or welds are required to be shall be made using the gas tungsten-arc welding
included in the test assembly by IWA-4722.2.1(d)(2), (GTAW), gas-metal arc welding (GMAW), or laser
such cladding and tube-to-tubesheet welds shall be beam welding (LBW) process.
examined by the liquid penetrant method and shall
comply with the acceptance standards NB-5350. IWA-4723.2 Fusion Welding Qualification
(2) Each sleeve weld and tube-to-tubesheet weld, IWA-4723.2.1 Procedure Qualification
when applicable, shall be sectioned longitudinally. After (a) Essential Variables
polishing and etching two faces of a single half-section, (1) For sleeve welds within the tubesheet, when
each explosive weld joint area shall be examined at the ligament thickness between the holes is 3⁄8 in.
50X or greater magnification to determine the length (10 mm) or less, a reduction in ligament thickness of
of the explosive bond. The bond shall be acceptable 10% of the ligament thickness or three times the
if the length of continuous bond between the sleeve specified wall thickness, whichever is less;
and tube on each cross-sectioned face is at least five (2) A change in any essential variable listed for
times the nominal tube wall thickness. the specific welding process in QW-250.
71
IWA-4723.2.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWA-4724.4
(b) Test Assembly. The procedure shall be qualified IWA-4723.3 Sleeving Procedure Specification. The
using a test assembly that simulates the conditions that SPS shall delineate all the requirements of the fusion
will be encountered in production with respect to the welding process, including the variables of QW-250.
(c) Test Assembly Within Tubesheet. The test assem- IWA-4723.4 Examination. The welded sleeve attach-
bly tubesheet thickness shall be at least as thick as ment shall be examined to confirm that the attachment
the production tubesheet except that it need not be is in the correct location and conforms to the Construc-
more than 1 in. (25 mm) greater than the length of tion Code and Owner’s Requirements.
the sleeve attachment.
(d) Examination of Test Assembly
(1) Five consecutive welds shall be examined by IWA-4724 Brazing
a liquid penetrant method in accordance with IWA- IWA-4724.1 General Requirements. When brazing
2200 and shall meet the acceptance standards of NB- is used for sleeve attachment, IWA-4724.2 through
5350. Welds inaccessible for liquid penetrant examina- IWA-4724.4 shall be met.
tion may be sectioned longitudinally through the center
of the sleeve prior to performing the liquid penetrant IWA-4724.2 Brazing Qualification
examination.
(2) The five consecutive welds shall also be sec- IWA-4724.2.1 Procedure Qualification. The braz-
tioned longitudinally through the center of each sleeve. ing procedure shall be qualified as required by QB-
The thickness of the assembly may be reduced to 200 and the following:
facilitate sectioning. (a) An additional essential variable is a change in
(3) The two faces of a single half-section shall the designed sleeve installation from free tubes to tubes
be polished, etched with a suitable etchant, and visually that are locked to the tube support plate.
examined at 10X magnification. The weld throat and (b) Test Assembly. The procedure shall be qualified
minimum leakage path shall not be less than that using a test assembly that simulates the conditions that
required by the Construction Code and Owner’s Re- will be encountered in production with respect to the
quirements. The weld shall be free of cracks and lack essential variables.
of fusion. Porosity shall not reduce the weld throat (c) Test Assembly Within Tubesheet. The test assem-
thickness below the required minimum leakage path. bly tubesheet thickness shall be at least as thick as
the production tubesheet except that it need not be
IWA-4723.2.2 Performance Qualification. Weld- more than 1 in. greater than the length of the sleeve
ing shall be performed by welders and welding operators attachment.
that have been qualified in accordance with the fol- (d) Examination of Test Assembly
lowing: (1) Each test specimen shall be examined to con-
(a) The test assembly for the performance qualifica- firm that the braze bond area conforms to the Construc-
tion for welders and welding operators shall be the tion Code and Owner’s Requirements.
same as for any welding procedure qualification in (2) The minimum number of braze joints required
accordance with the requirements of IWA-4723.2.1. for procedure qualification shall be five braze joints
(b) The essential variables for welders and welding made consecutively.
operators shall be in accordance with QW-350 and
IWA-4724.2.2 Performance Qualification. Each
QW-360, respectively, for the process to be employed.
brazer and brazing operator shall be qualified as required
(c) For welders, five consecutive acceptable welds
by QB-300, and each test specimen shall be examined
shall be made and examined in accordance with IWA-
to confirm that the braze bond area conforms to the
4723.2.1(d). For welding operators, one acceptable weld
Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements.
shall be made and examined in accordance with IWA-
4723.2.1(d). The performance qualification shall be IWA-4724.3 Sleeving Procedure Specification. The
made in accordance with a SPS qualified in accordance SPS shall delineate all the requirements of the brazing
with IWA-4723.2.1. process, including the variables of QB-200.
(d) Welders shall be tested under simulated access
conditions. The qualification test mock-up shall effec- IWA-4724.4 Examination. A final examination of
tively simulate the conditions that will be encountered the brazed sleeve attachment shall confirm that the
in production with respect to the essential variables. attachment is in the correct location and conforms to
(e) Retest shall be performed as required by QW-320. the Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements.
72
IWA-4725 Expansion (c) a change of 10% or more in the explosive

density or charge-to-mass ratio.
IWA-4725.1 General Requirements. When a sleeve
(7) for expansion procedures using a combination
is expanded against a tube by a mechanical, hydraulic,
of processes, a change in any of the essential variables
or explosive process so that the sleeve is permanently in IWA-4725.2.1(a)(5) and (6), as applicable.
deformed and the attachment depends upon friction or (b) Test Assembly. The procedure shall be qualified
interference at the interface, IWA-4725.2 through IWA- using a test assembly that simulates the conditions that
4725.4 shall be met. will be encountered in production with respect to the
IWA-4725.2 Expansion Qualification (c) Test Assembly Within Tubesheet. The test assem-
bly tubesheet thickness shall be at least as thick as
the production tubesheet except that it need not be
IWA-4725.2.1 Procedure Qualification more than 1 in. greater than the length of the sleeve
(a) Essential Variables attachment.
(1) a change in the basic expansion process; (d) Qualification of Test Assembly. Specimens repre-
(2) a change of 10% or more in sleeve material senting the expanded sleeve attachment to a tube shall
yield strength; be cyclic tested in accordance with Section III, Appendix
(3) a change in the expansion length; II. This fatigue test shall demonstrate the adequacy of
(4) a change that results in an expansion diameter the sleeve attachment to withstand the specified design
outside the range of sleeve or tube expansion diameters loadings without exceeding the specified design leak-
qualified. The range of sleeve or tube expansion diame- age limit.
ters qualified shall be the expansion diameters between IWA-4725.2.2 Performance Qualification. The
the minimum and maximum expansion diameters ob- expansion operator shall demonstrate the ability to
tained in qualification tests. expand sleeve attachments in accordance with the SPS.
(5) for mechanical expansion:
(a) a reduction in the minimum rolling torque; IWA-4725.3 Sleeving Procedure Specification. The
(b) a change in expansion roller geometry; SPS shall delineate the requirements for mechanical
(c) a reduction in the minimum expansion pres- expansion. These requirements shall conform to the
sure if expansion is controlled by hydraulic pressure Construction Code and Owner’s Requirements.
only. IWA-4725.4 Examination. The expanded sleeve at-
(6) for explosive expansion: tachment shall be examined to confirm that the attach-
(a) a change in the type of explosive; ment is in the correct location and conforms to the
(b) a change of 10% or more in the explosive requirements of the Construction Code and Owner’s
charge mass; Requirements.
73
ARTICLE IWA-5000
SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS
IWA-5100 GENERAL IWA-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENT

IWA-5110 PERIODIC SYSTEM PRESSURE IWA-5210 TEST
TESTS
IWA-5211 Test Description
(a) System pressure tests shall be conducted in ac-
Pressure retaining components within each system
cordance with the Examination Categories identified in
boundary shall be subject to the following applicable
Table IWB-2500-1, Category B-P; Table IWC-2500-1,
system pressure tests referenced in Table IWA-5210-
Category C-H; and Table IWD-2500-1, Category D-B.
1 under which conditions a VT-2 visual examination
(b) The pressure testing requirements for Class MC
is performed in accordance with IWA-5240 to detect
and CC components are identified in Articles IWE and
leakage:
IWL, respectively.
(a) a system leakage test conducted during operation
(c) Piping that penetrates a containment vessel is
at nominal operating pressure, or when pressurized to
exempt from the periodic system pressure test when
nominal operating pressure and temperature;
the piping and isolation valves perform a containment
(b) a system hydrostatic test conducted during a plant
function and the balance of the piping system is outside
shutdown at a pressure above nominal operating pressure
the scope of this Division.
or system pressure;1
(c) a system pneumatic test conducted in lieu of
either of the above system pressure tests for Class 2
or 3 components as permitted by IWC-5000 or IWD-
5000. The requirements for system leakage and hydro-
IWA-5120 SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS FOR static tests are applicable to pneumatic tests.
REPAIR /REPLACEMENT
ACTIVITIES
(a) Items subjected to repair /replacement activities
shall be pressure tested when required by IWA-4500. IWA-5212 Pressure and Temperature
(b) The test pressure and temperature for a system (a) System leakage tests and system hydrostatic tests
hydrostatic test, subsequent to the repair /replacement shall be conducted at the pressure and temperature
activity, shall comply with the system test pressure specified in IWB-5000, IWC-5000, and IWD-5000. The
and temperature specified in IWA-5212, applicable to system hydrostatic test pressure shall not exceed the
the system containing the item on which the repair / maximum allowable test pressure of any component
replacement activity was performed. within the system pressure test boundary.
(c) When the area of the repair /replacement activity (b) When conducting a system leakage test described
is isolable within a portion of a system, only that in IWA-5211(a), the level of system pressure and
portion need be pressure tested. temperature indicated or recorded by normal operating
(d) When the system hydrostatic test of IWA-5120(b) system instrumentation or by test instrumentation is
imposes test pressure and temperature in conflict with acceptable.
limitations included in the plant Technical Specifica-
tions, a system leakage test, at nominal operating pres-
sure and temperature, shall be acceptable in lieu of 1 Referto NB-7410, NC-7410, and ND-7410 for determination of
the system hydrostatic test. system pressure for which overpressure protection is provided.
74
TABLE IWA-5210-1
REFERENCE PARAGRAPHS FOR SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST AND VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
(VT-2) REQUIREMENTS
System Test Tests for Visual

Pressure Temperature Repair/Replacement Examinations Inspector Corrective
Tests and Pressure Activities VT-2 Duties Actions
IWA-5211(a) IWA-5212 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250
IWA-5211(b) IWA-5213 IWA-5240
IWB-5210 IWB-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWB-5240 IWA-5240
IWC-5210 IWC-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWC-5240 IWA-5240
IWD-5210 IWD-5220 IWA-4500 IWA-2212 IWA-2120(a) IWA-5250

IWD-5230 IWA-5240
(c) The system test conditions shall be maintained for insulated systems, and 10 min for noninsulated
essentially constant during the course of the visual systems or components.
examination, except as provided in IWA-5245. (c) system pneumatic tests — 10 min holding time
(d) When conducting system pressure tests described required after attaining the test pressure.
in IWA-5211(b) and (c), the requirements of IWA-
5260 shall be met.
(e) When portions of a system are subject to system IWA-5214 Preservice Test
pressure tests associated with two different system A preservice system pressure test is not required
functions, the visual examination need only be per- by this Article, except following repair /replacement
formed during the test conducted at the higher of the activities as required by IWA-5120.
test pressures of the respective system function, except
as permitted in IWA-5222.
(f) A system hydrostatic test [IWA-5211(b)] and
IWA-5220 TEST PRESSURIZATION
accompanying visual examination are acceptable in lieu
BOUNDARIES2
of the system leakage test [IWA-5211(a)] and visual
examination. IWA-5221 System Leakage Test Boundary 98
(g) The system test pressure and temperature may
The boundary subject to test pressurization during a
be obtained by using any means that comply with the
system leakage test [IWA-5211(a)] shall extend to those
plant Technical Specifications.
pressure retaining components under operating pressures
during normal system service in accordance with IWB-
IWA-5213 Test Condition Holding Time 5222, IWC-5222, and IWD-5240.
The holding time after pressurization to test condi-
tions, before the visual examinations commence, shall IWA-5222 System Hydrostatic Test Boundary
be as follows:
(a) system leakage tests — no holding time required (a) The boundary subject to test pressurization during
after attaining test pressure and temperature; except a system hydrostatic test [IWA-5211(b)] shall be defined
that for tests required by IWA-4540, a 10 min holding by the system boundary (or each portion of the bound-
time for noninsulated systems or components, or 4 hr ary) within which the components have the same mini-
for insulated systems or components, is required after mum required classification and are designed to the
attaining test pressure and temperature.
(b) system hydrostatic tests — 4 hr holding time 2 The boundary limits are generally defined by the location of the
required after attaining the test pressure and temperature safety class interface valves within the system.
75
same pressure rating as governed by the system function nents) for evidence of leakage, or other areas to which
and the internal fluid operating conditions, respectively. such leakage may be channeled, shall be required.
(b) Systems which share safety functions for different (c) Discoloration or residue on surfaces examined
modes of plant operation, and within which the compo- shall be given particular attention to detect evidence
nent classifications differ, shall be subject to separate of boric acid accumulations from borated reactor coolant
system hydrostatic tests of each portion of the system leakage.
boundary having the same minimum required design
pressure ratings.
(c) Systems designed to operate at different pressures
under several modes of plant operation or post-accident IWA-5243 Components With Leakage Collection
conditions shall be subject to a system hydrostatic test Systems
within the test boundary defined by the operating mode
with the higher pressure. Where leakages from components are normally ex-
(d) Where the respective system design pressure rat- pected and collected (such as valve stems, pump seals,
ings on the suction and discharge sides of system or vessel flange gaskets) the VT-2 visual examination
pumps differ, the system hydrostatic test boundary shall shall be conducted by verifying that the leakage collec-
be divided into two separate boundaries (such as suction tion system is operative.
side and discharge side test boundaries). In the case
of positive displacement pumps, the boundary interface
shall be considered as the pump. In the case of centrifu-
gal pumps, the boundary interface shall be the first IWA-5244 Buried Components
shutoff valve on the discharge side of the pump. (a) For buried components surrounded by an annulus,
the VT-2 visual examination shall consist of an examina-
tion for evidence of leakage at each end of the annulus
IWA-5240 VISUAL EXAMINATION and at low point drains.
(b) For buried components where a VT-2 visual
IWA-5241 Noninsulated Components examination cannot be performed, the examination re-
(a) The VT-2 visual examination shall be conducted quirement is satisfied by the following:
by examining the accessible external exposed surfaces of (1) The system pressure test for buried components
pressure retaining components for evidence of leakage. that are isolable by means of valves shall consist of
(b) For components whose external surfaces are inac- a test that determines the rate of pressure loss. Alterna-
cessible for direct VT-2 visual examination, only the tively, the test may determine the change in flow
examination of the surrounding area (including floor between the ends of the buried components. The accept-
areas or equipment surfaces located underneath the able rate of pressure loss or flow shall be established
components) for evidence of leakage shall be required. by the Owner.
(2) The system pressure test for nonisolable buried
components shall consist of a test to confirm that flow
IWA-5242 Insulated Components during operation is not impaired.
(3) Test personnel need not be qualified for VT-
(a) For systems borated for the purpose of controlling 2 visual examination.
reactivity, insulation shall be removed from pressure
retaining bolted connections for VT-2 visual examina-
tion. For other components, a VT-2 visual examination
may be conducted without the removal of insulation
IWA-5245 Elevated Temperature Tests
by examining the accessible and exposed surfaces and
joints of the insulation. Essentially vertical surfaces of The visual examination of system components requir-
insulation need only be examined at the lowest elevation ing a test temperature above 200°F (93°C) during the
where leakage may be detectable. Essentially horizontal system pressure test may be conducted after the pressure
surfaces of insulation shall be examined at each insula- holding period of IWA-5213 is satisfied, and the pres-
tion joint. sure is lowered to the level corresponding with a
(b) When examining insulated components, the exam- temperature of 200°F (93°C), in accordance with allow-
ination of the surrounding area (including floor areas able cooldown rates established by fracture prevention
or equipment surfaces located underneath the compo- criteria.
76
A99 IWA-5250 CORRECTIVE ACTION and that are conducted within a period not exceeding
2 weeks.
(a) The sources of leakage detected during the con-
duct of a system pressure test shall be located and
evaluated by the Owner for corrective action as follows. IWA-5264 Ranges
(1) Buried components with leakage losses in ex-
cess of limits acceptable for continued service shall be (a) Analog pressure gages used in testing shall have
corrected by repair /replacement activities. dials graduated over a range of at least 1.5 times, but
(2) If leakage occurs at a bolted connection in a not more than 4 times, the intended maximum test
system borated for the purpose of controlling reactivity, pressures.
one of the bolts shall be removed, VT-3 examined, (b) Digital pressure measuring instruments used in
and evaluated in accordance with IWA-3100. The bolt testing shall be selected such that the intended maximum
selected shall be the one closest to the source of leakage. test pressure shall not exceed 70% of the calibrated
When the removed bolt has evidence of degradation, all range of the instrument.
remaining bolting in the connection shall be removed,
VT-3 examined, and evaluated in accordance with IWA-5265 Location
IWA-3100.
(3) Components requiring correction shall have (a) When testing an isolated component, the pressure
repair /replacement activities performed in accordance measuring instrument or sensor shall be connected close
with IWA-4000. to the component.
(b) If boric acid residues are detected on components, (b) When testing a group of components or a multi-
the leakage source and the areas of general corrosion component system, the pressure measuring instrument
shall be located. Components with local areas of general or sensor shall be connected to any point within the
corrosion that reduce the wall thickness by more than pressure boundary of the components or system such
10% shall be evaluated to determine whether the compo- that the imposed pressure on any component, including
nent may be acceptable for continued service, or whether static head, will not exceed 106% of the specified test
repair /replacement activities will be performed. pressure for the system; even though the specified test
pressure may not be achieved at the highest elevations
in the system.
IWA-5260 INSTRUMENTS FOR SYSTEM
HYDROSTATIC TESTS
IWA-5300 TEST RECORDS
IWA-5261 Type
The record of the visual examination conducted
Any pressure measuring instrument or sensor, analog
during a system pressure test shall include the procedure
or digital, including the pressure measuring instrument documenting the system test condition and system
of the normal operating system instrumentation (such
pressure boundary. Any source of leakage or evidence
as control room instruments), may be used, provided of structural distress shall be itemized, and the location
the requirements of IWA-5260 are met. and corrective action documented.
IWA-5262 Accuracy
The pressure measuring instrument or sensor used
IWA-5400 PRESSURE TESTING OF CLASS A99
in hydrostatic testing shall provide results accurate to 1, 2, AND 3 ITEMS

within 0.5% of full scale for analog gages and 0.5% (a) Unless exempted by (b) below, repair/replacement
over the calibrated range for digital instruments. activities performed by welding or brazing on a pressure-
retaining boundary include (a)(1) or (a)(2) below.
(1) A system hydrostatic test shall be performed
IWA-5263 Calibration
in accordance with IWA-5000 prior to, or as part of,
All pressure measuring instruments shall be calibrated returning to service.
against a standard deadweight tester or calibrated master (2) The following requirements shall be met.
gage. The test gages shall be calibrated before each (a) The nondestructive examination methodol-
test or series of tests. A series of tests is a group of ogy and acceptance criteria of the 1992 Edition or later
tests that use the same pressure measuring instruments of Section III shall be met prior to return to service.
77

(b) The Owner’s Requirements shall be met

prior to return to service.
(c) A system leakage test shall be performed
in accordance with IWA-5000.
(b) The following are exempt from any pressure test:
(1) cladding
(2) heat exchanger tube plugging and sleeving
(3) piping, pump, and valve welding or brazing
that does not penetrate through the pressure boundary
(4) flange seating surface when less than half the
flange axial thickness is removed and replaced
(5) pressure vessel welding when the remaining
wall thickness, after metal removal, is at least 90% of
the minimum design wall thickness
(6) components or connections NPS3 1 and smaller
(7) tube-to-tubesheet welds when such welds are
made on the cladding
(8) seal weld
(9) welded joints between non-pressure-retaining
items and the pressure-retaining portion of the com-
ponent
(10) valve discs or seats, except as required by
IWA-4530(b)
77.1

ARTICLE IWA-6000
RECORDS AND REPORTS
IWA-6100 SCOPE (g) reference to the abstracts of the conditions noted

and the corrective measures recommended and taken
This Article provides the requirements for the prepara- for flaws detected during examination or test performed
tion, submittal, and retention of records and reports.
IWA-6230 SUMMARY REPORT

IWA-6200 REQUIREMENTS PREPARATION
IWA-6210 OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITY (a) A preservice inspection summary report shall be
prepared prior to commercial service.
(a) The Owner shall prepare plans and schedules for
(b) An inservice inspection summary report shall be
preservice and inservice examinations and tests to meet
prepared at the completion of the inservice inspection
the requirements of this Division. conducted during a refueling outage. Examinations,
(b) The Owner shall prepare records of examinations,
tests, and repair /replacement activities conducted since
tests, and repair /replacement activities.
the preceding summary report shall be included.
(c) The Owner shall prepare preservice and inservice (c) Each summary report required by IWA-6230(a)
inspection summary reports for Class 1 and 2 pressure
or (b) shall contain the following:
retaining components and their supports. A cover sheet
(1) interval, period, and refueling outage number
containing the information of IWA-6230(d) shall be
(when applicable)
provided.
(2) Owner’s Report for Inservice Inspections, Form
(d) The Owner shall prepare the Owner’s Report for NIS-1, as shown in Appendix II
Inservice Inspections, Form NIS-1, for preservice and (3) Owner’s Report for Repair /Replacement Activ-
inservice examination of Class 1 and 2 pressure retaining
ities, Form NIS-2, as shown in Appendix II.
components and their supports. (d) Summary Reports shall have a cover sheet provid-
(e) The Owner shall prepare the Owner’s Report for ing the following:
Repair /Replacement Activities, Form NIS-2. (1) date of document completion
(2) name and address of Owner
(3) name and address of plant
IWA-6220 PREPARATION OF ABSTRACT OF (4) name or number designation of the unit
EXAMINATION REQUIRED BY (5) commercial service date for the unit
FORM NIS-1
The abstract shall include a list or table of examina-
tions and tests containing the following:
IWA-6240 SUMMARY REPORT SUBMITTAL
(a) component examined or tested
(b) Code Class Summary reports shall be submitted to the regulatory
(c) Code Examination Category and Item No. and enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the
(d) examination or test method plant site.
(e) Code Cases (a) The preservice inspection summary report shall
(f) number and percentage of examinations or tests be submitted prior to the date of placement of the unit
completed into commercial service.
78

(b) The inservice inspection summary report shall identifying film artifacts that might appear as material
be submitted within 90 calendar days of the completion discontinuities in the reproduction.
of each refueling outage.
IWA-6330 CONSTRUCTION RECORDS

Records designated by the Owner in accordance with
NCA-4134.17 shall be retained.
IWA-6300 RETENTION
IWA-6310 MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS
IWA-6340 INSERVICE INSPECTION A99
The Owner shall retain records and reports identified RECORDS
in IWA-6330 and IWA-6340 as a minimum. The records
and reports shall be filed and maintained in a manner The Owner shall designate the records to be main-
which will allow access by the Inspector. The Owner tained. Such records shall include the following, as
shall provide suitable protection from deterioration and applicable:
damage for all records and reports, in accordance with (a) record index
the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program, for the service (b) preservice and inservice inspection plans and
lifetime of the component or system. Storage shall be schedules
either at the plant site or at another location that (c) preservice and inservice inspection reports
will meet the access and Quality Assurance Program (d) records and reports of repair /replacement activ-
requirements. ities
(e) records of flaw acceptance by analytical evalu-
ation
(f) records of regions in ferritic Class 1 standards
with modified acceptance standards
(g) nondestructive examination procedures
IWA-6320 REPRODUCTION AND
(h) nondestructive examination records
MICROFILMING (i) pressure test procedures
Records and reports shall be either the original (j) pressure test records
or a reproduced, legible copy. Radiographs may be (k) for Class MC, bolt torque or tension test records
microfilmed; however, the Owner’s Quality Assurance (Table IWE-2500-2)
Program shall include a system of monitoring the (l) for Class CC
accuracy of the reproduction process so that when the (1) tendon force and elongation measurement rec-
microfilm is projected to the original size it will provide ords (IWL-2522)
the same information retrieval capability as the original (2) tendon wire and strand sample test results
radiograph. The accuracy of the reproduction process (IWL-2523)
includes the exposure (or multiple exposures for density (3) free water documentation (IWL-2524.2)
coverage), focusing, contrast, and resolution. The Qual- (4) corrosion protection medium analysis results
ity Assurance Program shall also provide a system for (IWL-2525)
79

ARTICLE IWA-9000
GLOSSARY
applied stress (␴) — a stress resolvable into membrane bobbin coil — a circular inside diameter eddy current
and bending components and including pressure, ther- coil wound such that the coil is concentric with the
mal, discontinuity, and residual effects acting at the tube during examination
flaw location buried component or support — a component or support
appurtenance — an item to be attached to a stamped that is buried or concrete encased
component that has work performed on it requiring cold shutdown — see plant technical specifications
verification by an Inspector
commercial service — nuclear power plant operation
assess — to determine by evaluation of data compared
commencing with the date the power unit is determined
with previously obtained data such as operating data
by the Owner to be available for the regular production
or design specifications
of electricity
Authorized Inspection Agency — an organization that
is empowered by an enforcement authority to provide component — an item in a nuclear power plant such
inspection personnel and services as required by this as a vessel, pump, valve, or piping system
Section component standard support — a support consisting
Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector — a person who of one or more generally mass-produced units usually
is employed and has been qualified by an Authorized referred to as catalog items
Inspection Agency to verify that examinations, tests, component support — a metal support designed to
and repair /replacement activities (that do not include transmit loads from a component to the load-carrying
welding or brazing) are performed in accordance with building or foundation structure. Component supports
the requirements of this Section include piping supports and encompass those structural
Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector Supervisor — elements relied upon to either support the weight or
a person who is employed by an Authorized Inspection provide structural stability to components.
Agency to supervise Authorized Nuclear Inservice In- constant load type support — spring type support
spectors and who is qualified as an Authorized Nuclear that produces a relatively constant supporting force
Inservice Inspector throughout a specified deflection
Authorized Nuclear Inspector — an employee of an
construction — an all-inclusive term comprising materi-
Authorized Inspection Agency who has been qualified
als, design, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection,
in accordance with NCA-5000 of Section III
and certification required in the manufacture and instal-
beltline region — the region of the reactor vessel (shell lation of items
material including welds, heat affected zones, and plates
or forgings) that directly surrounds the effective height Construction Code — nationally recognized Codes,
of the active core and adjacent regions of the reactor Standards, and Specifications (e.g., ASME, ASTM,
vessel that are predicted to experience sufficient neutron USAS, ANSI, API, AWWA, AISC, MSS, AWS) includ-
radiation damage to be considered in the selection of ing designated Cases, providing construction require-
the most limiting material with regard to radiation ments for an item
damage core support structures — those structures or parts of
bending stress (␴b) — component of primary stress structures that are designed to provide direct support
proportional to distance from centroid of solid section. It or restraint of the core (fuel and blanket assemblies)
excludes discontinuity stresses and stress concentrations. within the reactor pressure vessel
80

crack arrest fracture toughness (KIa) — the critical examination category — a grouping of items to be
value of the stress intensity factor (KI) for crack arrest examined or tested
as a function of temperature explosive welding — a solid state welding process
crack tip — the extremity of the flaw. The boundary wherein coalescence is produced by the application of
between the flaw and the adjacent material at the pressure by means of an explosive
intersection of the two flaw faces. fabrication — actions such as forming, machining,
critical flaw size — the flaw size that will cause assembling, welding, brazing, heat treating, examination,
failure under a specified load calculated using fracture testing, inspection, and certification, but excluding de-
mechanics. The minimum critical flaw size for normal sign, required to manufacture components, parts, or
or upset conditions (Service Level A and B) is ac; the appurtenances
minimum critical initiation flaw size for emergency and Faulted Conditions — those operating conditions associ-
faulted conditions is ai. ated with extremely low probability postulated events
defect — a flaw (imperfection or unintentional disconti- (Service Level D)
nuity) of such size, shape, orientation, location, or flaw — an imperfection or unintentional discontinuity
properties as to be rejectable that is detectable by nondestructive examination
design life — the period of time for which a component flaw aspect ratio (a /ø) — the ratio of flaw depth (a)
is designed to meet the criteria set forth in the Design for surface flaws, or one-half of the flaw depth (2a)
Specification for subsurface flaws, to the length of the flaw (ø),
design lifetime — see design life where a, 2a, and ø are the dimensions of the rectangle
circumscribing the flaw. (See Figs. IWA-3310-1 through
Design Report — the design document which shows
IWA-3390-1.)
that the allowable limits stated in the construction code
are not exceeded for the loadings specified in the design flaw depth — the depth is the maximum through-
specification thickness dimension (a or 2a) of the rectangle circum-
scribing the flaw when drawn normal to the surface
Design Specification — a document prepared by the
of the component
Owner or Owner’s Designee which provides a complete
basis for construction in accordance with the construc- fracture initiation — level at which the applied stress
tion code intensity (KI) is equal to or exceeds the fracture tough-
ness (KIc)
discontinuity — a lack of continuity or cohesion; an
interruption in the normal physical structure of material general corrosion — an approximately uniform wastage
or a product of a surface of a component, through chemical or
electrochemical action, free of deep pits or cracks
dissimilar metal weld — a weld between (a) carbon
or low alloy steels to high alloy steels, (b) carbon or hanger — an item that carries the weight of components
low alloy steels to high nickel alloys, or (c) high alloy or piping from above with the supporting members
steels to high nickel alloys being mainly in tension
Emergency Conditions — those operating conditions hot functional testing — a series of preoperational tests,
which have a low probability of occurrence (Service prior to reactor criticality, to ensure that the equipment
Level C) meets the design parameters at normal system tempera-
tures and pressures
enforcement authority — a regional or local governing
hot standby — see plant technical specifications
body, such as a State or Municipality of the United
States or a Province of Canada, empowered to enact imperfection — a condition of being imperfect; a depar-
and enforce Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code legislation ture of a quality characteristic from its intended con-
dition
engineering evaluation — an evaluation of indications
that exceed allowable acceptance standards to determine indication — the response or evidence from the applica-
if the margins required by the Design Specifications tion of a nondestructive examination
and Construction Code are maintained inservice examination — the process of visual, surface,
evaluation — the process of determining the significance or volumetric examination performed in accordance
of examination or test results, including the comparison with the rules and requirements of this Division
of examination or test results with applicable acceptance inservice inspection — methods and actions for assuring
criteria or previous results the structural and pressure-retaining integrity of safety-
81
related nuclear power plant components in accordance is a time integral of neutron flux at a given location
with the rules of this Section in a component.
inservice life — the period of time from the initial nondestructive examination — an examination by the
use of an item until its retirement from service visual, surface, or volumetric method
inservice test — a test to determine the operational nonplanar flaw — a flaw oriented in more than one
readiness of a component or system plane. It may be curvilinear or a combination of two
inspection — verification of the performance of exami- or more inclined planes. (See Fig. IWA-3340-1.)
nations and tests by an Inspector normal operating conditions — the operating conditions
Inspection Program — the plan and schedule for per- during reactor startup, operation at power, hot standby,
forming examinations or tests and reactor cooldown to cold shutdown conditions. Test
Inspector — an Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector, conditions are excluded.
except for those instances where so designated as an normal plant operation — the conditions of startup,
Authorized Nuclear Inspector hot standby, operation within the normal power range,
installation — those actions required to place and attach and cooldown and shutdown of the plant
components to their supports and join items of a nuclear open ended — a condition of piping or lines that
power system by welding or mechanical means permits free discharge to atmospheric or containment
item — a material, part, appurtenance, piping subassem- atmosphere
bly, component, or component support operational readiness — the ability of a component
KI — see stress intensity factor or system to perform its intended function when required
KIa — see crack arrest fracture toughness overpressure protection — the means by which compo-
nents, or groups of components, are protected from
KIc — see plane strain fracture toughness
overpressure, as required by the applicable Construction
KId — dynamic initiation fracture toughness obtained Code, by the use of pressure relieving devices or other
under fast or rapidly applied loading conditions design provisions
KIR — the crack growth resistance (fracture toughness) Owner — the organization legally responsible for the
expressed in units corresponding to KI. The value of construction and /or operation of a nuclear facility in-
KIR defined in Appendix G is the lesser of KIc and cluding but not limited to one who has applied for,
KIa for the material and temperature involved. or who has been granted, a construction permit or
laminar flaw — planar flaws that are oriented within operating license by the regulatory authority having
10 deg. of a plane parallel to the surface of the lawful jurisdiction
component. (See Fig. IWA-3360-1.) Owner’s Requirements — those technical requirements
linear flaw — a flaw having finite length and narrow prepared by or for the Owner that define the material,
uniform width and depth. (See Fig. IWA-3400-1.) design, fabrication, and examination requirements for
lowest service temperature — the minimum temperature an item in excess of Construction Code requirements
of the fluid retained by a component or, alternatively, when a Construction Code is specified, or in place of
the calculated volumetric average metal temperature a Construction Code when one is not specified
expected during normal operation, whenever the pres- planar flaw — a flat two-dimensional flaw oriented in
sure within the component exceeds 20% of the preopera- a plane other than parallel to the surface of the compo-
tional system hydrostatic test pressure nent. (See Fig. IWA-3310-1.)
material — metallic materials manufactured to an SA, plane strain fracture toughness (KIc) — the material
SB, or SFA specification or any other material specifica- toughness property measured in terms of the stress
tion permitted by this Section or Section III intensity factor, KI, which will lead to nonductile crack
membrane stress (sm) — the component of normal propagation
stress which is uniformly distributed and equal to the post-tensioning — a method of prestressing concrete
average value of stress across the thickness of the in which the tendons are tensioned after the concrete
section under consideration has cured
multiple flaws — two or more proximate discontinuous prestressed concrete — reinforced concrete in which
flaws. They may be planar, coplanar, or separate. there have been introduced internal stresses of such
neutron fluence — the number of fast neutrons per magnitude and distribution that the stresses resulting
unit area received by a cross-sectional component. This from loads are counteracted to a desired degree
82
RTNDT — the reference nil-ductility transition tempera- support — (1) an item used to position components,
ture established in NB-2330 from drop weight and resist gravity, resist dynamic loading, or maintain equi-
Charpy V-notch tests to account for the effect of librium of components; (2) an item that carries the
irradiation weight of a component or piping from below with the
reconciliation — the process of evaluating and justifying supporting members being mainly in compression
use of alternative Construction Code requirements or support part — a part or subassembly of a component
revised Owner’s Requirements support or piping support
regulatory authority — a federal government agency, surface flaw — a flaw that either penetrates the surface
such as the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commis- or is less than a given distance from the surface. (See
sion, that is empowered to issue and enforce regulations Fig. IWA-3310-1.)
affecting the design, construction, and operation of tendon — an assembly of prestressing steel, anchorages,
nuclear power plants and couplings, which imparts prestressing forces to
reinforced concrete — concrete containing reinforce- concrete
ment and designed so that the two materials act together terminal ends — the extremities of piping runs that
in resisting force connect to structures, components, or pipe anchors,
relevant condition — a condition observed during a each of which acts as a rigid restraint or provides at
visual examination that requires supplemental examina- least 2 degrees of restraint to piping thermal expansion
tion, corrective measure, correction by repair /replace- test — a procedure to obtain information through
ment activities, or analytical evaluation measurement or observation to determine the operational
Repair /Replacement Organization — the organization readiness of a component or system while under con-
that performs repair /replacement activities under the trolled conditions
provisions of the Owner’s Quality Assurance Program.
text information — information stored on the recording
The Owner may be the Repair /Replacement Organi-
media to support recorded eddy current data. Examples
zation.
include tube and steam generator identifications, opera-
rerating — a nonphysical change to an item or piping tor name, date of examination, and examination results.
system done by changing its design ratings (e.g., internal
unbonded tendons — tendons in which the prestressing
or external pressure or temperature). Rerating covers
steel is permanently free to move relative to the concrete
pressure boundary items, core supports, and component
to which they are applying prestressing forces
supports
unit of data storage — each discrete physical recording
safety function — a function that is necessary to ensure
medium on which eddy current data and text information
(1) the integrity of the reactor coolant pressure boundary,
are stored. Examples include tape cartridge and
(2) the capability to shut down the reactor and maintain
floppy disk.
it in a safe shutdown condition, or (3) the capability
to prevent or mitigate the consequences of accidents that variable spring type support — a spring type support
could result in potential offsite exposures comparable to providing a variable supporting force throughout a
the guideline exposures of 10CFR100 specified deflection
seal weld — a nonstructural weld intended to prevent verify — to determine that a particular action has been
leakage, where the strength is provided by a separate performed in accordance with the rules and requirements
means of this Section either by witnessing the action or by
stress — the intensity of the internal forces or compo- reviewing records
nents of forces that act on a plane through a given vibration control and sway brace — a spring type
point. Stress is expressed in force per unit area. support providing a variable restraining force along
stress intensity factor (KI) — a measure of the stress- its axis
field intensity near the tip of an ideal crack in a linear welded joint category — the location of a joint in a
elastic medium when deformed so that the crack faces vessel used for specifying required examinations. The
are displaced apart, normal to the crack plane (opening categories are designated as A, B, C, and D as defined
mode or mode I deformation). KI is directly proportional in NE-3351.
to applied load and depends on specimen geometry. yield strength (sy) — the stress at which a material
Structural Integrity Test — the initial or subsequent exhibits a specified limiting deviation from the linear
pressure test of a containment structure to demonstrate proportionality of stress to strain. The deviation is
the ability to withstand the prescribed loads expressed in terms of strain (generally 0.2%).
83
SUBSECTION IWB
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1
COMPONENTS OF LIGHT-WATER
COOLED PLANTS
IWB-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

IWB-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IWB-1200 Components Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IWB-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IWB-1220 Components Exempt From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IWB-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

IWB-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
IWB-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
IWB-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
IWB-2411 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
IWB-2412 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
IWB-2413 Inspection Program for Steam Generator Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
IWB-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
IWB-2430 Additional Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
IWB-2500 Examination and Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
IWB-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

IWB-3100 Evaluation of Examination Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3110 Preservice Volumetric and Surface Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3111 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3112 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3113 Repair /Replacement Activity and Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3114 Review by Authorities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3120 Preservice Visual Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3122 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3122.1 Acceptance by Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
IWB-3122.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3122.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures or Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3130 Inservice Volumetric and Surface Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3131 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3132 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
85
IWB-3132.1 Acceptance by Volumetric or Surface Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3132.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3132.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
IWB-3140 Inservice Visual Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3141 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3142 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3142.1 Acceptance by Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3142.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3142.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures or Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3142.4 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3200 Supplemental Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
IWB-3400 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3410 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3410.1 Application of Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3410.2 Modification of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3420 Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3430 Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3500 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3510 Standards for Examination Category B-A, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Reactor Vessel, and Examination Category B-B, Pressure Retaining Welds
in Vessels Other Than Reactor Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3510.1 Allowable Planar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3510.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3510.3 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3512 Standards for Examination Category B-D, Full Penetration Welds of
Nozzles in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IWB-3514 Standards for Examination Category B-F, Pressure Retaining Dissimilar
Metal Welds in Vessel Nozzles, and Examination Category B-J, Pressure
Retaining Welds in Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IWB-3514.2 Allowable Flaw Standards for Ferritic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3514.3 Allowable Flaw Standards for Austenitic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3514.4 Allowable Flaw Standards for Dissimilar Metal Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3514.7 Allowable Linear Flaw Standards for Ferritic Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3515 Standards for Examination Category B-G-1, Pressure Retaining Bolting
Greater Than 2 in. in Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3515.1 Allowable Flaws for Surface Examinations of Studs and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3515.2 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Examinations of Studs and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3515.3 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Examinations of Threads in Stud Holes . . . . . . . . . 141
IWB-3516 Standards for Examination Category B-K Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping,
Pumps, and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IWB-3517 Standards for Examination Category B-G-1, Pressure Retaining Bolting
Greater Than 2 in. in Diameter, and Examination Category B-G-2,
Pressure Retaining Bolting 2 in. and Less in Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
86
IWB-3517.1 Visual Examination, VT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IWB-3518 Standards for Examination Category B-L-1 and B-M-1, Pressure Retaining
Welds in Pump Casings and Valve Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IWB-3519 Standards for Examination Category B-L-2, Pump Casings, and Examination
Category B-M-2, Valve Bodies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
IWB-3520 Standards for Examination Category B-N-1, Interior of Reactor Vessel,
Examination Category B-N-2, Welded Core Support Structures and Interior
Attachments to Reactor Vessels, and Examination Category
B-N-3, Removable Core Support Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IWB-3521 Standards for Examination Category B-Q, Steam Generator Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IWB-3521.1 Allowable Flaws for U-Tube Steam Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IWB-3521.2 Allowable Flaws for Straight-Tube Steam Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IWB-3522 Standards for Examination Category B-P, All Pressure Retaining Components . . . . . 146
IWB-3523 Standards for Examination Category B-O, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Control Rod Drive Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
IWB-3523.2 Allowable Flaw Standards for Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
IWB-3523.3 Allowable Flaw Standards for Volumetric Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
IWB-3600 Analytical Evaluation of Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
IWB-3610 Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Steel Components 4 in. and Greater in
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
IWB-3611 Acceptance Criteria Based on Flaw Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
IWB-3612 Acceptance Criteria Based on Applied Stress Intensity Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IWB-3613 Acceptance Criteria for Flanges and Shell Regions Near Structural
Discontinuities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IWB-3620 Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Components Less Than 4 in. in
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IWB-3630 Acceptance Criteria for Steam Generator Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IWB-3640 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Austenitic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
IWB-3641 Evaluation Procedures Based on Flaw Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IWB-3641.1 Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IWB-3641.2 Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IWB-3641.3 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IWB-3642 Evaluation Procedure Based on Applied Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
IWB-3650 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Flaws in Ferritic
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IWB-3651 Evaluation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IWB-3652 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
IWB-3700 Analytical Evaluation of Plant Operating Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
IWB-3710 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
IWB-3720 Unanticipated Operating Events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
IWB-3730 Fracture Toughness Criteria for Protection Against Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
IWB-3740 Operating Plant Fatigue Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
IWB-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

IWB-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
IWB-5210 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
87
IWB-5220 System Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
IWB-5221 Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
IWB-5222 Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
IWB-5230 Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
IWB-5240 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figures
IWB-2500-1 Vessel Shell Circumferential Weld Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
IWB-2500-2 Vessel Shell Longitudinal Weld Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
IWB-2500-3 Spherical Vessel Head Circumferential and Meridional Weld Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
IWB-2500-4 Shell-to-Flange Weld Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
IWB-2500-5 Head-to-Flange Weld Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
IWB-2500-6 Typical Tubesheet-to-Head Weld Joints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
IWB-2500-7(a) Nozzle in Shell or Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
IWB-2500-7(b) Nozzle in Shell or Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
IWB-2500-7(c) Nozzle in Shell or Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
IWB-2500-7(d) Nozzle in Shell or Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
IWB-2500-8 Similar and Dissimilar Metal Welds in Components, Nozzles, and Piping. . . . . . . . . 121
IWB-2500-9 Pipe Branch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
IWB-2500-12 Closure Stud and Threads in Flange Stud Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
IWB-2500-13 Welded Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
IWB-2500-16 Pump Casing Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
IWB-2500-17 Valve Body Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
IWB-2500-18 Control Rod Drive Housing Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
IWB-2500-20 Extent of Weld Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
IWB-3610-1 Characterization and Proximity Rules for Analytical Evaluation of Clad
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
IWB-3641-1 Weld Material–Base Material Interface Definition for Flaw Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tables
IWB-2411-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
IWB-2412-1 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
IWB-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
IWB-3410-1 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IWB-3510-1 Allowable Planar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
IWB-3510-2 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IWB-3510-3 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
IWB-3512-2 Component Thickness vs Flaw Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
IWB-3514-3 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
IWB-3514-4 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
88
IWB-3641-1 Allowable End-of-Evaluation Period Flaw Depth to Thickness Ratio for
Circumferential Flaws — Normal Operating (Including Upset and Test)
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Circumferential Flaws — Emergency and Faulted Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Axial Flaws — Normal Operating (Including Upset and Test) Conditions. . . . . . . 155
Axial Flaws — Emergency and Faulted Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
IWB-5230-1 Test Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
89
ARTICLE IWB-1000
IWB-1100 SCOPE (a) components that are connected to the reactor

coolant system and part of the reactor coolant pres-
This Subsection provides requirements for inservice
sure boundary, and that are of such a size and shape
inspection of Class 1 pressure retaining components
so that upon postulated rupture the resulting flow of
and their welded attachments in light-water cooled
coolant from the reactor coolant system under normal
plants.
plant operating conditions is within the capacity of
makeup systems that are operable from on-site emer-
gency power. The emergency core cooling systems are
IWB-1200 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO
excluded from the calculation of makeup capacity.
EXAMINATION
(b)(1) piping of NPS 1 (DN25) and smaller, except
IWB-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS for steam generator tubing;
(2) components and their connections in piping2
The examination requirements of this Subsection shall
apply to Class 1 pressure retaining components and of NPS 1 (DN25) and smaller;
their welded attachments. (c) reactor vessel head connections and associated
piping, NPS 2 (DN50) and smaller, made inaccessible
by control rod drive penetrations.
IWB-1220 COMPONENTS EXEMPT FROM (d) welds or portions of welds that are inaccessible
EXAMINATION due to being encased in concrete, buried underground,
located inside a penetration, or encapsulated by
The following components1 or parts of components guard pipe.
are exempted from the volumetric and surface examina-
tion requirements of IWB-2500:
1 The exemptions from examination in IWC-1220 may be applied 2 Inpiping is defined as having a cumulative inlet and a cumulative
to those components permitted to be Class 2 in lieu of Class 1 by outlet pipe cross-sectional area neither of which exceeds the nominal
the regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site. OD cross-sectional area of the designated size.
91
ARTICLE IWB-2000
IWB-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION TABLE IWB-2411-1

INSPECTION PROGRAM A
(a) Examinations required by this Article (with the
exception of Examination Category B-P, and the visual Inspection Period, Minimum Maximum
VT-3 examination of the internal surfaces of Categories Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
B-L-2 and B-M-2, of Table IWB-2500-1) shall be Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
completed prior to initial plant startup. In addition, 1st 3 100 100
these preservice examinations shall be extended to
include essentially 100% of the pressure retaining welds 2nd 7 33 67
10 100 100
in all Class 1 components, except in those components
exempted from examination by IWB-1220(a), (b), or 3rd 13 16 34
(c). However, in the case of Examination Category B- 17 40 50
O (Table IWB-2500-1), the examination shall be ex- 20 66 75
tended to include essentially 100% of the welds in the 23 100 100
installed peripheral control rod drive housings only.
4th 27 8 16
(b) Shop and field examinations may serve in lieu 30 25 34
of the on-site preservice examinations provided: 33 50 67
(1) in the case of vessels only, the examination 37 75 100
is performed after the hydrostatic test required by 40 100 ...
Section III has been completed;
(2) such examinations are conducted under condi-
tions and with equipment and techniques equivalent to
those that are expected to be employed for subsequent
inservice examinations; IWB-2411 Inspection Program A
(3) the shop and field examination records are, or
(a) The required percentage of examinations in each
can be, documented and identified in a form consistent
Examination Category shall be completed in accordance
with those required in IWA-6000.
with Table IWB-2411-1, with the following exceptions:
(c) Steam generator tube examination shall be gov-
(1) Examination Categories B-N-1, B-P, and B-Q;
erned by the plant Technical Specification.
(2) examinations partially deferred to the end of
an inspection interval, as allowed by Examination Cate-
gories B-A, B-D, and B-F;
(3) examinations deferred to the end of an inspec-
tion interval, as allowed by Examination Categories B-
A, B-L-1, B-M-1, B-N-2, B-N-3, and B-O;
(4) examinations deferred until disassembly of a
IWB-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE component for maintenance, repair/replacement activity,
or volumetric examination, as allowed by Examination
IWB-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM
Categories B-G-1, B-G-2, B-L-2, and B-M-2; and
Inservice examinations and system pressure tests may (5) welded attachments examined as a result of
be performed during plant outages such as refueling component support deformation under Examination Cat-
shutdowns or maintenance shutdowns. egory B-K.
92
IWB-2411 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-2420
(b) Following completion of Program A after 40 TABLE IWB-2412-1 98

years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the INSPECTION PROGRAM B
10 year inspection interval of Program B.
Inspection Period,
Calendar Years of Minimum Maximum
Inspection Plant Service Examinations Examinations
IWB-2412 Inspection Program B Interval Within the Interval Completed, % Credited, %
All 3 16 50
(a) The required percentage of examinations in each 7 501 75
Examination Category shall be completed in accordance 10 100 100
with Table IWB-2412-1, with the following exceptions:
Note:
(1) Examination Categories B-N-1, B-P, and B-Q; (1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination
(2) examinations partially deferred to the end of category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations
an inspection interval, as allowed by Examination Cate- shall be performed in the second period.
gories B-A, B-D, and B-F;
(3) examinations deferred to the end of an inspec-
tion interval, as allowed by Examination Categories B-
A, B-L-1, B-M-1, B-N-2, B-N-3, and B-O;
(4) examinations deferred until disassembly of a IWB-2413 Inspection Program for Steam
component for maintenance, repair/replacement activity, Generator Tubing
or volumetric examination, as allowed by Examination
Categories B-G-1, B-G-2, B-L-2, and B-M-2. The examinations shall be governed by the plant
(5) welded attachments examined as a result of Technical Specification.
component support deformation under Examination Cat-
egory B-K.
If there are less than three items or welds to be
examined in an Examination Category, the items or
welds may be examined in any two periods, or in any
one period if there is only one item or weld, in lieu
IWB-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS
of the percentage requirements of Table IWB-2412-1.
(b) If items or welds are added to the Inspection (a) The sequence of component examinations which
Program, during the service lifetime of a plant, examina- was established during the first inspection interval shall
tion shall be scheduled as follows: be repeated during each successive inspection interval,
(1) When items or welds are added during the to the extent practical.
first period of an interval, at least 25% of the examina- (b) If a component is accepted for continued service
tions required by the applicable Examination Category in accordance with IWB-3132.3 or IWB-3142.4, the
and Item Number for the added items or welds shall areas containing flaws or relevant conditions shall be
be performed during each of the second and third reexamined during the next three inspection periods
periods of that interval. Alternatively, if deferral of the listed in the schedule of the inspection program of
examinations is permitted for the Examination Category IWB-2400.
and Item Number, the second period examinations may (c) If the reexaminations required by IWB-2420(b)
be deferred to the third period and at least 50% of reveal that the flaws or relevant conditions remain
the examinations required by the applicable Examination essentially unchanged for three successive inspection
Category and Item Number for the added items or periods, the component examination schedule may revert
welds shall be performed during the third period. to the original schedule of successive inspections.
(2) When items or welds are added during the (d) For steam generator tubing, the successive exami-
second period of an interval, at least 25% of the nations shall be governed by the plant Technical Speci-
examinations required by the applicable Examination fication.
Category and Item Number for the added items or (e) If welded attachments are examined as a result
welds shall be performed during the third period of of identified component support deformation, and the
that interval. results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
(3) When items or welds are added during the third standards of Table IWB-3410-1, successive examina-
period of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in tions shall be performed, if determined necessary, based
accordance with IWB-2412(a) for successive intervals. on an evaluation by the Owner.
93
IWB-2430 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWB-2500
IWB-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS results of these examinations exceed the acceptance

standards of Table IWB-3410-1, additional examinations
(a) Examinations performed in accordance with Table
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on
IWB-2500-1, except for Examination Category B-P,
an evaluation by the Owner.
that reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-1 shall be
extended to include additional examinations during the
current outage. The additional examinations shall in- IWB-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE
clude an additional number of welds, areas, or parts1 TEST REQUIREMENTS
included in the inspection item2 equal to the number (a) Components shall be examined and tested as
of welds, areas, or parts included in the inspection specified in Table IWB-2500-1. The method of examina-
item that were scheduled to be performed during the tion for the components and parts of the pressure
present inspection period. The additional examinations retaining boundaries shall comply with those tabulated in
shall be selected from welds, areas, or parts of similar Table IWB-2500-1 except where alternate examination
material and service. This additional selection may methods are used that meet the requirements of
require inclusion of piping systems other than the one IWA-2240.
containing the flaws or relevant conditions. (b) Table IWB-2500-1 is organized as follows.
(b) If the additional examinations required by IWB-
2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding Examination
the acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-1, the Category Examination Area
examinations shall be further extended to include addi- B-A Pressure Retaining Welds in Reactor Vessel
tional examinations during the current outage. These B-B Pressure Retaining Welds in Vessels Other
additional examinations shall include the remaining Than Reactor Vessels
B-D Full Penetration Welded Nozzles in Vessels
number of welds, areas, or parts of similar material B-F Pressure Retaining Dissimilar Metal Welds
and service subject to the same type of flaws or relevant in Vessel Nozzles
conditions. B-G-1 Pressure Retaining Bolting, Greater Than 2 in.
(c) For the inspection period following the period in Diameter
in which the examinations of IWB-2430(a) or (b) were B-G-2 Pressure Retaining Bolting, 2 in. and Less
in Diameter
completed, the examinations shall be performed as B-J Pressure Retaining Welds in Piping
originally scheduled in accordance with IWB-2400. B-K Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping, Pumps,
(d) For steam generator tubing, additional examina- and Valves
tions shall be governed by plant Technical Specifica- B-L-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Pump Casings
tions. B-L-2 Pump Casings
B-M-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Valve Bodies
(e) If welded attachments are examined as a result B-M-2 Valve Bodies
of identified component support deformation, and the B-N-1 Interior of Reactor Vessel
B-N-2 Welded Core Support Structures and
1 Welds, areas, or parts are those described or intended in a particular Interior Attachments to Reactor Vessels
inspection item of Table IWB-2500-1. B-N-3 Removable Core Support Structures
2 An inspection item, as listed in Table IWB-2500-1, may comprise B-O Pressure Retaining Welds in Control Rod
a number of welds, areas, or parts of a component required to be Housings
examined in accordance with the inspection plan and schedule B-P All Pressure Retaining Components
(IWA-2420). B-Q Steam Generator Tubing
94
TABLE IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORIES
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-A, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN REACTOR VESSEL
Extent and Frequency of Examination
Examination 1st Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Successive Examination to
No. Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Interval Inspection Intervals4 End of Interval
B1.10 Shell Welds Volumetric IWB-3510 All welds2 Same as for Permissible
B1.11 Circumferential IWB-2500-1 1st Interval
B1.12 Longitudinal IWB-2500-2
B1.20 Head Welds IWB-2500-3 Volumetric IWB-3510 Accessible length of Same as for Permissible
B1.21 Circumferential all welds2 1st Interval
B1.22 Meridional
B1.30 Shell-to-Flange Weld IWB-2500-4 Volumetric IWB-3510 Weld2 Same as for See Note 3
1st Interval
B1.40 Head-to-Flange Weld IWB-2500-5 Volumetric and surface IWB-3510 Weld2 Same as for See Note 4
95
1st Interval
B1.50 Repair Welds1 IWB-2500-1 Volumetric IWB-3510 All weld repair areas Same as for Permissible
B1.51 Beltline region and -2 1st Interval
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS
NOTES:
(1) Material (base metal) weld repairs where repair depth exceeds 10% nominal of the vessel wall. If the location of the repair is not positively
and accurately known, then the individual shell plate, forging, or shell course containing the repair shall be included.
(2) Includes essentially 100% of the weld length.
(3) When using Inspection Program B, the shell-to-flange weld examination may be performed during the first and third periods, in which
case 50% of the shell-to-flange weld shall be examined by the end of the first period, and the remainder by the end of third period.
During the first period, the examination need only be performed from the flange face, provided this same portion is examined from
the shell during the third period.
(4) Deferral is not permissible for the head-to-flange weld. However, during the first and second periods, the examination need only be
performed from the flange face, provided these same portions are examined from the head during the third period.
Table IWB-2500-1
TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-B, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN VESSELS OTHER THAN REACTOR VESSELS

Table IWB-2500-1

Pressurizer Fig. IWB-2500-20(a) Fig. IWB-2500-20(b)

B2.10 Shell-to-Head Volumetric IWB-2510 Not permissible
B2.11 Circumferential IWB-2500-1 Both welds4 Both welds4
B2.12 Longitudinal IWB-2500-2 1 ft of all welds2 1 ft of one weld 2 per
head
B2.20 Head Welds IWB-2500-3 Volumetric IWB-3510 All welds4 One weld per head Not permissible
B2.21 Circumferential
B2.22 Meridional
Steam Generators (Primary Side) Fig. IWB-2500-20(c) Fig. IWB-2500-20(d)

B2.30 Head Welds IWB-2500-3 Volumetric IWB-3510 All welds4 One weld1 per head Not permissible
96
B2.31 Circumferential
B2.32 Meridional
B2.40 Tubesheet-To-Head Weld IWB-2500-6 Volumetric IWB-3510 Weld4 Weld1,4 Not permissible
Heat Exchangers (Primary Side) — Head Fig. IWB-2500-20(f) Fig. IWB-2500-20(f)

B2.50 Head Welds Volumetric IWB-3510 All welds4 One weld1 per head Not permissible
B2.51 Circumferential IWB-2500-1,-3
B2.52 Meridional IWB-2500-3
Heat Exchangers (Primary Side) — Shell Fig. IWB-2500-20(g) Fig. IWB-2500-20(h)

B2.60 Tubesheet-to-Head Welds IWB-2500-6 Volumetric IWB-3510 Weld4 Weld1,4 Not permissible
B2.70 Longitudinal Welds IWB-2500-2 Volumetric IWB-3510 1 ft of all welds2 1 ft of one weld1,2 Not permissible
at each end of at each end of
shell shell
B2.80 Tubesheet-to-Shell Welds IWB-2500-6 Volumetric IWB-3510 Welds4 each end Welds1,4 each end Not permissible
NOTES:
(1) The examination may be limited to one vessel among the group of vessels performing a similar function.
(2) The weld selected for examination is that weld intersecting the circumferential weld.
(3) The initially selected welds are to be examined in the same sequence during successive inspection intervals, to the extent practical.
(4) Includes essentially 100% of the weld length
ASME B&PVC
A99 TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-D, FULL PENETRATION WELDED NOZZLES IN VESSELS—INSPECTION PROGRAM A
Examination 1st and 2nd Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection 3rd and 4th Examination to
No. Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Interval Inspection Intervals End of Interval
Reactor Vessel
B3.10 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for See Note 3
B3.20 Nozzle Inside Radius Section IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 1st Interval See Note 2
Pressurizer
B3.30 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for 1st Interval Not permissible
97
Steam Generators (Primary Side)
sec11$$u55 05-12-99 06:41:34

Heat Exchangers (Primary Side)

B3.70 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for Not permissible
B3.80 Nozzle Inside Radius Section IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 1st Interval Not permissible
NOTES:
(1) Includes nozzles with full penetration welds to vessel shell (or head) and integrally cast nozzles, but excludes manways and handholes
either welded to or integrally cast in vessel.
(2) Deferral is permissible during the first and second intervals. During the third and fourth intervals at least 25% but not more than 50%
of the nozzles shall be examined by the end of the second period, and the remainder by the end of the interval.
(3) During the third and fourth intervals, if the nozzle weld is examined by the straight beam ultrasonic method from inside the nozzle bore,
the remaining examinations required from the shell inside diameter may be performed at or near the end of the interval.
(4) The examination volumes shall apply to the applicable Figure shown in Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) through (d).
Table IWB-2500-1
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC
A99 TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-D, FULL PENETRATION WELDED NOZZLES IN VESSELS—INSPECTION PROGRAM B

Reactor Vessel
B3.90 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for See Notes 2, 3, 5
B3.100 Nozzle Inside Radius Section IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 1st Interval See Notes 2, 5
Pressurizer
B3.110 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for 1st Inteval Not permissible
Steam Generators (Primary Side)
98
Heat Exchangers (Primary Side)
sec11$$u55 05-12-99 06:41:34

B3.150 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 Same as for Not permissible
B3.160 Nozzle Inside Radius Section IWB-2500-74 Volumetric IWB-3512 All nozzles1 1st Interval Not permissible
NOTES:
(1) Includes nozzles with full penetration welds to vessel shell (or head) and integrally cast nozzles, but excludes manways and handholes
either welded to or integrally cast in vessel.
(2) At least 25% but more than 50% of the nozzles shall be examined by the end of the first inspection period, and the remainder by the
end of the inspection interval.
(3) If the nozzle weld is examined by the straight beam ultrasonic method from inside the nozzle bore, the remaining examinations required
from the shell inside diameter may be performed at or near the end of the interval.
(4) The examination volumes shall apply to the applicable Figure shown in Figs. IWB-23500-7(a) through (d).
(5) For PWRs in the second and successive inspection intervals, these examinations may be deferred to the end of the interval, provided no
repair/replacement activities have been performed on the examination item, and no flaws or relevant conditions requiring successive
inspections in accordance with IWB-2420(b) are contained in the examination item.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-F, PRESSURE RETAINING DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS IN VESSEL NOZZLES

Reactor Vessel
B5.10 NPS 4 or Larger
Nozzle-to-Safe End Butt Welds IWB-2500-8 Volumetric and surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st See Notes 1, 2
interval
B5.20 Less Than NPS 4
Nozzle-to-Safe End Butt Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st See Note 1
interval
B5.30 Nozzle-to-Safe End Socket Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st See Note 1
interval
Pressurizer
99
Nozzle-to-Safe End Butt Welds IWB-2500-8 Volumetric and surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
Nozzle-to-Safe End Butt Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
B5.60 Nozzle-to-Safe End Socket Welds
IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
NOTES:
See Notes at end of Examination Category B-F.
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-F, PRESSURE RETAINING DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS IN VESSEL NOZZLES (CONT’D)

Table IWB-2500-1

Steam Generator
interval
interval
B5.90 Nozzle-to-Safe End Socket Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
Heat Exchangers
100
interval
interval
B5.120 Nozzle-to-Safe End Socket Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 All welds Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
NOTES:
(1) Deferral is not permissible during the first interval. However, during successive intervals, the examinations may be performed conicident
witht the vessel nozzle examinations required by Examination Category B-D.
(2) For PWRs in the second and successive inspection intervals, these examinations may be deferred to the end of the interval, provided no
repair/replacement activities have been performed on the examination item, and no flaws or relevant conditions requiring successive inspections
in accordance with IWB-2420(b) are contained in the examination item.
TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D) 98
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-G-1, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING, GREATER THAN 2 in. IN DIAMETER
Examination 1st Successive Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Inspection In- Examination to
No. Examined 1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval 2,3 tervals 2,3 End of Interval
Reactor Vessel All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st

B6.10 Closure Head Nuts Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 nuts, bushings, interval Permissible
B6.20 Closure Studs, in place IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 threads in flange Permissible
B6.30 Closure Studs, when removed IWB-2500-12 Surface and volumetric IWB-3515 stud holes Permissible
B6.40 Threads in Flange IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 Permissible
B6.50 Closure Washers, Bushings Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 Permissible
Pressurizer All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

B6.60 Bolts and Studs IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 nuts, bushings interval
B6.70 Flange Surface,4 when Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 and flange
B6.80 connection disassembled Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 surfaces
Nuts, Bushings, and Washers
101
Steam Generators All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible
B6.90 Bolts and Studs IWB-2500-12 Volumetric IWB-3515 nuts, bushings, interval
Heat Exchangers All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

NOTES:
See Notes at end of Examination Category B-G-1.
Table IWB-2500-1
98 TABLE IWB-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-G-1, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING, GREATER THAN 2 in. IN DIAMETER (CONT’D)

Table IWB-2500-1

No. Examined 1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval 2,3 Inspection Intervals2,3 End of Interval
Piping All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

B6.160 Flange Surface,4 when connection Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 and flange
B6.170 disassembled Surfaces Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 surfaces
Pumps All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible

102
Valves All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Permissible
NOTES:
(1) Bolting may be examined:
(a) in place under tension;
(b) when the connection is disassembled;
(c) when the bolting is removed.
(2) Bushings and threads in base material of flanges are required to be examined only when the connections are disassembled. Bushings may
be inspected in place.
(3) For heat exchangers, piping, pumps, and valves, examinations are limited to components selected for examination under Examination
Categories B-B, B-J, B-L-2, and B-M-2.
(4) Examination includes 1 in. annular surface of flange surrounding each stud.
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-G-2, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING, 2 in. AND LESS IN DIAMETER

No. Examined 1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval 2 Inspection Intervals2 End of Interval
Reactor Vessel
B7.10 Bolts, Studs, and Nuts Surface Visual, VT-1 IWB-3517 All bolts, studs, Same as for 1st Not permissible
and nuts interval
Pressurizer
and nuts interval
Steam Generators
and nuts interval
Heat Exchangers
and nuts interval
103
Piping
and nuts interval
Pumps
and nuts interval
Valves
and nuts interval
NOTES:
(1) Bolting may be examined:
(a) in place under tension;
(b) when the connection is disassembled;
(c) when the bolting is removed.
(2) For heat exchangers, piping, pumps, and valves, examinations are limited to components selected for examination under Examination
Categories B-B, B-J, B-L-2, and B-M-2.
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-J, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PIPING

Table IWB-2500-1

B9.10 NPS4 or Larger IWB-2500-8 Surface and volumetric IWB-3514 Same as for 1st Not permissible
B9.11 Circumferential Welds Welds1,3,4,5,6 interval
B9.20 Less Than NPS 4 IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 Welds1,3,4 Same as for 1st Not permissible
B9.21 Circumferential Welds interval
B9.30 Branch Pipe Connection Welds IWB-3514 Same as for 1st Not permissible
B9.31 NPS 4 or Larger IWB-2500-9, Surface and volumetric Welds1,3,4,5,6 interval
B9.32 Less Than NPS 4 -10, and -11 Surface Welds1,3,4
B9.40 Socket Welds IWB-2500-8 Surface IWB-3514 Welds1,3 Same as for 1st Not permissible
interval
104
NOTES:
(1) Examinations shall include the following:
(a) All terminal ends in each pipe or branch run connected to vessels.
(b) All terminal ends and joints in each pipe or branch run connected to other components where the stress levels exceed either of the
following limits under loads associated with specific seismic events and operational conditions:
(1) primary plus secondary stress intensity range of 2.4Sm for ferritic steel and austenitic steel
(2) cumulative usage factor U of 0.4
(c) All dissimilar metal welds not covered under Category B-F.
(d) Additional piping welds so that the total number of circumferential butt welds (or branch connection or socket welds) selected for
examination equals 25% of the circumferential butt welds (or branch connection or socket welds) in the reactor coolant piping system.
This total does not include welds excluded by IWB-1220. These additional welds may be located in one loop (one loop is defined for
both PWR and BWR plants in the 1977 Edition).
(2) The initially selected welds are to be examined in the same sequence during successive inspection intervals, to the extent practical.
(3) Includes essentially 100% of weld length.
(4) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, surface examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those
portions of the welds within the examination boundaries of intersecting Examination Category B-F and B-J circumferential welds.
(5) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, volumetric examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those
portions of the welds within the examination boundaries of intersecting Examination Category B-F and B-J circumferential welds. The
following requirements shall also be met:
(a) When longitudinal welds are specified and locations are known, examination requirements shall be met for both transverse and parallel
flaws at the intersection of the welds and for that length of longitudinal weld within the circumferential weld examination volume.
(b) When longitudinal welds are specified but locations are unknown, or the existence of longitudinal welds is uncertain, the examination
requirements shall be met for both transverse and parallel flaws within the entire examination volume of intersecting circumferential welds.
(6) For welds in carbon or low alloy steels, only those welds showing reportable preservice transverse indications need to be examined by the
ultrasonic method for reflectors transverse to the weld length direction except that circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal
welds shall meet Note (5).
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-K, WELDED ATTACHMENTS FOR VESSELS, PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES
Extent2,3 and Frequency6

of Examination

No. Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Interval Inspection Intervals End of Interval
Pressure Vessels
B10.10 Welded Attachments IWB-2500-13, Surface7 IWB-3516 Each welded attach- Same as for 1st Not permissible
-14, and -15 ment and each iden- interval
tified occurrence4
Piping
B10.20 Welded Attachments IWB-2500-13, Surface IWB-3516 Each welded attach- Same as for 1st Not permissible
tified occurrence5
Pumps
tified occurrence5
105
Valves
tified occurrence5
NOTES:
(1) Weld buildup on nozzles that is in compression under normal conditions and provides only component support is excluded from examination.
Examination is limited to those welded attachments that meet the following conditions:
(a) the attachment is on the outside surface of the pressure retaining component;
(b) the attachment provides component support as defined in NF-1110;

(c) the attachment weld joins the attachment either directly to the surface of the component or to an integrally cast or forged attachment
to the component, and
(d) the attachment weld is full penetration fillet, or partial penetration, continuous or intermittent.
(2) The extent of the examination includes essentially 100% of the length of the attachment weld at each attachment subject to examination.
(3) Selected samples of welded attachments shall be examined each inspection interval.
(4) For multiple vessels of similar design, function and service, only one welded attachment of only one of the multiple vessels shall be selected
for examination.
(5) For piping, pumps, and valves, a sample of 10% of the welded attachments associated with the component supports selected for examination
under IWF-2510 shall be examined.
(6) Examination is required whenever component support member deformation, e.g., broken, bent, or pulled out parts, is identified during
operation, refueling, maintenance, examination, or testing.
(7) For the configurations shown in Figs. IWB-2500-13 and IWB-2500-14, a surface examination from an accessible side of the attachment
weld shall be performed. Alternatively, for the configuration shown in Fig. IWB-2500-14, a volumetric examination of volume A-B-C-D
from an accessible side of the attachment weld may be performed in lieu of the surface examination of surfaces A-B or C-D.
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-L-1, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PUMP CASINGS; B-M-1, PRESSURE RETAINING
Table IWB-2500-1
WELDS IN VALVE BODIES; B-L-2, PUMP CASINGS; B-M-2, VALVE BODIES

Pumps
B12.10 Pump Casing Welds (B-L-1) IWB-2500-16 Volumetric IWB-3518 All welds1,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
B12.20 Pump Casing (B-L-2) Internal Visual, VT-3 IWB-3519 Internal surface1 Same as for 1st See Note 2
surfaces interval
Valves
B12.30 Valves, Less Than NPS 4
Valve Body Welds (B-M-1) IWB-2500-17 Surface WIB-3518 All welds3,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
106
B12.40 Valves, NPS 4 or Larger
Valve Body Welds (B-M-1) IWB-2500-17 Volumetric IWB-3518 All welds3,4 Same as for 1st Permissible
interval
B12.50 Valve Body, Exceeding NPS 4 Internal Visual, VT-3 IWB-3519 Internal surface3 Same as for 1st See Note 2
(B-M-2) surfaces interval
NOTES:
(1) Examinations are limited to at least one pump in each group of pumps performing similar functions in the system, e.g., recirculating
coolant pumps.
(2) Examination is required only when a pump or valve is disassembled for maintenance, repair, or volumetric examination. Examination
of the internal pressure boundary shall include the internal pressure retaining surfaces made accessible for examination by disassembly.
If a partial examination is performed and a subsequent disassembly of that pump or valve allows a more extensive examination, an
examination shall be performed during the subsequent disassembly. A complete examination is required only once during the interval.
(3) Examinations are limited to at least one valve within each group of valves that are of the same size, constructural design (such as
globe, gate, or check valves), and manufacturing method, and that perform similar functions in the system (such as containment
isolation and system overpressure protection).
(4) Includes essentially 100% of weld length.
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-N-1, INFERIOR OF REACTOR VESSEL

B-N-2, WELDED CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES AND INTERIOR ATTACHMENTS TO REACTOR VESSELS
B-N-3, REMOVABLE CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES

Reactor Vessel
B13.10 Vessel Interior (B-N-1) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Refueling outages3 Each inspection period Not permissible
areas1
Reactor Vessel (BWR)

B13.20 Interior Attachments Within Beltline Accessible Visual, VT-1 IWB-3520.1 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.30 Interior Attachments Beyond Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Beltline Region (B-N-2) welds interval
107
B13.40 Core Support Structure (B-N-2) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Surfaces Same as for 1st Permissible
surfaces interval
Reactor Vessel (PWR)

B13.50 Interior Attachments Within Beltline Accessible Visual, VT-1 IWB-3520.1 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.60 Interior Attachments Beyond Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.2 Welds Same as for 1st Permissible
Beltline Region (B-N-2) welds interval
B13.70 Core Support Structure2 (B-N-3) Accessible Visual, VT-3 IWB-3520.3 Surfaces Same as for 1st Permissible
surfaces interval
NOTES:
(1) Areas to be examined shall include the spaces above and below the reactor core that are made accessible for examination by removal of
components during normal refueling outages.
(2) The structure shall be removed from the reactor vessel for examination.
(3) At 1st refueling outage, and subsequent refueling outages at approximately 3 year intervals.
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-O, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN CONTROL ROD HOUSINGS

Table IWB-2500-1

Reactor Vessel
B14.10 Welds in CRD Housing IWB-2500-18 Volumetric or surface IWB-3523 10% peripheral CRD Same as for 1st Permissible
housings interval
108
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-P, ALL PRESSURE RETAINING COMPONENTS
1st Deferral of
Item Parts Test Examination Acceptance Inspection Successive Examination to
No. Examined Requirements Method1 Standard Interval Inspection Intervals End of Interval
Reactor Vessel
B15.10 Pressure Retaining Boundary System leakage Visual, VT-2 IWB-3522 Each refueling outage2 Same as for Not permissible
test (IWB- 1st interval
5220)
Pressurizer
5220)
Steam Generators
5220)
109
Heat Exchangers
5220)
Piping
5220)
Pumps
5220)
Valves
5220)
NOTES:
(1) Visual examination of IWA-5240.
(2) The system leakage test (IWB-5220) shall be conducted prior to plant startup following reactor refueling outage.
Table IWB-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY B-Q, STEAM GENERATOR TUBING

Table IWB-2500-1

B16.10 Steam Generator Tubing in Straight Entire length Volumetric ** * *

Tube Design of tubing
B16.20 Steam Generator Tubing in Tubing hot Volumetric IWB-3521 * *

U-Tube Design leg side, U-
bend portion
and option-
ally cold
leg side
110
NOTES:
* The extent and frequency of examination shall be governed by the plant Technical Specification.
** In the course of preparation.
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-2500-1
FIG. IWB-2500-1 VESSEL SHELL CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD JOINTS
111
Fig. IWB-2500-2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWB-2500-2 VESSEL SHELL LONGITUDINAL WELD JOINTS
112
FIG. IWB-2500-3 SPHERICAL VESSEL HEAD

CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND MERIDIONAL WELD JOINTS
113
FIG. IWB-2500-4 SHELL-TO-FLANGE WELD JOINT
114
FIG. IWB-2500-5 HEAD-TO-FLANGE WELD JOINT
115
Fig. IWB-2500-6
116
FIG. IWB-2500-6 TYPICAL TUBESHEET-TO-HEAD WELD JOINTS

REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-2500-7(a)
FIG. IWB-2500-7(a) NOZZLE IN SHELL OR HEAD

(Examination Zones in Barrel Type Nozzles Joined by Full Penetration Corner Welds)
117
Fig. IWB-2500-7(b) 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWB-2500-7(b) NOZZLE IN SHELL OR HEAD

(Examination Zones in Flange Type Nozzles Joined by Full Penetration Butt Welds)
118
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-2500-7(c)
FIG. IWB-2500-7(c) NOZZLE IN SHELL OR HEAD

(Examination Zones in Set-On Type Nozzles Joined by Full Penetration Corner Welds)
119
Fig. IWB-2500-7(d) 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWB-2500-7(d) NOZZLE IN SHELL OR HEAD

(Examination Zone in Nozzles Integrally Cast or Formed in Shell or Head)
120
FIG. IWB-2500-8 SIMILAR AND DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS IN COMPONENTS, NOZZLES, AND PIPING
121
FIG. IWB-2500-8 SIMILAR AND DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS IN COMPONENTS, NOZZLES, AND PIPING
(CONT’D)
122
FIG. IWB-2500-9 PIPE BRANCH CONNECTION
123
124
125
FIG. IWB-2500-12 CLOSURE STUD AND THREADS IN FLANGE STUD HOLE
126
FIG. IWB-2500-13 WELDED ATTACHMENT
127
128

Note: Examination of surface areas may be limited to the portions of these areas that are accessible without removal
of support members.
129
FIG. IWB-2500-16 PUMP CASING WELD

[Type F Pump (Section III)]
130
FIG. IWB-2500-17 VALVE BODY WELDS
131
FIG. IWB-2500-18 CONTROL ROD DRIVE HOUSING WELDS
132
FIG. IWB-2500-20 EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION
133
ARTICLE IWB-3000
ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
IWB-3100 EVALUATION OF IWB-3113 Repair / Replacement Activity and

EXAMINATION RESULTS Reexamination
IWB-3110 PRESERVICE VOLUMETRIC AND The repair / replacement activity and reexamination
SURFACE EXAMINATIONS shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex-
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the
IWB-3111 General requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
(a) The preservice volumetric and surface examina- demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace-
tions required by IWB-2200 and performed in accord- ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table
ance with IWA-2200 shall be evaluated by comparing IWB-3410-1.
the examination results with the acceptance standards
specified in Table IWB-3410-1, except where IWB-
IWB-3114 Review by Authorities
3112(b) is applicable.
(b) Acceptance of components for service shall be in (a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reex-
accordance with IWB-3112, IWB-3113, and IWB-3114. amination results shall be subject to review by the
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the
plant site.
(b) Evaluation of examination results may be subject
to review by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction
at the plant site.
IWB-3112 Acceptance
(a) A component whose volumetric or surface exami-
nation either confirms the absence of or detects flaws IWB-3120 PRESERVICE VISUAL
that do not exceed the standards of Table IWB-3410- EXAMINATIONS
1 shall be acceptable for service, provided the verified IWB-3121 General
flaws are recorded in accordance with the requirements
of IWA-1400(h), IWA-2220(b), and IWA-6230 in terms (a) The preservice visual examinations required by
of location, size, shape, orientation, and distribution IWB-2200 and performed in accordance with IWA-
within the component. 2200 shall be evaluated by comparing the examination
(b) A component whose volumetric or surface exami- results with the acceptance standards specified in Table
nation (IWB-2200) detects flaws that meet the nonde- IWB-3410-1.
structive examination standards of NB-2500 and NB- (b) Acceptance of components for service shall be in
5300, as documented in Quality Assurance Records accordance with IWB-3122, IWB-3123, and IWB-3124.
(NCA-4134.17), shall be acceptable.
(c) A component whose volumetric or surface exami-
IWB-3122 Acceptance
nation (IWB-2200) detects flaws, other than the flaws
of IWB-3112(b), that exceed the standards of Table IWB-3122.1 Acceptance by Visual Examination
IWB-3410-1 is unacceptable for service, unless the (a) A component whose visual examination confirms
component is corrected by a repair / replacement activity the absence of the relevant conditions described in the
to the extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards standards of Table IWB-3410-1 shall be acceptable for
prior to placement of the component in service. service.
134
IWB-3122.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3133
(b) A component whose visual examination detects (b) When flaws are detected by a required volumetric
the relevant conditions described in the standards of or surface examination, the component is acceptable
Table IWB-3410-1 shall be unacceptable for service, for continued service provided the requirements of
unless such components meet the requirements of IWB- IWB-3112(b) or the acceptance standards of Table
3122.2 or IWB-3122.3 prior to placement of the compo- IWB-3410-1 are met.
nent in service. (c) Volumetric and surface examination results shall
be compared with recorded results of the preservice
IWB-3122.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Exami-
examination and prior inservice examinations. Accept-
nation. A component containing relevant conditions
ance of the components for continued service shall be in
shall be acceptable for service if the results of supple-
accordance with IWB-3132, IWB-3133, and IWB-3134.
mental examinations (IWB-3200) meet the requirements
of IWB-3110.
IWB-3122.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures IWB-3132 Acceptance
or Repair / Replacement Activity. A component con- IWB-3132.1 Acceptance by Volumetric or Surface
taining relevant conditions is acceptable for service Examination. A component whose volumetric or sur-
if the relevant conditions are corrected by a repair / face examination either reconfirms the absence of flaws
replacement activity or by corrective measures to the or detects flaws that are acceptable under the provisions
extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards of of IWB-3131(b) are acceptable for continued service.
Table IWB-3410-1. Confirmed changes in flaws from prior examinations
shall be recorded in accordance with IWA-1400(h),
IWA-2220(b), and IWA-6230. A component that does
not meet the acceptance standards of Table IWB-3410-
IWB-3123 Repair / Replacement Activity and 1 shall be corrected in accordance with the provisions
Reexamination of IWB-3132.2 or IWB-3132.3.
The repair / replacement activity and reexamination IWB-3132.2 Acceptance by Repair / Replacement
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- Activity. A component whose volumetric or surface
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the examination detects flaws that exceed the acceptance
requirements of IWA-2200; the recorded results shall standards of Table IWB-3410-1 is unacceptable for
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace- continued service until the additional examination re-
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table quirements of IWB-2430 are satisfied and the component
IWB-3410-1. is corrected by a repair / replacement activity to the
extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards of
IWB-3000.
(a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reex-
amination results shall be subject to review by the IWB-3132.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation.
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the A component whose volumetric or surface examination
plant site. detects flaws that exceed the acceptance standards of
(b) Evaluation of examination results may be subject Table IWB-3410-1 is acceptable for continued service
to review by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction without a repair / replacement activity if an analytical
at the plant site. evaluation, as described in IWB-3600, meets the accept-
ance criteria of IWB-3600. The area containing the
flaw shall be subsequently reexamined in accordance
IWB-3130 INSERVICE VOLUMETRIC AND with IWB-2420(b) and (c).
SURFACE EXAMINATIONS
IWB-3131 General IWB-3133 Repair / Replacement Activity and
Reexamination
(a) The volumetric and surface examinations required
by IWB-2500 and performed in accordance with IWA- The repair / replacement activity and reexamination
2200 shall be evaluated by comparing the examination shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex-
results with the acceptance standards specified in Table amination shall be conducted in accordance with the
IWB-3410-1, except where IWB-3131(b) is applicable. requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
135
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace- IWB-3142.4 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation.
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table A component containing relevant conditions is accept-
IWB-3410-1. able for continued service if an analytical evaluation
demonstrates the component’s acceptability. The evalua-
tion analysis and evaluation acceptance criteria shall
IWB-3134 Review by Authorities be specified by the Owner. A component accepted for
(a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reex- continued service based on analytical evaluation shall
amination results shall be subject to review by the be subsequently examined in accordance with IWB-
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the 2420(b) and (c).
plant site.
(b) Analytical evaluation of examination results as
required by IWB-3132.4 shall be submitted to the
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site.
IWB-3143 Repair / Replacement Activity and

Reexamination
IWB-3140 INSERVICE VISUAL
EXAMINATIONS The repair / replacement activity and reexamination
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex-
IWB-3141 General
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the
(a) The visual examinations required by IWB-2500 requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
and performed in accordance with IWA-2200 shall be demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair / replace-
evaluated by comparing the examination results with ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table
the acceptance standards specified in Table IWB-3410-1. IWB-3410-1.
(b) Acceptance of components for continued service
shall be in accordance with IWB-3142, IWB-3143, and
IWB-3144.
IWB-3142 Acceptance (a) The Repair / Replacement Program and the reexam-
ination results shall be subject to review by the enforce-
IWB-3142.1 Acceptance by Visual Examination ment authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site.
(a) A component whose visual examination confirms (b) Evaluation analyses of examination results as
the absence of the relevant conditions described in the required by IWB-3142.4 shall be submitted to the
standards of Table IWB-3410-1 shall be acceptable for regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site.
continued service.
(b) A component whose visual examination detects
the relevant conditions described in the standards of
Table IWB-3410-1 shall be unacceptable for continued
service, unless such components meet the requirements
of IWB-3142.2, IWB-3142.3, or IWB-3142.4.
IWB-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL
EXAMINATIONS
IWB-3142.2 Acceptance by Supplemental Exami-
(a) Volumetric or surface examinations that detect
nation. A component containing relevant conditions
flaws which require evaluation in accordance with the
shall be acceptable for continued service if the results
requirements of IWB-3100 may be supplemented by
of supplemental examinations (IWB-3200) meet the
other examination methods and techniques (IWA-2240)
requirements of IWB-3130.
to determine the character of the flaw (i.e., size, shape,
IWB-3142.3 Acceptance by Corrective Measures and orientation).
or Repair / Replacement Activity. A component con- (b) Visual examinations that detect relevant condi-
taining relevant conditions is acceptable for continued tions described in the standards of this Article may be
service if the relevant conditions are corrected by a supplemented by surface or volumetric examinations
repair / replacement activity or by corrective measures to determine the extent of the unacceptable conditions
to the extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards and the need for corrective measures, analytical evalua-
of Table IWB-3410-1. tion or repair / replacement activities.
136
TABLE IWB-3410-1
Examination Acceptance
Category Component and Part Examined Standard
B-A, B-B Vessel welds IWB-3510
B-D Full penetration welded nozzles in vessels IWB-3512
B-F, B-J Dissimilar and similar metal welds in piping and IWB-3514
vessel nozzles
B-G-1 Bolting greater than 2 in. in diameter IWB-3515
IWB-3517
B-G-2 Bolting 2 in. in diameter and less IWB-3517
B-K Welded attachments for vessels, piping, pumps, and IWB-3516
valves
B-L-1, B-M-1 Welds in pumps and valves IWB-3518
B-L-2, B-M-2 Pump casings and valve bodies IWB-3519
B-N-1, B-N-2, B-N-3 Interior surfaces and internal components of reac- IWB-3520
tor vessels
B-O Control rod drive housing welds IWB-3523
B-P Pressure retaining boundary IWB-3522
B-Q Steam generator tubing IWB-3521
IWB-3400 STANDARDS (c) Modified standards shall not allow greater flaw
sizes than those contained in this Article for the applica-
IWB-3410 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
ble examination category.
The acceptance standards referenced in Table IWB- (d) Modified acceptance standards shall be filed with
3410-1 shall be applied to determine acceptability for the regulatory and enforcement authorities having juris-
service. The following conditions shall apply. diction at the plant site.
IWB-3410.1 Application of Standards
(a) The acceptance standards for ferritic steel compo-
nents shall only be applicable to those components
whose material properties are in accordance with those
stated in the referenced table.
(b) The acceptance standards for ferritic steel compo-
nents shall be applicable where the maximum postulated IWB-3420 CHARACTERIZATION
defect that determines the limiting operating conditions
Each detected flaw or group of flaws shall be charac-
conforms with the recommendations stated in Section
terized by the rules of IWA-3300 to establish the
III, Division 1 — Appendices.
dimensions of the flaws. These dimensions shall be
IWB-3410.2 Modification of Standards used in conjunction with the acceptance standards of
(a) Where less than the maximum postulated defect IWB-3500.
is used, as permitted by Appendix G of Section III,
Division 1 — Appendices, or operating conditions are
modified from those originally assumed, the acceptance
standards of this Article shall be modified.
(b) The Owner shall be responsible for modification
of acceptance standards as necessary to maintain the
equivalent safety margins1 of the acceptance standards
of this Article. IWB-3430 ACCEPTABILITY
Flaws that do not exceed the dimensions of allowable
1 For safety margins included in the acceptance standards, refer to flaws of IWB-3500 for the respective examination
report listed under 8(f)(1) of the Organization of Section XI. category shall be acceptable.
137
IWB-3500 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWB-3510.3
TABLE IWB-3510-1
ALLOWABLE PLANAR FLAWS
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NB-2331 and G-2110(b) of Section III
Volumetric Examination Method, Nominal Wall Thickness,1,2 t, in.

21⁄2 and less 4 to 12 16 and greater
Aspect Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface

Ratio,1 Flaw,5 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,5 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,5 Flaw,3,4
a/ ø a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, %
0.0 3.1 3.4Y 1.9 2.0Y 1.4 1.5Y
0.05 3.3 3.8Y 2.0 2.2Y 1.5 1.7Y
0.10 3.6 4.3Y 2.2 2.5Y 1.7 1.9Y
0.15 4.1 4.9Y 2.5 2.9Y 1.9 2.1Y
0.20 4.7 5.7Y 2.8 3.3Y 2.1 2.5Y
0.25 5.5 6.6Y 3.3 3.8Y 2.5 2.8Y
0.30 6.4 7.8Y 3.8 4.4Y 2.9 3.3Y
0.35 7.4 9.0Y 4.4 5.1Y 3.3 3.8Y
0.40 8.3 10.5Y 5.0 5.8Y 3.8 4.3Y
0.45 8.5 12.3Y 5.1 6.7Y 3.9 4.9Y
0.50 8.7 14.3Y 5.2 7.6Y 4.0 5.6Y
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a/ø and thickness t, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer to IWA-3200(b).
(2) Component thickness t is measured normal to the pressure retaining surface of the component. Where the section thickness varies, the
average thickness over the length of the planar flow is the component thickness.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw is 2a.
(4) Y p [(S/t)/(a/t)] or (S/a). Y is the flaw-to-surface proximity factor, and S is defined in IWA-3310 and IWA-3320. If S < 0.4d, the
subsurface flaw isclassified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
(5) Applicable to flaws in surface region B-E shown in Fig. IWB-2500-5 only if the maximum postulated defect of G-2120, Appendix G of
Section III, is justified. If a smaller defect is used, refer to IWB-3410.2.
IWB-3500 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS (d) Surface flaws within cladding are acceptable.
IWB-3510 STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION
IWB-3510.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws
CATEGORY B-A, PRESSURE
(a) The areas of allowable laminar flaws as defined
RETAINING WELDS IN REACTOR
by IWA-3360 within the boundary of the examination
VESSEL, AND EXAMINATION
zones delineated in the applicable figures specified in
CATEGORY B-B, PRESSURE
IWB-3510-1(a) shall not exceed the limits specified in
RETAINING WELDS IN VESSELS
Table IWB-3510-2.
OTHER THAN REACTOR VESSELS
(b) Laminar flaws that join with a planar flaw shall
IWB-3510.1 Allowable Planar Flaws be governed by the standards of Table IWB-3510-1.
(a) The size of allowable planar flaws within the
boundary of the examination volumes specified in Figs. IWB-3510.3 Allowable Linear Flaws
IWB-2500-1 through IWB-2500-6 shall not exceed the (a) The size of allowable linear flaws as detected
limits specified in Table IWB-3510-1. by a surface examination (MT /PT) or volumetric exami-
(b) Where a flaw extends or lies beyond the examina- nation (RT) within the examination boundary shown
tion volumes as detected by the procedures used to in Figs. IWB-2500-1 through IWB-2500-6 shall not
examine the specified volumes, the overall size of the exceed the limits specified in Table IWB-3510-3.
flaw shall be compared with the standards specified in (b) Where a flaw extends beyond the examination
Table IWB-3510-1. boundaries, or separate linear flaws lie both within and
(c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character- beyond the boundaries but are characterized as a single
ized as separate flaws by IWA-3330 are allowable, flaw by IWA-3400, the overall flaw size shall be
provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met. compared with the standards of Table IWB-3510-3.
138
IWB-3512 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3514.1
TABLE IWB-3510-2 (b) The size of allowable planar flaws detected in

ALLOWABLE LAMINAR FLAWS the vessel shell (or head) material adjoining the nozzle
and weld areas and within the boundary of the examina-
Component Thickness,1 Laminar Area,2 tion volumes specified in Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) through
t, in. A, sq. in.
IWB-2500-7(d) shall not exceed the limits of Table
2.5 7.5 IWB-3510-1.
4 12 (c) The component thickness t to be applied in
6 18
8 24 calculating the flaw a / t ratio for comparison with the
10 30 standards in Table IWB-3510-1 or IWB-3512-1, as
12 36 applicable, shall be selected as specified in Table IWB-
14 42 3512-2. This table lists the component thicknesses
16 and greater 52 as a function of flaw location for each type nozzle
NOTES: configuration as shown in Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) through
(1) For intermediate thicknesses, linear interpolation of area is per-
missible. Refer to IWA-3200(c).
IWB-2500-7(d).
(2) The area of a laminar flaw is defined in IWA-3360. (d) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character-
ized as separate flaws by IWA-3300 are allowable,
provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met.
IWB-3512.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws
TABLE IWB-3510-3 (a) Laminar flaws in vessel shell or head material
ALLOWABLE LINEAR FLAWS1 within the boundary of the examination volumes speci-
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements fied in Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) through IWB-2500-7(d)
of NB-2331 and G-2110(b) of Section III shall be governed by the standards of IWB-3510.2.
(b) Laminar flaws in the nozzle wall shall be consid-
Nominal ered as planar flaws and the standards of IWB-3512.1
Section Surface Subsurface shall apply.
Thickness,2 Flaw,1,3 Flaw,1
t, in. ø/t, % ø/t, %
21⁄2 and less 17.4 28.6 IWB-3514 Standards for Examination Category
4 through 12 10.4 15.2 B-F, Pressure Retaining Dissimilar
16 and greater 8.0 11.2
Metal Welds in Vessel Nozzles, and
NOTES: Examination Category B-J, Pressure
(1) Applicable to linear flaws detected by surface examination
(MT/PT) or radiographic examination (RT) method where flaw Retaining Welds in Piping
depth dimension a is indeterminate. If supplemental volumetric
examination (UT) is performed which determines the a and ø IWB-3514.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
dimensions, the standards of Table IWB-3510-1 shall apply. (a) The size of allowable planar flaws within the
(2) For intermediate thickness, linear interpolation is permissible. boundary of the examination surfaces and volumes
Refer to IWA-3200.
(3) Applicable to linear flaws in surface region B-E shown in Fig. delineated in Figs. IWB-2500-8 through IWB-2500-11
IWB-2500-5 only if the maximum postulated defect of G-2120, shall be in accordance with the standards of IWB-
Appendix G of Section III, is justified. If a smaller defect size 3514.2, IWB-3514.3, and IWB-3514.4, as applicable.
is used, refer to IWB-3410.2.
(b) Where flaws extend beyond the boundaries of
the examination surfaces and volumes, or separate
flaws are detected that lie both within and beyond the
boundaries but are characterized as a single flaw by
the rules of IWA-3300, the overall flaw size shall be
IWB-3512 Standards for Examination Category
compared with the standards of IWB-3514.1(a).
B-D, Full Penetration Welds of
(c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws that
Nozzles in Vessels
are characterized as separate flaws by IWA-3300 are
IWB-3512.1 Allowable Planar Flaws allowable, provided the requirements of IWA-3390
(a) The size of allowable planar flaws detected in are met.
the nozzle and weld areas within the boundary of the (d) Inner surface flaws detected by volumetric exami-
examination volume specified in Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) nation of piping components with austenitic cladding
through IWB-2500-7(d) shall not exceed the limits on the inner surface shall be governed by the following
specified in Table IWB-3512-1. standards.
139
Table IWB-3512-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 Table IWB-3512-2
TABLE IWB-3512-1
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NB-2331 and G-2110(b) of Section III
Volumetric Examination Method, Nominal Wall Thickness,1 t, in.

21⁄2 and less 4 through 12
Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface

Aspect Ratio,1 Flaw,2 Flaw,2–4 Flaw,2 Flaw,2–4
a/ ø a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, %
0.00 3.1 3.4Y 1.9 2.0
0.05 3.3 3.8Y 2.0 2.2
0.10 3.6 4.3Y 2.2 2.5
0.15 4.1 4.9Y 2.5 2.9
0.20 4.7 5.7Y 2.8 3.3
0.25 5.5 6.6Y 3.3 3.8
0.30 6.4 7.8Y 3.8 4.4
0.35 7.4 9.0Y 4.4 5.1
0.40 8.3 10.5Y 5.0 5.8
0.45 8.5 12.3Y 5.1 6.7
0.50 8.7 14.3Y 5.2 7.6
Inside corner region 2.5 Not applicable 2.5 Not applicable
NOTES:
(1) Dimensions of a and ø are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a /ø and thickens t, linear interpolation is permissible.
Refer to IWA-3200(b).
(2) See Table IWB-3512-2 for the appropriate component thickness t as a function of flaw location.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw is 2a (Fig. IWA-3320-1).
(4) Y p [(S/t)/(a/t)] p (S/a). If S < 0.4d, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
TABLE IWB-3512-2
COMPONENT THICKNESS VS FLAW LOCATION
Component Thickness, t
Location of Flaw Barrel Type Nozzle Flange Type Nozzle Set-On Type Nozzle Integrally Cast Nozzle
[Note (1)] [Fig. IWB-2500-7(a)] [Fig. IWB-2500-7(b)] [Fig. IWB-2500-7(c)] [Fig. IWB-2500-7(d)]
Shell (or head) adjoining region ts ts ts n/a
Attachment weld region ts ts ts n/a
Nozzle cylinder region (tn1 + tn2)/2 (tn1 + tn2)/2 tn1 n/a
Nozzle inside corner region Smallest of tn1, tn2, or ts Smallest of tn1, tn2, or ts Smaller of tn1 or ts Smaller of tn1 or ts
NOTE:
(1) See Figs. IWB-2500-7(a) through (d) for definition of the examination volume for each of the examination regions.
140
IWB-3514.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3515.3
(1) Surface flaws that do not penetrate through 2500-8 through IWB-2500-11 shall not exceed the limits
the nominal clad thickness into base metal need not specified in Table IWB-3514-4.
be compared with the standards of IWB-3514.1(a). (b) Where a flaw extends beyond the boundaries of
(2) The size of allowable surface flaws that pene- the examination surfaces in Figs. IWB-2500-8 through
trate through the cladding into base metal shall not IWB-2500-11, or where discontinuous linear flaws lie
exceed the standards of IWB-3514.1(a), except that the both within and beyond the boundaries and are character-
depth a of the flaw shall be the total depth minus the ized as a single flaw by the rules of IWA-3400, the
nominal clad thickness. size of allowable overall linear flaws shall not exceed
the limits specified in Table IWB-3514-4.
IWB-3514.2 Allowable Flaw Standards for Ferritic
Piping
(a) The size of allowable flaws shall not exceed the
limits specified in Table IWB-3514-1.
(b) Where flaws on the outer surface of piping as
detected by the surface examination method during an IWB-3515 Standards for Examination Category
inservice examination exceed the allowable standards B-G-1, Pressure Retaining Bolting
of IWB-3514.7, the indications may be examined by Greater Than 2 in. (51 mm) in
the volumetric method. The acceptance of these flaws Diameter
shall be governed by the allowable flaw standards for
the volumetric examination method in Table IWB- IWB-3515.1 Allowable Flaws for Surface Examina-
3514-1. tions of Studs and Bolts. Allowable surface flaws in
vessel closure studs and pressure retaining bolting shall
IWB-3514.3 Allowable Flaw Standards for Austen- not exceed the following limits:
itic Piping (a) nonaxial flaws, 1⁄4 in. in (6 mm) length
(a) The size of allowable flaws shall not exceed the (b) axial flaws, 1 in. (25 mm) in length
limits specified in Table IWB-3514-2.
(b) Where flaws on the outer surface of piping as
detected by the surface examination method during an IWB-3515.2 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Ex-
inservice examination exceed the allowable standards, aminations of Studs and Bolts
the flaws may be examined by the volumetric method. (a) The size of allowable nonaxial flaws in vessel
The acceptance of these flaws shall be governed by the closure studs and pressure retaining bolting within the
allowable flaw standards for the volumetric examination boundary of the examination volume shown in Fig.
method in Table IWB-3514-2. IWB-2500-12 shall not exceed the limits specified in
Table IWB-3515-1.
IWB-3514.4 Allowable Flaw Standards for Dissim- (b) Any two or more subsurface flaws, at any diame-
ilar Metal Welds ter of the stud which combine to reduce the net diameter
(a) The size of allowable flaws in the carbon or low are acceptable, provided the combined flaw depths do
alloy steel end of a dissimilar metal weld joint shall not exceed the sum of the allowable limits specified
be governed by the standards of IWB-3514.2. in Table IWB-3515-1 for the corresponding flaw aspect
(b) The size of allowable flaws in the high alloy ratios, divided by the number of flaws.
steel or high nickel alloy end, and the weld metal of (c) Any flaw detected by the volumetric examination
a dissimilar metal weld joint shall be governed by the shall be investigated by a surface examination. If con-
standards of IWB-3514.3. firmed to be a surface flaw, the standards of IWB-
3515.1 shall apply. If not a surface flaw, the standards
IWB-3514.6 Allowable Laminar Flaws. The area of IWB-3515.2(a) and (b) shall apply.
of allowable laminar flaws, as defined by IWA-3360,
within the boundary of the examination zones shown
in Figs. IWB-2500-8 through IWB-2500-11, shall not IWB-3515.3 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Ex-
exceed the limits specified in Table IWB-3514-3. aminations of Threads in Stud Holes. The size of
allowable flaws within the boundary of the examination
IWB-3514.7 Allowable Linear Flaw Standards for volume in Fig. IWB-2500-12 and oriented on a plane
Ferritic Piping normal to the axis of the stud shall not exceed 0.2 in.
(a) The size of an allowable linear flaw within the (5 mm) as measured radially from the root of the
boundaries of the examination surfaces in Figs. IWB- thread.
141
TABLE IWB-3514-1
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NB-2300 and the specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F

Table IWB-3514-1
0.312 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 and Over

Aspect Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface
Ratio,1 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4
a/ ø a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, %
Preservice Examination
0.00 7.4 9.2Y 6.7 8.4Y 5.7 7.2Y 4.7 5.8Y 3.7 4.6Y
0.05 7.9 9.6Y 7.2 8.7Y 6.2 7.5Y 5.0 6.1Y 4.0 4.8Y
0.10 8.7 10.4Y 7.9 9.5Y 6.8 8.1Y 5.5 6.6Y 4.3 5.2Y
0.15 9.6 11.5Y 8.8 10.5Y 7.5 9.0Y 6.1 7.3Y 4.8 5.8Y
0.20 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 8.4 10.1Y 6.9 8.2Y 5.4 6.5Y
0.25 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 7.8 9.3Y 6.1 7.3Y
0.30 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 8.8 10.5Y 6.9 8.2Y
0.35 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 8.8 11.8Y 6.9 9.3Y
0.40 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 8.8 11.8Y 6.9 10.4Y
142
0.45 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 8.8 11.8Y 6.9 11.6Y
0.50 9.6 11.5Y 9.9 11.8Y 9.5 11.4Y 8.8 11.8Y 6.9 11.6Y
Inservice Examination
0.00 11.1 13.8Y 10.0 12.6Y 8.5 10.8Y 7.0 8.7Y 5.5 6.9Y
0.05 11.8 14.4Y 10.8 13.0Y 9.3 11.2Y 7.5 9.1Y 6.0 7.2Y
0.10 13.0 15.6Y 11.8 14.2Y 10.2 12.1Y 8.2 9.9Y 6.4 7.8Y
0.15 14.4 17.2Y 13.2 15.7Y 11.2 13.5Y 9.1 10.9Y 7.2 8.7Y
0.20 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 12.6 15.1Y 10.3 12.3Y 8.1 9.7Y
0.25 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 11.7 13.9Y 9.1 10.9Y
0.30 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 13.2 15.7Y 10.3 12.3Y
0.35 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 13.2 17.7Y 10.3 13.9Y
0.40 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 13.2 17.7Y 10.3 15.6Y
0.45 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 13.2 17.7Y 10.3 17.4Y
0.50 14.4 17.2Y 14.8 17.7Y 14.2 17.1Y 13.2 17.7Y 10.3 17.4Y
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a/ ø and thickness t, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer to IWA-3200(b) and (c).
(2) t is nominal wall thickness or actual wall thickness as determined by UT examination.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw in 2a.
(4) Y p(S/t)/(a/t) pS/a. If S < 0.4d, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
TABLE IWB-3514-2
Material: Austenitic steels that meet the requirements for the specified minimum yield strength of 35 ksi or less at 100°F

Aspect Surface
Ratio,1 Examination
a/ ø 0.312 1.0 2.0 3.0 Method
Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Nom. Wall Flaw
Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Thickness,1,2 Length,
a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % a/t, % t, in. ø, in.
0.00 9.4 9.4Y 8.5 8.5Y 8.0 8.0Y 7.6 7.6Y 0.312 or less 1⁄
8
0.05 9.6 9.6Y 8.6 8.6Y 8.2 8.2Y 7.7 7.7Y
0.10 9.8 9.8Y 8.8 8.8Y 8.3 8.3Y 7.8 7.8Y 1.0 3⁄
16
0.15 9.9 9.9Y 8.9 8.9Y 8.4 8.4Y 7.9 7.9Y
0.20 10.0 10.0Y 9.1 9.1Y 8.6 8.6Y 8.1 8.1Y 2.0 1⁄
4
0.25 10.0 10.0Y 9.2 9.2Y 8.7 8.7Y 8.2 8.2Y
0.30 10.0 10.0Y 9.4 9.4Y 8.9 8.9Y 8.3 8.3Y 3.0 and over 1⁄
4
0.35 10.0 10.0Y 9.5 9.5Y 9.0 9.0Y 8.5 8.5Y
143
0.40 10.0 10.0Y 9.7 9.7Y 9.1 9.1Y 8.6 8.6Y
0.45 10.0 10.0Y 9.8 9.8Y 9.3 9.3Y 8.7 8.7Y
0.50 10.0 10.0Y 10.0 10.0Y 9.4 9.4Y 8.9 8.9Y
0.00 11.7 11.7Y 10.6 10.6Y 10.0 10.0Y 9.5 9.5Y 0.312 or less 0.2
0.05 12.0 12.0Y 10.7 10.7Y 10.2 10.2Y 9.6 9.6Y
0.10 12.2 12.2Y 11.0 11.0Y 10.4 10.4Y 9.7 9.7Y 1.0 0.25
0.15 12.4 12.4Y 11.1 11.1Y 10.5 10.5Y 9.9 9.9Y
0.20 12.5 12.5Y 11.4 11.4Y 10.7 10.7Y 10.1 10.1Y 2.0 0.45
0.25 12.5 12.5Y 11.5 11.5Y 10.9 10.9Y 10.2 10.2Y
0.30 12.5 12.5Y 11.7 11.7Y 11.1 11.1Y 10.4 10.4Y 3.0 and over 0.65
0.35 12.5 12.5Y 11.9 11.9Y 11.2 11.2Y 10.6 10.6Y
0.40 12.5 12.5Y 12.1 12.1Y 11.4 11.4Y 10.7 10.7Y
0.45 12.5 12.5Y 12.2 12.2Y 11.6 11.6Y 10.9 10.9Y
0.50 12.5 12.5Y 12.5 12.5Y 11.7 11.7Y 11.1 11.1Y
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a/ ø and thickness t, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer to IWA-3200(b) and (c).
(2) t is nominal wall thickness or actual wall thickness as determined by UT examination.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw in 2a.
(4) Y p(S/t)/(a/t) pS/a. If S < 0.4d, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
Table IWB-3514-2
IWB-3516 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWB-3518.1
TABLE IWB-3514-3 is attached shall be governed by IWB-3510, IWB-3514,

ALLOWABLE LAMINAR FLAWS or IWB-3518, as applicable.
(b) Where laminar flaws are detected in an attachment
Nominal Pipe Wall Laminar Area,1,2 which does not transmit tensile load in the through-
Thickness, t, in. sq in.
thickness direction, the laminar flaw standards need not
0.625 and less 7.5 apply.
3.5 7.5
6.0 12.0
NOTES: IWB-3517 Standards2 for Examination Category
(1) Area of a laminar flaw is defined in IWA-3360. B-G-1, Pressure Retaining Bolting
(2) Linear interpolation with respect to nominal pipe wall thickness is Greater Than 2 in. (51 mm) in
permissible to determine intermediate value of allowable laminar
area. Refer to IWA-3200(c). Diameter, and Examination Category
B-G-2, Pressure Retaining Bolting 2
in. (51 mm) and Less in Diameter
IWB-3517.1 Visual Examination, VT-1. The follow-
IWB-3516 Standards for Examination Category ing relevant conditions3 shall require correction to meet
B-K, Welded Attachments for Vessels, the requirements of IWB-3122 prior to service or IWB-
Piping, Pumps, and Valves 3142 prior to continued service:
(a) crack-like flaws that exceed the allowable linear
IWB-3516.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
flaw standards of IWB-3515;
(a) The size of an allowable flaw within the boundary
(b) more than one deformed or sheared thread in
of the examination surfaces and volumes in Figs. IWB-
the zone of thread engagement of bolts, studs, or nuts;
2500-13, IWB-2500-14, and IWB-2500-15 shall not
(c) localized general corrosion that reduces the bolt
exceed the allowable flaw standards of this Article for
or stud cross-sectional area by more than 5%;
the applicable supported pressure retaining component
(d) bending, twisting, or deformation of bolts or
to which the attachment is welded. For indications
studs to the extent that assembly or disassembly is
located wholly on the attachment side of the line A-
impaired;
D in Figs. IWB-2500-13, IWB-2500-14, and IWB-
(e) missing or loose bolts, studs, nuts, or washers;
2500-15, the thickness and the surface of the attachment
(f) fractured bolts, studs, or nuts;
shall be considered the thickness and surface of the
(g) degradation of protective coatings on bolting
component for purposes of flaw indication characteriza-
surfaces; or
tion (IWA-3300) and for comparison with the allowable
(h) evidence of coolant leakage near bolting.
indication standards. For indications located in the
examination volume A-B-C-D, the indication shall be
characterized considering both the surface of the attach- IWB-3518 Standards for Examination Category
ment and the surface of the pressure boundary as the B-L-1 and B-M-1, Pressure Retaining
surface of the component for comparison with the Welds in Pump Casings and Valve
allowable indication standards. Bodies
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the boundaries of
IWB-3518.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
the examination surfaces and volumes, or separate
(a) The size of an allowable planar flaw within the
flaws are detected that lie both within and beyond the
boundary of the examination surfaces and volumes
boundaries but are characterized as single flaws by the
delineated in Figs. IWB-2500-16 and IWB-2500-17
rules of IWA-3000, the overall flaw size shall be
shall not exceed the limits specified in Tables IWB-
compared with the standards of IWB-3516.1(a).
3518-1 and IWB-3518-2, as applicable. Base material
(c) Where a flaw detected by a surface examination
flaws in castings that are permitted by the governing
method exceeds the allowable standards of IWB-
material specifications and accepted under the rules of
3516.1(a), an optional volumetric examination may be
Section III are allowable.
conducted, in which case the allowable flaw standards
for the volumetric examination method shall apply. 2 The standards apply to accessible surfaces of bolting when examined
IWB-3516.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws in place, and to all surfaces when bolting is removed for examination.
3 Relevant conditions are defined in IWA-9000; they do not include
(a) The allowable area of a laminar flaw within the
fabrication marks, scratches, surface abrasion, material roughness, and
boundary of the examination volume of the attachment any other conditions acceptable by material, design, and manufacturing
or the pressure retaining membrane to which the support specifications.
144
IWB-3518.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3519.1
TABLE IWB-3514-4
ALLOWABLE LINEAR FLAWS
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NB-2300 and specified
minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
Nominal Wall Thickness, t, in. [Note (1)]

Less than
Examination 0.312 0.312 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 and Over
Surface Examination Method, PT or MT
Preservice Examination [Note (2)]
Flaw length, ø, in. 1⁄
16
1⁄
8
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
Inservice Examination [Note (2)]

Flaw Length, ø, in. 3⁄
16
3⁄
16
5⁄
16
5⁄
8
7⁄
8
7⁄
8
Volumetric Examination Method, RT

Preservice Examination [Note (3)]
Surface Flaw Length, ø, in. ... 1⁄
8
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
1⁄
4
Subsurface Flaw Length, ø, in. ... 1⁄
4
3⁄
8
3⁄
4 1.0 1.0
Inservice Examination [Note (3)]

Surface Flaw Length, ø, in. ... 3⁄
16
5⁄
16
5⁄
8
7⁄
8
7⁄
8
Subsurface Flaw Length, ø, in. ... 1⁄
4
3⁄
8
3⁄
4 1.2 1.4
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate nominal wall thicknesses, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer to IWA-3200(c).
(2) The provision of IWB-3514.2(b) may be applied whenever these standards are exceeded.
(3) The distinction between surface and subsurface flaws shall be determined by the rules of IWA-3320 and IWA-3370, and may require special
examination techniques.
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the boundaries of (2) The size of an allowable surface flaw that
the examination surfaces and volumes, or separate penetrates through the cladding into base material shall
flaws are detected that lie both within and beyond the not exceed the standards of IWB-3518.1(a), except that
boundaries but are characterized as a single flaw by the dimension a of the flaw shall be the total depth
the rules of IWA-3300, the overall flaw shall be com- minus the nominal clad thickness.
pared with the standards of IWB-3518.1(a).
(c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character-
ized as separate flaws by IWA-3300 are allowable, IWB-3519 Standards for Examination Category
provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met. B-L-2, Pump Casings, and
(d) Where a flaw is detected by the radiographic Examination Category B-M-2, Valve
examination method and exceeds the allowable surface Bodies
flaw standards of Table IWB-3518-1 or Table IWB-
3518-2 (as applicable), a supplemental examination by
ing relevant conditions4 shall require correction to meet
a surface examination method may be performed, with
the requirements of IWB-3122 prior to service or IWB-
acceptance in accordance with Table IWB-3518-1 or
3142 prior to continued service:
Table IWB-3518-2. If acceptable by surface examina-
(a) corrosion or erosion that reduces the pressure
tion, the flaw shall then be compared with the allowable
retaining wall thickness5 by more than 10%;
subsurface flaw standards of Table IWB-3518-1 or
Table IWB-3518-2.
(e) A surface flaw in cladding detected by volumetric 4 Relevant conditions are defined in IWA-9000; they do not include
examination of austenitic clad ferritic base material fabrication marks, material roughness, casting irregularities, and other
conditions acceptable by material, design, and manufacturing specifi-
shall be governed by the following standards. cations of the component.
(1) Surface flaws that do not penetrate through the 5 Wall thickness is determined either from design information, con-
nominal clad thickness into base material are allowable. struction drawings, or by measurement on the component.
145
IWB-3519.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWB-3522.1
TABLE IWB-3515-1 the requirements of IWB-3122 prior to service or IWB-

ALLOWABLE PLANAR FLAWS 3142 prior to continued service:
Materials: SA-193 Grade B7, SA-320 Grade L43, (a) crack-like surface flaws on the welds joining the
SA-540 Class 3 Grades B23, B24 that meet attachment to the vessel wall that exceed the allowable
the requirements of NB-2333
linear flaw standards of IWB-3510; or
Diameter Range: Nominal Sizes Greater Than 4 in.
(b) structural degradation of attachment welds such
that the original cross-sectional area7 is reduced by
Aspect Subsurface2 more than 10%.
Ratio,1 a / ø Flaws, a, in.
0.0 0.10 ing relevant conditions6 shall require correction in meet-
0.10 0.10
0.20 0.15
ing the requirements of IWB-3122 prior to service or
0.30 0.15 IWB-3142 prior to continued service:
0.40 0.20 (a) structural distortion or displacement of parts to
0.50 0.25 the extent that component function may be impaired;
Diameter Range: Nominal Sizes 2 in. and Greater, (b) loose, missing, cracked, or fractured parts, bolting,
But or fasteners;
Not Over 4 in. (c) foreign materials or accumulation of corrosion
products that could interfere with control rod motion
Aspect Subsurface
Ratio,1 a / ø Flaws,2 a, in.
or could result in blockage of coolant flow through fuel;
(d) corrosion or erosion that reduces the nominal
0.0 0.075 section thickness by more than 5%;
0.10 0.075
0.20 0.10
(e) wear of mating surfaces that may lead to loss
0.30 0.10 of function; or
0.40 0.15 (f) structural degradation of interior attachments such
0.50 0.18 that the original cross-sectional area is reduced more
NOTES: than 5%.
(1) Dimensions a and ø are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate
flaw aspect ratios a / ø, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer
to IWA-3200(b). IWB-3521 Standards for Examination Category
(2) The total depth of an allowable subsurface flaw is twice the
listed value. B-Q, Steam Generator Tubes
IWB-3521.1 Allowable Flaws for U-Tube Steam
Generators. For single or multiple flaws of cracks,
(b) wear of mating surfaces that may lead to loss wastage, or intergranular corrosion in tubing of SB-
of function or leakage; or 163 material meeting the requirements of NB-2550 and
(c) crack-like surface flaws developed in service or having an r /t ratio of less than 8.70, the depth of an
grown in size beyond that recorded during preservice allowable O.D. flaw shall not exceed 40% of the tube
visual examination. wall thickness.
IWB-3521.2 Allowable Flaws for Straight-Tube
IWB-3520 Standards for Examination Category Steam Generators. In the course of preparation.
B-N-1, Interior of Reactor Vessel,
Examination Category B-N-2, Welded
IWB-3522 Standards for Examination Category
Core Support Structures and Interior
B-P, All Pressure Retaining
Attachments to Reactor Vessels, and
Components
Examination Category B-N-3,
Removable Core Support Structures IWB-3522.1 Visual Examination, VT-2. The follow-
ing relevant conditions8 that may be detected during
ing relevant conditions6 shall require correction to meet
7 Cross-sectionalarea is determined either from design information,
6 Relevant conditions are defined in IWA-9000; they do not include construction drawings, or by measurement on the weld.
fabrication marks, material roughness, and other conditions acceptable 8 Relevant conditions are defined in IWA-9000; they do not include
by material, design, and manufacturing specifications of the com- conditions that result in condensation on components, normal collec-
ponent. tion of fluid in sumps, and drips from open drains.
146
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Table IWB-3518-1
TABLE IWB-3518-1
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NB-2300 and the
specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
Thickness Range: 2 in. or greater
Volumetric
Volumetric (UT) Volumetric (RT) (RT)
and Surface Method
Aspect Surface Subsurface Nominal Wall Subsurface
Ratio,1 Flaw,2 Flaw,2–4 Thickness,1 Surface Flaw, Flaw,
a/ ø a/t, % a/t, % t, in. Length, ø, in. Length, ø, in.
Preservice Examination Preservice Examination
0.00 2.6 3.3Y 2.0 1⁄ 3⁄

4 4
0.05 2.8 3.5Y
0.10 3.1 3.7Y 3.0 1⁄ 3⁄
4 4
0.15 3.5 4.1Y
0.20 3.9 4.7Y 4.0 1⁄ 3⁄
4 4
0.25 4.4 5.3Y
0.30 5.0 5.9Y 5.0 1⁄ 3⁄
4 4
0.35 5.0 6.7Y
0.40 5.0 7.5Y 6.0 and over 1⁄ 3⁄
4 4
0.45 5.0 8.4Y
0.50 5.0 9.3Y
Inservice Examination Inservice Examination
0.00 3.9 4.9Y 2.0 0.3 0.8

0.05 4.2 5.2Y
0.10 4.6 5.5Y 3.0 0.45 0.9
0.15 5.2 6.3Y
0.20 5.8 7.0Y 4.0 0.6 1.2
0.25 6.6 7.9Y
0.30 7.5 8.8Y 5.0 0.75 1.5
0.35 7.5 10.0Y
0.40 7.5 11.2Y 6.0 and over 0.9 1.8
0.45 7.5 12.6Y
0.50 7.5 14.1Y
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a/ ø and thickness t, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer to
IWA-3200(b) and (c).
(2) Component thickness t is measured normal to the pressure retaining surface of the component. Where
section thickness varies, the average thickness over the length of the indication is the component thickness.
(4) Y p (S/t /(a/t) p S/a. If S < 0.4d, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
147
IWB-3522.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWB-3523.1
TABLE IWB-3518-2
Material: Austenitic stainless steels that meet the requirements for the specified
minimum yield strength of 35 ksi or less at 100°F
Thickness Range: 2 in. and greater
Volumetric
(RT) and
Surface
Volumetric (UT)2,3 Method Volumetric (RT)
Nominal Wall Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface

Thickness,1 Flaw, Flaw,4,5 Flaw, Flaw,
t, in. a, in. ø, in. a, in. ø, in. Length, ø, in. Length, ø, in.
2.0 0.17 1.04 0.17Y 1.04 1⁄ 3⁄

4 4
3.0 and over 0.24 1.44 0.24Y 1.44 1⁄ 3⁄
4 4
2.0 0.22 1.32 0.22Y 1.32 0.3 1.0

3.0 and over 0.30 1.80 0.30Y 1.80 0.45 1.0
NOTES:
(1) t is the nominal wall thickness at the section where the flaw is detected or the actual wall thickness as
determined by a UT examination. For intermediate wall thicknesses, linear interpolation is acceptable.
Refer to IWA-3200(c).
(2) The allowable flaws for preservice examination are based on the following equations:
a / t p (10.1 − 0.7t ) / 100, where t max. p 3

ø / t p (60.6 − 4.2t ) / 100, where t max. p 3
(3) The allowable flaws for inservice examinations are based on the following equations:
a / t p (12.7 − 0.9t ) / 100, where t max. p 3

ø / t p (76.2 − 5.4t ) / 100, where t max. p 3
(4) Y p (S / t ) / (a / t ) p S / a. If S < 0.4d, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y> 1.0, use Y p 1.0
the conduct of system pressure tests shall require correc- (e) discoloration or accumulated residues on surfaces
tion to meet the requirements of IWB-3142 and IWA- of components, insulation, or floor areas that may be
5250 prior to continued service: evidence of borated water leakage9 [IWA-5242(c)]; or
(a) leakage from noninsulated components (IWA- (f) leakages or flow test results from buried compo-
5241); nents (IWA-5244) in excess of limits established by
(b) leakage in excess of permissible levels defined the Owner.
by the Owner from components provided with leakage
limiting devices (IWA-5243);
(c) leakage9 from insulated components or inaccessi- IWB-3523 Standards for Examination Category
ble components that will require location of leakage B-O, Pressure Retaining Welds in
source (IWA-5242); Control Rod Drive Housings
(d) areas of general corrosion of a component re-
sulting from leakage [IWA-5250(b)]; IWB-3523.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
(a) The size of an allowable planar flaw within the
9 The leakage is the through-wall leakage that penetrates the pressure boundary of the examination surfaces and volumes
retaining membrane. delineated in Fig. IWB-2500-18 shall not exceed the
148
IWB-3523.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS IWB-3611
limits specified in IWB-3523.2 and IWB-3523.3, as (3) Category 3 — A subsurface flaw that lies in
applicable. both the ferritic steel and the cladding shall be treated
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the boundaries of as either a surface or a subsurface flaw depending on
the examination surfaces and volumes, or separate the relationship between S and d as shown in Fig.
flaws are detected that lie both within and beyond the IWB-3610-1.
boundaries but are characterized as a single flaw by (4) Category 4 — A subsurface flaw that lies
the rules of IWA-3300, the overall flaw size shall be entirely in the ferritic steel and terminates at the weld
compared with the standards of IWB-3523.1(a). metal interface shall be treated as either a surface or
(c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character- subsurface flaw depending on the relationship between
ized as separate flaws by IWA-3300 are allowable, S and d as shown in Fig. IWB-3610-1.
provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met. (5) Category 5 — A subsurface flaw contained
entirely in the ferritic steel shall be treated as either
IWB-3523.2 Allowable Flaw Standards for Surface a surface or a subsurface flaw depending on the relation-
Examination ship between S and d as shown in Fig. IWB-3610-1.
(a) The size of allowable flaws shall not exceed 3⁄16 (c) When examination results do not permit accurate
in. (4.8 mm) for the preservice examination and 1⁄4 in. determination of the flaw category, the more conserva-
(6 mm) for the inservice examination. tive category shall be selected.
(b) Where a flaw on the outer surface of the housing (d) The component containing the flaw is acceptable
exceeds the allowable standards, the housing may be for continued service during the evaluated time period
examined using the volumetric method, and the accept- if the following are satisfied:
ance standards of IWB-3523.3 shall apply. (1) the criteria of IWB-3611 or IWB-3612;
(2) the primary stress limits of NB-3000, assuming
IWB-3523.3 Allowable Flaw Standards for Volu- a local area reduction of the pressure retaining mem-
metric Examination brane that is equal to the area of the detected flaw(s)
(a) The depth of an allowable preservice flaw shall as determined by the flaw characterization rules of
not exceed 10% of weld thickness; the length shall IWA-3000.
not exceed 60% of weld thickness. (e) The evaluation procedures shall be the responsi-
(b) The depth of an allowable inservice flaw shall bility of the Owner and shall be subject to approval
not exceed 12.5% of weld thickness; the length shall by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the
not exceed 75% of weld thickness. plant site.
IWB-3611 Acceptance Criteria Based on Flaw

IWB-3600 ANALYTICAL EVALUATION Size
OF FLAWS A flaw exceeding the limits of IWB-3500 is acceptable
IWB-3610 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR if the critical flaw parameters satisfy the following criteria:
FERRITIC STEEL COMPONENTS 4
in. AND GREATER IN THICKNESS af < 0.1ac
(a) A flaw that exceeds the size of allowable flaws
defined in IWB-3500 may be evaluated by analytical af < 0.5ai
procedures such as described in Appendix A to calculate
its growth until the next inspection or the end of service where
lifetime of the component. afp the maximum size to which the detected flaw
(b) For purposes of evaluation by analysis, the depth is calculated to grow in a specified time period,
of flaws in clad components shall be defined in accord- which can be the next scheduled inspection of
ance with Fig. IWB-3610-1 as follows: the component, or until the end of vessel design
(1) Category 1 — A flaw that lies entirely in the lifetime
cladding need not be evaluated. acp the minimum critical flaw size of the flaw under
(2) Category 2 — A surface flaw that penetrates normal operating conditions
the cladding and extends into the ferritic steel shall be aip the minimum critical flaw size of the flaw for
evaluated on the basis of the total flaw depth in both initiation of nonarresting growth under postu-
the ferritic steel and cladding. lated emergency and faulted conditions
149
FIG. IWB-3610-1 CHARACTERIZATION AND PROXIMITY RULES FOR ANALYTICAL

EVALUATION OF CLAD COMPONENTS
150
IWB-3612 Acceptance Criteria Based on Applied (b) For normal conditions (including upset and test
Stress Intensity Factor conditions) excluding those described in IWB-3613(a):
A flaw exceeding the limits of IWB-3500 is accept-
KI < KIa / √ 10
able if the applied stress intensity factor and the flaw
size af satisfy the following criteria.
(a) For normal conditions: where
KIp the maximum stress intensity factor for normal
KI < KIa / √ 10 conditions for the flaw size af
KIap the available fracture toughness based on crack
arrest for the corresponding crack tip temper-
where
ature
KIp the maximum applied stress intensity factor for
(c) For emergency and faulted conditions:
normal (including upset and test) conditions for
the flaw size af (defined in IWB-3611)
KI < KIc / √ 2
KIap the available fracture toughness based on crack
arrest for the corresponding crack tip temper-
ature where
(b) For emergency and faulted conditions: KIp the maximum applied stress intensity factor for
the flaw size af under emergency and faulted
KI < KIc / √ 2 conditions
KIcp the available fracture toughness based on frac-
ture initiation for the corresponding crack tip
where temperature
KIp the maximum applied stress intensity factor for
the flaw size af under emergency and faulted
conditions
KIcp the available fracture toughness based on frac- IWB-3620 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
ture initiation for the corresponding crack tip FERRITIC COMPONENTS LESS
temperature THAN 4 in. IN THICKNESS
These criteria are in the course of preparation. In
the interim, the criteria of IWB-3610 may be applied.
IWB-3613 Acceptance Criteria for Flanges and
Shell Regions Near Structural
Discontinuities
IWB-3630 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
The following criteria shall be used for the evaluation STEAM GENERATOR TUBING
of flaws in areas such as vessel-flange and tophead-
flange intersections (NB-3213.2 and NB-3213.3) where Evaluation of cracks, wastage, or intergranular corro-
the bolt-up loads play a significant role. A flaw ex- sion in steam generator tubes that exceed the allowable
ceeding the limits of IWB-3500 is acceptable if the flaw standards of IWB-3521 shall be performed by
applied stress intensity factor satisfies the following analyses acceptable to the regulatory authority having
limits. jurisdiction at the plant site.
(a) For conditions of bolt-up and pressurization not
exceeding 20% of the Design Pressure, during which
the minimum temperature is not less than RTNDT + 60°F: IWB-3640 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
KI < KIa / √ 2 AUSTENITIC PIPING
Piping containing a flaw exceeding the allowable
where flaw standards of IWB-3514.3 may be evaluated to
KIp the maximum stress intensity factor correspond- determine its acceptability for continued service in
ing to the final size af (defined in IWB-3611) accordance with the evaluation procedures and accept-
KIap the available fracture toughness based on crack ance criteria of IWB-3641 or IWB-3642. The evaluation
arrest for the corresponding crack tip temper- procedures and acceptance criteria shall be the responsi-
ature bility of the Owner and shall be subject to approval
151
of the regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the ing to flaw length øf for normal operating (in-
plant site. cluding upset and test) conditions
aop the maximum allowable flaw depth correspond-
ing to the flaw length øf for postulated emer-
gency and faulted conditions
IWB-3641 Evaluation Procedures Based on Flaw
(b) The time interval selected for flaw growth analysis
Size
(i.e., evaluation period) shall be either until the next
Evaluation procedures based on flaw size may be inspection or until the end of service lifetime of the item.
used subject to the following: (c) Using the applied stress values, such as those
(a) The evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria referenced by Appendix C, and the øf flaw parameter
are applicable to austenitic pipe NPS 4 (DN100) or defined in IWB-3641.2(a), the maximum allowable flaw
greater and portions of adjoining pipe fittings within depth, an, of a circumferential flaw under normal op-
a distance of √ rt of the weld center line (where r is erating conditions shall be calculated from Table IWB-
the nominal outside radius and t is the nominal thickness 3641-1 for flaws in base material and associated welds.
of the pipe). Similarly, the maximum allowable flaw depth, ao, of
(b) The evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria a circumferential flaw under emergency and faulted
are applicable to pipe and pipe fittings (and associated conditions shall be calculated from Table IWB-3641-
weld materials) which: 2 for flaws in base material and associated welds. The
(1) are made of wrought stainless steel, Ni–Cr– weld-base metal interface is defined in Fig. IWB-3641-
Fe alloy, or cast stainless steel (with ferrite level less 1. Alternatively, the equations given in C-3300 and C-
than 20% or 20FN); 3400 may be used in lieu of Tables IWB-3641-1 through
(2) have a specified minimum yield strength less IWB-3641-4.
than 45 ksi (310 MPa); and (d) Using the stress ratio and øf flaw parameter, the
(3) have Sm values given in Table I-1.2 of Sec- maximum allowable flaw depth of an axial flaw under
tion III. normal conditions an shall be calculated from Table
(c) For cast stainless steel materials, adequate tough- IWB-3641-3. Similarly, the maximum allowable flaw
ness for the pipe to reach limit load after aging shall depth of an axial flaw under emergency and faulted
be demonstrated. conditions ao shall be calculated from Table IWB-
3641-4.
IWB-3641.1 Methodology
(a) A flaw growth analysis shall be performed on IWB-3641.3 Acceptance Criteria. Piping containing
the detected flaw to determine its maximum growth a flaw exceeding the allowable flaw standards of IWB-
due to fatigue and stress corrosion cracking mechanisms, 3514.3 is acceptable for continued service until the end
or both, where applicable, during a specified evaluation of the evaluation period if the following criteria are
period. satisfied:
(b) The calculated maximum flaw dimensions at the (a) For circumferential flaws
end of the evaluation period shall be compared with (1) af < an (Table IWB-3641-1) and
the calculated maximum allowable flaw dimensions for (2) af < ao (Table IWB-3641-2)
both normal operating conditions and emergency and (b) For axial flaws
faulted conditions to determine the acceptability of the (1) af < an (Table IWB-3641-3) and
item for continued service. (2) af < ao (Table IWB-3641-4)
IWB-3641.2 Evaluation
(a) The flaw shall be evaluated by analytical proce-
IWB-3642 Evaluation Procedure Based on
dures such as those described in Appendix C to calculate
Applied Stress
the following critical flaw parameters:
af p the maximum depth to which the detected flaw The piping containing a flaw exceeding the allowable
is calculated to grow at the end of the evaluation flaw standards of IWB-3514.3 is acceptable for contin-
period ued service until the end of the evaluation period if
øf p the maximum length to which the detected flaw the evaluation procedures provide a safety margin, based
is calculated to grow at the end of the evaluation on load, equivalent to a factor of 3 for normal operating
period (including upset and test) conditions and a factor of
anp the maximum allowable flaw depth correspond- 1.5 for emergency and faulted conditions.
152
Table IWB-3641-1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1 COMPONENTS Fig. IWB-3641-1
TABLE IWB-3641-1
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW
DEPTH1 TO THICKNESS RATIO
FOR CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS — NORMAL OPERATING (INCLUDING UPSET AND TEST) CONDITIONS
Ratio of Flaw Length, ø f , to Pipe Circumference [Note (3)]

Stress Ratio 0.5
[See Note (5)] 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 or Greater
1.5 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.4 0.75 0.40 0.21 0.15 (4) (4)
1.3 0.75 0.75 0.39 0.27 0.22 0.19
1.2 0.75 0.75 0.56 0.40 0.32 0.27
1.1 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.51 0.42 0.34
1.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.63 0.51 0.41
0.9 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.59 0.47
0.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.53
0.7 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.58
≤ 0.6 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.63
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p an for a surface flaw
2an for a subsurface flaw
t p nominal thickness
Linear interpolation is permissible.
(2) Pm p primary longitudinal membrane stress (Pm ≤ 0.05 Sm )
Pb p primary bending stress
Sm p allowable design stress intensity (in accordance with Section III)
Pe p expansion stress resulting from restraint of free end displacement
Z p 1.15 [1 + 0.013 (D-4)] for SMAW
p 1.30 [1 + 0.010 (D-4)] for SAW
D p nominal outside diameter of the pipe, in.
(3) Circumference based on nominal pipe diameter.
(4) IWB-3514.3 shall be used.
3 4
P + Pb Z P
(5) Stress Ratio p m for base metal and GMAW and GTAW welds; and Pm + Pb + e for SAW and SMAW welds
Sm Sm 2.77
FIG. IWB-3641-1 WELD MATERIAL–BASE MATERIAL INTERFACE

DEFINITION FOR FLAW LOCATION
153
TABLE IWB-3641-2
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW
DEPTH1 TO THICKNESS RATIO
FOR CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS —
EMERGENCY AND FAULTED CONDITIONS
Stress Ratio Ratio of Flaw Length, ø f , to Pipe Circumference [Note (3)]

[See Note (5)] 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.75 1.0
3.0 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)

2.8 0.75 0.46 0.24 0.17 0.13 (4) (4) (4)
2.6 0.75 0.75 0.39 0.27 0.22 0.19 0.17 0.17
2.4 0.75 0.75 0.54 0.38 0.30 0.26 0.24 0.24
2.2 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.48 0.38 0.33 0.30 0.29
2.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.58 0.46 0.40 0.35 0.35
1.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.67 0.54 0.47 0.41 0.40
1.6 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.53 0.46 0.46
1.4 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.60 0.51 0.51
≤ 1.2 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.66 0.56 0.55
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p ao for a surface flaw
2ao for a subsurface flaw
(2) Pm p primary longitudinal membrane stress (Pm ≤ 1.0 Sm )
Pb p primary bending stress. The sum (Pm + Pb) shall not exceed 2Sy, where Sy is the Section III specified minimum yield stress.
Sm p allowable design stress intensity (in accordance with Section III)
Pe p expansion stress resulting from restraint of free end displacement
Z p 1.15 [1 + 0.013 (D-4)] for SMAW
p 1.30 [1 + 0.010 (D-4)] for SAW
D p nominal outside diameter of the pipe, in.
(3) Circumference based on nominal pipe diameter.
3 4
P + Pb Z P
(5) Stress Ratio p m for base metal and GMAW and GTAW welds; and Pm + Pb + e for SAW and SMAW welds
Sm Sm 2.77
IWB-3650 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND (a) The evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR are applicable to ferritic piping NPS 4 or greater and
FLAWS IN FERRITIC PIPING portions of adjoining pipe fittings within a distance
Ferritic piping containing a flaw exceeding the accept- of √ R2 t from the weld center line, where R2 is the
ance standards of IWB-3514.2 may be evaluated by outside radius and t is the thickness of the pipe.
analytical procedures to determine acceptability for (b) The evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria
continued service to the next inspection or to the end are applicable to seamless or welded wrought carbon
of service lifetime. The pipe containing the flaw is steel piping and pipe fittings that have a specified
acceptable for continued service during the evaluated minimum yield strength not greater than 40 ksi, and
time period if the criteria of IWB-3652(a) or (b) are their associated weld materials.
satisfied. The evaluation shall be the responsibility of
the Owner and shall be subject to the approval of the
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site. IWB-3652 Acceptance Criteria
The evaluation shall be submitted to the enforcement
authorities having jurisdiction at the plant site. A ferritic pipe containing a flaw exceeding the accept-
ance standards of IWB-3514.2 may be evaluated by
analytical procedures such as those described in Appen-
IWB-3651 Evaluation Procedures
dix H and are acceptable for continued service during the
Evaluation procedures based on flaw size or applied evaluated time period when the critical flaw parameters
stress such as those defined in Appendix H may be satisfy the criteria in IWB-3652(a) or (b).
used, subject to the following. (a) Flaw Size Criteria
154
TABLE IWB-3641-3
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION
PERIOD FLAW DEPTH1 TO THICKNESS RATIO FOR AXIAL FLAWS —
NORMAL OPERATING (INCLUDING UPSET AND TEST) CONDITIONS
Nondimensional Flaw Length [Note (3)] (øf /√ rt )

Stress
Ratio 12.0 or
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 Greater
≤0.4 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.70 0.68 0.67 0.66 0.65 0.64 0.64 0.64 (4)
0.5 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.72 0.65 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.55 (4) (4) (4)
0.6 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.64 0.55 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.7 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.53 0.44 0.40 0.38 0.37 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.8 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.40 0.32 0.28 0.26 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.9 0.75 0.70 0.42 0.23 0.17 0.15 0.14 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.0 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p an for a surface flaw
p 2an for a subsurface flaw
PD
(2) Stress ratio p / Sm
where 2t
P = maximum pressure for normal operating conditions

D = nominal outside diameter of the pipe
t = nominal thickness
Sm = allowable design stress intensity (in accordance with Section III)
(3) ø f = end-of-evaluation period for flaw length
r = nominal radius of the pipe
a f ≤ an the end-of-evaluation-period flaw length and depth, flaw

orientation, and the pipe failure mode.
and (b) Applied Stress Criteria
a f ≤ ao Pb ≤ Sc for circumferential flaws
where
or
af p the maximum depth to which the detected flaw
is calculated to grow by the end of the evaluation
sh ≤ Sa for axial flaws
period
øf p the maximum length to which the detected flaw
is calculated to grow by the end of the evaluation where
period Pbp the maximum applied pipe primary bending
anp the maximum allowable flaw depth correspond- stress
ing to the flaw length ø f for normal operating shp the maximum applied pipe hoop stress
(including upset and test) conditions Scp the allowable pipe bending stress for a pipe with
aop the maximum allowable flaw depth correspond- a circumferential flaw
ing to the flaw length øf for postulated emer- Sap the allowable pipe hoop stress for a pipe with
gency and faulted conditions an axial flaw
Tables of allowable flaw depths are given in Appendix Equations for these values are given in Appendix H.
H. The allowable flaw depths for the flawed pipe, an The allowable stress for the flawed pipe, Sc or Sa , is
and ao , are functions of the actual pipe stresses, the a function of the actual pipe stresses, the required
required safety margins, the pipe material properties, safety margins, the pipe material properties, the end-
155
TABLE IWB-3641-4
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION
PERIOD FLAW DEPTH1 TO THICKNESS RATIO FOR
AXIAL FLAWS — EMERGENCY AND FAULTED CONDITIONS
Nondimensional Flaw Length [Note (3)] (øf /√ rt )

Stress
Ratio 6.0 or
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Greater
≤0.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.70 0.68 (4)
1.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.72 0.65 0.61 (4) (4)
1.2 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.64 0.55 (4) (4) (4)
1.4 0.75 0.75 0.73 0.53 0.44 (4) (4) (4)
1.6 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.40 (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.8 0.75 0.70 0.42 0.23 (4) (4) (4) (4)
2.0 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p ao for a surface flaw
p 2ao for a subsurface flaw
PD
(2) Stress ratio p / Sm
2t
where
P = maximum pressure for normal operating conditions
D = nominal outside diameter of the pipe
Sm = allowable design stress intensity (in accordance with Section III)
(3) ø f = end-of-evaluation period for flaw length
r = nominal radius of the pipe
of-evaluation-period flaw length and depth, flaw orienta- (b) Appendix E provides procedures and criteria that
tion, and the pipe failure mode. may be used to evaluate the integrity of the reactor
vessel beltline for the out-of-limit condition.
(c) The evaluation procedures shall be the responsi-
bility of the Owner and shall be subject to acceptance
IWB-3700 ANALYTICAL EVALUATION OF
by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the
PLANT OPERATING EVENTS plant site.
IWB-3710 SCOPE
This Subarticle provides rules for evaluation of events
IWB-3730 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS
and conditions for pressure boundary components and
CRITERIA FOR PROTECTION
associated structures in operating plants.
AGAINST FAILURE
(a) During reactor operation, load and temperature
conditions shall be maintained to provide protection
IWB-3720 UNANTICIPATED OPERATING
against failure due to the presence of postulated flaws
EVENTS
in the ferritic portions of the reactor coolant pressure
(a) When an operating event causes an excursion boundary. Appendix G provides procedures that may
outside the normal operating pressure and temperature be used to define these load and temperature conditions.
limits defined in the plant Technical Specifications, an (b) For reactor vessels with material upper shelf
engineering evaluation shall be performed to determine Charpy impact energy levels less than 50 ft-lb, service
the effects of the out-of-limit condition on the structural and test conditions may be evaluated, using current
integrity of the Reactor Coolant System. geometry and material properties, to provide protection
156
against ductile failure. Appendix K contains procedures

that may be used to demonstrate protection against
ductile failure.
(c) The procedures used to define protection against
failure due to the presence of postulated flaws shall
be the responsibility of the Owner and shall be subject
to acceptance by the regulatory authority having jurisdic-
tion at the plant site.
IWB-3740 OPERATING PLANT FATIGUE

ASSESSMENTS
(a) Appendix L provides procedures that may be
used to assess the effects of thermal and mechanical
fatigue concerns on component acceptability for contin-
ued service.
(b) Appendix L provides procedures that may also
be used when the calculated fatigue usage exceeds the
fatigue usage limit defined in the original Construc-
tion Code.
157
ARTICLE IWB-5000
IWB-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS Table IWB-5230-1

TEST PRESSURE
IWB-5210 TEST
Test Temperature, °F Test Pressure1,2
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the 100 or less 1.10Po
method specified in Table IWB-2500-1, Examination 200 1.08Po
300 1.06Po
Category B-P.
400 1.04Po
(b) The system pressure tests and visual examinations 500 or greater 1.02Po
shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000 and
NOTES:
this Article. The contained fluid in the system shall (1) Po is the nominal operating pressure corresponding with 100%
serve as the pressurizing medium. rated reactor power.
(2) Linear interpolation at intermediate test temperatures is permis-
sible.
IWB-5220 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST

IWB-5221 Pressure
(a) The system leakage test shall be conducted at a ing to the selected test temperature, provided the require-
pressure not less than nominal operating pressure associ- ments of IWB-5240 are met for all ferritic steel compo-
ated with normal system operation. nents within the boundary of the system (or portion
(b) The system test pressure and temperature shall of system) subject to the test pressure (see IWA-5245).
be attained at a rate in accordance with the heat-up (b) Whenever a hydrostatic test is conducted in which
limitations specified for the system. the reactor vessel contains nuclear fuel and the vessel
is within the system test boundary, the test pressure
shall not exceed the limiting conditions specified in
IWB-5222 Boundaries the plant Technical Specifications.
(a) The pressure retaining boundary during the sys-
tem leakage test shall correspond to the reactor coolant
boundary, with all valves in the position required for
normal reactor operation startup. The visual examination
shall, however, extend to and include the second closed IWB-5240 TEMPERATURE
valve at the boundary extremity. (a) The minimum test temperature for either the
(b) The pressure retaining boundary during the sys- system leakage or system hydrostatic test shall not be
tem leakage test conducted at or near the end of each lower than the minimum temperature for the associated
inspection interval shall extend to all Class 1 pressure pressure specified in the plant Technical Specifications.
retaining components within the system boundary. (b) The system test temperature shall be modified
as required by the results obtained from each set of
material surveillance specimens withdrawn from the
IWB-5230 HYDROSTATIC TEST
reactor vessel during the service lifetime.
(a) The hydrostatic test may be conducted at any (c) For tests of systems or portions of systems con-
test pressure specified in Table IWB-5230-1 correspond- structed entirely of austenitic steel, test temperature
158
limitations are not required to meet fracture prevention

criteria. In cases where the components of the system
are constructed of ferritic and austenitic steels that are
nonisolable from each other during a system leakage
or system hydrostatic test, the test temperature shall
be in accordance with IWB-5230(a).
159
SUBSECTION IWC
COOLED PLANTS
IWC-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

IWC-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1200 Components Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1220 Components Exempt From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1221 Components Within RHR, ECC, and CHR Systems or Portions of
Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1222 Components Within Systems or Portions of Systems Other Than RHR,
ECC, and CHR Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-1223 Inaccessible Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
IWC-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

IWC-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2411 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2412 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
IWC-2430 Additional Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
IWC-2500 Examination and Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
IWC-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

IWC-3100 Evaluation of Examination Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3110 Preservice Volumetric and Surface Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3111 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3112 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3113 Repair /Replacement Activity and Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3114 Review by Authorities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3120 Inservice Volumetric and Surface Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3122 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
IWC-3122.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3122.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
161
IWC-3130 Inservice Visual Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3131 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3132 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3132.1 Acceptance by Supplemental Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3132.2 Acceptance by Corrective Measures or Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3132.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
IWC-3200 Supplemental Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3400 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3410 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3410.1 Applications of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3420 Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3430 Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3500 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3510 Standards for Examination Category C-A, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Pressure Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3510.1 Allowable Planar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3510.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3510.3 Conditionally Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3510.4 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
IWC-3511 Standards for Examination Category C-B, Pressure Retaining Welds of
Nozzles in Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3511.1 Allowable Planar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3511.3 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3512 Standards for Examination Category C-C, Welded Attachments for
Vessels, Piping, Pumps, and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3513 Standards for Examination Category C-D, Pressure Retaining Bolting
Greater Than 2 in. in Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
IWC-3513.1 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Examinations of Studs and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
IWC-3513.2 Allowable Flaws for Surface Examinations of Studs and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-3514 Standards for Examination Category C-F-1, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Austenitic Stainless Steel or High Alloy Piping, and C-F-2, Pressure
Retaining Welds in Carbon or Low Alloy Steel Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-3515 Standards for Examination Category C-G, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Pumps and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-3516 Standards for Examination Category C-H, All Pressure Retaining
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-3600 Analytical Evaluation of Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-3610 Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IWC-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

IWC-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5210 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5220 System Leakage Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5221 Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5222 Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5230 Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
IWC-5240 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
162
Figures
IWC-2500-1 Vessel Circumferential Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
IWC-2500-2 Typical Tubesheet-to-Shell Circumferential Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
IWC-2500-3 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
IWC-2500-4 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
IWC-2500-5 Welded Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
IWC-2500-6 Pressure Retaining Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
IWC-2500-7 Welds in Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
IWC-2500-8 Welds in Pump Casings and Valve Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
IWC-2500-9 Branch Connection Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
IWC-2500-10 Pipe Branch Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tables
IWC-2411-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
IWC-2412-1 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
IWC-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
IWC-3410-1 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
IWC-3510-1 Allowable Planar Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
IWC-3510-2 Allowable Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3510-3 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IWC-3511-2 Allowable Linear Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
163
ARTICLE IWC-1000
IWC-1100 SCOPE (c) Vessels, piping, pumps, valves, other components,

and component connections of any size in statically
This Subsection provides requirements for inservice pressurized, passive (i.e., no pumps) safety injection
inspection of Class 2 pressure retaining components systems3 of pressurized water reactor plants.
and their welded attachments in light-water cooled (d) Piping and other components of any size beyond
plants. the last shutoff valve in open ended portions of systems
that do not contain water during normal plant operating
conditions.
IWC-1200 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO
EXAMINATION IWC-1222 Components Within Systems or A99
Portions of Systems Other Than
IWC-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
RHR, ECC, and CHR Systems1
(a) For systems, except auxiliary feedwater systems
apply to Class 2 pressure retaining components and
in pressurized water reactor plants:
their welded attachments. (1) piping NPS 4 and smaller
(2) vessels, pumps, and valves and their connec-
tions in piping2 NPS 4 and smaller
IWC-1220 COMPONENTS EXEMPT FROM (b) For auxiliary feedwater systems in pressurized
EXAMINATION water reactor plants:
(1) piping NPS 11⁄2 and smaller
The following components or parts of components are (2) vessels, pumps, and valves and their connec-
exempted from the volumetric and surface examination tions in piping2 NPS 11⁄2 and smaller.
requirements of IWC-2500. (c) Vessels, piping, pumps, valves, other components,
and component connections of any size in systems or
portions of systems that operate (when the system
IWC-1221 Components Within RHR, ECC, and function is required) at a pressure equal to or less than
CHR Systems or Portions of Systems1 275 psig (1900 kPa) and at a temperature equal to or
(a) For systems, except high pressure safety injection less than 200°F (93°C).
systems in pressurized water reactor plants: (d) Piping and other components of any size beyond
(1) piping NPS 4 (DN100) and smaller the last shutoff valve in open ended portions of systems
(2) vessels, pumps, and valves and their connec- that do not contain water during normal plant operating
tions in piping2 NPS 4 (DN100) and smaller conditions.
(b) For high pressure safety injection systems in
pressurized water reactor plants: IWC-1223 Inaccessible Welds
(1) piping NPS 11⁄2 (DN40) and smaller
Welds or portions of welds that are inaccessible
(2) vessels, pumps, and valves and their connec-
due to being encased in concrete, buried underground,
tions in piping2 NPS 11⁄2 (DN40) and smaller
located inside a penetration, or encapsulated by
guard pipe.
1 RHR, ECC, and CHR systems are the Residual Heat Removal,
Emergency Core Cooling, and Containment Heat Removal Systems, 3 Statically pressurized, passive safety injection systems of pressurized
respectively. water reactor plants are typically called:
2 In piping is defined as having a cumulative inlet and a cumulative (a) accumulator tank and associated system
outlet pipe cross-sectional area neither of which exceeds the nominal (b) safety injection tank and associated system
OD cross-sectional area of the designated size. (c) core flooding tank and associated system
165

ARTICLE IWC-2000
IWC-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION TABLE IWC-2411-1

(a) All examinations required by this Article (with
the exception of Examination Category C-H of Table Inspection Period, Minimum Maximum
IWC-2500-1) for those components initially selected Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
for examination in accordance with Inspection Program Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
A or Inspection Program B and not exempt from 1st 3 100 100
inservice examinations by IWC-1220 shall be completed
prior to initial plant startup. 2nd 7 33 67
10 100 100
(b) Shop and field examinations may serve in lieu
of the on-site preservice examinations, provided: 3rd 13 16 34
(1) in the case of vessels only, the hydrostatic 17 40 50
test required by Section III has been completed; 20 66 75
(2) such examinations are conducted under condi- 23 100 100
tions and with equipment and techniques equivalent to
4th 27 8 16
those which are expected to be employed for subsequent 30 25 34
inservice examinations; 33 50 67
(3) the shop and field examination records are, or 37 75 100
can be, documented and identified in a form consistent 40 100 ...
with those required in IWA-6000.
IWC-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE IWC-2412 Inspection Program B
IWC-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM (a) The required examinations in each examination

category shall be completed during each inspection
Inservice examinations and system pressure tests may interval in accordance with Table IWC-2412-1, with
be performed during either system operation or plant the exception of welded attachments examined as a
outages. result of component support deformation under Exami-
nation Category C-C. If there are less than three items
or welds to be examined in an Examination Category,
IWC-2411 Inspection Program A
the items or welds may be examined in any two periods,
(a) The required examinations in each examination or in any one period if there is only one item or weld,
category shall be completed during each inspection in lieu of the percentage requirements of Table IWC-
interval in accordance with Table IWC-2411-1, with 2412-1.
the exception of welded attachments examined as a (b) If items or welds are added to the Inspection
result of component support deformation under Exami- Program, during the service lifetime of a plant, examina-
nation Category C-C. tion shall be scheduled as follows:
(b) Following completion of Program A after 40 (1) When items or welds are added during the
years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the first period of an interval, at least 25% of the examina-
10 year inspection interval of Program B. tions required by the applicable Examination Category
166

IWC-2412 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-2500
98 TABLE IWC-2412-1 IWC-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS

INSPECTION PROGRAM B
(a) Examinations performed in accordance with Table
Inspection IWC-2500-1, except for Examination Category C-H,
Period, that reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
Calendar Years of acceptance standards of Table IWC-3410-1 shall be
Plant Service Minimum Maximum extended to include additional examinations during the
Inspection Within the Examinations Examinations
Interval Interval Completed, % Credited, %
current outage. The additional examinations shall in-
clude an additional number of welds, areas, or parts1
All 3 16 50 included in the inspection item2 equal to 20% of the
7 501 75
10 100 100 number of welds, areas, or parts included in the inspec-
tion item that are scheduled to be performed during
Note: the interval. The additional examinations shall be se-
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations lected from welds, areas, or parts of similar material
shall be performed in the second period. and service. This additional selection may require inclu-
sion of piping systems other than the one containing
the flaws or relevant conditions.
(b) If the additional examinations required by IWC-
2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the
and Item Number for the added items or welds shall acceptance standards of Table IWC-3410-1, the examina-
be performed during each of the second and third tions shall be further extended to include additional exami-
periods of that interval. nations during the current outage. These additional exami-
(2) When items or welds are added during the second nations shall include the remaining number of welds, areas,
period of an interval, at least 25% of the examinations re- or parts of similar material and service subject to the same
quired by the applicable Examination Category and Item type of flaws or relevant conditions.
Number for the added items or welds shall be performed (c) For the inspection period following the period
during the third period of that interval. in which the examinations of IWC-2430(a) or (b) were
(3) When items or welds are added during the third completed, the examinations shall be performed as
period of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in originally scheduled in accordance with IWC-2400.
accordance with IWC-2412(a) for successive intervals. (d) If welded attachments are examined as a result
of identified component support deformation and the
results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
IWC-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS standards of Table IWC-3410-1 additional examinations
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on
(a) The sequence of component examinations which
an evaluation by the Owner.
was established during the first inspection interval shall
be repeated during each successive inspection interval,
to the extent practical.
(b) If a component is accepted for continued service IWC-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE
in accordance with IWC-3122.3 or IWC-3132.3, the TEST REQUIREMENTS
areas containing flaws or relevant conditions shall be
(a) Components shall be examined and pressure
reexamined during the next inspection period listed in
tested as specified in Table IWC-2500-1. The method
the schedule of the inspection programs of IWC-2400.
of examination for the components and parts of the
(c) If the reexaminations required by IWC-2420(b)
pressure retaining boundaries shall comply with those
reveal that the flaws or relevant conditions remain
tabulated in Table IWC-2500-1, except where alternate
essentially unchanged for the next inspection period,
examination methods are used that meet the require-
the component examination schedule may revert to the
ments of IWA-2240.
original schedule of successive inspections.
(d) If welded attachments are examined as a result
of identified component support deformation and the 1 Welds, areas, or parts are those described or intended in a particular
results of these examinations exceed the acceptance inspection item of Table IWC-2500-1.
2 Aninspection item, as listed in Table IWC-2500-1, may comprise
standards of Table IWC-3410-1 successive examinations
a number of welds, areas, or parts of a component required to be
shall be performed, if determined necessary, based on examined in accordance with the inspection plan and schedule
an evaluation by the Owner. (IWA-2420).
167
IWC-2500 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWC-2500
(b) Table IWC-2500-1 is organized as follows.

Examination
Category Examination Area
C-A Pressure Retaining Welds in Pressure Vessels
C-B Pressure Retaining Nozzle Welds in Vessels
C-C Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping,
Pumps, and Valves
C-D Pressure Retaining Bolting Greater Than 2 in.
in Diameter
C-F-1 Pressure Retaining Welds in Austenitic
Stainless Steel or High Alloy Piping
C-F-2 Pressure Retaining Welds in Carbon or
Low Alloy Steel Piping
C-G Pressure Retaining Welds in Pumps and Valves
C-H All Pressure Retaining Components
168
ASME B&PVC
TABLE IWC-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-A, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PRESSURE VESSELS
Examination
Item Requirements / Examination Acceptance Frequency of
No. Parts Examined Fig. No. Method5 Standard Extent of Examination Examination4
C1.10 Shell Circumferential Welds IWC-2500-1 Volumetric IWC-3510 Welds1 at gross structural Each inspection
discontinuity2 only interval
C1.20 Head Circumferential Welds IWC-2500-1 Volumetric IWC-3510 Head-to-shell weld1 Each inspection
interval
C1.30 Tubesheet-to-Shell Weld IWC-2500-2 Volumetric IWC-3510 Tubesheet-to-shell weld1 Each inspection
interval
169
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

NOTES:
(1) Includes essentially 100% of the weld length.
(2) Gross structural discontinuity is defined in NB-3213.2. Examples are junctions between shells of different thicknesses, cylindrical shell-to-conical shell junctions,
shell (or head)-to-flange welds, and head-to-shell welds.
(3) In the case of multiple vessels of similar design, size, and service (such as steam generators, heat exchangers), the required examinations may be limited to one
vessel or distributed among the vessels.
(4) The vessel areas selected for the initial examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence over the service lifetime of the component, to the extent practical.
(5) For welds in vessels with nominal wall thickness of 0.2 in. or less, a surface examination may be applied in lieu of a volumetric examination. The examination
shall include the weld and 0.5 in. on either side of the weld. The acceptance standard for the examination shall be those specified for piping in IWC-3514.
Table IWC-2500-1
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC
A99 TABLE IWC-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-B, PRESSURE RETAINING NOZZLE WELDS IN VESSELS

Table IWC-2500-1
Examination
No. Parts Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination4 Examination3
C2.10 Nozzles in Vessels ≤ 1⁄2 in. Nominal
Thickness
C2.11 Nozzle-to-Shell (Nozzle to Head or IWC-2500-3 Surface IWC-3511 All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
Nozzle to Nozzle) Weld piping runs2 interval
C2.20 Nozzles Without Reinforcing Plate

in Vessels > 1⁄2 in. Nominal Thickness
C2.21 Nozzle-to-Shell (Nozzle to Head or IWC-2500-4(a) or (b) Surface and volumetric IWC-3511 All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
Nozzle to Nozzle) Weld piping runs2 interval
C2.22 Nozzle Inside Radius Section IWC-2500-4(a) or (b) Volumetric IWC-3511 All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
piping runs2 interval
C2.30 Nozzles With Reinforcing Plate

in Vessels > 1⁄2 in. Nominal Thickness
170
C2.31 Reinforcing Plate Welds to IWC-2500-4(c) Surface IWC-3511 All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
Nozzle and Vessel piping runs2 interval
C2.32 Nozzle-to-Shell (Nozzle to Head or IWC-2500-4(c) Volumetric IWC-3511 All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
Nozzle to Nozzle) Welds piping runs2 interval
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

When Inside of Vessel is Accessible
C2.33 Nozzle-to-Shell (Nozzle to Head or Note (5) Visual, VT-2 No leakage All nozzles at terminal ends1 of Each inspection
Nozzle to Nozzle) Welds piping runs2 period

When Inside of Vessel Is Inaccessible
NOTES:
(1) Includes nozzles welded to or integrally cast in vessels that connect to piping runs (manways and handholes are excluded).
(2) Includes only those piping runs selected for examination under Examination Category C-F.
(3) The nozzles selected initially for examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence over the service lifetime of the component, to the extent practical.
(4) In the case of multiple vessels of similar design, size, and service (such as steam generators, heat exchangers), the required examinations be limited to one vessel
or distributed among the vessels.
(5) The telltale hole in referencing plate shall be examined for evidence of leakage while vessel is undergoing the system leakage test (IWC-5220) as required by
Examination Category C-H.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

TABLE IWC-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-C, WELDED ATTACHMENTS FOR VESSELS, PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES
Examination
No. Parts Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination2,3 Examination6
Pressure Vessels
C3.10 Welded Attachments IWC-2500-5 Surface IWC-3512 100% of required areas of each Each identified
welded attachment occurrence
and each in-
spection in-
terval4
Piping
and each in-
spection in-
terval5
Pumps
171
and each in-
spection in-
terval5
Valves
and each in-
spection in-
terval5
NOTES:
(1) Examination is limited to those welded attachments that meet the following conditions:
(c) the attachment weld joins the attachment either directly to the surface of the component or to an integrally cast or forged attachment to the component; and
(d) the attachment weld is full penetration, fillet, or partial penetration, continuous, or intermittent.
(3) Selected samples of welded attachments shall be examined each inspection interval.
(4) For multiple vessels of similar design, function, and service, only one welded attachment of only one of the multiple vessels shall be selected for examination.
(5) For piping, pumps, and valves, a sample of 10% of the welded attachments associated with the component supports selected for examination uner IWF-2510 shall
be examined.
(6) Examination is required whenever component support member deformation, e.g., broken, bent, or pulled out parts, is identified during operation, refueling,
maintenance, examination, or testing.
Table IWC-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-D, PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING GREATER THAN 2 in. IN DIAMETER
Examination
Table IWC-2500-1

No. Parts Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination1,2,3 Examination4
Pressure Vessels
C4.10 Bolts and Studs IWC-2500-6 Volumetric IWC-3513 100% bolts and studs at each Each inspection
bolted connection of com- interval
ponents required to be
inspected
Piping
inspected
Pumps
172
inspected
Valves
inspected
NOTES:
(1) The examination may be performed on bolting in place under load or upon disassembly of the connection.
(2) The examination of bolting for vessels, pumps, and valves may be ocnducted on one vessel, one pump, one valve among a group of vessels, pumps, and valves in
each system required to be examined and which are similar in design, size, function, and service. In addition, where the one component to be examined contains
a group of bolted connections of similar design and size (such as flange connections, manway covers), the examination may be conducted on one bolted connection
among the group.
(3) The examination of flange bolting in piping systems required to be examined may be limited to the flange connections in pipe runs selected for examination under
Examination Category C-F.
(4) The areas selected for the initial examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence over the service lifetime of the component, to the extent practical.
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-F-1, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL OR HIGH ALLOY PIPING
Examination
No. Parts Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination2 Examination4
C5.10 Piping Welds ≥ 3⁄8 in. Nominal Wall

Thickness for Piping > NPS 4
C5.11 Circumferential Weld IWC-2500-7 Surface and volumetric IWC-3514 100% of each weld requiring Each inspection
examination5,6 interval
C5.20 Piping Welds > 1⁄5 in. Nominal Wall Thick-

ness for Piping ≥ NPS 2 and ≤ NPS 4
C5.30 Socket Welds IWC-2500-7 Surface IWC-3514 100% of each weld requiring Each inspection
examination interval
C5.40 Pipe Branch Connections of Branch Piping
173
≥ NPS 2
C5.41 Circumferential Weld IWC-2500-9 to -13, Surface IWC-3514 100% of each weld requiring Each inspection
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

inclusive examination5 interval
NOTES:
See Notes at end of Examination Category C-F-1.
Table IWC-2500-1
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC
Table IWC-2500-1

EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-F-1, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL OR HIGH ALLOY PIPING
NOTES:
(1) Requirements for examination of welds in piping ≤ NPS 4 apply to PWR high pressure safety injection and auxiliary feedwater systems in accordance with the
exemption criteria of IWC-1220.
(2) The welds selected for examination shall include 7.5%, but not less than 28 welds, of all dissimilar metal, austenitic stainless steel or high alloy welds not exempted
by IWC-1220. (Some welds not exempted by IWC-1220 are not required to be nondestructively examined per Examination Category C-F-1. These welds, however,
shall be included in the total weld count to which the 7.5% sampling rate is applied.) The examinations shall be distributed as follows:
(a) the examinations shall be distributed among the Class 2 systems prorated, to the degree practicable, on the number of nonexempt dissimilar metal, austenitic
stainless steel, or high alloy welds in each system (i.e., if a system contains 30% of the nonexempt welds, then 30% of the nondestructive examinations
required by Examination Category C-F-1 should be performed on that system);
(b) within a system, the examinations shall be distributed among terminal ends, dissimilar metal welds, and structural discontinuities [See Note (3)] prorated, to
the degree practicable, on the number of nonexempt terminal ends, dissimilar metal welds, and structural discontinuities in that system; and
(c) within each system, examinations shall be distributed between line sizes prorated to the degree practicable.
174
(3) Structural discontinuities include pipe weld joints to vessel nozzles, valve bodies, pump casings, pipe fittings (such as elbows, tees, reducers, flanges, etc., conforming
to ANSI B16.9), and pipe branch connections and fittings.
(4) The welds selected for examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence, during subsequent inspection intervals over the service lifetime of the piping component,
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

(5) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, surface examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those portions of the welds
within the examination boundaries of intersecting circumferential welds.
(6) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, volumetric examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those portions of the welds
within the examination boundaries of intersecting circumferential welds. The following requirements shall also be met:
(a) When longitudinal welds are specified and locations are known, examination requirements shall be met for both transverse and parallel flaws at the intersection
of the welds and for that length of longitudinal weld within the circumferential weld examination volume.
(b) When longitudinal welds are specified but locations are unknown, or the existence of longitudinal welds is uncertain, the examination requirements shall be
met for both transverse and parallel flaws within the entire examination volume of intersecting circumferential welds.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-F-2, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN CARBON OR LOW ALLOY STEEL PIPING
Examination
No. Parts Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination2,5 Examination4
C5.50 Piping Welds ≥ 3⁄8 in. Nominal Wall
Thickness for Piping > NPS 4
C5.60 Piping Welds > 1⁄5 in. Nominal Wall Thick-

ness for Piping ≥ NPS 2 and ≤ NPS 4
C5.70 Socket Welds IWC-2500-7 Surface IWC-3514 100% of each weld requiring Each inspection
examination interval
C5.80 Pipe Branch Connections of Branch Piping
175
≥ NPS 2
C5.81 Circumferential Weld IWC-2500-9 to -13, Surface IWC-3514 100% of each weld requiring Each inspection
inclusive examination6 interval
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

NOTES:
See Notes at end of Examination Category C-F-2.
Table IWC-2500-1
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC
Table IWC-2500-1

EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-F-2, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN CARBON OR LOW ALLOY STEEL PIPING (CONT’D)
NOTES:
(1) Requirements for examination of welds in piping ≤ NPS 4 apply to PWR high pressure safety injection and auxiliary feedwater systems in accordance with the
exemption criteria of IWC-1220.
(2) The welds selected for examination shall include 7.5%, but not less than 28 welds, of all carbon and low alloy steel welds not exempted by IWC-1220. (Some
welds not exempted by IWC-1220 are not required to be nondestructively examined per Examination Category C-F-2. These welds, however, shall be included in
the total weld count to which the 7.5% sampling rate is applied.) The examinations shall be distributed as follows:
(a) the examinations shall be distributed among the Class 2 systems prorated, to the degree practicable, on the number of nonexempt carbon and low alloy steel
welds in each system (i.e., if a system contains 30% of the nonexempt welds, then 30% of the nondestructive examinations required by Examination Category
C-F-2 should be performed on that system);
(b) within a system, the examinations shall be distributed among terminal ends and structural discontinuities [see Note (3)] prorated, to the degree practicable,
on the number of nonexempt terminal ends and structural discontinuities in that system; and
(c) within each system, examinations shall be distributed between line sizes prorated to the degree practicable.
(3) Structural discontinuities include pipe weld joints to vessel nozzles, valve bodies, pump casings, pipe fittings (such as elbows, tees, reducers, flanges, etc., conforming
176
to ANSI B16.9), and pipe branch connections and fittings.
(4) The welds selected for examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence, during subsequent inspection intervals over the service lifetime of the piping component,
(5) Only those welds showing reportable preservice transverse indications need to be examined by the ultrasonic method for reflectors transverse to the weld length
sec11$$u75 05-12-99 06:53:06

direction, except that circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal weld shall meet Note (7).
(6) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, surface examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those portions of the welds
within the examination boundaries of intersecting circumferential welds.
(7) For circumferential welds with intersecting longitudinal welds, volumetric examination of the longitudinal piping welds is required for those portions of the welds
within the examination boundaries of intersecting circumferential welds. The following requirements shall also be met:
(a) When longitudinal welds are specified and locations are known, examination requirements shall be met for both transverse and parallel flaws at the intersection
of the welds and for that length of longitudinal weld within the circumferential weld examination volume.
(b) When longitudinal welds are specified but locations are unknown, or the existence of longitudinal welds is uncertain, the examination requirements shall be
met for both transverse and parallel flaws within the entire examination volume of intersecting circumferential welds.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-G, PRESSURE RETAINING WELDS IN PUMPS AND VALVES
Examination
No. Parts Examined Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination Examination3
Pumps
C6.10 Pump Casing Welds2 IWC-2500-8 Surface IWC-3515 100% welds in all components1 Each inspection
in each piping run examined interval
under Examination
Category C-F
Valves
C6.20 Valve Body Welds2 IWC-2500-8 Surface IWC-3515 100% welds in all components1 Each inspection
in each piping run examined interval
under Examination
Category C-F
177
NOTES:
(1) In case of multiple pumps and valves of similar design, size, function, and service in a system, the examination of only one pump and one valve among each group
of multiple pumps and valves is required.
(2) The examination may be performed from either the inside or outside surface of the component.
(3) The pumps and valves initially selected for examination shall be reexamined in the same sequence over the service lifetime of the component, to the extent practical.
Table IWC-2500-1
Table IWC-2500-1

EXAMINATION CATEGORY C-H, ALL PRESSURE RETAINING COMPONENTS
Item Test Examination Acceptance Frequency of

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method1 Standard Extent of Examination Examination
C7.10 Pressure retaining components System leakage Visual, VT-2 IWC-3516 Pressure retaining boundary Each inspection
test (IWC-5220) period
178
NOTES:
(1) Visual examination of IWA-5240.
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS Fig. IWC-2500-1
FIG. IWC-2500-1 VESSEL CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELDS
179
Fig. IWC-2500-2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWC-2500-2 TYPICAL TUBESHEET-TO-SHELL CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELDS

(Steam Generator Designs)
180
FIG. IWC-2500-3 NOZZLE-TO-VESSEL WELDS
181
FIG. IWC-2500-4 NOZZLE-TO-VESSEL WELDS
182
FIG. IWC-2500-4 NOZZLE-TO-VESSEL WELDS (CONT’D)
183
FIG. IWC-2500-5 WELDED ATTACHMENTS

Note: Examination of surface areas may be limited to the portions of these areas that are accessible without removal
of support members.
184
FIG. IWC-2500-6 PRESSURE RETAINING BOLTING
185
FIG. IWC-2500-7 WELDS IN PIPING
186
FIG. IWC-2500-8 WELDS IN PUMP CASINGS AND VALVE BODIES
187
FIG. IWC-2500-9 BRANCH CONNECTION WELDS
188
FIG. IWC-2500-10 PIPE BRANCH CONNECTION
189
190
191
192
ARTICLE IWC-3000
IWC-3100 EVALUATION OF amination shall be conducted in accordance with the

EXAMINATION RESULTS requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair /replace-
IWC-3110 PRESERVICE VOLUMETRIC AND ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table
SURFACE EXAMINATIONS IWC-3410-1.
IWC-3111 General
(a) The preservice examinations required by IWC- IWC-3114 Review by Authorities
2200 and performed in accordance with IWA-2200 (a) The Repair /Replacement Program and the reex-
shall be evaluated by comparing the examination results amination results shall be subject to review by the
with the acceptance standards specified in Table IWC- enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the
3410-1, except where IWC-3112(b) is applicable. plant site.
(b) Acceptance of components for service shall be in (b) Evaluation of examination results may be subject
accordance with IWC-3112, IWC-3113, and IWC-3114. to review by the regulatory authority having jurisdiction
at the plant site.
IWC-3112 Acceptance
(a) A component whose examination either confirms IWC-3120 INSERVICE VOLUMETRIC AND
the absence of or detects flaws that do not exceed the SURFACE EXAMINATIONS
standards of Table IWC-3410-1 shall be acceptable for
service, provided the verified flaws are recorded in IWC-3121 General
accordance with the requirements of IWA-1400(h) and (a) The examination results shall be compared with
IWA-6230 in terms of location, size, shape, orientation, the recorded results of the preservice and prior inservice
and distribution within the component. examinations. Acceptance of the components for contin-
(b) A component whose examination detects flaws ued service shall be in accordance with the acceptance
that meet the nondestructive examination standards of alternatives of IWC-3122.
NC-2500 and NC-5300 and are documented in Quality (b) Where a required inservice examination detects
Assurance Records (NCA-4134.17) shall be acceptable. flaws that are acceptable under IWC-3112(b), the com-
(c) A component whose examination detects flaws ponent shall remain acceptable for service provided the
other than the flaws of IWC-3112(b) that exceed the flaws satisfy the acceptance standards of NC-2500 and
standards of Table IWC-3410-1 is unacceptable for NC-5300 or the acceptance standards of Table IWC-
service unless the component is corrected by a repair / 3410-1.
replacement activity to the extent necessary to meet
the acceptance standards prior to placement of the
component in service. IWC-3122 Acceptance
IWC-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination. A com-
ponent whose examination reconfirms the absence of
IWC-3113 Repair /Replacement Activity and
flaws, detects flaws that do not exceed the acceptance
Reexamination
standards listed in Table IWC-3410-1, or detects flaws
The repair /replacement activity and reexamination that are acceptable in accordance with IWC-3121(b)
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- shall be acceptable for continued service. Confirmed
193
IWC-3122.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWC-3133
changes in flaws from prior examinations shall be 2200 shall be evaluated by comparing the examination
recorded in accordance with IWA-1400(h) and IWA- results with the acceptance standards specified in Table
6230. A component that does not meet the acceptance IWC-3410-1. Acceptance of components for continued
standards of IWC-3410 shall be corrected in accordance service shall be in accordance with IWC-3132, IWC-
with the provisions shown in IWC-3122.2 or IWC- 3133, and IWC-3134.
3122.3.
IWC-3122.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement
Activity. A component whose examination detects flaws
that exceed the acceptance standards of Table IWC-
3410-1 is unacceptable for continued service until the IWC-3132 Acceptance
additional examination requirements of IWC-2430 are (a) A component whose examination confirms the
satisfied and the component is corrected by a repair / absence of relevant conditions described in the standards
replacement activity to the extent necessary to meet of Table IWC-3410-1 shall be acceptable for continued
the acceptance standards of IWC-3000. service.
IWC-3122.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation. (b) A component whose examination detects relevant
A component whose examination detects flaws that conditions described in the standards of Table IWC-
exceed the acceptance standards of Table IWC-3410- 3410-1 shall be unacceptable for continued service
1 is acceptable for continued service without a repair / unless such components meet the requirement of IWC-
replacement activity if an analytical evaluation, as 3132.1, IWC-3132.2, or IWC-3132.3.
described in IWC-3600, meets the acceptance criteria
of IWC-3600. The area containing the flaw shall be IWC-3132.1 Acceptance by Supplemental Exami-
subsequently reexamined in accordance with IWC- nation. Components containing relevant conditions shall
2420(b) and (c). be acceptable for continued service if the results of
supplemental examination (IWC-3200) meet the require-
IWC-3124 Repair /Replacement Activity and ments of IWC-3120.
Reexamination
The repair /replacement activity and reexamination IWC-3132.2 Acceptance by Corrective Measures
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- or Repair /Replacement Activity. A component con-
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the taining relevant conditions is acceptable for continued
requirements of IWA-2200; the recorded results shall service if the relevant conditions are corrected by a
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair /replace- repair /replacement activity or by corrective measures
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of Table to the extent necessary to meet the acceptance standards
IWC-3410-1. of Table IWC-3410-1.
IWC-3125 Review by Authorities IWC-3132.3 Acceptance by Analytical Evaluation.

A component containing relevant conditions is accept-
(a) The Repair /Replacement Program and the reex- able for continued service if an evaluation demonstrates
amination results shall be subject to review by the the component’s acceptability. The evaluation analysis
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the and evaluation acceptance criteria shall be specified by
plant site. the Owner. Components accepted for continued service
(b) Evaluation analyses of examination results as based on evaluation shall be subsequently examined in
required by IWC-3122.3 shall be submitted to the accordance with IWC-2420(b) and (c).
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site.
IWC-3130 INSERVICE VISUAL

EXAMINATIONS
IWC-3133 Repair /Replacement Activity and
IWC-3131 General Reexamination
The visual examinations required by IWC-2500 and The repair /replacement activity and reexamination
performed in accordance with the procedures of IWA- shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000.
194
IWC-3134 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-3510.4
IWC-3134 Review by Authorities IWC-3500 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

(a) The Repair /Replacement Program and the reex-
IWC-3510 STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION
amination results shall be subject to review by the
CATEGORY C-A, PRESSURE
enforcement authorities having jurisdiction at the
plant site. RETAINING WELDS IN
(b) Evaluation analyses of examination results as PRESSURE VESSELS
required by IWC-3132.3 shall be submitted to the
regulatory authority having jurisdiction at the plant site. IWC-3510.1 Allowable Planar Flaws
(a) The size of allowable planar flaws within the
boundary of the examination volumes specified in Figs.
IWC-2500-1 and IWC-2500-2 shall not exceed the
IWC-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL limits specified in Table IWC-3510-1.
EXAMINATIONS (b) Where a flaw extends beyond the examination
(a) Examinations that detect flaws that require evalua- volumes, or separate flaws lie both within and beyond
tion in accordance with the requirements of IWC-3100 the boundaries but are characterized as a single flaw
may be supplemented by other examination methods by IWA-3400, the overall size of the flaw shall not
and techniques (IWA-2240) to determine the character exceed the limits specified in Table IWC-3510-1.
of the flaw (i.e., size, shape, and orientation). (c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character-
(b) Visual examinations that detect relevant condi- ized as separate flaws by IWA-3330 are allowable,
tions may be supplemented by other examinations provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met.
(IWA-2220, IWA-2230, or IWA-2240) to determine
the need for corrective measures, analytical evaluation,
or repair /replacement activities.
IWC-3510.2 Allowable Laminar Flaws. The areas
of allowable laminar flaws within the boundary of the
examination zone delineated in the applicable figures
IWC-3400 STANDARDS specified in IWC-3510.1(a) shall not exceed the limits
IWC-3410 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS specified in Table IWC-3510-2.
The acceptance standards referenced in Table IWC-
3410-1 shall be applied to determine acceptability for
service. The following conditions shall apply. IWC-3510.3 Conditionally Allowable Laminar
Flaws
IWC-3410.1 Applications of Standards. The accept-
(a) Laminar flaws that exceed the standards specified
ance standards for ferritic steel components shall only
in IWC-3510.2 shall be considered conditionally allow-
be applicable to those components whose material
able laminar flaws. In such cases, these laminar flaws
properties are in accordance with those stated in the
shall be included as additional areas of the component
referenced table.
subject to examination under the applicable examination
categories of Table IWC-2500-1.
(b) Laminar flaws that join with a planar flaw shall
IWC-3420 CHARACTERIZATION
be governed by the standards of IWC-3510.1.
Each detected flaw or group of flaws shall be charac-
terized by the rules of IWA-3300 to establish the
dimensions of the flaws. These dimensions shall be
IWC-3510.4 Allowable Linear Flaws
used in conjunction with the acceptance standards of
(a) The size of allowable linear flaws as detected
IWC-3500.
by either a surface examination (MT /PT) or volumetric
examination (RT) within the boundary of the examina-
tion volumes shown in Figs. IWC-2500-1 and IWC-
IWC-3430 ACCEPTABILITY 2500-2 and within the boundaries of the examination
Flaws that do not exceed the dimensions of allowable surfaces shown in Fig. IWC-2500-5 [see IWC-
flaws of IWC-3500 for the respective examination 3512.1(a)] shall not exceed the limits specified in Table
category shall be acceptable. IWC-3510-3.
195
Table IWC-3410-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 Table IWC-3510-1
TABLE IWC-3410-1
Examination Component and Acceptance

Category Part Examined Standard
C-A Welds in pressure vessels IWC-3510
C-B Vessel nozzle welds IWC-3511
C-C Welded attachments for vessels, IWC-3512
piping, pumps, and valves
C-D Bolting IWC-3513
C-F-1, C-F-2 Welds in piping IWC-3514
C-G Welds in pumps and valves IWC-3515
C-H Pressure retaining components IWC-3516
TABLE IWC-3510-1
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NC-2300 and
with specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
Thickness, t, in.1,2
≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0 ≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0
Aspect Surface Surface Surface Subsurface Subsurface Subsurface

Ratio,1 Flaw, Flaw, Flaw, Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4
a/ø a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, %
0.00 5.4 3.1 1.9 5.9Y 3.4Y 2.0Y
0.05 5.7 3.3 2.0 6.6Y 3.8Y 2.2Y
0.10 6.2 3.6 2.2 7.4Y 4.3Y 2.5Y
0.15 7.1 4.1 2.5 8.5Y 4.9Y 2.9Y
0.20 8.1 4.7 2.8 9.9Y 5.7Y 3.3Y
0.25 9.5 5.5 3.3 11.4Y 6.6Y 3.8Y
0.30 11.1 6.4 3.8 13.5Y 7.8Y 4.4Y
0.35 12.8 7.4 4.4 15.6Y 9.0Y 5.1Y
0.40 14.4 8.3 5.0 18.2Y 10.5Y 5.8Y
0.45 14.7 8.5 5.1 21.3Y 12.3Y 6.7Y
0.50 15.1 8.7 5.2 24.8Y 14.3Y 7.6Y
NOTES:
(1) Dimensions of a and ø are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a / ø and tickness t, linear interpolation is permissible.
(2) Component thickness, t, is measured normal to the pressure retaining surface of the component. Where the section thickness varies, the
average thickness over the length of the planar flaw is the component thickness.
(3) The total depth of a subsurface flaw is 2 a.
(4) Y p (S /t ) p S /a. If Y ≤ 0.4, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0, use Y p 1.0.
196
IWC-3510.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-3512.1
TABLE IWC-3510-2 volumes specified in Fig. IWC-2500-4 shall not exceed

ALLOWABLE LAMINAR FLAWS the limits of Table IWC-3510-1.
(c) Any two or more coplanar aligned flaws character-
Component Thickness,1 Laminar Area,2 ized as separate flaws by IWA-3300 are allowable,
t, in. A, sq in.
provided the requirements of IWA-3390 are met.
2.5 and less 7.5
4 12
6 18
(a) The size of allowable linear flaws, as detected
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate thcknesses, linear interpolation of area is permis-
by either a surface (PT /MT) or volumetric examination
sible. Refer to IWA-3200(c). (RT), within the boundary of the examination surfaces
(2) The area of a laminar flaw is defined in IWA-3360. and volumes shown in Figs. IWC-2500-3 and IWC-
2500-4 shall not exceed the limits specified in Table
IWC-3511-2.
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the examination
TABLE IWC-3510-3 boundaries, or separate linear flaws lie both within and
ALLOWABLE LINEAR FLAWS1 beyond the boundaries but are characterized as a single
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of flaw by IWA-3400, the overall flaw size shall be
NC-2300 and the specified minimum yield strength compared with the standards of Table IWC-3511-2.
of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
IWC-3511.3 Allowable Laminar Flaws
Surface Examination Method (PT / MT)
and Volumetric Examination (a) Laminar flaws in vessel shell or head material
Method (RT) within the boundary of the examination volumes speci-
fied in Fig. IWC-2500-4 shall be governed by the
Nominal Section Flaw
Thickness,2 t, in. Length, ø, in. standards of Table IWC-3510-2.
(b) Laminar flaws in the nozzle wall shall be consid-
≤1⁄2 3⁄
16
ered as planar flaws and the standards of IWC-3511.1
21⁄2 1⁄
4
≥4.0 3⁄ shall apply.
8
NOTES:
(1) Applicable to linear flaws detected by an examination method
where flaw depth dimension a is indeterminate.
(2) For intermediate thickness, linear interpolation is permissible.
Refer to IWA-3200. IWC-3512 Standards for Examination Category
C-C, Welded Attachments for Vessels,
Piping, Pumps, and Valves
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the examination (a) The size of an allowable flaw within the boundary
boundaries, or separate linear flaws lie both within and of the examination surfaces in Fig. IWC-2500-5 shall
beyond the boundaries but are characterized as a single not exceed the allowable flaw standards of this Article
flaw by IWA-3400, the overall flaw size shall be for the applicable supported pressure retaining compo-
compared with the standards of Table IWC-3510-3. nent to which the attachment is welded.
(b) Where a flaw extends beyond the boundaries of
the examination surfaces, or separate flaws are detected
IWC-3511 Standards for Examination Category
that lie both within and beyond the boundaries but are
C-B, Pressure Retaining Welds of
characterized as a single flaw by the rules of IWA-
Nozzles in Vessels
3000, the overall flaw size shall be compared with the
IWC-3511.1 Allowable Planar Flaws standards of IWC-3512.1(a).
(a) The size of allowable planar flaws in the nozzle (c) Where a flaw detected by a surface examination
and weld areas within the boundary of the examination method exceeds the allowable standards of IWC-
volume specified in Fig. IWC-2500-4 shall not exceed 3512.1(a), an optional volumetric examination may be
the limits specified in Table IWC-3511-1. conducted, in which case the allowable flaw standards
(b) The size of allowable planar flaws in the vessel for the volumetric examination method for the applicable
shell (or head) material adjoining the nozzle and weld supported pressure retaining component to which the
areas and within the boundary of the examination attachment is welded shall apply.
197
IWC-3513 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWC-3513.1
TABLE IWC-3511-1
Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of NC-2300 and
with specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
Thickness, t, in.1,2
≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0 ≤0.5 2.5 ≥4.0
Aspect Surface Surface Surface Subsurface Subsurface Subsurface

Ratio,1 Flaw,5 Flaw,5 Flaw,5 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4 Flaw,3,4
a/ø a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, % a /t, %
0.00 5.4 3.1 1.9 5.9Y 3.4Y 2.0Y
0.05 5.7 3.3 2.0 6.6Y 3.8Y 2.2Y
0.10 6.2 3.6 2.2 7.4Y 4.3Y 2.5Y
0.15 7.1 4.1 2.5 8.5Y 4.9Y 2.9Y
0.20 8.1 4.7 2.8 9.9Y 5.7Y 3.3Y
0.25 9.5 5.5 3.3 11.4Y 6.6Y 3.8Y
0.30 11.1 6.4 3.8 13.5Y 7.8Y 4.4Y
0.35 12.8 7.4 4.4 15.6Y 9.0Y 5.1Y
0.40 14.4 8.3 5.0 18.2Y 10.5Y 5.8Y
0.45 14.7 8.5 5.1 21.3Y 12.3Y 6.7Y
0.50 15.1 8.7 5.2 24.8Y 14.3Y 7.6Y
Inside corner rn / 60 in. rn / 60 in. rn / 60 in. Not Not Not
region5 applicable applicable applicable
NOTES:
(1) Dimensions of a and ø are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate flaw aspect ratios a / ø and tickness t, linear interpolation is permissible.
(2) See Fig. IWC-2500-4 for the appropriate component thickness, t.
(4) Y p (S /t ) / (a /t ) p S /a. If Y ≤ 0.4, the flaw is classified as a surface flaw. If Y > 1.0,use Y p 1.0.
(5) rn is the radius of the nozzle bore.

C-D, Pressure Retaining Bolting
Greater Than 2 in. (51 mm) in
Diameter TABLE IWC-3511-2
ALLOWABLE LINEAR FLAWS1
IWC-3513.1 Allowable Flaws for Volumetric Ex- Material: Ferritic steels that meet the requirements of
aminations of Studs and Bolts NC-2300 and the specified minimum yield strength
(a) The size of allowable nonaxial flaws in pressure of 50 ksi or less at 100°F
retaining bolting within the boundary of the examination
volume shown in Fig. IWC-2500-6 shall not exceed Surface Examination Method (PT / MT)
the limits specified in Table IWC-3513-1. and Volumetric Examination
Method (RT)
(b) Any two or more subsurface flaws, at any cross
section, which combine to reduce the net area are Nominal Section Flaw
acceptable provided the combined flaw depths do not Thickness,2 t, in. Length, ø, in.
exceed the sum of the allowable limits specified in ≤1⁄2 3⁄
16
Table IWC-3513-1 for the corresponding flaw aspect 21⁄2 1⁄
4
ratios, divided by the number of flaws. ≥4 3⁄

8
(c) Any flaw detected by the volumetric examination NOTES:

shall be investigated by a surface examination. If con- (1) Applicable to linear flaws detected by an examination method
where flaw depth dimension a is indeterminate.
firmed to be a surface flaw, the standards of IWC- (2) For intermediate thickness, linear interpolation is permissible.
3513.2 shall apply. If not a surface flaw, the standards Refer to IWA-3200.
of IWC-3513.1(a) and (b) shall apply.
198
IWC-3513.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-3610
IWC-3513.2 Allowable Flaws for Surface Exami- TABLE IWC-3513-1

nations of Studs and Bolts. Allowable surface flaws in ALLOWABLE PLANAR FLAWS
pressure retaining bolting shall not exceed the following Material: SA-193, SA-320, SA-354, SA-540 that meet
limits: the requirements of NC-2333 and the specified minimum
yield strength between 95 and 130 ksi at 100°F
(a) nonaxial flaws, 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in length
(b) axial flaws, 1 in. (25 mm) in length Diameter Range: Nominal Sizes Greater
Than 2 in.
IWC-3514 Standards for Examination Category Aspect Subsurface2

Ratio,1 a/ ø Flaws, a, in.
C-F-1, Pressure Retaining Welds in
Austenitic Stainless Steel or High 0.0 0.075
Alloy Piping, and C-F-2, Pressure 0.10 0.075
0.20 0.10
Retaining Welds in Carbon or Low 0.30 0.10
Alloy Steel Piping 0.40 0.15
0.50 0.18
These standards are in the course of preparation.
The standards of IWB-3514 may be applied. NOTES:
(1) Dimensions a and ø are defined in IWA-3300. For intermediate
flaw aspect ratios a/ ø, linear interpolation is permissible. Refer
to IWA-3200(b).
IWC-3515 Standards for Examination Category (2) The total depth of an allowable subsurface flaw is twice the
C-G, Pressure Retaining Welds in listed value.
Pumps and Valves
These standards are in the course of preparation.
The standards of IWB-3518 may be applied.
IWC-3600 ANALYTICAL EVALUATION
OF FLAWS
C-H, All Pressure Retaining IWC-3610 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
Components FERRITIC COMPONENTS
These standards are in the course of preparation. These criteria are in the course of preparation. In
The standards of IWB-3522 may be applied. the interim, the criteria of IWB-3610 may be applied.
199
ARTICLE IWC-5000
IWC-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS IWC-5230 HYDROSTATIC TEST 98
IWC-5210 TEST (a) The hydrostatic test pressure shall be at least

1.10 times the system pressure Psv for systems with
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at
Design Temperature of 200°F (93°C) or less, and at
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the
least 1.25 times the system pressure Psv for systems
methods specified in Table IWC-2500-1, Examination
with Design Temperature above 200°F (93°C). The
Category C-H:
system pressure Psv shall be the lowest pressure setting
(b)(1) The system pressure tests and visual examina-
among the number of safety or relief valves provided
tions shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000
for overpressure protection within the boundary of the
and this Article. The contained fluid in the system
system to be tested. For systems (or portions of systems)
shall serve as the pressurizing medium.
not provided with safety or relief valves, the system
(2) Alternatively, steam systems may use either
design pressure Pd shall be substituted for Psv.
water or gas as the pressurizing medium. When gas
(b) The test pressure for a pneumatic test conducted
is the pressurizing medium, the test procedure shall
in accordance with IWA-5211(c) shall be the system
include methods for detection and location of through-
leakage test pressure of IWC-5221.
wall leakage from components of the system tested.
(c) In the case of atmospheric storage tanks, the
nominal hydrostatic pressure, developed with the tank
filled to its design capacity, shall be acceptable as the
system test pressure.
(d) For 0–15 psi (0–103 kPa) storage tanks, the test
IWC-5220 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST pressure shall be 1.1 PG, Design Pressure of vapor or
gas space above liquid level for which overpressure
IWC-5221 Pressure protection is provided by relief valves.
The nominal operating pressure during system opera- (e) The hydrostatic test of the Class 2 portion of
tion shall be acceptable as the test pressure for the the Main Steam System in Boiling Water Reactor
system leakage test. (BWR) plants may be performed in conjunction with
the hydrostatic test of the Class 1 portion, when the
Class 2 portion is not capable of being isolated from
the Class 1 portion by the boundary valve. The hydro-
static test of the Class 2 portion shall meet the require-
IWC-5222 Boundaries ments of IWA-5000 and IWB-5230.
(a) The pressure retaining boundary includes only (f) For the purpose of the test, open ended portions
those portions of the system required to operate or of a suction or drain line from a storage tank extending
support the safety function up to and including the to the first shutoff valve shall be considered as an
first normally closed valve (including a safety or relief extension of the storage tank.
valve) or valve capable of automatic closure when the (g) For open ended portions of discharge lines beyond
safety function is required. the last shutoff valve in nonclosed systems (e.g., contain-
(b) Items outside the boundaries of IWC-5222(a), ment spray header), demonstration of an open flow
and open ended discharge piping, are excluded from path test shall be performed in lieu of the system
the examination requirements. hydrostatic test.
200
IWC-5230 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 2 COMPONENTS IWC-5240
(h) Open ended vent and drain lines extending beyond

the last shutoff valve and open ended safety or relief
valve discharge lines are exempt from hydrostatic
testing.
(i) The pressure measuring instrument used for mea-
suring system hydrostatic or pneumatic test pressure
shall meet the requirements of IWA-5260.
IWC-5240 TEMPERATURE
(a) The system test temperature during a system
hydrostatic test in systems containing ferritic steel com-
ponents shall meet the requirements specified by fracture
prevention criteria.
(b) In systems containing ferritic steel components
for which fracture toughness requirements were neither
specified nor required in the construction of the compo-
nents, the system test temperature shall be determined
by the Owner.
(c) No limit on system test temperature is required
for systems comprised of components constructed en-
tirely of austenitic steel materials.
201
SUBSECTION IWD
COOLED PLANTS
IWD-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

IWD-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IWD-1200 Components Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IWD-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IWD-1220 Components Exempt From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
IWD-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

IWD-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2411 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2412 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IWD-2430 Additional Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IWD-2500 Examination and Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IWD-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
IWD-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

IWD-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5210 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5220 Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5221 System Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5222 System Hydrostatic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5230 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IWD-5240 Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure
IWD-2500-1 Welded Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
203
Tables
IWD-2411-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
IWD-2412-1 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
IWD-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
204
ARTICLE IWD-1000
IWD-1100 SCOPE IWD-1220 COMPONENTS EXEMPT FROM 98

EXAMINATION A99
inspection of Class 3 pressure retaining components The following components or parts of components
and their welded attachments in light-water cooled are exempted from the VT-1 visual examination require-
plants. ments of IWD-2500:
(a) piping NPS 4 (DN100) and smaller
(b) vessels, pumps, and valves and their connections
IWD-1200 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO in piping1 NPS 4 (DN100) and smaller
EXAMINATION (c) components that operate at a pressure of 275
psig (1900 kPa) or less and at a temperature of 200°F
IWD-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS (93°C) or less in systems (or portions of systems)
The examination requirements of this Subsection shall whose function is not required in support of reactor
apply to pressure retaining components and their welded residual heat removal, containment heat removal, and
attachments on Class 3 systems in support of the emergency core cooling;
following functions: (d) welds or portions of welds that are inaccessible
(a) reactor shutdown due to being encased in concrete, buried underground,
(b) emergency core cooling located inside a penetration, or encapsulated by
(c) containment heat removal guard pipe.
(d) atmosphere cleanup
1 Inpiping is defined as having a cumulative inlet and a cumulative
(e) reactor residual heat removal
outlet pipe cross-sectional area neither of which exceeds the nominal
(f) residual heat removal from spent fuel storage pool OD cross-sectional area of the designated size.
205

ARTICLE IWD-2000
IWD-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION TABLE IWD-2411-1

All examinations required by this Article (with the
exception of Examination Category D-B of Table IWD- Inspection
2500-1) shall be performed completely, once, as a Period, Minimum Maximum
preservice examination requirement prior to initial plant Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
startup.
1st 3 100 100
2nd 7 33 67
IWD-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE 10 100 100
IWD-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM 3rd 13 16 34
Inservice examinations and system pressure tests may 17 40 50
20 66 75
be performed during either system operation or plant 23 100 100
outages.
4th 27 8 16
30 25 34
IWD-2411 Inspection Program A 33 50 67
37 75 100
(a) The required examinations in each examination 40 100 ...
category shall be completed during each inspection
interval in accordance with Table IWD-2411-1, with
the exception of welded attachments examined as a
result of component support deformation under Exami-
nation Category D-A.
(b) Following completion of Program A after 40 (b) If items are added to the Inspection Program,
years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the during the service lifetime of a plant, examination shall
10 year inspection interval of Program B. be scheduled as follows:
(1) When items are added during the first period
of an interval, at least 25% of the examinations required
IWD-2412 Inspection Program B
by the applicable Examination Category and Item Num-
(a) The required examinations in each examination ber for the added items shall be performed during each
category shall be completed during each inspection of the second and third periods of that interval.
interval in accordance with Table IWD-2412-1, with (2) When items are added during the second period
the exception of welded attachments examined as a of an interval, at least 25% of the examinations required
result of component support deformation under Exami- by the applicable Examination Category and Item Num-
nation Category D-A. If there are less than three items ber for the added items shall be performed during the
to be examined in an Examination Category, the items third period of that interval.
may be examined in any two periods, or in any one (3) When items are added during the third period
period if there is only one item, in lieu of the percentage of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in
requirements of Table IWD-2412-1. accordance with IWD-2412(a) for successive intervals.
206

IWD-2420 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 3 COMPONENTS IWD-2500
98 TABLE IWD-2412-1 in the inspection item2 equal to 20% of the number

INSPECTION PROGRAM B of welds, areas, or parts included in the inspection
item that are scheduled to be performed during the
Inspection Period,
Calendar Years of
interval. The additional examinations shall be selected
Plant Service Minimum Maximum from welds, areas, or parts of similar material and
Inspection Within the Examinations Examinations service. This additional selection may require inclusion
Interval Interval Completed, % Credited, % of piping systems other than the one containing the
All 3 16 50 flaws or relevant conditions.
7 501 75 (b) If the additional examinations required by IWD-
10 100 100 2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding
Note:
the acceptance standards of IWD-3000, the examinations
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination shall be further extended to include additional examina-
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations during the current outage. The extent of the
tions shall be performed in the second period.
additional examinations shall be determined by the
Owner based upon an engineering evaluation of the
root cause of the flaws or relevant conditions. The
Owner’s corrective measures shall be documented in
accordance with IWA-6000.
IWD-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS
(c) For the inspection period following the period
(a) The sequence of component examinations which in which the examinations of IWD-2430(a) or (b) were
was established during the first inspection interval shall completed, the examinations shall be performed as
be repeated during each successive inspection interval, originally scheduled in accordance with IWD-2400.
to the extent practical. (d) If welded attachments are examined as a result
(b) If components are accepted for continued service of identified component support deformation, and the
by evaluation in accordance with IWD-3000, the areas results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
containing flaws or relevant conditions shall be reexam- standards of IWD-3000, additional examinations shall
ined during the next inspection period listed in the be performed, if determined necessary, based on an
schedule of the inspection program of IWD-2400. evaluation by the Owner.
(c) If the reexaminations required by IWD-2420(b)
reveal that the flaws or relevant conditions remain
essentially unchanged for the next inspection period,
the component examination schedule may revert to the
original schedule of successive inspections. IWD-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE
(d) If welded attachments are examined as a result TEST REQUIREMENTS
of identified component support deformation and the
(a) Components shall be examined and pressure
results of these examinations exceed the acceptance
tested as specified in Table IWD-2500-1. The method
standards of IWD-3000, successive examinations shall
of examination for the components and parts of the
be performed, if determined necessary based on an
pressure retaining boundaries shall comply with those
evaluation by the Owner.
tabulated in Table IWD-2500-1 except where alternate
examination methods are used that meet the require-
ments of IWA-2240.
IWD-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS (b) Table IWD-2500-1 is organized as follows.
(a) Examinations performed in accordance with Table Examination
IWD-2500-1, except for Examination Category D-B, Category Examination Area
that reveal flaws or relevant conditions exceeding the D-A Welded Attachments for Vessels, Piping, Pumps,
acceptance standards of IWD-3000 shall be extended and Valves
to include additional examinations during the current D-B All Pressure Retaining Components
outage. The additional examinations shall include an
additional number of welds, areas, or parts1 included 2 Aninspection item, as listed in Table IWD-2500-1, may comprise
a number of welds, areas, or parts of a component required to be
1 Welds, areas, or parts are those described or intended in a particular examined in accordance with the inspection plan and schedule
inspection item of Table IWD-2500-1. (IWA-2420).
207
TABLE IWD-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY D-A, WELDED ATTACHMENTS FOR VESSELS, PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES
Examination
Table IWD-2500-1

No. Parts Examined1 Fig. No. Method Standard Extent of Examination2,3 Examination3,4
Pressure Vessels
D1.10 Welded Attachments IWD-2500-1 Visual, VT-1 IWD-3000 100% of required areas of each Each identified
and each
inspection
interval
Piping
and each
inspection
interval
Pumps
208
and each
inspection
interval
Valves
and each
inspection
interval
NOTES:
(1) Examination is limited to those welded attachments that meet the following conditions:
(c) the attachment weld joins the attachment either directly to the surface of the component or to an integrally cast or forged attachment to the component; and
(d) the attachment weld is full penetration, fillet, or partial penetration, continuous, or intermittent.
(3) Selected samples of welded attachments shall be examined each inspection interval. All welded attachments selected for examination shall be those most subject
to corrosion, as determined by the Owner, such as the welded attachments of the Service Water or Emergency Service Water systems. For multiple vessels of
similar design, function and service, the welded attachments of only one of the multiple vessels shall be selected for examination. For welded attachments of piping,
pumps, and valves, a 10% sample shall be selected for examination. This percentage sample shall be proportional to the total number of nonexempt welded
attachments connected to the piping, pumps, and valves in each system subject to these examinations.
(4) Examination is required whenever component support member deformation, e.g., broken, bent, or pulled out parts, is identified during operation, refueling,
maintenance, examination, or testing.
TABLE IWD-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY D-B, ALL PRESSURE RETAINING COMPONENTS
Item Test Examination Acceptance Frequency of

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method Standard Extent of Examination Examination
D2.10 Pressure retaining components System leakage Visual, VT-2 IWD-3000 Pressure retaining boundary Each inspection
test (IWD-5221) period
209
D2.20 Pressure retaining components System hydrostatic Visual, VT-2 IWD-3000 Pressure retaining boundary Each inspection
test (IWD-5222) interval1
NOTES:
(1) The system hydrostatic test (IWD-5222) shall be conducted at or near the end of each inspection interval or during the same inspection period of each inspection
interval of Inspection Program B.
Table IWD-2500-1
Fig. IWD-2500-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWD-2500-1 WELDED ATTACHMENTS

Note: Examination of surface areas may be limited to the portions of these areas
that are accessible without removal of support members.
210
ARTICLE IWD-3000
This Article is in the course of preparation.

The rules of IWB-3000 may be used.
211
ARTICLE IWD-5000
IWD-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS (b) The test presure for a pneumatic test conducted
in accordance with IWA-5211(c) shall be the system
IWD-5210 TEST
leakage test pressure of IWC-5221.
(a) Pressure retaining components shall be tested at (c) In the case of atmospheric storage tanks, the
the frequency stated in, and visually examined by the hydrostatic head, developed with the tank filled to its
methods specified in Table IWD-2500-1, Examination design capacity, shall be acceptable as the test pressure.
Category D-B: (d) For 0–15 psi (0–103 kPa) storage tanks, the test
(1) System Leakage Test, IWA-5211(a) pressure shall be 1.1PG, Design Pressure of vapor or
(2) System Hydrostatic Test, IWA-5211(b) gas space above liquid level for which overpressure
(b)(1) The system pressure tests and visual examina- protection is provided by relief valve.
tions shall be conducted in accordance with IWA-5000 (e) For the purpose of the test, open ended1 portions
and this Article. The contained fluid in the system of suction or drain lines from a storage tank extending
shall serve as the pressurizing medium. to the first shutoff valve shall be considered as an
(2) Alternatively, steam systems may use either extension of the storage tank.
water or gas as the pressurizing medium. When gas (f) For open ended portions of discharge lines beyond
is the pressurizing medium, the test procedure shall the last shutoff valve in nonclosed systems (e.g., service
include methods for detection and location of through- water systems), confirmation of adequate flow during
wall leakage from components of the system tested. system operation shall be acceptable in lieu of system
hydrostatic test.
(g) Open ended vent and drain lines from components
extending beyond the last shutoff valve and open ended
IWD-5220 PRESSURE safety or relief valve discharge lines, including safety
IWD-5221 System Leakage Test or relief valve piping which discharges into the contain-
ment pressure suppression pool, shall be exempt from
The nominal operating pressure during system opera- hydrostatic test.
tion shall be acceptable as the test pressure for the (h) The pressure measuring instrument used for mea-
system leakage test. suring system hydrostatic or pneumatic test pressure
shall meet the requirements of IWA-5260.
98 IWD-5222 System Hydrostatic Test
(a) The system hydrostatic test pressure shall be at IWD-5230 TEMPERATURE
least 1.10 times the system pressure Psv for systems
(a) The system test temperature during a system
with Design Temperature of 200°F or less, and at least
hydrostatic test in systems constructed of ferritic steel
1.25 times the system pressure Psv for systems with
components shall satisfy either the requirements of
Design Temperature above 200°F (93°C). The system
fracture prevention criteria, as applicable, or the test
pressure Psv shall be the lowest pressure setting among
temperature determined by the Owner.
the number of safety or relief valves provided for
overpressure protection within the boundary of the
1 Discharge lines to structural compartments (e.g., service water pump
system to be tested. For systems (or portions of systems)
intake structures) and collection tanks, sumps, and basins that are
not provided with safety or relief valves, the system open (or may become open) to the atmosphere are considered
design pressure Pd shall be substituted for Psv. open ended.
212
IWD-5230 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 3 COMPONENTS IWD-5240
(b) For tests of systems or portions of systems con-

structed entirely of austenitic steel, test temperature
limitations are not required to meet fracture prevention
criteria.
IWD-5240 BOUNDARIES
(a) The pressure retaining boundary includes only
those portions of the system required to operate or
support the safety function up to and including the
first normally closed valve (including a safety or relief
valve) or valve capable of automatic closure when the
safety function is required.
(b) Items outside the boundaries of IWD-5240(a),
and open ended discharge piping, are excluded from
the examination requirements.
213
SUBSECTION IWE A99
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC

AND METALLIC LINERS OF CLASS CC
COOLED PLANTS
IWE-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

IWE-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1200 Components Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1220 Components Exempted From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1230 Accessibility for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1231 Accessible Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1232 Inaccessible Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
IWE-1240 Surface Areas Requiring Augmented Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-1241 Examination Surface Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-1242 Identification of Examination Surface Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
IWE-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

IWE-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2300 Visual Examination, Personnel Qualification, and Responsible Individual . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2310 Visual Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
IWE-2320 Responsible Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2330 Personnel Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2411 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2412 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2500 Examination and Pressure Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2600 Condition of Surface to Be Examined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

IWE-3100 Evaluation of Examination Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3110 Preservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3111 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3112 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3114 Repair /Replacement Activity and Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
215
ASME B&PVC sec11$u110 05-12-99 07:45:00 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWE-3120 Inservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

IWE-3121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3122.3 Acceptance by Engineering Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
IWE-3124 Repair/Replacement Activity and Reexamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3130 Inservice Visual Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3200 Supplemental Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3400 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3410 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3430 Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3500 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510 Standards for Examination Category E-A, Containment Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.1 Visual Examination — General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.2 Visual Examination of Coated and Noncoated Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.3 Visual Examination of Pressure-Retaining Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3510.4 Visual Examination of Moisture Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511 Standards for Examination Category E-C, Containment Surfaces Requiring
Augmented Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.2 Visual Examination of Coated and Noncoated Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
IWE-3511.3 Ultrasonic Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
IWE-4000 Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

IWE-4100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
IWE-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

IWE-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5210 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5220 Tests Following Repair, Modification, or Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5221 Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5222 Deferral of Leakage Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5240 Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-5250 Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
IWE-7000 Replacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

IWE-7100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure
IWE-2500-1 Examination Areas for Moisture Barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tables
IWE-2411-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
IWE-2412-1 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
IWE-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
IWE-2500-2 Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements for Augmented Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
216

ARTICLE IWE-1000
IWE-1100 SCOPE to the containment vessel. These components shall be

examined in accordance with the requirements of IWB
or IWC, as appropriate to the classification defined by
inspection of Class MC pressure retaining components
the Design Specifications.
and their integral attachments, and of metallic shell
and penetration liners of Class CC pressure retaining
components and their integral attachments in light-water
cooled plants. IWE-1230 ACCESSIBILITY FOR
EXAMINATION
IWE-1231 Accessible Surface Areas 98
IWE-1200 COMPONENTS SUBJECT TO
(a) As a minimum, the following portions of Class
EXAMINATION MC containment vessels, parts, and appurtenances and
IWE-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS Class CC metallic shell and penetration liners shall
remain accessible for either direct or remote visual
examination, from at least one side of the vessel, for
apply to Class MC pressure retaining components and
the life of the plant:
their integral attachments and to metallic shell and
(1) openings and penetrations;
penetration liners of Class CC pressure retaining compo-
(2) structural discontinuities;
nents and their integral attachments. These examinations
(3) 80% of the pressure-retaining boundary (ex-
shall apply to surface areas, including welds and base
cluding attachments, structural reinforcement, and areas
metal.
made inaccessible during construction; and
(4) surface areas identified in IWE-1240.
(b) The requirements of IWE-1232 shall be met
98 IWE-1220 COMPONENTS EXEMPTED FROM when accessibility for visual examination is the interior
EXAMINATION surface.
The following components (or parts of components)
are exempted from the examination requirements of
IWE-1232 Inaccessible Surface Areas 98
IWE-2000:
(a) vessels, parts, and appurtenances outside the (a) Portions of Class MC containment vessels, parts,
boundaries of the containment system as defined in the and appurtenances that are embedded in concrete or
Design Specifications; otherwise made inaccessible during construction of the
(b) embedded or inaccessible portions of containment vessel or as a result of vessel repair /replacement activi-
vessels, parts, and appurtenances that met the require- ties are exempted from examination, provided:
ments of the original Construction Code; (1) no openings or penetrations are embedded in
(c) portions of containment vessels, parts, and appur- the concrete;
tenances that become embedded or inaccessible as a (2) all welded joints that are inaccessible for exam-
result of vessel repair /replacement activities if the ination are double butt welded and are fully radio-
conditions of IWE-1232 and IWE-5220 are met; graphed and, prior to being covered, are tested for leak
(d) piping, pumps, and valves that are part of the tightness using a gas medium test, such as Halide Leak
containment system, or which penetrate or are attached Detector Test; and
217
IWE-1232 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWE-1242
(3) the vessel is leak rate tested after completion or repeated loss of protective coatings has resulted in
of construction or repair /replacement activities to the substantial corrosion and pitting. Typical locations of
leak rate requirements of the Design Specifications. such areas are those exposed to standing water, repeated
(b) Portions of Class CC metallic shell and penetra- wetting and drying, persistent leakage, and those with
tion liners that are embedded in concrete or otherwise geometries that permit water accumulation, condensa-
made inaccessible during construction or as a result of tion, and microbiological attack. Such areas may include
repair /replacement activities are exempted from exami- penetration sleeves, stiffeners, surfaces wetted during
nation, provided: refueling, concrete-to-steel shell or liner interfaces, em-
(1) all welded joints that are inaccessible for exam- bedment zones, leak chase channels, drain areas, or
ination are examined in accordance with CC-5520 and, sump liners.
prior to being covered or otherwise obstructed by (b) interior and exterior containment surface areas
adjacent structures, components, parts, or appurtenances, that are subject to excessive wear from abrasion or
are tested for leak tightness in accordance with CC- erosion that causes a loss of protective coatings, defor-
5536; and mation, or material loss. Typical locations of such areas
(2) the containment is leak rate tested after comple- are those subject to substantial traffic, sliding pads or
tion of construction or repair /replacement activities to supports, pins or clevises, shear lugs, seismic restraints,
the leak rate requirements of the Design Specifications. surfaces exposed to water jets from testing operations
or safety relief valve discharges, and areas that experi-
ence wear from frequent vibrations.
IWE-1240 SURFACE AREAS REQUIRING (c) interior and exterior containment surface areas
AUGMENTED EXAMINATION identified in accordance with IWE-2420(b).
98 IWE-1241 Examination Surface Areas
IWE-1242 Identification of Examination Surface 98
Surface areas likely to experience accelerated degra-
Areas
dation and aging require the augmented examinations
identified in Table IWE-2500-1, Examination Category Surface areas requiring augmented examination shall
E-C. Such areas include the following: be determined in accordance with IWE-1241, and shall
(a) interior and exterior containment surface areas be identified in the Owner’s Inspection Program.
that are subject to accelerated corrosion with no or Examination methods shall be in accordance with
minimal corrosion allowance or areas where the absence IWE-2500(b).
218
ARTICLE IWE-2000
98 IWE-2100 GENERAL Class MC or Class CC components to items designed,

A99 constructed, and installed to the requirements of Section
The requirements of IWA-2000 apply, except the III, Class 1, 2, or 3, the examination requirements of
requirements of IWA-2210, IWA-2300, IWA-2500, and
IWB-2000, IWC-2000, or IWD-2000, as applicable,
IWA-2600 are not mandatory for Table IWE-2500-1 shall also apply.
visual examinations. (e) Preservice examination for a repair /replacement
activity may be conducted prior to installation provided:
(1) the examination is performed after the pressure
test required by the Construction Code has been com-
98 IWE-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION
pleted;
(a) Examinations listed in Table IWE-2500-1 shall be (2) the examination is conducted under conditions
completed prior to initial plant startup. These preservice and with equipment and techniques equivalent to those
examinations shall include the pressure retaining por- that are expected to be employed for subsequent inser-
tions of components not exempted by IWE-1220. vice examinations; and
(b) When visual examinations are required, these (3) the shop or field examination records are, or
examinations shall be performed in accordance with can be, documented and identified in a form consistent
IWE-2600, following the completion of the pressure with that required by IWA-6000.
test required by the Construction Code and after applica-
tion of protective coatings (e.g., paint) when such
coatings are required.
(c) When a vessel, liner, or a portion thereof is
subjected to a repair /replacement activity during the
service lifetime of a plant, the preservice examination IWE-2300 VISUAL EXAMINATION, 98
requirements for the portion of the vessel affected by PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
the repair /replacement activity shall be met. AND RESPONSIBLE
(1) When the repair /replacement activity is per- INDIVIDUAL
formed while the plant is not in service, the preservice
IWE-2310 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS
examination shall be performed prior to resumption of
service. (a) The Owner shall define requirements for visual
(2) When the repair /replacement activity is per- examination of containment surfaces.
formed while the plant is in service, the preservice (b) General visual examinations shall be performed
examination may be deferred to the next scheduled in accordance with IWE-2500 and Table IWE-2500-1,
plant outage, provided nondestructive examination in Examination Category E-A, to assess the general condi-
accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program is tion of containment surfaces.
performed. (c) Detailed visual examinations shall be performed
(3) When a system leakage test is required by in accordance with IWE-2500 and Table IWE-2500-1,
IWE-5220, the preservice examination may be per- Examination Category E-C:
formed either prior to or following the test. (1) to assess the initial condition of surfaces requir-
(d) Welds made as part of repair /replacement activi- ing augmented examinations in accordance with IWE-
ties shall be examined in accordance with the require- 1241 and to determine the magnitude and extent of
ments of IWA-4000, except that for welds joining any deterioration and distress of these surfaces.
219

IWE-2310 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWE-2412
(2) to determine the magnitude and extent of deteri- TABLE IWE-2411-1

oration and distress of suspect containment surfaces INSPECTION PROGRAM A
initially detected by general visual examinations.
(d) Detailed visual examinations shall also be per- Inspection Period, Minimum Maximum
Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
formed in accordance with IWE-5240 to assess the Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
structural condition of areas affected by repair/replace-
ment activities. 1st 3 100 100
(e) For areas and items subject to detailed visual 2nd 7 33 67
examination, the following criteria apply. 10 100 100
(1) Painted or coated areas shall be examined for
evidence of flaking, blistering, peeling, discoloration, 3rd 13 16 34
and other signs of distress. 17 40 50
20 66 75
(2) Noncoated areas shall be examined for evidence 23 100 100
of cracking, discoloration, wear, pitting, excessive corro-
sion, gouges, surface discontinuities, dents, and other 4th 27 8 16
signs of surface irregularities. 30 25 34
33 50 67
37 75 100
40 100 ...
IWE-2320 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL
(a) The Responsible Individual shall be knowledge-
able in the requirements for design, inservice inspection,
and testing of Class MC and metallic liners of Class
CC components. of either Inspection Program A or Inspection Program
(b) The Responsible Individual shall be responsible B shall be met.
for the following:
(1) development of plans and procedures for exam-
ination of containment surfaces; IWE-2411 Inspection Program A
(2) instruction, training, and approval of visual With the exception of the examinations that may be
examination personnel; deferred until the end of an inspection interval, as
(3) performance or direction of general and de- specified in Table IWE-2500-1, the required examina-
tailed visual examinations; tions shall be completed during each successive inspec-
(4) evaluation of examination results; and tion interval, in accordance with Table IWE-2411-1.
(5) submittal of report to the Owner documenting Following completion of Program A after 40 years,
results of examinations. successive inspection intervals shall follow the 10 year
inspection interval of Program B.
IWE-2330 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION IWE-2412 Inspection Program B

(a) The Owner shall define the qualification require- (a) With the exception of the examinations that may
ments for personnel performing visual examinations. be deferred until the end of an inspection interval, as
(b) Visual examinations shall be performed either specified in Table IWE-2500-1, the required examina-
directly or remotely, with adequate illumination, by tions shall be completed during each successive inspec-
personnel with visual acuity sufficient to detect evidence tion interval, in accordance with Table IWE-2412-1.
of degradation. (b) If items or welds are added to the Inspection
Program, examination shall be scheduled as follows.
(1) When items or welds are added during the
IWE-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE first period of an interval, at least 25% of the examina-
tions required by the applicable Examination Category
IWE-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM
and Item Number for the added items or welds shall
Inservice examinations and system pressure tests may be performed during each of the second and third
be performed during plant outages such as refueling periods of that interval. Alternatively, if deferral of the
shutdowns or maintenance shutdowns. The requirements examinations is permitted for the Examination Category
220

IWE-2412 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC COMPONENTS IWE-2600
98 TABLE IWE-2412-1 nation in accordance with Table IWE-2500-1, Examina-

INSPECTION PROGRAM B tion Category E-C.
Inspection
Period,
Calendar Years of
Plant Service Minimum Maximum IWE-2500 EXAMINATION AND PRESSURE 98
Inspection Within the Examinations Examinations TEST REQUIREMENTS
Interval Interval Completed, % Credited, %
(a) Examination methods shall comply with those
All 3 16 50 tabulated in Table IWE-2500-1, except when alternate
7 501 75
10 100 100 examination methods are used that meet the require-
ments of IWA-2240.
Note: (b) Methods for augmented examination of surface
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations areas identified in IWE-1242 shall comply with the
shall be performed in the second period. following criteria:
(1) Areas accessible from both sides shall be visu-
ally examined using a detailed visual examination
method.
(2) Areas accessible from one side only shall be
and Item Number, the second period examinations may examined for wall thinning using an ultrasonic thickness
be deferred to the third period and at least 50% of measurement method in accordance with Section V,
the examinations required by the applicable Examination T-544.
Category and Item Number for the added items or (3) When ultrasonic thickness measurements are
welds shall be performed during the third period. performed, grids shall be used. Gridline spacing shall
(2) When items or welds are added during the comply with the requirements of Table IWE-2500-2.
second period of an interval, at least 25% of the The number and location of the grids shall be determined
examinations required by the applicable Examination by the Owner. Locations of gridline intersections to
Category and Item Number for the added items or be examined may be marked on containment surfaces
welds shall be performed during the third period of in lieu of marking gridlines.
that interval. (4) Ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be
(3) When items or welds are added during the third performed to determine the minimum wall thickness
period of an interval, examinations shall be scheduled in at locations specified in Table IWE-2500-2. Minimum
accordance with IWE-2412(a) above for successive wall thickness locations and locations of examined
intervals. gridline intersections shall be marked such that periodic
reexamination of these locations can be performed in
accordance with the requirements of Table IWE-2500-
98 IWE-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS 1, Examination Category E-C.
(c) Pressure test requirements for components and
(a) The sequence of component examinations estab-
parts of the pressure retaining boundary shall comply
lished during the first inspection interval shall be re-
with the requirements of IWE-5000.
peated during each successive inspection interval, to
the extent practical.
(b) When examination results require evaluation of
flaws or areas of degradation in accordance with IWE- IWE-2600 CONDITION OF SURFACE TO 98
3000, and the component is acceptable for continued
BE EXAMINED
service, the areas containing such flaws or areas of
degradation shall be reexamined during the next inspec- (a) When a containment vessel or liner is painted
tion period listed in the schedule of the inspection or coated to protect surfaces from corrosion, preservice
program of IWE-2411 or IWE-2412, in accordance and inservice visual examinations shall be performed
with Table IWE-2500-1, Examination Category E-C. without the removal of the paint or coating.
(c) When the reexaminations required by IWE- (b) When removal of paint or coating is required,
2420(b) reveal that the flaws or areas of degradation it shall be removed in a manner that will not reduce
remain essentially unchanged for the next inspection the base metal or weld thickness below the design
period, these areas no longer require augmented exami- thickness.
221

A99 TABLE IWE-2500-1
ASME B&PVC
EXAMINATION CATEGORY E-A, CONTAINMENT SURFACES

Table IWE-2500-1
Examination1 1st Deferral of

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Successive Inspection to
E1.10 Containment Vessel
Pressure Retaining Boundary1
E1.11 Accessible Surface Areas IWE-2310 General Visual IWE-3510 100% 100% N/A
During each During each
Inspection Period Inspection Period
E1.12 Wetted Surfaces of Submerged Areas IWE-2310 General Visual IWE-3510 100% 100% Permissible
E1.20 BWR Vent System IWE-2310 General Visual IWE-3510 100% 100% Permissible
222
Accessible Surface Areas1,2
E1.30 Moisture Barriers3 IWE-2310 General Visual IWE-3510 100% 100% N/A
Fig. IWE-2500-1 During each During each
sec11$u120 05-12-99 07:56:10

Inspection Period Inspection Period
NOTES:
(1) Examination shall include all accessible interior and exterior surfaces of Class MC components, parts, and appurtenances, and metallic
shell and penetration liners of Class CC components. The following items shall be considered for examination:
(a) integral attachments and structures that are parts of reinforcing structure, such as stiffening rings, manhole frames, and reinforcement
around openings.
(b) surfaces of attachment welds between structural attachments and the pressure retaining boundary or reinforcing structure, except for
nonstructural or temporary attachments as defined in NE-4435 and minor permanent attachments as defined in CC-4543.4.
(c) surfaces of containment structural and pressure boundary welds, including longitudinal welds (Category A), circumferential welds
(Category B), flange welds (Category C), and nozzle-to-shell welds (Category D) as defined in NE-3351 for Class MC and CC-3840
for Class CC; and surfaces of Flued Head and Bellows Seal Circumferential Welds joined to the Penetration.
(d) pressure-retaining bolted connections, including bolts, studs, nuts, bushings, washers, and threads in base material and flange ligaments
between fastener holes. Bolted connections need not be dissassembled for performance of examinations, and bolting may remain in
place under tension.
(2) Includes flow channeling devices within containment vessels.
(3) Examination shall include moisture barrier materials intended to prevent intrusion of moisture against inaccessible areas of the pressure retaining metal containment shell or liner at
concrete-to-metal interfaces and at metal-to-metal interfaces which are not seal-welded. Containment moisture barrier materials include caulking, flashing, and other sealants used for
this application.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

A99 TABLE IWE-2500-1 (CONT’D)
EXAMINATION CATEGORY E-C, CONTAINMENT SURFACES REQUIRING AUGMENTED EXAMINATION

Item Parts Requirements / Examination Acceptance Inspection Successive Inspection to
E4.10 Containment Surface Areas1
E4.11 Visible Surfaces IWE-2310(c) Detailed Visual IWE-3511 100% of surface 100% of surface Not permissible
IWE-2500(b)(1) areas identified by areas identified by
IWE-2500(b)(2) IWE-12421 IWE-12422
223
E4.12 Surface Area Grid IWE-2500(b)(2) Ultrasonic Thickness IWE-3511 100% of gridline 100% of gridline Not permissible
Gridline Intersections and Minimum Wall IWE-2500(b)(3) intersections and intersections and
Thickness Location IWE-2500(b)(4) minimum wall minimum wall
thickness locations thickness locations
during each during each
inspection period, inspection period,
established in established in
accordance with accordance with
IWE-2500(b)(3)2 IWE-2500(b)(3)2
and and
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC COMPONENTS
IWE-2500(b)(4)2 IWE-2500(b)(4)2
NOTES:
(1) Containment surface areas requiring augmented examination are those identified in IWE-1240.
(2) The extent of examination shall be 100% for each inspection period until the areas examined remain essentially unchanged for the next
inspection period. Such areas no longer require augmented examination in accordance with IWE-2420(c).
Table IWE-2500-1
ASME B&PVC
Table IWE-2500-2
A99 TABLE IWE-2500-2

ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASUREMENTS FOR AUGMENTED EXAMINATIONS
Augmented Examination Area Size (Continguous) Examination Requirements
≤ 100 square feet 100% of Gridline Intersections1, 2, 3, 5, 6
> 100 square feet 100% of Gridline Intersections1, 2, 4, 5, 6
NOTES:
(1) Location and size of area to be examined shall be determined by the Owner.
(2) Gridline spacing shall not exceed 12 in., and need not be less than 2 in.
(3) Gridline spacing shall be selected such that a minimum of 100 measurements are obtained from within each augmented examination area, unless this requires selecting gridline
spacing of less than 2 in.
(4) In lieu of examining 100% of the gridline intersections within the augmented examination area, an alternate examination plan may be developed as follows:
(a) A sample area from within the augmented examination area may be selected for examination. The location and size of the sample area shall be determined by the Owner, but
224
shall consist of areas subject to the most severe service conditions within the larger augmented examination area. 100% of the gridline intersections within the sample area
shall be examined, and gridline spacing shall be selected such that a minimum of 100 measurements are obtained from within the sample area.
(b) If the sample area exceeds 100 contiguous square feet, the Owner may develop a sampling plan for examination of gridline intersections within the sample area. Locations
of ultrasonic thickness measurements to be taken at gridline intersections shall be selected at random throughout the sample area. The minimum number of measurements
sec11$u120 05-12-99 07:56:10

shall be 100, or shall be sufficient to ensure at least a 95% confidence level that the thickness of the base metal is reduced by no more than 10% of the nominal plate
thickness at 95% of the gridline intersections within the sample area, whichever is greater.
(c) If any ultrasonic thickness measurements within the sample area reveal that the thickness of the base metal is reduced by more than 10% of the nominal plate thickness, all
remaining gridline intersections within the sample area shall be examined, and additional UT examinations from outside the sample area shall be required. These additional
UT examinations shall be performed on another area from within the larger augmented examination area that is at least as large as the initial sample area. If any of these
subsequent examinations reveal that the thickness of the base metal is reduced by more than 10% of the nominal plate thickness, additional areas from within the larger
augmented examination area shall be examined until subsequent examinations of additional areas reveal no measurements where metal loss exceeds 10% of the nominal plate
thickness, or until the entire augmented examination area has been examined.
(5) When an ultrasonic thickness measurement performed at a gridline intersection reveals that the thickness of the base metal is reduced by more than 10% of the nominal plate
thickness, the minimum wall thickness shall be determined and located within each adjoining grid.
(6) Measurements need not be obtained at locations where obstructions interfere with gridline intersections.
pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC COMPONENTS Fig. IWE-2500-1
FIG. IWE-2500-1 EXAMINATION AREAS FOR MOISTURE BARRIERS
225
ARTICLE IWE-3000
98 IWE-3100 EVALUATION OF IWE-3120 INSERVICE EXAMINATIONS 98

EXAMINATION RESULTS IWE-3121 General 98
IWE-3110 PRESERVICE EXAMINATIONS Inservice examination results shall be compared with
98 IWE-3111 General recorded results of the preservice examination and prior
inservice examinations. Acceptance of the components
The preservice examination required by IWE-2200 for continued service shall be in accordance with
and performed in accordance with the procedures of IWE-3122.
IWA-2200 shall be evaluated by the acceptance stan-
dards specified in IWE-3500. Acceptance of components
for service shall be in accordance with IWE-3112, and IWE-3122 Acceptance
IWE-3114. IWE-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination. A compo- 98
nent whose examination results meet the acceptance
98 IWE-3112 Acceptance standards of IWE-3500 shall be acceptable for continued
service. Confirmed changes in flaws or areas of degrada-
(a) A component whose examination either confirms tion from prior examinations shall be recorded in accord-
the absence of or detects flaws or areas of degradation ance with IWA-1400(h) and IWA-6230. A component
that do not exceed the acceptance standards of IWE- that does not meet the acceptance standards of IWE-
3500 is acceptable for service, provided the flaws or 3500 shall be corrected in accordance with the provi-
areas of degradation are recorded in accordance with sions shown in IWE-3122.2 or IWE-3122.3.
the requirements of IWA-1400(h) and IWA-6230 in
terms of location, size, shape, orientation, and distribu- IWE-3122.2 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement 98
tion within the component. Activity. A component whose examination detects flaws
(b) A component whose examination detects flaws or areas of degradation that do not meet the acceptance
or areas of degradation that do not meet the acceptance standards of IWE-3500 is unacceptable for continued
standards of IWE-3500 is unacceptable for service service until the component is corrected by a repair /
unless the component is corrected by a repair /replace- replacement activity to the extent necessary to meet
ment activity, to the extent necessary to meet the the acceptance standards of IWE-3500.
acceptance standards, prior to placement of the compo- IWE-3122.3 Acceptance by Engineering Evalu- 98
nent in service. ation
(a) A component whose examination detects flaws
or areas of degradation that do not meet the acceptance
98 IWE-3114 Repair /Replacement Activity and
standards of IWE-3500 is acceptable for continued
Reexamination
service without a repair /replacement activity if an engi-
The repair /replacement activity and reexamination neering evaluation indicates that the flaw or area of
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- degradation is nonstructural in nature or has no unac-
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the ceptable effect on the structural integrity of the contain-
requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall ment. If either the thickness of the base metal in local
demonstrate that the area subjected to the repair /replace- areas is reduced by no more than 10% of the nominal
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of plate thickness or the reduced thickness can be shown
IWE-3500. by analysis to satisfy the requirements of the Design
226
IWE-3122.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS MC COMPONENTS IWE-3511.2
Specifications, the component is acceptable by engi- for service following the preservice examination and
neering evaluation. each inservice examination.
(b) When flaws or areas of degradation are accepted
by engineering evaluation, the area containing the flaw
IWE-3430 ACCEPTABILITY
or degradation shall be reexamined in accordance with
IWE-2420(b) and (c). Flaws or areas of degradation that do not exceed
(c) When portions of later editions of the Construc- the allowable acceptance standards of IWE-3500 for
tion Code or Section III are used, all related portions the respective examination category shall be acceptable.
shall be met.
98 IWE-3124 Repair /Replacement Activity and IWE-3500 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS

Reexamination IWE-3510 STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION
The repair /replacement activity and reexamination CATEGORY E-A, CONTAINMENT
shall comply with the requirements of IWA-4000. Reex- SURFACES
amination shall be conducted in accordance with the IWE-3510.1 Visual Examination — General 98
requirements of IWA-2200. The recorded results shall The Owner shall define acceptance criteria for visual
demonstrate that the area subject to the repair /replace- examination of containment surfaces.
ment activity meets the acceptance standards of
IWE-3500. IWE-3510.2 Visual Examination of Coated and 98
Noncoated Areas. The condition of the inspected area
is acceptable if there is no evidence of damage or
IWE-3130 INSERVICE VISUAL degradation which exceeds the visual examination ac-
EXAMINATIONS ceptance criteria specified by the Owner. Areas that
are suspect shall be accepted by engineering evaluation
A component whose visual examination as specified or corrected by repair /replacement activities in accord-
in Table IWE-2500-1 detects areas that are suspect, ance with IWE-3122. Supplemental examinations in
shall be unacceptable for continued service unless, accordance with IWE-3200 shall be performed when
following verification of the suspect areas by the supple- specified as a result of the engineering evaluation.
mental examination as required by IWE-3200, the re-
quirements of IWE-3120 are satisfied. IWE-3510.3 Visual Examination of Pressure-Re- 98
taining Bolting. Except for loose bolting, bolting mate-
rials with conditions that cause the bolted connection
98 IWE-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL to violate either the containment leak-tight or structural
integrity shall be corrected by repair/replacement activ-
EXAMINATIONS
ities.
Examinations that detect flaws or evidence of degra-
IWE-3510.4 Visual Examination of Moisture Bar- 98
dation that require evaluation in accordance with the
riers. Moisture barriers with wear, damage, erosion,
requirements of IWE-3100 may be supplemented by
tear, surface cracks, or other defects that permit intrusion
other examination methods and techniques (IWA-2240)
of moisture against inaccessible areas of the pressure
to determine the character of the flaw (i.e., size, shape,
retaining surfaces of the metal containment shell or
and orientation) or degradation. Visual examinations
liner shall be corrected.
that detect surface flaws or areas that are suspect
shall be supplemented by either surface or volumetric
examination, when specified as a result of the engi- IWE-3511 Standards for Examination Category 98
neering evaluation performed in IWE-3122.3 E-C, Containment Surfaces Requiring
Augmented Examination
IWE-3511.1 General. The Owner shall define accept- 98
IWE-3400 STANDARDS
ance criteria for visual examination of containment
98 IWE-3410 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS surfaces.
A99
The acceptance standards of IWE-3500 shall be IWE-3511.2 Visual Examination of Coated and 98
applied to evaluate the acceptability of the component Noncoated Areas. The condition of the inspected area
227
ASME B&PVC sec11$u125 04-15-99 13:57:43 pd: sec11

IWE-3511.2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWE-3511.3
is acceptable if there is no evidence of damage or

degradation which exceeds the visual examination ac-
ceptance criteria specified by the Owner.
98 IWE-3511.3 Ultrasonic Examination. Examinations
of Class MC pressure retaining components that detect
material loss in a local area exceeding 10% of the
nominal wall thickness, or material loss in a local area
projected to exceed 10% of the nominal wall thickness
prior to the next examination, shall be documented.
Such local areas shall be accepted by engineering
evaluation or corrected by repair /replacement activities
in accordance with IWE-3122. Supplemental examina-
tions in accordance with IWE-3200 shall be performed
when specified as a result of the engineering evaluation.
228

ARTICLE IWE-4000 98
REPAIR PROCEDURES
IWE-4100 SCOPE
The rules of IWA-4000 apply.
229
ARTICLE IWE-5000
IWE-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS performed in accordance with the Repair /Replacement
Program and Plan:
IWE-5210 GENERAL (a) welds of attachments to the surface of the pressure
Except as noted in IWE-5240, the requirements of retaining boundary;
IWA-5000 are not applicable to Class MC or Class (b) weld cavities, the depth of which does not pene-
CC components. trate the required design wall by more than 10%;
and
(c) welds attaching penetrations that are NPS 1
(DN25) or smaller.
IWE-5220 TESTS FOLLOWING REPAIR /
REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES IWE-5240 VISUAL EXAMINATION 98
98 IWE-5221 Leakage Test During the pressure test required by IWE-5220, a
Except as noted in IWE-5222, repair /replacement detailed visual examination (IWE-2310) shall be per-
activities performed on the pressure retaining boundary formed on areas affected by repair/replacement activ-
of Class MC or Class CC components shall be subjected ities.
to a pneumatic leakage test in accordance with the
provisions of Title 10, Part 50 of the Code of Federal
Regulations, Appendix J, Paragraph IV.A. IWE-5250 CORRECTIVE ACTION 98
If the leakage test requirements of IWE-5221 cannot

be satisfied, the source of leakage shall be located and
IWE-5222 Deferral of Leakage Tests the area shall be examined to the extent necessary to
establish the requirements for corrective action. Repair /
Leakage tests for the following minor repair /replace- replacement activities shall be performed in accordance
ment activities performed on the pressure retaining with the requirements of IWA-4000. Leakage testing
boundary may be deferred until the next scheduled shall be reperformed as required by IWE-5220, prior
leakage test, provided nondestructive examination is to returning the component to service.
230
ARTICLE IWE-7000 98
REPLACEMENTS
IWE-7100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The rules of IWA-4000 apply.
231
SUBSECTION IWF
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS 1, 2, 3, AND MC
COMPONENT SUPPORTS OF
IWF-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

IWF-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-1200 Component Supports Subject to Examination and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-1220 Snubber Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-1230 Supports Exempt From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-1300 Support Examination Boundaries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IWF-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

IWF-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2210 Initial Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2220 Adjustment and Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2400 Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2410 Inspection Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2420 Successive Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
IWF-2430 Additional Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
IWF-2500 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
IWF-2510 Supports Selected for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
IWF-2520 Method of Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
IWF-3000 Standards for Examination Evaluations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

IWF-3100 Evaluation of Examination Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3110 Preservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3111 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3112 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3112.1 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3112.2 Acceptance by Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3112.3 Acceptance by Evaluation or Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3120 Inservice Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3122 Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3122.2 Acceptance by Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
IWF-3122.3 Acceptance by Evaluation or Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
233
IWF-3200 Supplemental Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IWF-3400 Acceptance Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IWF-3410 Acceptance Standards — Component Support Structural Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
IWF-5000 Inservice Inspection Requirements for Snubbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

IWF-5100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
IWF-5200 Preservice Examinations and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
IWF-5300 Inservice Examinations and Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
IWF-5400 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure
IWF-1300-1 Illustrations of Typical Support Examination Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tables
IWF-2410-1 Inspection Program A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
IWF-2410-2 Inspection Program B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
IWF-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
234
ARTICLE IWF-1000
IWF-1100 SCOPE IWF-1300 SUPPORT EXAMINATION

This Subsection provides the requirements for inser- BOUNDARIES
vice inspection of Class 1, 2, 3, and MC component The support examination boundaries for both integral
supports. and nonintegral supports are shown in Fig. IWF-1300-
1. The following definitions apply.
(a) The boundary of an integral support (B) connected
to a pressure retaining component (A) is the distance
IWF-1200 COMPONENT SUPPORTS
from the pressure retaining component (A) as indicated
SUBJECT TO EXAMINATION in IWB, IWC, IWD, and IWE.
AND TEST (b) The boundary of an integral support (C) connected
IWF-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS to a building structure (E) is the surface of the building
structure.
The examination requirements shall apply to the (c) The boundary of a nonintegral support (D) con-
following: nected to a pressure retaining component (A) is the
(a) piping supports contact surface between the component and the support.
(b) supports other than piping supports (d) The boundary of a nonintegral support (D) con-
nected to a building structure (E) is the surface of the
building structure.
IWF-1220 SNUBBER INSPECTION (e) Where the mechanical connection of a nonintegral
REQUIREMENTS support is buried within the component insulation, the
support boundary may extend from the surface of the
The inservice inspection requirements for snubbers component insulation, provided the support either carries
shall be in accordance with the requirements of the weight of the component or serves as a structural
IWF-5000. restraint in compression.
(f) The examination boundary of an intervening ele-
ment shall include the attachment portion1 of the in-
IWF-1230 SUPPORTS EXEMPT FROM tervening element to pressure retaining components,
EXAMINATION integral and nonintegral attachments of pressure re-
taining components, and integral and nonintegral sup-
Supports exempt from the examination requirements
ports. The examination boundary does not include the
of IWF-2000 are those connected to piping and other
attachment of the intervening element to the building
items exempted from volumetric, surface, or VT-1 or
structure.
VT-3 visual examination by IWB-1220, IWC-1220,
(g) All integral and nonintegral connections within
IWD-1220, and IWE-1220. In addition, portions of
the boundary governed by IWF rules and requirements
supports that are inaccessible by being encased in
are included.
concrete, buried underground, or encapsulated by guard
pipe are also exempt from the examination requirements
of IWF-2000. 1 Attachment portion includes welds, bolting, pins, clamps, etc.
235
Fig. IWF-1300-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. IWF-1300-1 ILLUSTRATIONS OF TYPICAL SUPPORT EXAMINATION BOUNDARIES
236
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPONENT SUPPORTS Fig. IWF-1300-1
FIG. IWF-1300-1 ILLUSTRATIONS OF TYPICAL SUPPORT EXAMINATION BOUNDARIES (CONT’D)
237
ARTICLE IWF-2000
IWF-2100 SCOPE TABLE IWF-2410-1

The requirements of this Article apply to the examina-
tion and inspection of component supports, but not to Inspection Period, Minimum Maximum
the inservice test requirements of IWF-5000. Inspection Calendar Years of Examinations Examinations
Interval Plant Service Completed, % Credited, %
1st 3 100 100
2nd 7 33 67
IWF-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION 10 100 100
IWF-2210 INITIAL EXAMINATION 3rd 13 16 34

17 50
(a) All examinations listed in Table IWF-2500-1
20 66 75
shall be performed completely, once, as a preservice 23 100 100
examination. These preservice examinations shall be
extended to include 100% of all supports not exempted 4th 27 8 16
by IWF-1230. 30 25 34
33 50 67
(b) Examinations for systems that operate at a temper-
37 75 100
ature greater than 200°F (93°C) during normal plant 40 100 ...
operation shall be performed during or following initial
system heatup and cooldown. Other examinations may
be performed prior to initial system heatup and
cooldown.
IWF-2400 INSPECTION SCHEDULE
IWF-2410 INSPECTION PROGRAM
(a) Inservice examinations shall be performed either
IWF-2220 ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR /
during normal system operation or plant outages.
REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES
(b) The required examinations shall be completed in
(a) Prior to return of the system to service, the accordance with the inspection schedule provided in
applicable examinations listed in Table IWF-2500-1 Table IWF-2410-1 or Table IWF-2410-2.
shall be performed on component supports that have (c) If component supports are added to the Inspection
been adjusted in accordance with IWF-3000 or corrected Program during the service lifetime of a plant, examina-
or modified by repair /replacement activities. tion shall be scheduled as follows:
(b) For systems that operate at a temperature greater (1) When component supports are added during
than 200°F during normal plant operation, the Owner the first period of an interval, at least 25% of the
shall perform an additional preservice examination on examinations required by the applicable Examination
the affected component supports during or following Category and Item Number for the added component
the subsequent system heatup and cooldown cycle unless supports shall be performed during each of the second
determined unnecessary by evaluation. This examination and third periods of that interval.
shall be performed during operation or at the next (2) When component supports are added during
refueling outage. the second period of an interval, at least 25% of the
238
IWF-2410 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPONENT SUPPORTS IWF-2500
98 TABLE IWF-2410-2 ponent supports for which corrective action is required.

INSPECTION PROGRAM B The additional examinations shall be extended to include
additional supports within the system, equal in number
Inspection and of the same type and function as those scheduled
Period, Calendar
Years of Plant Minimum Maximum for examination during the inspection period.
Inspection Service, Within Examinations Examinations (b) When the additional examinations required by
Interval the Interval Completed, % Credited, % IWF-2430(a) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
All 3 16 50 ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
7 501 75 examinations shall be further extended to include addi-
10 100 100 tional examinations during the current outage. These
Note:
additional examinations shall include the remaining
(1) If the first period completion percentage for any examination component supports within the system of the same type
category exceeds 34%, at least 16% of the required examinations and function.
shall be performed in the second period.
(c) When the additional examinations required by
IWF-2430(b) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
examinations shall be extended to include all nonexempt
examinations required by the applicable Examination supports potentially subject to the same failure modes
Category and Item Number for the added component that required corrective measures in accordance with
supports shall be performed during the third period of IWF-2430(a) and (b).
that interval. Also, these additional examinations shall include
(3) When component supports are added during nonexempt component supports in other systems when
the third period of an interval, examinations shall be the support failures requiring corrective measures indi-
scheduled in accordance with IWF-2410(b) for succes- cate non-system-related support failure modes.
sive intervals. (d) When the additional examinations required by
(d) Following completion of Program A after 40 IWF-2430(c) reveal flaws or relevant conditions ex-
years, successive inspection intervals shall follow the ceeding the acceptance standards of IWF-3400, the
10 year inspection interval of Program B. Owner shall examine those exempt component supports
that could be affected by the same observed failure
modes and could affect nonexempt components.
IWF-2420 SUCCESSIVE INSPECTIONS
(a) The sequence of component support examinations
established during the first inspection interval shall be
repeated during each successive inspection interval, to
the extent practical.
(b) When a component support is accepted for contin-
ued service in accordance with IWF-3112.2 or IWF-
3122.2, the component support shall be reexamined IWF-2500 EXAMINATION
during the next inspection period listed in the schedules REQUIREMENTS
of the inspection programs of IWF-2410.
The following shall be examined in accordance with
(c) When the examinations required by IWF-2420(b)
Table IWF-2500-1:
do not require additional corrective measures during
(a) mechanical connections to pressure retaining com-
the next inspection period, the inspection schedule may
ponents and building structure
revert to the requirements of IWF-2420(a).
(b) weld connections to building structure
(c) weld and mechanical connections at intermediate
joints in multiconnected integral and nonintegral sup-
IWF-2430 ADDITIONAL EXAMINATIONS
ports
(a) Component support examinations performed in (d) clearances of guides and stops, alignment of
accordance with Table IWF-2500-1 that reveal flaws supports, and assembly of support items
or relevant conditions exceeding the acceptance stan- (e) hot or cold settings of spring supports and con-
dards of IWF-3400 shall be extended to include the stant load supports
component supports immediately adjacent to those com- (f) accessible sliding surfaces
239
IWF-2510 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWF-2520
IWF-2510 SUPPORTS SELECTED FOR

EXAMINATION
Supports not exempted by IWF-1230 shall be exam-
ined in accordance with Table IWF-2500-1.
IWF-2520 METHOD OF EXAMINATION

The methods of examination shall comply with those
in Table IWF-2500-1. Alternative methods of examina-
tion meeting the requirements of IWA-2240 may be
used.
240
TABLE IWF-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY F-A, SUPPORTS
Examination
Item1 Requirements / Examination Acceptance Extent and Exami- Frequency of
No. Support Types Examined Fig. No. Method Standard nation Examination4
F1.10 Class 1 Piping Supports IWF-1300-1 Visual, VT-3 IWF-3410 25% of Class 12 Each inspection
interval
interval
interval
F1.40 Supports Other Than Piping Supports IWF-1300-1 Visual, VT-3 IWF-3410 100% of the supports3 Each inspection
(Class 1, 2, 3, and MC) interval
241
REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPONENT SUPPORTS
NOTES:
(1) Item numbers shall be categorized to identify support types by component support function (e.g., A p supports such as one directional rod hangers; B p
supports such as multi-directional restraints; and C p supports that allow thermal movement, such as springs).
(2) The total percentage sample shall be comprised of supports from each system (such as Main Steam, Feedwater, or RHR), where the individual sample sizes
are proportional to the total number of non-exempt supports of each type and function within each system.
(3) For multiple components other than piping, within a system of similar design, function, and service, the supports of only one of the multiple components
are required to be examined.
(4) To the extent practical, the same supports selected for examination during the first inspection interval shall be examined during each successive inspection
interval.
Table IWF-2500-1
ARTICLE IWF-3000
STANDARDS FOR EXAMINATION EVALUATIONS
IWF-3100 EVALUATION OF (b) If a component support or a portion of a compo-

EXAMINATION RESULTS nent support has been evaluated or tested and determined
to be acceptable for service in accordance with IWF-
IWF-3110 PRESERVICE EXAMINATIONS 3112.3(a), the Owner may perform corrective measures
IWF-3111 General to restore the component support to its original design
condition. The requirements of IWF-2220 are not appli-
The preservice examinations performed to meet the cable after corrective measures of IWF-3112.2(a) are
requirements of IWF-2200 shall be evaluated by com- performed.
paring the examination results with the acceptance (c) Records and reports shall meet the requirements
standards specified in IWF-3400. of IWA-6000.
IWF-3112 Acceptance
IWF-3120 INSERVICE EXAMINATIONS
IWF-3112.1 Acceptance by Examination. Compo-
nent supports whose examinations do not reveal condi- IWF-3121 General
tions described in IWF-3410(a) shall be acceptable for Inservice nondestructive examinations performed dur-
service. ing or at the end of successive inspection intervals
IWF-3112.2 Acceptance by Correction. A support to meet the requirements of Table IWF-2500-1 and
whose examination detects conditions described in IWF- conducted in accordance with the procedures of IWA-
3410(a) is unacceptable for service until such conditions 2200 shall be evaluated by comparing the results of
are corrected by one or more of the following: examinations with the acceptance standards specified
(a) adjustment and reexamination in accordance with in IWF-3400.
IWF-2200 for conditions such as
(1) detached or loosened mechanical connections;
IWF-3122 Acceptance
(2) improper hot or cold settings of spring supports
and constant load supports; IWF-3122.1 Acceptance by Examination. Compo-
(3) misalignment of supports; or nent supports whose examinations do not reveal condi-
(4) improper displacement settings of guides tions described in IWF-3410(a) shall be acceptable for
and stops. continued service. Verified changes of conditions from
(b) repair /replacement activities in accordance with prior examinations shall be recorded in accordance with
IWA-4000 and reexamination in accordance with IWA-6230.
IWF-2200.
IWF-3122.2 Acceptance by Correction. A support
IWF-3112.3 Acceptance by Evaluation or Test whose examination detects conditions described in IWF-
(a) As an alternative to the requirements of IWF- 3410(a) is unacceptable for continued service until such
3112.2, a component support or a portion of a compo- conditions are corrected by one or more of the following:
nent support containing relevant conditions that do not (a) adjustment and reexamination in accordance with
meet the acceptance standards of IWF-3410 shall be IWF-2200 for conditions such as
acceptable for service without corrective measures if (1) detached or loosened mechanical connections;
an evaluation or test demonstrates that the component (2) improper hot or cold settings of spring supports
support is acceptable for service. and constant load supports;
242
IWF-3122.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPONENT SUPPORTS IWF-3410
(3) misalignment of supports; or examinations that detect surface flaws that exceed IWF-
(4) improper displacement settings of guides 3400 criteria may be supplemented by either surface
and stops. or volumetric examinations.
(b) repair /replacement activities in accordance with
IWA-4000 and reexamination in accordance with
IWF-2200. IWF-3400 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
IWF-3122.3 Acceptance by Evaluation or Test IWF-3410 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS —
(a) As an alternative to the requirements of IWF- COMPONENT SUPPORT
3122.2, a component support or a portion of a compo- STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY
nent support containing relevant conditions that do not (a) Component support conditions which are unac-
meet the acceptance standards of IWF-3410 shall be ceptable for continued service shall include the fol-
acceptable for service without corrective measures if lowing:
an evaluation or test demonstrates that the component (1) deformations or structural degradations of fas-
support is acceptable for service. teners, springs, clamps, or other support items;
(b) If a component support or a portion of a compo- (2) missing, detached, or loosened support items;
nent support has been evaluated or tested and determined (3) arc strikes, weld spatter, paint, scoring,
to be acceptable for service in accordance with IWF- roughness, or general corrosion on close tolerance ma-
3122.3(a), the Owner may perform corrective measures chined or sliding surfaces;
to restore the component support to its original design (4) improper hot or cold settings of spring supports
condition. The requirements of IWF-2220 are not appli- and constant load supports;
cable after corrective measures of IWF-3122.2(a) are (5) misalignment of supports;
performed. (6) improper clearances of guides and stops.
(c) Records and reports shall meet the requirements (b) Except as defined in IWF-3410(a), the following
of IWA-6000. are examples of nonrelevant conditions:
(1) fabrication marks (e.g., from punching, layout,
bending, rolling, and machining);
IWF-3200 SUPPLEMENTAL (2) chipped or discolored paint;
EXAMINATIONS (3) weld spatter on other than close tolerance
machined or sliding surfaces;
Examinations that detect conditions that require evalu- (4) scratches and surface abrasion marks;
ation in accordance with the requirements of IWF-3100 (5) roughness or general corrosion which does not
may be supplemented by other examination methods reduce the load bearing capacity of the support;
and techniques (IWA-2000) to determine the character (6) general conditions acceptable by the material,
of the flaw (that is, size, shape, and orientation). Visual Design, and /or Construction Specifications.
243
ARTICLE IWF-5000
INSERVICE INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR
SNUBBERS
IWF-5100 SCOPE IWF-5300 INSERVICE EXAMINATIONS

This Article provides requirements for inservice in-
AND TESTS
spection of snubbers. (a) Inservice examinations shall be performed in
accordance with ASME /ANSI OM, Part 4, using the
VT-3 visual examination method described in IWA-
2213.
(b) Inservice tests shall be performed in accordance
with ASME /ANSI OM, Part 4.
(c) Integral and nonintegral attachments for snubbers,
including lugs, bolting, pins, and clamps, shall be
IWF-5200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATIONS examined in accordance with the requirements of this
AND TESTS Subsection.
(a) Preservice examinations shall be performed in
accordance with ASME /ANSI OM, Part 4, using the
VT-3 visual examination method described in IWA- IWF-5400 REPAIR /REPLACEMENT
2213. ACTIVITIES
(b) Preservice tests shall be performed in accordance Repair /replacement activities performed on snubbers
with ASME /ANSI OM, Part 4. shall be in accordance with IWA-4000. Snubbers in-
(c) Integral and nonintegral attachments for snubbers, stalled, corrected, or modified by repair /replacement
including lugs, bolting, pins, and clamps, shall be activities shall be examined and tested in accordance
examined in accordance with the requirements of this with the applicable requirements of IWF-5200 prior to
Subsection. return to service.
244
SUBSECTION IWL
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC
CONCRETE COMPONENTS OF
IWL-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

IWL-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
IWL-1200 Items Subject to Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
IWL-1210 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
IWL-1220 Items Exempt From Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
IWL-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

IWL-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2200 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2210 Examination Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2220.1 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2220.2 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2230 Preservice Examination of Repair /Replacement Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2300 Visual Examination, Personnel Qualification, and Responsible Engineer . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2310 Visual Examination and Personnel Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
IWL-2320 Responsible Engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
IWL-2400 Inservice Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
IWL-2410 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
IWL-2420 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
IWL-2421 Sites With Multiple Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
IWL-2510 Surface Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IWL-2520 Examination of Unbonded Post-Tensioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IWL-2521 Tendon Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IWL-2521.1 Exemptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IWL-2522 Tendon Force and Elongation Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
IWL-2523 Tendon Wire and Strand Sample Examination and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2523.1 Tendon Detensioning and Sample Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2523.2 Sample Examination and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2523.3 Retensioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2524 Examination of Tendon Anchorage Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2524.1 Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2524.2 Free Water Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2525 Examination of Corrosion Protection Medium and Free Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2525.1 Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
245
IWL-2525.2 Sample Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2526 Removal and Replacement of Corrosion Protection Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-3000 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

IWL-3100 Preservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3110 Concrete Surface Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3111 Acceptance by Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3112 Acceptance by Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3113 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3120 Unbonded Post-Tensioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3200 Inservice Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3210 Surface Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3220 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3221.1 Tendon Force and Elongation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
IWL-3221.2 Tendon Wire or Strand Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
IWL-3221.3 Tendon Anchorage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
IWL-3221.4 Corrosion Protection Medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
IWL-3300 Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
IWL-3310 Evaluation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
IWL-4000 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

IWL-4100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4110 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4120 Repair /Replacement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4200 Repair /Replacement Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4210 Responsible Engineer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4220 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4230 Reinforcing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4240 Post-Tensioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
IWL-4300 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
IWL-5000 System Pressure Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

IWL-5100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5200 System Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5210 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5220 Test Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5230 Leakage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5250 Test Procedure and Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5260 Corrective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
IWL-5300 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tables
IWL-2500-1 Examination Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
246
IWL-2521-1 Number of Tendons for Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
IWL-2525-1 Corrosion Protection Medium Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
247
ARTICLE IWL-1000
IWL-1100 SCOPE IWL-1220 ITEMS EXEMPT FROM

EXAMINATION
(a) This Subsection provides requirements for pre-
service examination, inservice inspection, and repair / The following items are exempt from the examination
replacement activities of the reinforced concrete and requirements of IWL-2000:
the post-tensioning systems of Class CC components, (a) tendon end anchorages that are inaccessible, sub-
herein referred to as concrete containments as defined ject to the requirements of IWL-2521.1;
by CC-1000. (b) portions of the concrete surface that are covered
(b) The rules and requirements of this Subsection by the liner, foundation material, or backfill, or are
do not apply to the following: otherwise obstructed by adjacent structures, components,
(1) steel portions not backed by concrete; parts, or appurtenances.
(2) shell metallic liners;
(3) penetration liners extending the containment
liner through the surrounding shell concrete.
IWL-1200 ITEMS SUBJECT TO

EXAMINATION
IWL-1210 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
apply to concrete containments.
249
ARTICLE IWL-2000
98 IWL-2100 GENERAL IWL-2230 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION OF

REPAIR /REPLACEMENT
The requirements of IWA-2000 apply, except that
ACTIVITIES
the requirements of IWA-2210 and IWA-2300 are not
applicable to visual examinations or qualification of (a) When a concrete containment or a portion thereof
visual examination personnel for concrete containments. is corrected or modified by repair /replacement activities
during the service lifetime of a plant, the preservice
examination requirements shall be met for the repair /
replacement activity.
98 IWL-2200 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION (b) When the repair /replacement activity is performed
Preservice examination shall be performed in accord- while the plant is not in service, the preservice examination
ance with the following requirements. shall be performed prior to resumption of service.
(c) When the repair /replacement activity is performed
while the plant is in service, the preservice examination
may be deferred to the next scheduled outage.
IWL-2210 EXAMINATION SCHEDULE
Preservice examination shall be completed prior to
initial plant startup.
IWL-2300 VISUAL EXAMINATION,

PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION,
IWL-2220 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER
IWL-2220.1 Concrete IWL-2310 VISUAL EXAMINATION AND
(a) Preservice examination shall be performed in PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION
accordance with IWL-2510.
(b) The preservice examination shall be performed (a) General visual examinations of concrete surfaces
following completion of the containment Structural shall be performed to assess the general structural
Integrity Test. condition of containments. The general visual examina-
tion shall be performed in sufficient detail to identify
IWL-2220.2 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Systems. areas of concrete deterioration and distress, such as
The following information shall be documented in the defined in ACI 201.1.
preservice examination records. This information may (b) Detailed visual examinations shall be performed
be extracted from construction records. to determine:
(a) Date on which each tendon was tensioned. (1) the magnitude and extent of deterioration and
(b) Initial seating force in each tendon. distress of suspect concrete surfaces initially detected
(c) For each tendon anchorage, the location of all by general visual examinations.
missing or broken wires or stands and unseated wires. (2) the condition and any deterioration of concrete
(d) For each tendon anchorage, the location of all surfaces at tendon anchorage areas.
missing or detached buttonheads or missing wedges. (3) the condition (e.g., cracks, wear, or corrosion)
(e) The product designation for the corrosion protec- of tendon wires or strands, and anchorage hardware,
tion medium used to fill the tendon duct. as described in IWL-2524.1; and
250
IWL-2310 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS IWL-2421
(4) to determine the condition of concrete surfaces completed within this stated time interval, examination
affected by repair/replacement activities, in accordance of those portions may be deferred until the next regularly
with IWL-5250. scheduled plant outage.
(c) Visual examinations shall be performed directly (c) The 10 year and subsequent examinations shall
or remotely, with adequate illumination, by personnel commence not more than 1 year prior to the specified
with visual acuity sufficient to detect evidence of degra- dates and shall be completed not more than 1 year
dation. after such dates. If plant operating conditions are such
(d) The Owner shal define qualification requirements that examination of portions of the concrete cannot be
for personnel performing examinations of concrete and completed within this stated time interval, examination
tendon anchorage hardware, wires, or strands. of those portions may be deferred until the next regularly
(e) The Owner shall define requirements for visual scheduled plant outage.
examination of tendon achorage hardware, wires, or
strands.
IWL-2420 UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING
SYSTEMS
IWL-2320 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER
(a) Unbonded post-tensioning systems shall be exam-
The Responsible Engineer shall be a Registered ined in accordance with IWL-2520 at 1, 3, and 5 years
Professional Engineer experienced in evaluating the following the completion of the containment Structural
condition of structural concrete. The Responsible Engi- Integrity Test and every 5 years thereafter.
neer shall have knowledge of the design and Construc- (b) The 1, 3, and 5 year examinations shall commence
tion Codes and other criteria used in design and con- not more than 6 months prior to the specified dates
struction of concrete containments in nuclear power and shall be completed not more than 6 months after
plants. such dates. If plant operating conditions are such that
The Responsible Engineer shall be responsible for examination of portions of the post-tensioning system
the following: cannot be completed within this stated time interval,
(a) development of plans and procedures for examina- examination of those portions may be deferred until
tion of concrete surfaces; the next regularly scheduled plant outage.
(b) approval, instruction, and training of concrete (c) The 10 year and subsequent examinations shall
examination personnel; commence not more than 1 year prior to the specified
(c) evaluation of examination results; dates and shall be completed not more than 1 year
(d) preparation or review of Repair /Replacement after such dates.
Plans and procedures;
(e) review of procedures for pressure tests following
repair/replacement activities; IWL-2421 Sites With Multiple Plants
(f) submittal of a report to the Owner documenting re- (a) For sites with multiple plants, the examination
sults of examinations, repair /replacement activities, and requirements for the concrete containments may be
pressure tests. modified if the containments utilize the same pre-
stressing system and are essentially identical in design,
if post-tensioning operations for each subsequent con-
IWL-2400 INSERVICE INSPECTION tainment constructed at the site were completed not
SCHEDULE more than 2 years apart, and if the containments are
similarly exposed to or protected from the outside
IWL-2410 CONCRETE
environment.
(a) Concrete shall be examined in accordance with (b) When the conditions of IWL-2421(a) are met,
IWL-2510 at 1, 3, and 5 years following the completion the inspection dates and examination requirements may
of the containment Structural Integrity Test CC-6000 be as follows.
and every 5 years thereafter. (1) For the containment with the first Structural
(b) The 1, 3, and 5 year examinations shall commence Integrity Test, all examinations required by IWL-2500
not more than 6 months prior to the specified dates shall be performed at 1, 3, and 10 years and every
and shall be completed not more than 6 months after 10 years thereafter. Only the examinations required by
such dates. If plant operating conditions are such that IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 need be performed at 5 and
examination of portions of the concrete cannot be 15 years and every 10 years thereafter.
251
IWL-2421 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWL-2522
(2) For each subsequent containment constructed not examined during earlier inspections. The number
at the site, all examinations required by IWL-2500 of tendons to be examined during an inspection shall
shall be performed at 1, 5, and 15 years and every be as specified in Table IWL-2521-1.
10 years thereafter. Only the examinations required by (b) One tendon of each type (as defined in Table
IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 need be performed at 3 and IWL-2521-1) shall be selected from the first year inspec-
10 years and every 10 years thereafter. tion sample and designated as a common tendon. Each
common tendon shall be examined during each inspec-
tion. A common tendon shall not be detensioned unless
IWL-2500 EXAMINATION required by IWL-3300. If a common tendon is deten-
sioned, another common tendon of the same type shall
REQUIREMENTS
be selected from the first year inspection sample.
Examination shall be performed in accordance with (c) If a containment with a stranded post-tensioning
the requirements of Table IWL-2500-1. system is constructed with a predesignated number of
detensionable tendons, one tendon of each type shall
be selected from among those that are detensionable.
IWL-2510 SURFACE EXAMINATION The remaining tendons shall be selected from among
those that cannot be detensioned.
(a) Concrete surface areas, including coated areas,
except those exempted by IWL-1220(b), shall be visu- IWL-2521.1 Exemptions. The following require-
ally examined in accordance with IWL-2310(a) for ments shall apply to tendon anchorages that are not
evidence of conditions indicative of damage or degra- accessible for examination because of safety or radiolog-
dation, such as defined in ACI 201.1. Selected areas, ical hazards or because of structural obstructions.
such as those that indicate suspect conditions, shall be (a) After the process of randomly selecting tendons
visually examined in accordance with IWL-2310(b). to be examined, any inaccessible tendons shall be
(b) Tendon anchorage areas, including coated areas, designated as exempt and removed from the sample.
except those exempted by IWL-1220(a), shall be visually (b) Substitute tendons shall be selected for all tendons
examined in accordance with IWL-2310(b) for evidence designated as exempt. Each substitute tendon shall be
of conditions indicating damage or degradation. Selected selected so that it is located as close as possible to
areas, such as those that indicate suspect conditions, the exempted tendon, and shall be examined in accord-
shall be subject to additional examinations, if specified ance with IWL-2520.
by the Responsible Engineer. (c) Each exempted tendon shall be examined in
(c) For containments with unbonded post-tensioning accordance with IWL-2524 and IWL-2525 to the extent
systems, the concrete surfaces and tendon end anchorage that the end anchorages of the exempt tendon are
areas shall be examined for corrosion protection medium accessible either during operation or at an outage.
leakage, and the tendon end caps shall be examined
for deformation.
(d) The examination shall be performed by, or under IWL-2522 Tendon Force and Elongation
the direction of, the Responsible Engineer. Measurements
(e) Visual examinations may be performed from (a) The prestressing force in all inspection sample
floors, roofs, platforms, walkways, ladders, ground sur- tendons shall be measured by lift-off or an equiva-
face, or other permanent vantage points, unless tempo- lent test.
rary close-in access is required by the inspection plan. (b) Equipment used to measure tendon force shall
be calibrated in accordance with a calibration procedure
prior to the first tendon force measurement and following
IWL-2520 EXAMINATION OF UNBONDED the final tendon force measurement of the inspection
POST-TENSIONING SYSTEMS period. Accuracy of the calibration shall be within
1.5% of the specified minimum ultimate strength of
IWL-2521 Tendon Selection
the tendon. If the post-test calibration differs from the
(a) Tendons to be examined during an inspection pretest calibration by more than the specified accuracy
shall be selected on a random basis except as noted tolerance, the results of the examination shall be eval-
in IWL-2521(b) and (c). The population from which uated.
the random sample is drawn shall consist of all tendons (c) During retensioning of a tendon, the tendon elon-
of a particular type (as defined in Table IWC-2521-1) gation shall be measured.
252
TABLE IWL-2500-1
EXAMINATION CATEGORY L-A, CONCRETE
Item Test or Examination Test or Examination Acceptance Extent Frequency Deferral

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method Standard of Examination of Examination of Examination
L1.10 Concrete Surface
L1.11 All Accessible Surface Areas IWL-2510 General Visual IWL-3210 IWL-2510 IWL-2410 NA
L1.12 Suspect Areas IWL-2510 General Visual IWL-3210 IWL-2510 IWL-2410 NA
253
EXAMINATION CATEGORY L-B, UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING SYSTEM
Item Test or Examination Test or Examination Acceptance Extent Frequency Deferral

No. Parts Examined Requirement Method Standard of Examination of Examination of Examination
L2.10 Tendon IWL-2522 IWL-2522 IWL-3221.1 IWL-2521 IWL-2420 NA
L2.20 Wire or Strand IWL-2523 IWL-2523.2 IWL-3221.2 IWL-2523.1 IWL-2420 NA
L2.30 Anchorage Hardware and Surrounding Concrete IWL-2524 Detailed Visual IWL-3221.3 IWL-2524.1 IWL-2420 NA
REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS
L2.40 Corrosion Protection Medium IWL-2525 IWL-2525.2(a) IWL-3221.4 IWL-2525.1(a) IWL-2420 NA
L2.50 Free Water IWL-2525 IWL-2525.2(b) IWL-2525.1(b) IWL-2420 NA

Table IWL-2500-1
IWL-2523 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IWL-2526
TABLE IWL-2521-1 IWL-2524 Examination of Tendon Anchorage

NUMBER OF TENDONS FOR EXAMINATION Areas
Required Maximum IWL-2524.1 Visual Examination. A detailed visual

Percentage1,2 Minimum1 Required examination in accordance with IWL-2310(b) shall be
Inspection of all Tendons Number of Number of performed on the tendon anchorage hardware, including
Period of Each Type3 Each Type Each Type bearing plates, anchorheads, wedges, buttonheads,
1st year 4 4 10 shims, and the concrete extending outward a distance
3rd year 4 4 10 of 2 ft from the edge of the bearing plate. The following
5th year 4 4 10
shall be documented:
10th year4 2 3 5
(a) concrete cracks having widths greater than
0.01 in.;
NOTES:
(1) Fractional tendon numbers shall be rounded to the next higher (b) corrosion, broken or protruding wires, missing
integer. Actual number examined shall not be less than the mini- buttonheads, broken strands, and cracks in tendon an-
mum required number and need not be more than the maximum chorage hardware;
required number.
(2) The reduced sample size listed for the 10th year and subsequent (c) broken wires or strands, protruding wires and
inspections is applicable only if the acceptable criteria of IWL- detached buttonheads following retensioning of tendons
3221.1 have been met for the last three inspections. which have been detensioned.
(3) A tendon type is defined by its geometry and position in the
containment: e.g., hoop, vertical, dome, helical, and inverted U. IWL-2524.2 Free Water Documentation. The quan-
(4) The number and percentage of tendons to be examined every 5th
year thereafter shall remain the same. tity of free water contained in the anchorage end cap
as well as any which drains from the tendon during
the examination process shall be documented.
IWL-2525 Examination of Corrosion Protection

IWL-2523 Tendon Wire and Strand Sample Medium and Free Water
Examination and Testing
IWL-2525.1 Samples
IWL-2523.1 Tendon Detensioning and Sample Re- (a) Samples of the corrosion protection medium shall
moval. One sample tendon of each type shall be be taken from each end of each tendon examined. Free
completely detensioned. A single wire or strand shall water shall not be included in the samples.
be removed from each detensioned tendon. (b) Samples of free water shall be taken where water
IWL-2523.2 Sample Examination and Testing is present in quantities sufficient for laboratory analysis.
(a) Each removed wire or strand shall be examined IWL-2525.2 Sample Analysis
over its entire length for corrosion and mechanical (a) Each corrosion protection medium sample shall
damage. The examination shall determine the location be thoroughly mixed and analyzed for reserve alkalinity,
of most severe corrosion, if any. Strand wires shall be water content, and concentrations of water soluble
examined for wedge slippage marks. chlorides, nitrates, and sulfides. Analyses shall be per-
(b) Tension tests shall be performed on each removed formed in accordance with the procedures specified in
wire or strand: one at each end, one at midlength, and Table IWL-2525-1.
one in the location of the most corroded area, if (b) Free water samples shall be analyzed to deter-
any. The following information shall be obtained from mine pH.
each test:
(1) yield strength
(2) ultimate tensile strength IWL-2526 Removal and Replacement of
(3) elongation Corrosion Protection Medium
IWL-2523.3 Retensioning. Tendons that have been (a) The amount of corrosion protection medium re-
detensioned shall be retensioned to at least the force moved at each anchorage shall be measured and the
predicted for the tendon at the time of the test. However, total amount removed from each tendon (two anchor-
the retensioning force shall not exceed 70% of the ages) shall be recorded. The total amount replaced in
specified minimum ultimate tensile strength of the each tendon shall be recorded and differences between
tendon based on the number of effective wires or amount removed and amount replaced shall be docu-
strands in the tendon at the time of retensioning. mented.
254
(b) Corrosion protection medium may be replaced

using a pressurized system or cold pack, by pouring,
or by nonpressurized pumping on each end. The Respon-
sible Engineer shall specify the maximum pressure to
be used in a pressurized system.
TABLE IWL-2525-1
CORROSION PROTECTION MEDIUM ANALYSIS
Characteristic Test Method Acceptance Limit
Water content ASTM D 95 10 percent maximum
ASTM D 512 [Note (1)] or 10 ppm maximum

Water soluble chlorides ASTM D 4327 [Note (1)]
ASTM D 992 [Note (1)] or 10 ppm maximum

ASTM D 3867 [Note (1)] or
Water soluble nitrates ASTM D 4327 [Note (1)]
APHA 427 [Note (1)] or 10 ppm maximum

Water soluble sulfides APHA 4500-S2− [Note (1)]
Reserve alkalinity ASTM D 974 [Note (3)]

(Base number) Modified [Note (2)]
NOTES:
(1) Water Soluble Ion Tests. The inside (bottom and sides) of a one (1) liter beaker, approx. OD 105 mm,
height 145 mm, is thoroughly coated with 100 610 grams of the sample. The coated beaker is filled
with approximately 900 ml of distilled water and heated in an oven at a controlled temperature of 100°F
(37.8°) 62°F for 4 hours. The water extraction is tested by the noted test procedures for the appropriate
water soluble ions. Results are reported as PPM in the extracted water.
(2) ASTM D 974 Modified. Place 10 g of sample in a 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10 cc isopropyl alcohol
and 5 cc toluene. Heat until sample goes into solution. Add 90 cc distilled water and 20 cc 1NH2SO4.
Place solution on a steam bath for 1⁄2 hour. Stir well. Add a few drops of indicator (1% phenolphthalein)
and titrate with 1NNaOH until the lower layer just turns pink. If acid or base solutions are not exactly
1N, the exact normalities should be used when calculating the base number. The Total Base Number
(TBN), expressed as milligrams of KOH per gram of sample, is calculated as follows:
[20 (NA) − (B)(NB)]56.1

TBN p
W
where
B p milliliters NaOH
NA p normality of H2SO4 solution
NB p normality of NaOH solution
W p weight of sample in grams
(3) The base number shall be at least 50% of the as-installed value, unless the as-installed value is 5 or
less, in which case the base number shall be no less than zero. If the tendon duct is filled with a mixture of
materials having various as-installed base numbers, the lowest number shall govern acceptance.
255
ARTICLE IWL-3000
IWL-3100 PRESERVICE EXAMINATION or end-cap deformation sufficient to warrant further

evaluation or performance of repair /replacement activ-
IWL-3110 CONCRETE SURFACE CONDITION
ities.
IWL-3111 Acceptance by Examination
The condition of the surface is acceptable if the IWL-3212 Acceptance by Evaluation
Responsible Engineer determines that there is no evi-
Items with examination results that do not meet the
dence of damage or degradation sufficient to warrant
acceptance standards of IWL-3211 shall be evaluated
further evaluation or performance of repair /replacement
as required by IWL-3300.
activities.
IWL-3213 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement

IWL-3112 Acceptance by Evaluation Activity
Items with examination results that do not meet the Repair /replacement activities to reestablish the ac-
acceptance standards of IWL-3111 shall be evaluated ceptability of an item shall be completed as required
as required by IWL-3300. by IWL-3300.
IWL-3113 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement

Activity IWL-3220 UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING
SYSTEMS
Repair /replacement activities required to reestablish
acceptability of an item shall be completed as required IWL-3221 Acceptance by Examination
by IWL-3300. IWL-3221.1 Tendon Force and Elongation. Tendon
forces and elongation are acceptable if:
(a) the average of all measured tendon forces, includ-
IWL-3120 UNBONDED POST-TENSIONING ing those measured in IWL-3221.1(b)(2), for each type
SYSTEM of tendon is equal to or greater than the minimum
The condition of the unbonded post-tensioning system required prestress specified at the anchorage for that
is acceptable if it met the requirements of the construc- type of tendon;
tion specification at the time of installation. (b) the measured force in each individual tendon is
not less than 95% of the predicted force unless the
following conditions are satisfied:
(1) the measured force in not more than one tendon
IWL-3200 INSERVICE EXAMINATION
is between 90% and 95% of the predicted force;
IWL-3210 SURFACE CONDITION (2) the measured forces in two tendons located
adjacent to the tendon in IWL-3221.1(b)(1) are not
IWL-3211 Acceptance by Examination
less than 95% of the predicted forces; and
The condition of the concrete surface and tendon (3) the measured forces in all the remaining sample
end anchorage areas is acceptable if the Responsible tendons are not less than 95% of the predicted force.
Engineer determines that there is no evidence of damage (c) the prestressing forces for each type of tendon
or degradation, corrosion protection medium leakage, measured in IWL-3221.1(a) and (b), and the measure-
256
IWL-3221.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CLASS CC COMPONENTS IWL-3310
ment from the previous examination, indicate a prestress IWL-3222 Acceptance by Evaluation
loss such that predicted tendon forces meet the minimum
Items with examination results that do not meet the
design prestress forces at the next scheduled examina-
acceptance standards of IWL-3221 shall be evaluated
tion; and
as required by IWL-3300.
(d) the measured tendon elongation varies from the
last measurement, adjusted for effective wires or strands,
by less than 10%. IWL-3223 Acceptance by Repair /Replacement
Activity
IWL-3221.2 Tendon Wire or Strand Samples. The Repair /replacement activities to reestablish accept-
condition of wire or strand samples is acceptable if: ability of the condition of an item shall be completed
(a) samples are free of physical damage; as required by IWL-3300. Acceptable completion of
(b) sample ultimate tensile strength and elongation the repair /replacement activity shall constitute accept-
are not less than minimum specified values. ability of the item.
IWL-3221.3 Tendon Anchorage Areas. The condi-

tion of tendon anchorage areas is acceptable if: IWL-3300 EVALUATION
(a) there is no evidence of cracking in anchor heads,
shims, or bearing plates; IWL-3310 EVALUATION REPORT
(b) there is no evidence of active corrosion; Items with examination results that do not meet the
(c) broken or unseated wires, broken strands, and acceptance standards of IWL-3100 or IWL-3200 shall
detached buttonheads were documented and accepted be evaluated by the Owner. The Owner shall be respon-
during a preservice examination or during a previous sible for preparation of an Engineering Evaluation
inservice examination; Report stating the following:
(d) cracks in the concrete adjacent to the bearing (a) the cause of the condition that does not meet
plates do not exceed 0.01 in. (0.3 mm) in width; the acceptance standards;
(e) there is no evidence of free water. (b) the applicability of the condition to any other
plants at the same site;
IWL-3221.4 Corrosion Protection Medium. Corro- (c) the acceptability of the concrete containment
sion protection medium is acceptable when the reserve without repair of the item;
alkalinity, water content, and soluble ion concentrations (d) whether or not repair /replacement activity is re-
of all samples are within the limits specified in Table quired and, if required, the extent, method, and comple-
IWL-2525-1. The absolute difference between the tion date for the repair /replacement activity;
amount removed and the amount replaced shall not (e) extent, nature, and frequency of additional exami-
exceed 10% of the tendon net duct volume. nations.
257
ARTICLE IWL-4000
IWL-4100 GENERAL tivities on exposed-end anchors of the post-tensioning

system shall be in accordance with IWL-4240.
IWL-4110 SCOPE
(d) New material shall be chemically, mechanically,
(a) This Article provides requirements for repair / and physically compatible with existing concrete.
replacement activities on concrete containments. (e) When detensioning of prestressing tendons is
(b) Grease cups and installation screws are exempt required for the repair /replacement activity on the
from the requirements of this Article. concrete surface adjacent to the tendon, the Repair /
Replacement Plan shall require the following:
(1) selection of new material to minimize stress
IWL-4120 REPAIR /REPLACEMENT and strain incompatibilities between new material and
PROGRAM existing concrete;
(2) procedures for application of new material;
Repair /replacement activities shall be performed in (3) procedures for detensioning and retensioning
accordance with the Repair /Replacement Program and of prestressing tendons.
Plan required by IWA-4150. The Repair /Replacement (f) The Repair /Replacement Plan shall specify re-
Program shall address concrete material control. quirements for in-process sampling and testing of new
material.
IWL-4200 REPAIR /REPLACEMENT PLAN

IWL-4210 RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IWL-4230 REINFORCING STEEL
The Repair /Replacement Plan shall be developed Damaged reinforcing steel shall be corrected by any
under the direction of a Responsible Engineer (IWL- method permitted in the original Construction Code or
2300). in Section III, Division 2, with or without removal of
the damaged reinforcing steel.
IWL-4220 CONCRETE
IWL-4240 POST-TENSIONING SYSTEM
(a) The Repair /Replacement Plan shall specify re-
quirements for removal of defective material. (a) Welding of bearing plates and shim plates of
(b) The affected area shall be visually examined the post-tensioning system shall meet the applicable
to assure proper surface preparation of concrete and requirements of IWA-4000. The corrosion protection
reinforcing steel prior to placement of concrete. medium shall be restored following the repair /replace-
(c) When removal of defective material exposes rein- ment activity.
forcing steel, the reinforcing steel shall receive a detailed (b) The following items, as applicable, shall be con-
visual examination as defined in IWL-2310(b). Reinforc- tained in the Repair /Replacement Plan:
ing steel is acceptable when the Responsible Engineer (1) requirements for removal of items;
determines that there is no evidence of damage or (2) surface preparation required prior to installation
degradation sufficient to warrant further evaluation or of items;
repair. When required, reinforcing steel shall be repaired (3) examinations required prior to installation of
in accordance with IWL-4230. Repair /replacement ac- items;
258
(4) detensioning and retensioning requirements for

tendons affected by installation of items;
(5) requirements and procedures applicable to in-
stallation of items;
(6) in-process sampling and testing requirements
to be performed during installation of items.
IWL-4300 EXAMINATION
Areas of repair /replacement activities shall be exam-
ined in accordance with IWL-2000 to establish a new
preservice record and shall meet the acceptance stan-
dards of IWL-3000.
259
ARTICLE IWL-5000
IWL-5100 SCOPE IWL-5250 TEST PROCEDURE AND

EXAMINATIONS
This Article provides requirements for pressure testing
concrete containments following repair /replacement ac- The Responsible Engineer shall review the pressure
tivities. test procedure and shall authorize performance of the
pressure test. The surface of all containment concrete
placed during repair /replacement activities shall be
examined in accordance with IWL-2310(b) prior to
IWL-5200 SYSTEM TEST REQUIREMENTS start of pressurization, at test pressure, and following
IWL-5210 GENERAL completion of depressurization. Extended surface exami-
nations, additional examinations during pressurization,
A containment pressure test shall be performed fol- other examinations, and measurements of structural
lowing repair /replacement activities unless any of the response to pressure shall be conducted as specified
following conditions exist: by the Responsible Engineer.
(a) The Engineering Evaluation Report (IWL-3310)
demonstrates that the structural integrity of containment
in the prior to performance of the repair /replacement IWL-5260 CORRECTIVE ACTION
activity condition has not been reduced below that
required by the original design criteria. If the surface examinations of IWL-5250 cannot
(b) The repair /replacement activity affects only the satisfy the requirements specified by the Responsible
cover concrete external to the outermost layer of struc- Engineer, the area shall be examined to the extent
tural reinforcing steel or post-tensioning tendons. necessary to establish requirements for corrective action.
(c) The repair /replacement activity involves only Repair /replacement activities shall be performed in
exchange of post-tensioning tendons, tendon anchorage accordance with IWL-4000, and pressure testing shall
hardware, shims, or corrosion protection medium. be repeated in accordance with IWL-5200, prior to
returning the containment to service.
IWL-5220 TEST PRESSURE IWL-5300 REPORT

The pressure test shall be conducted at the design A pressure test report shall be prepared under the
basis accident pressure, Pa. direction of the Responsible Engineer. This report may
be an addition to a previously-prepared Engineering
Evaluation Report (IWL-3310). The report shall describe
pressure test procedures and examination results and
IWL-5230 LEAKAGE TEST
shall state whether or not the repair /replacement activity
A leakage test shall be conducted as required by is acceptable. If the repair /replacement activity is not
IWE-5000. acceptable, the report shall specify corrective measures.
260
SUBSECTION IWP
INSERVICE TESTING OF PUMPS
IN NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
IWP-1000 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

IWP-1100 Pump Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
261
ARTICLE IWP-1000
REQUIREMENTS
IWP-1100 PUMP TESTING

Pump testing shall be performed in accordance with
the requirements stated in ASME /ANSI OM, Part 6.
263
SUBSECTION IWV
INSERVICE TESTING OF VALVES
IN NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS
IWV-1000 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

IWV-1100 Valve Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
265
ARTICLE IWV-1000
REQUIREMENTS
IWV-1100 VALVE TESTING

Valve testing shall be performed in accordance with
the requirements stated in ASME /ANSI OM, Part 10.
267
MANDATORY APPENDICES A99
APPENDIX I ULTRASONIC EXAMINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
I-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

I-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
I-2000 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

I-2100 Vessels Greater Than 2 in. in Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2110 Reactor Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2120 Other Vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2200 Vessel Not Greater Than 2 in. in Thickness and All Piping Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2210 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2220 Welds in Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2300 Bolts and Studs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2400 All Other Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
I-2500 Thickness Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
I-Supplements
I-Supplement 1 Calibration Block Material and Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
I-Supplement 2 Calibration Blocks for Clad Welds or Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
I-Supplement 3 Calibration Blocks for Examination of Parts With Curved Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
I-Supplement 4 Alternative Weld Calibration Block Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
I-Supplement 5 Electronic Simulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 6 Pulse Repetition Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 7 Instrument Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 8 Scan Overlap and Search Unit Oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 9 Scan Angles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 10 Recording Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
I-Supplement 11 Geometric Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
I-Supplement 12 Flaw Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
APPENDIX II OWNER’S REPORTS FOR INSERVICE INSPECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Form NIS-1 Owner’s Report for Inservice Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Form NIS-2 Owner’s Report for Repair/Replacement Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
APPENDIX III ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF VESSELS NOT GREATER THAN 2

INCHES IN THICKNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
III-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
269

III-1100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
III-2000 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

III-2100 Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-2110 Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-2120 Search Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-2200 Personnel Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-2300 Written Procedure Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-2400 General Examination Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
III-2410 Examination Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
III-2420 Rate of Search Unit Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
III-2430 Scanning Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
III-3000 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

III-3100 Instrument Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3110 Screen Height Linearity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3120 Amplitude Control Linearity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3200 System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3210 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3230 Angle Beam Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
III-3300 Calibration Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
III-3310 Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
III-3320 System Calibration Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
III-3330 System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3331 Corrective Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3400 Basic Calibration Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3410 Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3411 Material Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3420 Surface Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3430 Calibration Reflectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3440 Retention and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3500 Calibration Data Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-4000 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

III-4100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4200 Surface Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4300 Identification of Examination Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4310 Weld Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4320 Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4330 Reference System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4400 Angle Beam Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4410 Beam Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4420 Reflectors Parallel to the Weld Seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4430 Reflectors Transverse to the Weld Seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4450 Inaccessible Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
III-4500 Recording Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
III-4510 Indications to Be Recorded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
III-4511 Flaw Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
III-4512 Indications Determined to Be of Geometric or Metallurgical Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
III-4520 Recorded Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
270

III-4530 Flaw Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
III-Supplement
III-Supplement 1 Austenitic and Dissimiliar Metal Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310–312
APPENDIX IV EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
IV-1000 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

IV-1100 Methods Addressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
IV-1200 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
IV-2000 General System and Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

IV-2100 Procedure Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IV-2200 Procedure Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IV-2300 Personnel Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IV-2310 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IV-2320 Personnel Requirements for Surface Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
IV-3000 Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

IV-3100 Qualification Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IV-3110 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IV-3120 Essential Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IV-3130 Requalification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
IV-4000 Essential Variable Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

IV-4100 Instruments and Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
IV-4200 Computerized System Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
IV-4300 Calibration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
IV-5000 Record of Qualification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
IV-Supplements
IV-Supplement 1 Equipment Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
IV-Supplement 2 Qualification Requirements for Surface Examination of Piping and Vessels . . . . . . . 323
IV-Supplement 3 Qualification Requirements for Surface Examination of Bolting — Center Bore
Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
IV-Supplement A Data Acquisition Procedure Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
IV-Supplement B Data Analysis Procedure Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
APPENDIX V SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND

PRESSURE VESSEL COMMITTEE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
271

V-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
V-2000 Inquiry Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
V-3000 Code Revisions or Additions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
V-4000 Code Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
V-5000 Code Interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
V-6000 Submittals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
APPENDIX VI QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL FOR VISUAL EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . 329
VI-1000 Introduction and Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
VI-2000 Qualification Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

VI-2100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
VI-3000 Written Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

VI-3100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3110 Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3120 Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3130 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3200 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3300 Use of an Outside Agency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-3400 Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
VI-4000 Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

VI-4100 Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4110 Initial Certification for Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4200 Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4300 Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4310 Administration of Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4320 Grading of Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4330 Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-4400 Interrupted Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
VI-5000 Qualification Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
VI-Supplements
VI-Supplement 1 Content of Initial Training Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
272

APPENDIX VII QUALIFICATION OF NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION PERSONNEL
FOR ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
VII-1000 Introduction and Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
VII-2000 Qualification Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

VII-2100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
VII-3000 Written Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

VII-3100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3110 Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3120 Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3130 Annual Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3140 Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3200 Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3300 Use of an Outside Agency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3400 Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
VII-3500 Availability of Training Course Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
VII-4000 Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

VII-4100 Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4110 Initial Certification for Ultrasonic Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4120 Experience Options for Level III Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4121 Option 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4122 Option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4123 Option 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4130 Experience Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
VII-4140 NDE Instructor Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4200 Training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4210 Program, Facilities, and Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4220 Training Course Content and Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4221 Training Course Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4222 Initial Training Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4223 Training Requirements for Previously Qualified Individuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4230 Evaluation of Initial Training Effectiveness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VII-4240 Annual Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4300 Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4310 Examination Questions and Test Specimens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4320 Level I and II Qualification Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4321 Level I and II General Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4322 Level I and II Specific Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4323 Level I and II Practical Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4330 Level III Qualification Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
VII-4340 Administration of Examinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
VII-4341 Level I and II General, Specific, and Practical Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
VII-4342 Level III Basic, Method, Specific, Practical, and Demonstration Examinations . . . . . 348
VII-4350 Grading of Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
VII-4360 Reexamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
VII-4400 Interrupted Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
273

VII-5000 Qualification Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
VII-5100 Pre-Certification Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
VII-5200 Certification Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
VII-5300 Maintenance of Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
VII-Supplements
VII-Supplement 1 Minimum Content of Initial Training Courses for the Ultrasonic Examination
Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
APPENDIX VIII PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION FOR ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION

SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
VIII-1000 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

VIII-1100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
VIII-2000 General Examination System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

VIII-2100 Procedure Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
VIII-2200 Personnel Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
VIII-3000 Qualification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

VIII-3100 Qualification Test Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VIII-3110 Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VIII-3120 Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VIII-3130 Essential Variable Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VIII-3140 Requalification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
VIII-4000 Essential Variable Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

VIII-4100 Procedure Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
VIII-4110 Pulsers, Receivers, and Search Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
VIII-4120 Search Unit Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
VIII-4200 Computerized System Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
VIII-4300 Calibration Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
VIII-5000 Record of Qualification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

VIII-5100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
VIII-Supplements
VIII-Supplement 1 Evaluating Electronic Characteristics of Ultrasonic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
VIII-Supplement 2 Qualification Requirements for Wrought Austenitic Piping Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
VIII-Supplement 3 Qualification Requirements for Ferritic Piping Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
VIII-Supplement 4 Qualification Requirements for the Clad /Base Metal Interface of Reactor Vessel . . 367
VIII-Supplement 5 Qualification Requirements for Nozzle Inside Radius Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
VIII-Supplement 6 Qualification Requirements for Reactor Vessel Welds Other Than Clad /Base
Metal Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
VIII-Supplement 7 Qualification Requirements for Nozzle-to-Vessel Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
274

VIII-Supplement 8 Qualification Requirements for Bolts and Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
VIII-Supplement 9 Qualification Requirements for Cast Austenitic Piping Welds (In the Course of
Preparation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
VIII-Supplement 10 Qualification Requirements for Dissimilar Metal Piping Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
VIII-Supplement 11 Qualification Requirements for Full Structural Overlaid Wrought Austenitic Piping
Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
VIII-Supplement 12 Requirements for Coordinated Implementation of Selected Aspects of Supplements
2, 3, 10, and 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
VIII-Supplement 13 Requirements for Coordinated Implementation of Selected Aspects of Supplements
4, 5, 6, and 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
APPENDIX IX MECHANICAL CLAMPING DEVICES FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 PIPING

PRESSURE BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
IX-1000 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
IX-2000 Defect Characterization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
IX-3000 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

IX-3100 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
IX-3200 Clamping Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
IX-3300 Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
IX-4000 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
IX-5000 Pressure Testing Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
IX-6000 Monitoring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Figures
I-S4 Alternative Calibration Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
III-3230-1 Example of Physical Restrictions to the Weld Examination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
III-3230-2 Recommended Design for Basic Piping Calibration Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
III-3430-1 Allowable Notch Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
III-S1-1 ........................................................................... 310
III-S1-2 ........................................................................... 310
III-S1-3 ........................................................................... 311
III-S1-4 ........................................................................... 311
III-S2-1 Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
2.3.2-1 Instrument Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
VIII-S1-1A System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
VIII-S1-1B Test Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
VIII-S1-2A Frequency Response Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
VIII-S4-1 Definition of Statistical Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
275
Tables
I-2000-1 Required Supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
III-2120-1 Maximum Nominal Search Unit Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
III-3430-1 Surface Notch Depths for Ultrasonic Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
III-S3-1 Specified Limits for Echo Amplitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
IV-3110-1 ........................................................................... 317
VII-4110-1 Required Experience for Initial Certification for Ultrasonic Examination (Hours) . . . 345
VII-4220-1 Initial Training Hours (Classroom /Laboratory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
VIII-3110-1 Component Qualification Supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
VIII-S2-1 Performance Demonstration Detection Test Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
VIII-S6-1 Detection and Sizing Test Flaws and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
VIII-S7-1 Flaw Locations and Orientations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
VIII-S8-1 Maximum Notch Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
IX-3200-1 Stress Limits for Design and Service Loadings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
276
APPENDIX I
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATIONS
277
ARTICLE I-1000
INTRODUCTION
I-1100 SCOPE
This Appendix provides rules for the ultrasonic exam-
ination required by IWA-2232.
279
ARTICLE I-2000
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
I-2100 VESSELS GREATER THAN 2 in. I-2200 VESSELS NOT GREATER THAN
(51 mm) IN THICKNESS 2 in. (51 mm) IN THICKNESS
98 I-2110 REACTOR VESSELS AND ALL PIPING WELDS
I-2210 VESSELS
(a) Ultrasonic examination procedures, equipment,
and personnel used to detect and size flaws in reactor Ultrasonic examination of vessels not greater than
vessels greater than 2 in. (51 mm) in thickness shall 2 in. in thickness shall be conducted in accordance
be qualified by performance demonstration in accord- with Appendix III, as supplemented by Table I-2000-1.
ance with Appendix VIII for the following specific
examinations and no other I-2000 requirements apply.
(1) Shell and Head Welds Excluding Flange Welds
(2) Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds
(3) Nozzle Inside Radius Section
(4) Clad /Base Metal Interface Region I-2220 WELDS IN PIPING
(b) Ultrasonic examination of reactor vessel-to-flange Ultrasonic examination procedures, equipment, and
welds, closure head-to-flange welds, and integral attach- personnel used to detect and size flaws in piping welds
ment welds shall be conducted in accordance with shall be qualified by performance demonstration in
Article 4 of Section V, except that alternative examina- accordance with Appendix VIII and no other I-2000
tion beam angles may be used. These examinations requirements apply.
shall be further supplemented by Table I-2000-1.
(c) Ultrasonic examination of reactor vessel CRD
housing welds (if applicable) shall be conducted in
accordance with Appendix III, as supplemented by
Table I-2000-1.
(d) Appendix M provides guidance that may be I-2300 BOLTS AND STUDS
used for validation of mathematical models used with
Ultrasonic examination procedures, equipment, and
procedure qualification in accordance with Appendix
personnel used to detect flaws in bolts and studs
VIII.
shall be qualified by performance demonstration in
accordance with Appendix VIII and no other I-2000
requirements apply.
I-2400 ALL OTHER EXAMINATIONS

I-2120 OTHER VESSELS
When the requirements of I-2100, I-2200, or I-
Ultrasonic examination of all other vessels greater 2300 do not apply, the ultrasonic examination shall be
than 2 in. in thickness shall be conducted in accordance conducted in accordance with the applicable require-
with Article 4 of Section V, as supplemented by Table ments of Article 4 of Section V, as supplemented by
I-2000-1. Table I-2000-1.
280
I-2500 APPENDIX I — MANDATORY I-2500
I-2500 THICKNESS MEASUREMENTS

Ultrasonic thickness measurements shall be conducted
in accordance with Section V, Article 23. SE-797,
“Standard Practice for Thickness Measurement by Man-
ual Contact Ultrasonic Method,” and as modified by
a referencing Subsection.
TABLE I-2000-1
REQUIRED SUPPLEMENTS
Reactor Vessel
Flange and Reactor Vessel Other Other
Attachment CRD Housing Vessels Vessels ≤ 2
Welds Welds > 2 in. Thick in. Thick Other
Supplement I-2110(b) I-2110(c) I-2120 I-2210 I-2400
1 — Calibration Block X X X
Material and Thickness
2 — Calibration Blocks for X X X X
Clad Welds/
Components
3 — Calibration Blocks for X X X
Curved Surfaces
4 — Alternative Calibration X X X X
Block Design
5 — Electronic Simulators X X X X
6 — Pulse Repetition Rate X X X X
7 — Instrument Calibration X X X
8 — Scan Overlap and X X
Search Unit Oscillation
9 — Scan Angles X
10 — Recording Criteria X X X X X
11 — Geometric Reflectors X X X X
12 — Flaw Sizing X X X X X
281
APPENDIX I — SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 1 — CALIBRATION BLOCK (b) For calibration blocks for examination surfaces
MATERIAL AND THICKNESS with diameters greater than 20 in. (508 mm), one of
the following shall be applied.
(a) The material from which the blocks are fabricated
(1) A calibration block of essentially the same
shall be one of the following:
curvature as the examination surface; or
(1) a nozzle dropout from the component;
(2) A single curved calibration block to calibrate
(2) a component prolongation; or
the examination for surfaces in the range of curvature
(3) material of the same material specification,
from 0.9 to 1.5 times the calibration block diameter; or
product form, and heat treatment condition as one of
(3) A flat calibration block may be used. When
the materials being joined.
the contact technique is used with a search unit having
(b) Where two or more base material thicknesses
a flat contact surface (i.e., does not conform to the
are involved, the calibration block thickness shall be
examination surface), the following additional require-
of a size sufficient to contain the entire examination path.
ments apply:
(a) The minimum radius to be examined shall
be determined and the search unit contact area and
frequency shall be selected so that the minimum radius
SUPPLEMENT 2 — CALIBRATION BLOCKS is greater than the critical radius as determined by
FOR CLAD WELDS OR COMPONENTS Appendix A of Article 5 of Section V.
Calibration blocks shall be clad using the same (b) For determining the maximum allowable
method (i.e., rollbonded, manual weld deposited, auto- search unit contact area for the frequency and couplant
matic wire deposited, or automatic strip deposited) as selected, Appendix A shall be applied for both straight
used to clad the component to be examined. In the beam and angle beam examinations and for convex,
event the cladding method is not known, the calibration concave, or compound curvatures.
shall be performed using a calibration block clad by (c) When rectangular search units are used, the
a manual weld deposited method. When the parent width of the search unit face tangent to the minimum
material on opposite sides of a weld are clad by radius shall be used instead of the transducer diameter
different methods, the cladding on the calibration block in Table A-10, Article 5, of Section V.
shall be applied by the method used on the side of
the weld from which the examination will be conducted.
If the examination will be conducted from both sides SUPPLEMENT 4 — ALTERNATIVE WELD
of the weld, the calibration block shall provide for CALIBRATION BLOCK DESIGN
calibration for both methods of cladding.
The alternative calibration block design of Fig. I-S4
may be used in lieu of a separate block for each weld
thickness as required by Articles 4 and 5 of Section
V provided that the following requirements are met.
SUPPLEMENT 3 — CALIBRATION BLOCKS
(a) The calibration block thickness shall equal or
FOR EXAMINATION OF PARTS WITH
exceed the maximum weld thickness to be examined.
CURVED SURFACES
(b) The calibration block material requirements shall
(a) The rules of the referenced Article or Appendix be as specified by Supplement 1 and Articles 4 and
shall be applied for selecting calibration blocks for 5 of Section V.
examination surfaces in materials with diameters 20 (c) Calibration for examinations that include the
in. and less. clad–base metal interface shall employ additional re-
282
APPENDIX I — MANDATORY Fig. I-S4
FIG. I-S4 ALTERNATIVE CALIBRATION BLOCK
283
Supplement 4 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 Supplement 10
flectors as required by Fig. I-S4. The instrument gain Section V, shall be met at the beginning and end of
setting required to establish reference levels shall be the weld examinations performed during one outage.
based upon maximum allowable planar flaws located
at the clad–base metal interface.
SUPPLEMENT 8 — SCAN OVERLAP AND

SUPPLEMENT 5 — ELECTRONIC SEARCH UNIT OSCILLATION
SIMULATORS
(a) Each pass of the search unit shall overlap 50%
(a) Simulator use does not preclude the requirement of the transducer (piezoelectric element) dimension
for a written record of all calibration data. parallel to the direction of scan indexing. As an alterna-
(b) Simulator use shall be described in the written tive, if the sound beam dimension parallel to the
examination procedure. direction of scan indexing is measured in accordance
(c) Simulators shall be calibrated at least every 6 with the Section V, Article 4 beam spread measurement
months to verify compliance with the manufacturer’s rules, each pass of the search unit shall provide overlap
specification. of the minimum beam dimension determined from the
(d) A minimum of three pulses shall be used to Section V, Article 4 beam spread measurements.
represent a DAC curve at three different delay times (b) Oscillation of the search unit is permitted if
over the DAC range within the ranges of 15% to 30%, it can be demonstrated that overlapping coverage is
40% to 60%, and 70% to 110% of the maximum transit provided.
time to cover the thickness to be examined.
(e) The final calibration check after the finish of
each examination shall include a calibration check on
at least three of the basic reflectors in the basic calibra- SUPPLEMENT 9 — SCAN ANGLES
tion block.
(f) As an alternative to (e) above, the final calibration For examinations conducted from the inside diameter
check may be made without the basic calibration block clad surface of vessels, in addition to the two angle
provided calibration checks include measuring the re- beams having nominal angles of 45 deg. and 60 deg.,
sponse from at least three reflectors (or multiples from a longitudinal wave beam having a nominal angle of
a single reflector) that are located in a test medium at 70 deg. shall be used. The examination using the 70
distances providing transit times in the ranges of 15% deg. beam shall cover the near surface to a depth of
to 30%, 40% to 60%, and 70% to 110% of the 1 in. (25 mm) in the required volume. For calibration
maximum transit time to cover the thickness to be of the 70 deg. beam, a 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) deep minimum,
1⁄ in. (3.2 mm) diameter maximum, side-drilled hole,
examined. 8
drilled parallel to the clad interface shall be located
with the center at 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) from the inside
diameter clad surface or at the clad–base metal interface
SUPPLEMENT 6 — PULSE REPETITION
in the basic vessel calibration block. At least two
RATE
additional 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) diameter maximum side-
The ultrasonic instrument pulse repetition rate shall drilled holes shall be installed at 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
be sufficient to pulse the search unit at least six maximum increments to establish metal path calibration.
times within the time necessary to move one-half the
transducer (piezoelectric element) dimension parallel to
the direction of scan at maximum scanning speed.
Alternatively, a dynamic calibration on multiple reflec- SUPPLEMENT 10 — RECORDING CRITERIA
tors that is within 62 dB of a static calibration may
be used to verify an acceptable pulse repetition rate. Angle beam reflectors that produce a response greater
than 20% of the reference level shall be investigated.
The maximum amplitude, location, and extent of these
reflectors shall be recorded. The operator shall determine
SUPPLEMENT 7 — INSTRUMENT
whether the indication originates from a flaw or is a
CALIBRATION
geometric indication in accordance with Supplement
The requirements for Screen Height Linearity and 11. When the reflector is determined to be a flaw, the
Amplitude Control Linearity of T-431, Article 4 of acceptance standards of IWA-3000 apply.
284
Supplement 11 APPENDIX I — MANDATORY Supplement 12
SUPPLEMENT 11 — GEOMETRIC (1) Interpret the area containing the reflector in

INDICATIONS accordance with the applicable examination procedure;
(2) Plot and verify the reflector coordinates. Pre-
Ultrasonic indications of geometric and metallurgical
pare a cross-sectional sketch showing the reflector
origin shall be classified as follows.
position and surface discontinuities such as root and
(a) Indications that are determined to originate from
counterbore; and
surface configurations (such as weld root geometry) or
(3) Review fabrication or weld prep drawings.
variations in metallurgical structure of materials (such
(c) Alternatively, other NDE methods or techniques
as weld-to-base metal interface) may be classified as
may be applied to classify an indication as geometric
geometric indications. Such indications need not be
(e.g., alternative UT beam angles, radiography, or ID
characterized as originating from flaws, and flaw sizing
and /or OD profiling).
in accordance with Supplement 12 and comparison of
the reflector causing the indication with the allowable
flaw standards of IWA-3000 are not required. The
SUPPLEMENT 12 — FLAW SIZING
maximum indication amplitude and the location and
extent of the reflector causing a geometric indication (a) Flaws shall be sized in accordance with a qualified
shall be recorded. (For example: internal attachment, procedure that meets the requirements of Appendix VIII.
200% DAC maximum amplitude, 1 in. above the weld (b) For components to which Appendix VIII is not
center line, on the inside surface, from 90 deg. to applicable, sizing techniques qualified in accordance
95 deg.) with Appendix VIII may be applied, provided such
(b) The following steps shall be taken to classify components, materials, sizes, and shapes are within the
an indication as geometric. scope of the qualified flaw sizing procedure.
285
APPENDIX II
OWNER’S REPORT FOR
INSERVICE INSPECTIONS
287
APPENDIX II — MANDATORY Form NIS-1
289
Form NIS-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
290
GUIDE FOR COMPLETING

FORM NIS-1
1. The name and address of the Owner of the nuclear power plant.
2. The name and address of the nuclear power plant where the inservice examinations
and tests were performed.
3. The Owner’s designated unit identification number.
4. The Owner’s Certificate of Authorization number taken from the Certificate held
during the time of the examinations and tests covered by the Form NIS-1, if appli-
cable.
5. The date determined by the Owner that the nuclear power plant was originally
available for regular production of electricity.
6. The National Board number assigned to the unit or reactor vessel, if applicable.
7. The name of the item inspected, (e.g., reactor, steam generator, reactor coolant
pump).
8. The name of the manufacturer or installer of the item taken from the appropriate
Data Report representing the item, or from plant records when no Data Report exists
for the item.
9. The serial number assigned to the item by the manufacturer or installer, taken from
the appropriate Data Report, or from plant records when no Data Report exists for
the item.
10. The identification number assigned to the item by the State or Province of Canada
in which the item is operated.
11. The National Board number assigned to the item by the manufacturer of the item
being examined or tested, if applicable.
12. The date the examinations and tests represented by this Form were started.
13. The date the examinations and tests represented by this Form were concluded.
14. The inspection period represented by this Form as determined from Tables IWX-
2411-1 and IWX-2412-1.
15. The dates the current inspection interval commenced and is expected to conclude.
See IWA-2430.
16. The Edition and Addenda of Section XI applicable to the examinations and tests
represented by this Form.
17. Same as line 16.
18. The date and revision level of the inspection plan followed during the examinations
and tests represented by this Form.
291
19. A summary of all activities performed during the time documented by this Report,
including the status of work completed for the inspection interval. (This block will
normally refer to an attachment containing the required information.)
20. A summary of the examination and test results. (This may be included as an
attachment.)
21. A summary of corrective measures for items that did not meet the acceptance criteria
of IWX-3000. (This may be included as an attachment.)
22. The Owner’s Certificate of Authorization number provided by the Society, if appli-
cable.
23. The expiration date taken from the Owner’s Certificate of Authorization provided
by the Society, if applicable.
24. The date (month, day, year) the Form NIS-1 was signed.
25. The name of the Owner of the nuclear power plant.
26. The signature of the individual representing the Owner, who certified the accuracy
of the Form NIS-1 and its attachments.
27. The name of the jurisdiction (State or Province) where the examinations and tests
were performed.
28. The name of the Inspector’s employer, the Authorized Inspection Agency.
29. The address of the Authorized Inspection Agency (City /Town and State or Province).
30. The date the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector began activities verifying that
the examinations and tests represented by this Form NIS-1 were completed.
31. The last date the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector verified the activities
represented by this Form NIS-1.
32. The Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector’s signature.
33. The Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector’s National Board Commission Number,
including endorsements, jurisdiction name, and Certificate of Competency number
held in the State or Province where inspections represented by this Form NIS-1
were performed.
34. The date (month, day, year) the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector signed the
Form NIS-1.
292
293 A99

FORM NIS-2 (Back)
9. Remarks (23)
Applicable Manufacturer’s Data Reports to be attached
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
I certify that the statements made in the report are correct and that this conforms to the requirements of
the ASME Code, Section XI.
Type Code Symbol Stamp (25)
Certificate of Authorization No. (26) Expiration Date
E
Signed (27) Date , 19
Owner or Owner’s Designee, Title
PL
CERTIFICATE OF INSERVICE INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors and the State or Province of (28) and employed by (29)
M
of (30) have inspected the components described
in this Owner’s Report during the period (31) to (32) , and state that
to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Owner has performed examinations and taken corrective measures
described in this Owner’s Report in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code, Section XI.
SA
By signing this certificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied,
concerning the examinations and corrective measures described in this Owner’s Report. Furthermore, neither
the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or a
loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
(33) Commissions (34)

Inspector’s Signature National Board, State, Province, and Endorsements
Date (35) 19
294

GUIDE FOR COMPLETING A99
FORM NIS-2
1. The name and address of the Owner of the nuclear power plant.
2. The date this Form was prepared.
3. The number representing this Form in relation to the number of forms comprising
attachments to the initial Form NIS-2, which will commence with sheet number
one (1).
4. The name and address of the nuclear power plant where the repair/replacement
activity was performed.
5. The Owner’s designated unit identification number.
6. A unique identification of the repair/replacement activity enabling the work to be
identified.
7. The name and address of the organization responsible for completing the repair/
replacement activity. When the organization responsible for the repair/replacement
activity holds a Certificate of Authorization, the name and address of the organization
shall be the same as shown on the Certificate of Authorization.
8. The symbol representing the Certificate of Authorization (e.g., N, NPT, NA).
9. The number from the Certificate of Authorization held by the organization responsi-
ble for completing the repair/replacement activity.
10. The expiration date of the Certificate of Authorization taken from the certificate
held by the organization responsible for completing the repair/replacement activity.
11. The unique designation of the system in the nuclear power plant, by name, including
the ASME Class of system.
12. (a) The Section of the ASME Code or other standard, (e.g., ANSI B31.1, Draft
Pump and Valve Code) that the item was manufactured in accordance with,
including the year of publication, the designation of the addenda of the standard
in effect, and any applicable Cases identified by number.
(b) The Edition and Addenda of Section XI used for the repair/replacement activity.
(c) Applicable Section XI Code Cases associated with the repair/replacement ac-
tivity.
13. The name of the item taken from the Data Report provided by the manufacturer or
from plant records when no Data Report exists for the item.
14. The name of the manufacturer of the item taken from the Data Report describing
the item. Alternatively, the name of the manufacturer or the installer of the item
taken from the plant records when no Data Report exists for the item.
15. The serial number of the item taken from the Data Report provided by the manufac-
turer or from plant records when no Data Report exists for the item.
16. The National Board Number assigned to the item by the manufacturer taken from
the Data Report or item, if applicable.
295

17. Other appropriate identification, (e.g., State or Province number, plant assigned
designator) taken from drawings or other records.
18. The year the item was manufactured, taken from the Data Report representing the
item or its nameplate as appropriate, or the date of installation taken from plant
records when no Data Report exists for the item.
19. Indicate the action taken on the item: corrected, removed, or installed.
20. Indicate if the item bears an ASME Code Symbol Stamp.
21. A brief narrative of the work performed.
22. Indicate the appropriate pressure test completed following the repair/replacement
activity, or denote exemption. Record the test pressure and temperature of the
component during the pressure test, if applicable.
23. Additional information necessary to describe the repair/replacement activity not
otherwise covered in the Form NIS-2. Manufacturer’s Data Reports for newly
installed items included in the repair/replacement activity should be identified and
attached to this Form. Describe any change to the original construction requirements.
NOTE: Manufacturer’s Data Reports for the item being removed need not be
included.
25. The type of ASME Code Symbol Stamp held by the Owner or the Owner’s designee,
if applicable.
26. The number taken from the ASME Certificate of Authorization that granted authority
to possess the ASME Code Symbol Stamp discussed in line 25, if applicable.
27. The signature of the individual and title representing the Owner who certified the
accuracy of the contents of the Form NIS-2 and its attachments, including the date
this document was signed.
28. The name of the jurisdiction (State or Province) where the repair/replacement activity
was performed.
29. The name of the Inspector’s employer, the Authorized Inspection Agency.
30. The address of the Authorized Inpsection Agency (City /Town and State or Province).
31. The date the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector began verifications that the
activities represented by this Form NIS-2 were completed.
32. The last date the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector verified the activities
represented by this Form NIS-2.
33. The Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector’s signature.
34. The Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector’s National Board Commission Number,
including endorsements, and if applicable, the jurisdiction name and Certificate of
Competency number held in the State or Province where inspections represented
by this Form NIS-2 were performed.
35. The date (month, day, year) the Authorized Nuclear Inservice Inspector signed the
Form NIS-2.
296

APPENDIX III A99
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF
VESSELS NOT GREATER THAN 2 INCHES
IN THICKNESS
297

ARTICLE III-1000
INTRODUCTION
III-1100 GENERAL A99
(a) This Appendix describes ultrasonic (UT) exami-

nation methods, equipment, and requirements applicable
to vessels not greater than 2 in. in thickness.
(b) The requirements are limited to full penetration
butt welds and adjacent base metal in vessels having
nominal wall thickness of 0.2 in. to 2 in. inclusive.
(c) The requirements of Supplement 4 apply to exam-
ination of austenitic and dissimilar metal welds.
(d) Alternative examination techniques and calibra-
tion block designs and materials may be used as
provided by IWA-2240 except when the requirements
of III-3430 apply.
299

ARTICLE III-2000
III-2100 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS TABLE III-2120-1 A99

MAXIMUM NOMINAL SEARCH UNIT SIZES
III-2110 INSTRUMENT
Vessel Wall Thickness Maximum
A pulse-echo ultrasonic flaw detection instrument
(Nominal), in. Nominal Size,1 in.
shall be used. The instrument shall be equipped with
a stepped gain control calibrated in units of 2 dB or less. Less than 0.5 0.25
0.5 to 2.0 0.5
NOTE:
(1) For dual element search units used in the pulse receiver mode,
III-2120 SEARCH UNIT the dimension applies to each individual element.
(a) Search units may contain either single or dual

transducer elements.
(b) Search units with contoured contact wedges may
be used to aid ultrasonic coupling. Calibration shall dure to be used for the examination. The qualification
be done with the contact wedges used during the
shall include demonstrated proficiency in discriminating
examination.
between flaw indications and indications of geometric
(c) The maximum nominal search unit sizes for
or metallurgical origin.
circular, square, or rectangular active elements shall
not exceed those listed in Table III-2120-1. Larger
search unit sizes may be used, provided equivalent
sensitivity and examination coverage (III-2410) are III-2300 WRITTEN PROCEDURE
demonstrated for a semicircular notch (0.5 aspect ratio)
REQUIREMENTS
of the maximum size allowed by IWB-3500. Equiva-
lence is established by comparing the responses from Ultrasonic examination shall be performed in accord-
the semicircular notch of the larger search unit and ance with a written procedure. Each procedure shall
the maximum size search unit allowed by Table III- include, as a minimum, the following information:
2120-1. Equivalence may be obtained by adjusting (a) weld types and configurations to be examined,
examination coverage (III-2410), scanning sensitivity including thickness dimensions, materials, and product
(III-2430), and recording levels in accordance with form (e.g., casting, forging, or plate);
III-4510. (b) scanning surface and surface condition require-
ments;
(c) equipment list, including each of the following
applicable items:
A99 III-2200 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
(1) make and model of pulse-echo ultrasonic flaw
(a) Nondestructive examination personnel shall be detection instrument;
qualified in accordance with IWA-2300. (2) transducer size and search unit type, angle,
(b) Personnel who perform recording or determine and frequency;
which indications are to be recorded in accordance (3) size and configuration of wedges and shoes;
with III-4510 shall have successfully completed the (4) automatic alarm and recording equipment;
qualification requirements of III-2200(a), for the proce- (5) rotating, revolving, or scanning mechanisms;
300

III-2300 APPENDIX III — MANDATORY III-2430
(6) couplant; and Detection may be demonstrated using the simulated

(7) search unit cable type, length, and number of maximum allowable flaw size (IWB-3514) for a 0.5
connectors. aspect ratio. The simulated maximum allowable flaw
(d) examination technique including angles and size shall exhibit a recordable indication on two consecu-
modes of wave propagation in the material, directions, tive scans separated by one increment.
maximum speed, and extent of scanning;
(e) calibration techniques including the establishment
of scanning sensitivity levels, instrument controls to
be used, and acceptance standards for the calibrated
condition;
(f) calibration block design;
III-2420 RATE OF SEARCH UNIT A99
(g) data to be recorded and method of recording
MOVEMENT
including interpretation of indications as required by
III-4510; The rate of search unit movement shall not exceed
(h) techniques for data interpretation and plotting; 3 in. /sec unless calibration has been verified at the
(i) personnel qualification requirements. higher scanning speed.
III-2400 GENERAL EXAMINATION

REQUIREMENTS
A99 III-2410 EXAMINATION COVERAGE
III-2430 SCANNING SENSITIVITY
While scanning, the search unit shall be oscillated
approximately ⫾20 deg. If oscillation is not possible, Manual scanning shall be done at a minimum of
flaw detection shall be demonstrated. twice (+6 dB) the primary reference level.
301
[This is electronic page #301

ARTICLE III-3000
CALIBRATION
III-3100 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude
signal at a longer beam path; this beam path shall not
A99 III-3110 SCREEN HEIGHT LINEARITY be used for calibration.)
The ultrasonic instrument shall provide screen height (c) For contact examination, the temperature differ-
linearity within 5% of full range for at least 80% of ence between the examination and basic calibration
the full screen height (FSH) (base line to maximum block surfaces shall not exceed 25°F (14°C).
calibrated screen points). Reject or clipping controls (d) For immersion examination, the temperature dif-
shall be set in the off or minimum position for calibration ference between the examination and calibration
and examination. couplants shall not exceed 25°F (14°C), or appropriate
compensation for angle changes shall be made.
(e) Calibration shall be performed from the surface
A99 III-3120 AMPLITUDE CONTROL (clad or unclad) of the calibration block which corres-
LINEARITY ponds to the component surface to be examined.
The ultrasonic instrument shall utilize an amplitude

control, accurate over its useful range to ⫾20% of
the nominal amplitude ratio, to allow measurement of
indications beyond the linear range of the vertical III-3230 ANGLE BEAM CALIBRATION A99
display on the screen. (a) Obtain the angle beam paths required in III-4420
and III-4430 on the sweep display. Variables such
as weld preparation, weld crown width, or physical
III-3200 SYSTEM CALIBRATION interference may preclude obtaining two-beam path
direction coverage of the complete examination volume
A99 III-3210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
with half-V examination from two sides. If this interfer-
(a) Calibration shall include the complete ultrasonic ence with examination coverage occurs, the beam path
examination system. Any change in search units, shoes, shall be increased as required to obtain full coverage
couplants, cables, ultrasonic instruments, recording de- of the examination volume from two directions. Alterna-
vices, or any other parts of the examination system tively, the interference may be eliminated by one or
shall be cause for calibration check. The original calibra- more of the following:
tion shall be performed on the basic calibration block. (1) reducing the dimension of the wedge edge-to-
Calibration checks may be performed on either a basic beam entry point;
calibration block simulator or the basic calibration block, (2) reducing search unit size;
but must include a check of the entire examination (3) increasing the beam angle;
system. (4) conditioning the weld surface.
(b) The maximum calibration indications shall be (b) Position the search unit for maximum response
obtained with the sound beam oriented essentially per- from the notch on the opposite side of the calibration
pendicular to the axis of the calibration reflector. The standard; then position the search unit to obtain the
center line of the search unit shall be at least 3⁄4 in. metal path determined in III-3230(a). Adjust the sweep
(19 mm) from the nearest side of the block. (Rotation control to display the indications from the notch at
of the beam into a corner formed by the reflector and convenient intervals on the sweep range. Mark the
302

FIG. III-3230-1 A99

DELETED
indication locations on the screen and record them on III-3300 CALIBRATION CONFIRMATION
the calibration data sheet.
(c) Sensitivity levels shall be established using the III-3310 INSTRUMENT
notch and shall be applicable to that region of the Instrument calibration for screen height and amplitude
calibrated sweep length providing complete examination control linearity shall be verified at the beginning and
of the weld and heat affected zone (HAZ). To establish end of the weld examinations performed during one
calibration, maximize the signal amplitude from the outage.
calibration position and notch that give the greatest
reflection. The response shall be set to 80% of FSH.
Without changing the gain control, determine the peak
indication amplitudes from the remaining points in the
examination region and construct a distance–amplitude
III-3320 SYSTEM CALIBRATION
correction (DAC) curve. This curve shall be the primary
CONFIRMATION
reference level.
(d) When the calibration is limited to the half-V path Complete ultrasonic examination system calibration,
due to material attenuation or examination technique establishing the DAC curve, shall be performed within
selection, sensitivity shall be established by setting the one day prior to use of the system for examination of
back surface notch at 80% of FSH; no DAC curve is those welds for which the calibration is applicable, and
required. at least once each week during the examination.
303

III-3330 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 III-3500
III-3330 SYSTEM CHECK the weld from which the examination will be conducted.
If the examination will be conducted from both sides,
A system calibration check, which is the verification
calibration reflectors shall be provided in both materials.
of the instrument sensitivity and sweep range calibration,
(c) Where the examination is to be performed from
shall be performed:
only one side of the joint, the calibration block material
(a) at the start and finish of each examination;
shall be of the same specification as the material on
(b) at intervals not to exceed 12 hr;
that side of the joint.
(c) with any change in examination personnel, except
(d) If material of the same specification is not avail-
when using mechanized equipment.
able, material of similar chemical analysis, tensile prop-
erties, and metallurgical structure may be used.
A99 III-3331 Corrective Actions (e) When the component material is clad, and the
cladding is determined to be important to the examina-
(a) If the calibration point has decreased 20% or 2 tion, the block shall be clad by the same welding
dB of its amplitude, all data sheets since the last procedure as the production part. When the automatic
calibration check shall be marked void. A new calibra- method is impractical, a manual method shall be used.
tion shall be made and recorded and the voided examina-
tion areas shall be reexamined.
(b) If the calibration point has increased more than
20% or 2 dB of its amplitude, recorded indications III-3420 SURFACE FINISH A99
taken since the last valid calibration or calibration check The finish on the surfaces of the block shall be
may be reexamined with the correct calibration and representative of the surface finish of the vessel.
their values changed on the data sheets.
(c) If the calibration point has moved on the sweep
line more than 10% of the sweep division reading, III-3430 CALIBRATION REFLECTORS A99
correct the sweep range calibration and note the correc-
tion in the examination record. If recordable reflectors Basic calibration blocks shall contain circumferential
are noted on the data sheets, those data sheets shall and longitudinal notches whose sides are perpendicular
be voided, a new calibration shall be recorded, and to the surface, at least 1.0 in. long, on the O.D. and
the examination areas shall be reexamined. I.D. surfaces. Allowable notch configurations are shown
in Fig. III-3430-1. Notch width W shall be no greater
than 1⁄4 in. Notch depth d shall be as specified in Table
III-3430-1. The reflecting surface of the notch shall be
III-3400 BASIC CALIBRATION BLOCKS
90 deg. ⫾2 deg. to the block surface. The blocks shall
A99 III-3410 MATERIAL generally conform to the design shown in Fig. III-
3230-1. Alternate block layout may be used, provided
The basic calibration blocks shall be made from
similar beam paths are utilized. Additional reflectors
material of the same wall thickness within 25% as the
may be installed; however, they shall not interfere with
component to be examined.
establishing the primary reference.
The basic calibration block shall be curved for surface
curvatures less than 20 in. diameter. A single curved
basic calibration block may be used to calibrate the
examination surfaces in the range of curvature from 0.9 III-3440 RETENTION AND CONTROL A99
to 1.5 times the basic block diameter. For examination of Basic calibration blocks shall be retained by the
welds with surface curvatures greater than 20 in. diame- Owner.
ter, a block of essentially the same curvature, or a flat
basic calibration block shall be used.
III-3500 CALIBRATION DATA RECORD A99
A99 III-3411 Material Specification
The following data shall be recorded on a calibration
(a) The calibration blocks for similar metal welds data sheet:
shall be fabricated from one of the materials being (a) calibration sheet identification and date of cali-
joined by the weld. bration;
(b) Calibration blocks for dissimilar welds shall be (b) names of examination personnel;
fabricated from the material specified for the side of (c) examination procedure number and revision;
304

APPENDIX III — MANDATORY Fig. III-3230-1
NOTES:
(1) Length and arc shall be adequate to provide required angle beam calibration.
(2) All side drilled holes are optional in accordance with III-3230(d).
(3) For vessels less than 1 in. nominal wall thickness:
(a) stagger notch I.D./O.D. locations;
(b) a 1⁄2 t hole may be used in lieu of 1⁄4 t and 3⁄4 t side drilled holes.
FIG. III-3230-1 RECOMMENDED DESIGN FOR BASIC CALIBRATION BLOCKS
305

III-3500 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 III-3500
A99 TABLE III-3430-1 (d) basic calibration block identification;

SURFACE NOTCH DEPTHS FOR (e) ultrasonic instrument identification and serial
ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION number;
(f) beam angle, couplant, and mode of wave propaga-
Notch Depth,
Nominal Wall d, in.
tion in the material;
Thickness, t, in. [Note (1)] Tolerance (g) orientation of search unit with respect to the
weld (parallel or perpendicular);
Less than 0.312 0.10t +0.005 in.
(h) search unit identification — frequency, size, and
−0.010 in.
0.312 to 6.0 0.104t–0.009t 2 +10% manufacturer’s serial number;
−20% (i) special search units, wedges, shoe type, or sad-
NOTE:
dle’s identification, if used;
(1) Notch depth in base material shall be based on either nominal or (j) search unit cable type and length;
actual calibration block thickness (excluding clad). (k) times of initial calibration and subsequent calibra-
tion checks;
(l) amplitudes and sweep readings obtained from
the calibration reflectors.
306

APPENDIX III — MANDATORY Fig. III-3430-1
FIG. III-3430-1 ALLOWABLE NOTCH CONFIGURATIONS

[Allowable Cross Sections Are in Sketches (a), (b), and (c)]
307

ARTICLE III-4000
EXAMINATION
A99 III-4100 GENERAL III-4400 ANGLE BEAM TECHNIQUE

This Article describes the angle beam ultrasonic III-4410 BEAM ANGLE A99
examination requirements for similar and dissimilar
The search unit and beam angle selected shall be
metal welds. The examination is applicable to welds
capable of detecting flaws within the required examina-
accessible from at least one surface adjacent to the
tion volume.
weld seam. This examination is intended to detect,
locate, and dimension planar flaws.
III-4200 SURFACE PREPARATION

III-4420 REFLECTORS PARALLEL TO THE
The examination surface shall be free of irregularities, WELD SEAM
loose material, or coatings which interfere with ultra-
The examination shall be performed using a suffi-
sonic wave transmission.
ciently long examination beam path to provide coverage
of the required examination volume in two-beam path
directions. The examination shall be performed from
III-4300 IDENTIFICATION OF two sides of the weld, where practicable, or from one
EXAMINATION AREAS side of the weld, as a minimum.
III-4310 WELD LOCATION

Weld identification and location shall be shown on
a weld identification plan.
III-4430 REFLECTORS TRANSVERSE TO
THE WELD SEAM
III-4320 MARKING The angle beam examination for reflectors transverse
Low stress stamps or vibratooling, or both, may be to the weld shall be performed on the weld crown on
used to permanently identify each weld. Marking applied a single scan path to examine the weld root by one-
shall not be any deeper than 3⁄64 in. (1.2 mm). half V path in two directions along the weld.
A99 III-4330 REFERENCE SYSTEM

A reference system shall be established to locate the
III-4450 INACCESSIBLE WELDS
weld centerline. Circumferential and longitudinal welds
requiring volumetric examination shall be marked once Welds that cannot be examined from at least one
before or during the preservice examination to establish side (edge) using the angle beam technique shall be
a reference point. examined by another volumetric method.
308

III-4500 RECORDING REQUIREMENTS (b) names and certification levels of examination

personnel;
III-4510 INDICATIONS TO BE RECORDED (c) examination procedure and revision;
III-4511 Flaw Indications (d) calibration sheet identification;
(e) identification and location of the weld or volume
(a) Any indication of a suspected flaw shall be scanned (for example, marked up drawings or sketches);
recorded regardless of amplitude. (f) surfaces from which the examination is con-
(b) Any other indications which are not determined ducted; and
to be of geometrical or metallurgical origin shall be (g) examination results.
recorded if they are 20% of DAC or greater. (1) Search unit location, orientation, and the fol-
lowing information shall be recorded for each indication
(III-4511):
III-4512 Indications Determined to Be of
(a) peak amplitude as dB from the reference
Geometric or Metallurgical Origin
level, sweep readings to reflector, search unit positions,
(a) The following steps shall be taken in order to search unit locations, and sound beam directions;
classify an indication to be of geometric or metallurgical (b) search unit positions parallel to the reflector
origin: at the end points where the reflector amplitude equals
(1) interpret the area containing the reflector in 50% of the peak amplitude (estimated length); and
accordance with the applicable examination procedure; (c) the true position of the indication, plotted
(2) plot and verify the indication coordinates in on a cross-sectional sketch showing O.D. profile and
accordance with III-4520(g)(2); and I.D. geometry (such as root and counterbore). For
(3) review fabrication or weld prep drawings. austenitic material, the beam angle as measured on
(4) Alternatively, other NDE methods or tech- the component shall be used to plot the position of
niques may be applied (e.g., alternate UT beam angles, indications.
radiography, I.D. and /or O.D. profiling). (2) The following shall be recorded for each indica-
(b) Indications 20% of DAC or greater shall be tion that equals or exceeds the recording level and is
recorded for preservice examinations of new or replaced not considered to be a flaw:
piping. (a) peak amplitude and amplitude range as dB
(c) Indications 50% of DAC or greater shall be from the reference level sweep readings to reflector,
recorded for inservice examinations. For indications search unit locations, and sound beam direction over
classified and recorded in accordance with III-4512(a) the extent of the reflector;
and (b), the classification and recording do not have (b) reflector location (at a representative posi-
to be repeated for subsequent examinations. tion), plotted on a cross-sectional sketch showing surface
discontinuities (such as root and counterbore); and
(c) basis for disposition.
(3) Welds and required examination volumes found
A99 III-4520 RECORDED DATA free of indications shall be identified and recorded.
The following data shall be recorded on the examina-
tion data sheet:
III-4530 FLAW SIZING
(a) data sheet identification and date and time period
of examination; In the course of preparation.
309

A99 APPENDIX III — SUPPLEMENT
(3) cast pipe and fittings; and

(4) dissimilar metal welds between combinations
of (1), (2), or (3) above and wrought carbon or low
A99 SUPPLEMENT 1 DELETED
alloy steels.
(b) The rules of this Appendix shall be used for the
examination of the welds and materials in (a) above
with the following modifications.
(1) III-4410 Beam Angle — The actual beam
angle in the examination part shall be 40 deg. or greater
for shear wave at the I.D. surface, and 35 deg. or
A99 SUPPLEMENT 2 DELETED greater for refracted, longitudinal wave at the I.D.
surface. The beam angle in the examination part shall
be determined for each weld to be examined. The beam
angle measurements shall be used to assure coverage
of the required examination volume by extending the
calibration and examination distance, as required.
(2) III-4430 Reflectors Transverse to the Weld
Seam — Substitute: The angle beam examination for
A99 SUPPLEMENT 3 DELETED
reflectors transverse to the weld shall be performed in
two directions covering the minimum area from 1⁄2 in.
(13 mm) from one side ofthe weld crown to 1⁄2 in.
(13 mm) from the other side of the weld crown including
the crown.
A99 SUPPLEMENT 1 — AUSTENITIC AND
(3) Table III-3430-1 Calibration Notches — Sub-
DISSIMILAR METAL WELDS
stitute: depth 10% of t.
(a) The following welds and cast materials, because (4) Scanning from both sides of the weld is re-
of their inherent coarse grained structure, may be subject quired where practical. Single side access limitations
to marked variations in attenuation, velocity, reflection, shall be noted in the examination data record. Cast
and refraction at grain boundaries: items such as fittings, valve bodies, and pump casings
(1) high alloy steels; may preclude meaningful examinations because of ge-
(2) high nickel alloys; ometry and attenuation variables.
310–312

APPENDIX IV
EDDY CURRENT EXAMINATION
313
ARTICLE IV-1000
SCOPE
IV-1100 METHODS ADDRESSED qualified in accordance with this Appendix. The organi-
zation may contract implementation of the program.
When eddy current examination is used as a surface (c) Performance demonstration requirements apply
examination method in accordance with IWA-2223, to procedures and equipment for acquisition and analysis
this Appendix provides requirements for performance and to personnel who are responsible for detecting,
demonstration of eddy current systems. sizing, and reporting of flaws.
(d) The performance demonstration requirements
specified in this Appendix apply to the acquisition
process but do not apply to personnel involved in the
acquisition process. Such personnel shall be trained
and qualified by their employer for the specific tasks
IV-1200 GENERAL they perform. The requirements for training and qualifi-
cation of such personnel shall be described in the
(a) This Appendix specifies performance demonstra- employer’s written practice (IWA-2300).
tion requirements for eddy current examination proce- (e) This performance demonstration is applicable
dures, equipment, and personnel used to detect and only to materials whose acceptance standard is 1⁄8 in.
size flaws in piping and components. This Appendix (3.2 mm) or more in length.
does not include performance demonstration require- (f) Equipment characterization described in Supple-
ments for steam generator heat exchanger tubing exami- ment 1 is optional. When Supplement 1 is selected,
nation. both the original and substitute equipment shall be
(b) Each organization (i.e., Owner, or vendor) shall characterized.
have a written program that complies with this Appen- (g) Equipment and techniques qualified in accordance
dix. Each organization that performs eddy current exami- with this Appendix may be used in procedures without
nation shall use procedures, equipment, and personnel regard to the organization that qualified the procedure.
314
ARTICLE IV-2000
GENERAL SYSTEM AND PERSONNEL
REQUIREMENTS
IV-2100 PROCEDURE REQUIREMENTS (1) method of calibration, e.g., phase angle or

amplitude adjustments
The procedure shall contain a statement of scope
(2) channel and frequencies used for analysis
that specifically defines the limits of procedure applica-
(3) extent or area of the component evaluated
bility (e.g., material specification, grade, type, or class).
(4) data review requirements, e.g., secondary data
The procedure shall reference a technique specification,
review, computer data screening
delineating the essential variables, qualified in accord-
(5) reporting requirements, i.e., signal-to-noise
ance with the appropriate supplement referenced in
threshold, voltage threshold, flaw depth threshold
IV-3000.
(6) methods of identifying flaw indications and
distinguishing them from nonrelevant indications, such
as indications from probe lift-off or conductivity and
permeability changes in weld material
IV-2200 PROCEDURE SPECIFICATIONS
(7) manufacturer and model of eddy current data
(a) The data acquisition procedure shall specify the analysis equipment
following: (8) manufacturer, title and version of data analysis
(1) instrument or system, including manufacturer’s software, as applicable
name and model (c) The acquisition procedure or the analysis proce-
(2) size and type of probe, including manufactur- dure, or both, as applicable, shall address requirements
er’s name and part number for system calibration. Calibration requirements include
(3) analog cable type and length including those actions required to ensure that the sensitivity and
(a) probe cable type and length accuracy of the signal amplitude and time outputs of
(b) extension cable type and length the examination system, whether displayed, recorded,
(4) examination frequencies, or minimum and max- or automatically processed, are repeatable and correct.
imum range, as applicable Any process of calibrating the system is acceptable; a
(5) coil excitation mode, e.g., absolute or differ- description of the calibration process shall be included
ential in the procedure.
(6) minimum data to be recorded
(7) method of data recording
(8) minimum digitizing rate (samples per in.) or
maximum scanning speed (for analog systems) as appli- IV-2300 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
cable
IV-2310 GENERAL
(9) scan pattern, when applicable (e.g., helical
pitch and direction, rectilinear rotation, length, scan (a) Personnel shall be qualified to the applicable
index, or overlap) level in accordance with IWA-2300.
(10) magnetic bias technique, when applicable (b) Personnel performing data acquisition shall have
(11) material type received specific training, and shall be qualified by
(12) coating type and thickness, when applicable examination, in accordance with the employer’s proce-
(b) The data analysis procedure shall define the fol- dures, in the operation of the equipment, applicable
lowing: techniques, and recording of examination results.
315
IV-2320 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IV-2320
IV-2320 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS FOR

SURFACE EXAMINATION
(a) Personnel performing analysis of data shall have
received additional specific training in the data analysis
techniques used in the performance demonstration and
shall successfully complete the performance demonstra-
tion described in IV-3100.
(b) Personnel involved in qualifying procedures, but
who are not seeking qualification to perform examina-
tions, e.g., laboratory personnel, need not meet the
requirements of IV-2310 or IV-2320(a).
316
ARTICLE IV-3000
QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
IV-3100 QUALIFICATION TEST TABLE IV-3110-1

REQUIREMENTS
Applicable
IV-3110 GENERAL Component Type Supplement
(a) Data sets for detection and sizing shall meet the Piping and Vessels (Surface) 2
requirements of the appropriate supplement listed in Bolting — Center Bore Hole (Surface) 3
Table IV-3110-1.
(b) The acquisition procedure, analysis procedure,
equipment and analysis personnel shall be considered
qualified upon successful completion of the performance
demonstration specified in the appropriate supplement the demonstrated ranges identified in the Data Acquisi-
listed in Table IV-3110-1. tion Procedure Specification shall be considered equiva-
(c) Once a procedure has been qualified, subsequent lent. When the procedure allows more than one value
analyst qualifications may be performed using prere- or range for an essential variable, the qualification test
corded data acquired using the qualified procedure. shall be repeated at the minimum and maximum value
for each essential variable with all other variables
remaining at their nominal values. Changing essential
variables may be accomplished during successive proce-
IV-3120 ESSENTIAL VARIABLES dure qualifications involving different personnel. Each
(a) An essential variable is a procedure, software, data analyst need not demonstrate qualification over
or hardware item that, if changed, could result in the entire range of every essential variable.
erroneous examination results. Further, any item that (c) When the procedure does not specify a range for
could decrease the signal to noise ratio to less than 2:1 essential variables and establishes criteria for selecting
shall be considered an essential variable. (Nonmandatory values, the criteria must be demonstrated.
sample Data Acquisition Procedure Specification and
Data Analysis Procedure Specification Forms are pro-
vided in supplements A and B for the purpose of IWA-3130 REQUALIFICATION
documenting the essential variables.) When a change in an acquisition technique or analysis
(b) Any two procedures with the same essential technique causes an essential variable to exceed a
variables (IV-2100 and IV-2200) are considered equiva- qualified range, the acquisition or analysis technique
lent. Equipment with essential variables that vary within shall be requalified for the revised range.
317
ARTICLE IV-4000
ESSENTIAL VARIABLE TOLERANCES
IV-4100 INSTRUMENTS AND PROBES equivalent to those qualified. When the performance
demonstration results meet the acceptance requirements
The qualified acquisition procedure may be modified
of IV-3000, the algorithm shall be considered qualified.
to replace instruments or probes of similar make, model,
and manufacturer without requalification. Other equip-
ment may be substituted, provided the performance
constraints for essential variables are met (e.g., 2:1
signal-to-noise ratio is maintained). The qualified acqui- IV-4300 CALIBRATION METHODS
sition procedure may also be modified to replace instru- Alternative calibration methods may be demonstrated
ments or probes without requalification, when the range equivalent to those described in the qualified acquisition
of essential variables defined in the Data Acquisition
procedure or analysis procedure without requalification.
Procedure Specification are met, provided the equipment
This demonstration of equivalence shall be conducted
is evaluated using Supplement 1.
as follows.
(a) Calibrate the system in accordance with the alter-
native methods.
IV-4200 COMPUTERIZED SYSTEM
(b) The alternative calibration method is acceptable
ALGORITHMS when the system complies with the essential variables
Computerized system algorithms that are altered may defined in the Data Acquisition or Data Analysis Proce-
be used when the altered algorithms are demonstrated dure Specification.
318
ARTICLE IV-5000
RECORD OF QUALIFICATION
The organization’s performance demonstration pro-

gram shall specify the documentation that shall be
maintained as qualification records. The qualification
record shall include the following information:
(a) Identification of the procedure (acquisition or
analysis) qualified and a summary of its essential vari-
ables (A copy of the procedure is sufficient.)
(b) Personnel performing and witnessing the qualifi-
cation demonstrations
(c) Description and drawings of the qualification
specimens and the calibration blocks, as applicable
(d) Qualification results
319
APPENDIX IV — SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 1 — EQUIPMENT fundamental sinusoidal frequency, or the ratio in dB

CHARACTERIZATION of the amplitude of the fundamental frequency to the
amplitude of the largest side lobe as displayed on a
1.0 SCOPE
frequency spectrum plot. It shall be measured for each
(a) This Supplement specifies essential variables as- frequency specified.
sociated with eddy current data acquisition instrumenta- (b) When used as an essential variable, the maximum
tion and establishes a methodology for essential variable harmonic distortion shall be specified.
measurement.
(b) Essential variables are divided into two cate- 2.2.2 Output Impedance. The output impedance
gories: is measured for each test frequency at the output
(1) Those associated with an individual instrument, connector of the instrument. Both the magnitude and
probe, or cable phase shall be measured for each specified frequency.
(2) Those associated with specific on-site equip- When used as an essential variable, the tolerance of
ment configurations the ratio of the output (transmitter) to input (receiver)
(c) When the essential variables of both original impedance shall be specified.
and substitute equipment have been characterized in
2.3 Receiver
accordance with this Appendix, and the essential vari-
ables of the substitute equipment are equivalent to those 2.3.1 Input Impedance
of the original equipment, the substitute equipment (a) The input impedance is to be measured indepen-
may be used without any supplemental performance dently of the output impedance if the transmitter and
demonstration. receiver are not wired to the same coils as in the case
for reflection (driver/pickup) arrangements. Both the
magnitude and phase shall be measured at each specified
2.0 EDDY CURRENT INSTRUMENT frequency.
(b) When used as an essential variable, the tolerance
2.1. The essential variables for the eddy current
of the ratio of the output (transmitter) to input (receiver)
instrument are related to the three basic modules of impedance shall be specified.
the instrument:
(a) The transmitter (signal generation and injection) 2.3.2 Amplifier Linearity and Stability
(b) The receiver (probe signal detection, amplifica- (a) Amplifier linearity and stability of each channel
tion, demodulation, and filtering) used for inspection is measured as the ratio of the
(c) Analog-to-digital conversion signal injected at the instrument input to the magnitude
of the signal measured at the data analysis screen. It
2.2 Transmitter
is a measurement of the similarity between the eddy
2.2.1 Total Harmonic Distortion current signal sensed at the coil side and the signal
(a) Harmonic distortion is due to nonlinearities in observed on the analysis screen after signal amplification
the amplitude transfer characteristics of the instrument. and filtering. The measurement is performed for five
The output contains not only the fundamental frequency, different gain settings equally spaced between the small-
but integral multiples of the fundamental frequency. est and largest gain values available on the instrument,
For eddy current instruments, harmonic distortion is a and for five different signals injected at the instrument
measure of the quality of the sinusoidal signal injected input at each gain setting, equally spaced between the
into the coil(s). The total harmonic distortion is ex- smallest detectable signal and the largest signal that
pressed in either percent distortion compared to the can be obtained without saturation.
320
Supplement 1 APPENDIX IV — MANDATORY Supplement 1
2.4.3 Sample Rate

(a) The sample rate is the frequency in Hz at which
the analog to digital conversions are made. The sample
rate in combination with the probe traverse speed
determines the digitization rate.
Sample Rate(samples/second)
Digitization Rate(samples/in.) p
Probe Speed(in./second)
(b) When used as an essential variable, the minimum

digitization rate shall be specified. The minimum sample
rate of the A/D converter must be capable of providing
the specified digitization rate at the probe speeds to
be used.
FIG. 2.3.2-1 INSTRUMENT LINEARITY
Sample RateMin p Digitization RateMin × Probe Speed
(c) Conversely, the maximum probe speed is deter-

(b) Linearity is expressed in terms of percentage mined by the maximum sample rate of the instrument
deviation from a best-fit linear relationship between divided by the minimum digitization rate specified.
corresponding input and output values when plotted on
a graph. The percentage is determined by dividing the Sample RateMax
Probe SpeedMax p
maximum deviation from the line by the full scale Digitization RateMin
value.
(c) When used as essential variables, linearity and
stability shall be expressed as minimum requirements.
The output/input graph shown in Fig. 2.3.2-1 illustrates
3.0 PROBE CHARACTERIZATION
the curve fitting method used to determine amplifier
linearity. 3.1 Impedance. The impedance (magnitude and
phase) shall be measured for each test coil at the
2.4 A/D Converter test frequencies selected for the examination. This is
considered to be the input impedance of the instrument,
2.4.1 A/D Resolution as defined in Section 2.3.1.
(a) The resolution of the analog-to-digital converter
is the value of the input voltage that corresponds to 3.2 Resonant Frequency
a change of one bit. It is a measurement of the smallest (a) The resonant frequency is measured with the full
change in the eddy current signal that can be observed cable length between the coil and the instrument input
after digitization. If applicable, it is measured for five connector.
equally spaced gain settings between the smallest and (b) When used as an essential variable, the allowable
largest gain values available on the instrument. range of the resonant frequency shall be specified.
(b) When used as an essential variable, the resolution 3.3 Magnetic Field. Measurements are performed
of the analog-to-digital converter shall be expressed as with the eddy current instrument wired according to
a minimum value. the on-site conditions (including the cable length) be-
tween the eddy current instrument and the coils. Essen-
2.4.2 Dynamic Range tial variables are defined for pancake coils.
(a) The number of bits for full-scale input determines
the dynamic range of the A/D converter. It is a measure 3.3.1 Bobbin Coil
of the maximum eddy current signal that can be recorded 3.3.1.1 Effective Scan Field Width
without distortion after digitization. (a) The Effective Scan Field Width is a measure of
(b) When used as an essential variable, the number the extent of the effective magnetic field in the preferred
of bits for full scale input shall be expressed as a direction. It is also a measure of the spatial resolution.
minimum value. This resolution determines minimum spacing between
321
three successive notches compared to a single notch expected in the bore hole. A 1.27 mm (0.050 in.) deep
of equal depth. notch of 2 mm (0.008 in.) width, and of varying length
(b) The measurement is performed for each eddy from a minimum length equal to the coil width and
current examination frequency and mode of coil opera- up to the coil width +13 mm (0.5 in.), at increments
tion, e.g., absolute or differential. A 1.27 mm (0.050 of 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) is scanned perpendicular to the
in.) deep notch of 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) width, and coil preferred direction. The gain setting is adjusted
minimum length equal to the coil width +25 mm (1.0 for an 80% scale peak signal from the signal having
in.) is scanned perpendicular to the preferred direction. the largest amplitude.
(c) A curve is plotted for the signal amplitude as a (b) When used as an essential variable, the axial
function of the probe displacement. The effective scan length coefficient shall be specified, for absolute and
field width in mm (in.) is determined by subtracting differential modes, as a maximum amplitude attenuation
the crack length from the measured distance between for each length relative to the longest one.
corresponding signal amplitude points for a given attenu-
ation below the maximum amplitude. The effective Example: ALC−2.5 mm p 0 dB
scan field width can be a negative value for one or
all of the four points measured on the curve. ALC−5.0 mm p −2 dB
(d) When used as an essential variable, the effective
scan field width shall be specified, for absolute and
differential modes, as the maximum distance to a point 3.3.1.4 Transverse Width Coefficient
on the curve used to determine the minimum value of (a) The Transverse Width Coefficient (TWC) is a
four points, equally spaced, selected to define the curve measure of the dependency of transverse crack width
on either side of the minimum and maximum signal on the amplitude of the eddy current signal. The
amplitudes. measurement is performed for each of the examination
frequencies, absolute/differential coil mode and nominal
Example: ESFW−12db p − 0.08 in. fill factors expected in the bore hole. A 1.27 mm
(0.050 in.) deep notch of the same length as the total
coil width, and 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) to 0.6 mm (0.02
3.3.1.2 Fill Factor Coefficient. The Fill Factor
in.) wide, at increments of 0.1 mm (0.004 in.), is
Coefficient (FFC) is a measure of the drop in the
scanned parallel to the coil preferred direction. The
effective magnetic field perpendicular to a tube. The
gain setting is adjusted for an 80% full scale peak
measurement is performed for each eddy current exami-
signal from the signal having the largest amplitude.
nation frequency and absolute/differential coil configu-
(b) When used as an essential variable, the transverse
ration. A 1.27 mm (0.050 in.) notch of 0.2 mm (0.008
width coefficient shall be specified, for absolute and
in.) width, and of a minimum length equal to the coil
differential modes, as a maximum amplitude attenuation
width +25 mm (1.0 in.) is scanned perpendicular to
for each defect width relative to the largest one.
the coil preferred direction.
(a) The gain setting is adjusted for an 80% full scale
peak signal for the signal having the largest amplitude. Example: TWC−0.5 mm p 0.5 dB
The measurements are performed for three or more fill
factors (ratio of square of OD probe diameter to ID TWC−0.2 mm p −1.0 dB
hole diameter) between the largest and smallest to be
encountered in bore holes.
3.3.1.5 Direct Current Saturation Strength
(b) When used as an essential variable, the fill factor
(a) The Direct Current Saturation Strength (DCSS)
shall be specified, for absolute and differential modes,
concerns only probes delivered with a supplemental
as the amplitude attenuation from the largest fill factor
coil or magnet designed to suppress the influence of
to the smallest fill factor.
possible magnetic variations. The direct current satura-
Example: FCC 0.85 to 0.70 p −5 dB
tion strength is measured in air with a gauss meter
3.3.1.3 Axial Length Coefficient located at the center of the coil at a nominal distance
(a) The Axial Length Coefficient (ALC) is a measure from the bore hole inner surface. It is expressed in
of the influence of the axial crack length on the millitesla.
amplitude of the eddy current signal. The measurement (b) When used as an essential variable, the direct
is performed for each of the examination frequencies, current saturation strength coefficient and direction shall
absolute/differential coil modes, and nominal fill factors be specified as a minimum requirement.
322
Supplement 1 APPENDIX IV — MANDATORY Supplement 2
3.3.2 Pancake Coil Example: LOV 0.85 to 0.70 p −5 dB

3.3.2.1 Effective Scan Field Width. See Section
3.3.1.1.
3.3.2.4 Axial Width Coefficient. See Section
3.3.1.3.
3.3.2.2 Effective Track Field Width
(a) The Effective Track Field Width (ETFW) takes
3.3.2.5 Transverse Width Coefficient. See Sec-
into account the combined influence of the coil magnetic
tion 3.3.1.4.
field and the coil scanning pitch. It measures the drop
in signal amplitude when the coil scans the defect at
increasing scanning distances. A 3 mm (0.125 in.)
minimum depth notch of 0.2 mm (0.008 in.) maximum SUPPLEMENT 2 — QUALIFICATION
width, and of a minimum length equal to the coil REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE
width +25 mm (1.0 in.) is scanned perpendicular to EXAMINATION OF PIPING AND VESSELS
the coil preferred direction for defect detection.
(b) The gain setting is adjusted for an 80% full scale 1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS
peak signal for the signal having the largest amplitude. Specimens to be used in the qualification test shall
(c) A curve is plotted for the signal amplitude as a meet the requirements listed herein unless a set of
function of the distance between the center of the coil test specimens is designed to accommodate specific
and the center of the notch. limitations stated in the scope of the examination proce-
(d) When used as an essential variable, the effective dure, e.g., surface roughness or contour limitations.
track field width coefficient shall be specified, for The same specimens may be used to demonstrate both
absolute and differential modes, as the maximum dis- detection and sizing qualification. For examination of
tance from the notch, where a given signal attenuation coated surfaces, Section V, Article 8 shall apply. Speci-
is the minimum of four points, equally spaced, selected mens shall conform to the following requirements:
to define the curve on either side of the minimum and (a) Specimens shall be fabricated from the same
maximum signal amplitudes. base material nominal composition (UNS Number) and
heat treatment (e.g., solution annealed, precipitation
hardened, solution heat treated and aged) as those to
Example: ETFW−3 db p 3 mm be examined.
(b) Welding shall be performed with the same filler
metal AWS classification, and postweld heat treatment
(e.g., as welded, solution annealed, stress relieved) as
the welds to be examined.
3.3.2.3 Lift-Off Value (LOV) (c) Specimen surface roughness and contour shall
(a) The Lift-Off Value (LOV) is a measure of the be generally representative of the surface roughness
drop in the effective magnetic field in a direction and contour of the component surface to be examined.
perpendicular to the examination surface. The measure- The examination surface curvature need not be simulated
ment is performed for each eddy current examination if the ratio of the component diameter to the coil
frequency and absolute/differential coil configuration. diameter exceeds 20:1.
A 3 mm (0.125 in.) minimum depth notch of 0.2 mm (d) Defect conditions:
(0.008 in.) maximum width, and of a minimum length (1) The flawed grading units shall be cracks or
equal to the coil width +25 mm (1.0 in.) is scanned notches.
perpendicular to the coil preferred direction. (2) The length of cracks or notches open to the
(b) The gain setting is adjusted for an 80% full scale surface shall not exceed the allowable length specified
peak signal for the signal having the largest amplitude. in IWB-3514 and IWC-3514 for inservice surface flaws
The measurements are performed for three or more for piping or Table IWB-3510-3 and Table IWC-3510-
lift-off values between the largest and smallest to be 3 for vessels.
encountered for the configurations to be examined. (3) The maximum depth of a crack or compressed
When used as an essential variable, the lift-off value notch shall be 0.040 in.
shall be specified, for absolute and differential modes, (4) Machined notches shall have a maximum width
as the amplitude attenuation from the smallest lift-off of 0.010 in. and a maximum depth of 0.020 in.
to the largest lift-off value. (e) Demonstration Specimens:
323
(1) The demonstration specimen shall include one (a) Specimens shall be fabricated from materials of
crack or notch at each of the following locations: the same base material nominal composition (UNS
(a) on the weld Number) and heat treatment (e.g., solution annealed,
(b) in the heat-affected zone precipitation hardened, solution heat treated and aged)
(c) at the fusion line of the weld as those to be examined.
(d) in the base material (b) The effect of the presence of corrosion products
(2) The demonstration shall include the effects of must be evaluated if the bore hole of the bolt is not
coating thickness, when applicable. thoroughly cleaned prior to examination [IV-3120(b)].
(c) Defect Conditions
(1) The crack shall be located in the bore hole
and oriented circumferentially.
3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (2) The length of the crack open to the surface
shall not exceed 1⁄4 in.
All flaws in each of the four identified areas must (3) The crack used for qualification may be located
be detected with a minimum 2:1 signal-to-noise ratio in a block with different geometry if the qualification
at the minimum digitization rate (for digital systems) demonstrates that cracks can be detected in the bore
or maximum scanning speed (for analog systems) per- hole. The alternative block shall be demonstrated by
mitted by the procedure. showing equivalent response in both geometries (bore
hole and block) using calibration discontinuities speci-
fied by the qualified procedure.
SUPPLEMENT 3 — QUALIFICATION
REQUIREMENTS FOR SURFACE 2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
EXAMINATION OF BOLTING — CENTER DEMONSTRATION
BORE HOLES
Specimen identification and crack locations shall be
1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS obscured so as to maintain a “blind test.”
This Supplement applies only to surface examination
of the center bore hole of studs or bolts with eddy
current examination. Specimens to be used in the 3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
qualification test for examination of the center bore Examination procedures, equipment, and personnel
hole surface shall meet the following requirements shall be considered qualified when the qualification
unless a set of test specimens is designed to accommo- crack has been detected with a minimum 2:1 signal-
date specific limitations stated in the scope of the to-noise ratio. The notch axial location shall be correctly
examination procedure. Specimens shall conform to the identified to within 6 1⁄2 in. or 5% of the bolt or stud
following requirements: length, whichever is greater.
324
APPENDIX IV — MANDATORY
APPENDIX IV: SUPPLEMENT A

DATA ACQUISITION PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
1. SCOPE:
2. INSTRUMENT:
Manufacturer:
Model:
Software/Mfg./Version:
3. PROBE:
Size:
Manufacturer:
Part No.:
4. CABLES
Probe Cable Extension Cable
Type: Type:
Length: Length:
5. FREQUENCIES/MODES
Mode: Mode:
Frequencies/Channels: Frequencies/Channels:
1. 5. 1. 5.
2. 6. 2. 6.
3. 7. 3. 7.
4. 8. 4. 8.
6. CALIBRATION METHOD:
7. DATA RECORDING
Equipment Manufacturer: Model:
Media: Format:
8. DIGITIZING RATE
Samples Per Inch:
9. SCAN PATTERN
Pitch: Direction:
325
APPENDIX IV: SUPPLEMENT B

DATA ANALYSIS PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
1. CALIBRATION METHOD
Phase Angle to Depth:

a) Frequency/Mix/Channel:
b) Frequency/Mix/Channel:
Amplitude to Depth:
a) Frequency/Mix/Channel:
b) Frequency/Mix/Channel:
Other:
Tables (List & Attach):
2. DATA REVIEW REQUIREMENTS

Extent:
Two Party:
Computer Screen:
Other:
3. REPORTING REQUIREMENTS
Flaw Depth Threshold:
Voltage Threshold:
Signal to Noise Threshold:
Other:
4. INSTRUMENT
Manufacturer:
326
APPENDIX V
SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE
BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL COMMITTEE
V-1000 INTRODUCTION in the request being returned to the inquirer with no

action.
The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
and its Subcommittees, Subgroups, and Working Groups
meet regularly to consider revisions of the Code rules,
new Code rules as dictated by technological develop- V-2000 INQUIRY FORMAT
ment, Code Cases, and Code interpretations. This Ap- Submittals to the Committee shall include:
pendix provides guidance to Code users for submitting (a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
technical inquiries to the Committee. Technical inquiries (1) revision of present Code rule(s);
include requests for revisions or additions to the Code (2) new or additional Code rule(s);
rules, requests for Code Cases, and requests for Code (3) Code Case;
interpretations. (4) Code interpretation.
Code Cases may be issued by the Committee when (b) Background. Provide the information needed for
the need is urgent. Code Cases clarify the intent of the Committee’s understanding of the inquiry, being
existing Code requirements or provide alternative re- sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section,
quirements. Code Cases are written as a question and Division, Edition, Addenda, paragraphs, figures, and
a reply and are usually intended to be incorporated tables. Preferably, provide a copy of the specific refer-
into the Code at a later date. Code interpretations enced portions of the Code.
provide the meaning of or the intent of existing rules (c) Presentations. The inquirer may desire or be
in the Code and are also presented as a question and asked to attend a meeting of the Committee to make
reply. Both Code Cases and Code interpretations are a formal presentation or to answer questions from
published by the Committee. the Committee members with regard to the inquiry.
The Code rules, Code Cases, and Code interpretations Attendance at a Committee meeting shall be at the
established by the Committee are not to be considered expense of the inquirer. The inquirer’s attendance or
as approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing lack of attendance at a meeting shall not be a basis for
any proprietary or specific design or as limiting in any acceptance or rejection of the inquiry by the Committee.
way the freedom of manufacturers or constructors to
choose any method of design or any form of construction
that conforms to the Code rules.
As an alternate to the requirements of this Appendix,
V-3000 CODE REVISIONS OR
members of the Committee and its Subcommittees, ADDITIONS
Subgroups, and Working Groups may introduce requests Requests for Code revisions or additions shall provide
for Code revisions or additions, Code Cases, and Code the following:
interpretations at their respective Committee meetings (a) Proposed Revision(s) or Addition(s). For revi-
or may submit such requests to the secretary of a sions, identify the rules of the Code that require revision
Subcommittee, Subgroup, or Working Group. and submit a copy of the appropriate rules as they
Inquiries that do not comply with the provisions of appear in the Code marked up with the proposed
this Appendix or that do not provide sufficient informa- revision. For additions, provide the recommended word-
tion for the Committee’s full understanding may result ing referenced to the existing Code rules.
327
V-3000 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 V-6000
(b) Statement of Need. Provide a brief explanation (a) Inquiry. Provide a condensed and precise ques-
of the need for the revision(s) or addition(s). tion, omitting superfluous background information, and,
(c) Background Information. Provide background in- when possible, composed in such a way that a “yes”
formation to support the revision(s) or addition(s) in- or a “no” Reply, possibly with brief provisos, is accept-
cluding any data or changes in technology that form able. The question should be technically and editorially
the basis for the request that will allow the Committee correct.
to adequately evaluate the proposed revision(s) or addi- (b) Reply. Provide a proposed Reply that will clearly
tion(s). Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be and concisely answer the Inquiry question. Preferably,
submitted as appropriate. When applicable, identify any the Reply should be “yes” or “no” possibly with brief
pertinent paragraph in the Code that would be affected provisos.
by the revision(s) or addition(s) and paragraphs in the (c) Background Information. Provide any background
Code that reference the paragraphs that are to be revised information that will assist the Committee in understand-
or added. ing the proposed Inquiry and Reply.
V-6000 SUBMITTALS
V-4000 CODE CASES Submittals to and responses from the Committee
shall meet the following:
Requests for Code Cases shall provide a Statement
(a) Submittal. Inquiries from Code users shall prefera-
of Need and Background Information similar to that
bly be submitted in typewritten form; however, legible
defined in V-3000(b) and V-3000(c), respectively, for
handwritten inquiries will also be considered. They
Code revisions or additions. The proposed Code Case shall include the name, address, telephone number, and
should identify the Code Section and Division and be fax number, if available, of the inquirer and be mailed
written as a Question and Reply in the same format to the following address:
as existing Code Cases. Requests for Section XI Code
Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Edi- Secretary
tion(s) and Addenda to which the proposed Code Case ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
applies. 345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
(b) Response. The Secretary of the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Committee or of the appropriate
Subcommittee shall acknowledge receipt of each prop-
V-5000 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
erly prepared inquiry and shall provide a written re-
Requests for Code interpretations shall provide the sponse to the inquirer upon completion of the requested
following: action by the Code Committee.
328
APPENDIX VI 98
QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL FOR VISUAL

EXAMINATION
329
ARTICLE VI-1000
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
This Appendix specifies the training requirements

and experience for visual examination personnel in
preparation for employer certification to perform VT-
1, VT-2, VT-3 visual examinations.
331
ARTICLE VI-2000
QUALIFICATION LEVELS
VI-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

There are five qualification levels: Trainee, Level I,
Level II, Level III, and NDE Instructor. The skills and
responsibilities associated with each level shall be as
defined in ANSI/ASNT CP-189, as modified by
IWA-2300.
332
ARTICLE VI-3000
WRITTEN PRACTICE
VI-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS VI-3200 RESPONSIBILITIES

Organizations performing training, examination, or The written practice shall specify the responsibilities,
qualification activities shall prepare a written practice duties, and qualifications required for personnel who
in accordance with ANSI/ASNT CP-189, as modified perform examinations or implement the personnel quali-
by this Division, for their control and administration. fication program.
VI-3300 USE OF AN OUTSIDE AGENCY

VI-3110 EXPERIENCE (a) An outside agency is an organization or individual
The written practice shall specify the experience that provides NDE Level III or Instructor services. The
requirements for each qualification level in accordance organization that engages the outside agency qualifies
with ANSI/ASNT CP-189 and the additional experience that agency. The written practice of the organization
that may be required for special visual examination that engages the outside agency shall specify require-
applications, such as in-vessel visual examination. ments for ensuring the outside agency meets the applica-
ble requirements of ANSI/ASNT CP-189 an this Ap-
pendix.
(b) The outside agency shall maintain a written prac-
VI-3120 TRAINING tice that specifies the documentation to be maintained
in the agency’s qualification records. This documenta-
The written practice shall specify the training require- tion shall include such information as stated in Appendix
ments for each qualification level in accordance with VII, VII-3300(b)
ANSI/ASNT CP-189 and the additional training that (c) An outside agency administering the examinations
may be required for special visual examination applica- required by this Appendix may be an independent
tions, such as in-vessel visual examination. company or a functionally independent organization
within the same company.
VI-3130 EXAMINATIONS VI-3400 CONFIDENTIALITY

The written practice shall specify the examination The written practice shall specify the provisions to
requirements for each qualification level in accordance ensure the confidentiality of qualification materials, e.g.,
with ANSI/ASNT CP-189. test questions, answer sheets, and test specimens.
333
ARTICLE VI-4000
VI-4100 EXPERIENCE Training received in other NDE disciplines or academic

training courses covering the topics in Supplement 1
VI-4110 INITIAL CERTIFICATION FOR
may be credited toward certification. The hours of
VISUAL EXAMINATION
training shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASNT
(a) Experience in each discipline is required for CP-189.
unlimited certification. The term ‘experience‘ refers to
visual examination defined in IWA-2211, IWA-2212,
and IWA-2213, or related experience in the applicable
method such as the following: VI-4300 EXAMINATIONS
(1) for VT-1, experience as a weld examiner, AWS To be considered for examination, the Level I, II, and
CWI or AWS CAWI; III candidates shall successfully complete the training
(2) for VT-1, experience in performing surface required by VI-4200. Level I and II qualification exami-
examinations; nations shall by in accordance with ANSI/ASNT CP-
(3) for VT-2, experience in pressure tests; 189. Level III qualification examinations shall be in
(4) for VT-2, plant walkdown experience, such as accordance with IWA-2300.
that gained by licensed and nonlicensed operators, local
leak rate personnel, system engineers, quality control
personnel, and nondestructive examination personnel;
(5) for VT-3, installation, maintenance, or exami- VI-4310 ADMINISTRATION OF
nation of pumps, valves, or supports; EXAMINATIONS
(6) for VT-1 and VT-3, experience in installation, Level I, II, and III examinations shall be approved,
maintenance, or examination of RPV internals, or other administered, and graded by a Level III. The candidate
remote visual examination; shall perform the Practical Examination using proce-
(7) for Level III, documented visual training or dures, techniques, and equipment complying with the
examination activities; administration or development requirements of this Division.
of VT-1, VT-2, or VT-3 visual examination training
or examination programs; or experience as defined in
(1) through (6) above.
(b) Experience shall be documented by specific tasks VI-4320 GRADING OF EXAMINATIONS
and disciplines, e.g., 10 hr VT-3 visual examination
The requirements of VII-4350 apply.
of supports.
(c) No more than 50% of the required experience
for VT-1 visual examination shall be in surface exami-
nation. VI-4330 REEXAMINATION
VI-4200 TRAINING
VI-4400 INTERUPTED SERVICE
Visual examination personnel shall successfully com-
plete the training program outlined in Supplement 1. The requirements of VII-4400 apply.
334
ARTICLE VI-5000
QUALIFICATION RECORDS
335
APPENDIX VI — SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 1 — CONTENT OF INITIAL 5.0 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF

TRAINING COURSES COMPONENTS
1.0 FUNDAMENTALS OF VISUAL 5.1 Valves
EXAMINATION 5.2 Pumps
5.3 Bolting
1.1 Definition of visual examination
5.4 Welds
1.2 Overview of visual examination
1.3 Standard terms and definitions
1.4 Vision requirements
1.5 Lighting requirements 6.0 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF
1.6 Direct and remote methods COMPONENT SUPPORTS
6.1 Support categories
(a) Plate and shell type supports
(b) Linear type supports
2.0 VISUAL EXAMINATION METHODS
(c) Component standard supports
2.1 VT-1 6.2 Types of supports
2.2 VT-2 (a) Buried supports
2.3 VT-3 (b) Constant load supports
(c) Hangers
(d) Variable spring type supports
(e) Restraints
3.0 VISUAL EXAMINATION (f) Mechanical and hydraulic snubbers
EQUIPMENT (g) Guides and stops
(h) Vibration control and sway braces
3.1 Optical aids 6.3 Examination boundaries
(a) Mirrors and magnifiers
(b) Borescopes and fiberscopes
(c) Closed-circuit television
(d) Lighting and light measurement 7.0 VISUAL EXAMINATION FOR
3.2 Mechanical measuring devices LEAKAGE
(a) Scales and calipers
7.1 System pressure testing
(b) Gages
(a) System leakage test
(b) System hydrostatic test
(c) System pneumatic test
(d) Buried components
4.0 MATERIALS AND PROCESSES 7.2 Plant systems and components
4.1 Manufacturing discontinuities
(a) Castings and forgings
(b) Rolled and wrought products
8.0 RECORDS AND REPORTS
(c) Extruding, drawing, and piercing
4.2 Welding discontinuities 8.1 Data sheets
4.3 Service-related discontinuities 8.2 Identification stamps and certification
336
9.0 APPENDIX VI — MANDATORY 11.0
9.0 PROCEDURES 11.0 ADDITIONAL TRAINING FOR

LEVEL III CANDIDATES
9.1 Requirements
9.2 Format 11.1 Nuclear power plant design, function, and system
9.3 Acceptance criteria operation
9.4 Documentation 11.2 Materials, metal processing, fabrication technology,
failure mechanisms, and fracture mechanics techniques
11.3 Review of NDE methods commonly used dur-
ing ISI
10.0 ADDITIONAL TRAINING FOR 11.4 Administration of NDE personnel qualification and
REACTOR VESSEL INTERNALS certification practices and instructional techniques
EXAMINATION 11.5 Codes, standards, and regulatory requirements
11.6 Procedure preparation
10.1 BWR internal design (as applicable)
NOTES:
10.2 PWR internal design (as applicable)
10.3 Remote examination equipment (1) The training shall cover the applicable topics for the visual
(a) Camera, monitor, and recording equipment design technique and level.
(b) Operation, of specific equipment (2) The hours of instruction devoted to each subject shall be
10.4 Examination requirements for internals determined by the Level III.
337
APPENDIX VII
QUALIFICATION OF NONDESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION PERSONNEL FOR
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION
339
ARTICLE VII-1000
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
This Appendix specifies requirements for the training

and qualification of ultrasonic nondestructive examina-
tion (NDE) personnel in preparation for Employer
certification to perform NDE. Personnel shall be quali-
fied in accordance with IWA-2300 as modified by this
Appendix.
341
ARTICLE VII-2000
QUALIFICATION LEVELS
VII-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

There shall be five qualification levels: Trainee, Level
I, Level II, Level III, and NDE Instructor. The skills
and responsibilities associated with each level shall be
as defined in ANSI /ASNT CP-189.
342
ARTICLE VII-3000
WRITTEN PRACTICE
VII-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS VII-3200 RESPONSIBILITIES

Organizations performing training, examination, or The written practice shall specify the responsibilities,
qualification activities shall prepare a written practice duties, and qualifications required for personnel who
for their control and administration. perform examinations or implement the personnel quali-
fication program. The written practice shall specify the
responsibilities of NDE Instructors, Level III personnel,
or other individuals providing classroom or laboratory
VII-3110 EXPERIENCE training.
The written practice shall specify the experience

requirements for each qualification level in accordance VII-3300 USE OF AN OUTSIDE AGENCY
with VII-4100 and the additional experience that may
be required for special NDE applications. (a) An outside agency is an organization or individual
that provides NDE Level III or NDE Instructor services
and whose qualifications have been accepted by the
organization that engages the outside agency. The writ-
ten practice of the organization that engages the outside
VII-3120 TRAINING
agency shall specify requirements for assuring the out-
The written practice shall specify the following: side agency meets the applicable requirements of this
(a) classroom and laboratory training requirements Appendix.
for each qualification level in accordance with VII-4200; (b) Each outside agency shall maintain a written
(b) additional training that may be required for special practice that specifies the documentation to be main-
NDE applications; and tained in the agency’s qualification records. This docu-
(c) course outlines for each qualification level includ- mentation shall include such information as the qualifi-
ing the number of instruction contact hours. cation examinations, candidate’s name and certification
level, date of examination, overall course grade, and
formal qualification examination grade.
(c) An outside agency administering the examinations
VII-3130 ANNUAL TRAINING of VII-4342 may be an independent company or a
functionally independent organization within the same
The written practice shall specify the requirements company.
for annual training for each qualification level. Annual
training shall be in accordance with VII-4240.
VII-3400 CONFIDENTIALITY
Provisions to assure the confidentiality of qualification
materials (e.g., test questions, answer sheets, and test
VII-3140 EXAMINATIONS
specimens) shall be included in the written practice.
The written practice shall specify the examination Access to such qualification materials shall be limited,
requirements for each qualification level. Examination and the qualification examinations shall be maintained
requirements shall be in accordance with VII-4300. in secure files.
343
VII-3500 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 VII-3500
VII-3500 AVAILABILITY OF TRAINING

COURSE MATERIALS
Training course materials shall be available for review
or audit by user organizations and cognizant authorities.
Training course materials shall not be subject to any
confidentiality requirements other than the normally
applicable copyright laws.
344
ARTICLE VII-4000
VII-4100 EXPERIENCE TABLE VII-4110-1

REQUIRED EXPERIENCE FOR
VII-4110 INITIAL CERTIFICATION FOR INITIAL CERTIFICATION
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION FOR ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION (HOURS)
Table VII-4110-1 lists the required experience for
Trainee Level I Level II Level III
initial certification for ultrasonic examination. As used
in this Appendix, experience means performance of the None 250 800 4200/2100 (Option 1)
6300/4200 (Option 2)
skill activities described or referenced in VII-2000 for
8400/4200 (Option 3)
the applicable NDE Level.
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For Level II certification, the experience shall consist of time at
Level I. To certify a candidate directly to Level II with no time
at Level I, the total experience hours required for Level I plus
Level II shall apply.
VII-4120 EXPERIENCE OPTIONS FOR (b) When exercising the options for Level III (e.g., Option 1: 4200/
LEVEL III PERSONNEL 2100), the first figure specifies the required total experience. The
second figure specifies the amount of experience that shall be in
The three experience options identified in Table VII- nuclear applications. Prior certification as a Level I or Level II
is not required.
4110-1 for qualification as a Level III are as follows.
VII-4121 Option 1
VII-4123 Option 3
Graduate of a 4 year accredited engineering or science
High school graduate, or equivalent, plus 4 years
college or university with a degree in engineering or
experience in an assignment comparable to that of a
science, plus 2 years experience in NDE in an assign-
Level II in the ultrasonic examination method. At least
ment comparable to that of an NDE Level II in the
2 years of this experience shall be in nuclear applications
ultrasonic examination method. At least 1 year of this
and shall include the actual performance of examinations
experience shall be in nuclear applications and shall
and evaluation of examination results.
include the actual performance of examinations and
evaluation of examination results.
VII-4130 EXPERIENCE RECORDS
(a) The records maintained by the Employer to sub-
VII-4122 Option 2
stantiate experience for initial certification to each level
Completion with a passing grade of at least the shall include the activity performed, the number of hours
equivalent of 2 full years of engineering or science performing the method, and the level of certification.
study at a university, college, or technical school, plus (b) Documented experience with the current Em-
3 years experience in an assignment comparable to that ployer may be used for certification in accordance with
of a Level II in the ultrasonic examination method. At this Appendix, subject to acceptance by a Level III.
least 2 years of this experience shall be in nuclear (c) Experience during previous employment may be
applications and shall include the actual performance accepted where such experience is supported by docu-
of examinations and evaluation of examination results. mentation. The documentation may be a copy of an
345
experience record form obtained from the previous TABLE VII-4220-1

Employer or a written statement signed by a cognizant, INITIAL TRAINING HOURS
responsible member of the previous Employer’s staff (CLASSROOM/LABORATORY)
attesting to the type and extent of ultrasonic examination
Level I Level II Level III
experience to be credited. A Level III shall be responsi-
ble for reviewing the documentation and judging previ- 40/40 40/40 40/0
ous experience for acceptability under the current Em- GENERAL NOTES:
ployer’s written practice. (a) To certify a candidate directly to Level II with no time at Level
I, the total hours of training required for Level I plus Level II
shall apply.
(b) To certify a candidate directly to Level III with no time at Level
I or Level II, the total hours of training required for Level I plus
VII-4140 NDE INSTRUCTOR Level II plus Level III shall apply.
(c) Industrial or academic training courses covering the topics listed
QUALIFICATION in 9.0 of Supplement 1 may be credited toward the training
required for Level III personnel.
A candidate being considered for qualification as an (d) The hours of instruction devoted to each subject in Supplement
NDE Instructor shall satisfy the Level III Basic and 1 shall be determined by the NDE Instructor.
Method Examination requirements of IWA-2300 and
shall also meet one of the following requirements:
(a) the candidate shall maintain a current teacher VII-4223 Training Requirements for Previously
or vocational instructor certificate issued by a state, Qualified Individuals
municipal, provincial, or federal authority; or
(a) For individuals who have been previously quali-
(b) the candidate shall complete a minimum of 40
fied to Level I or Level II under a written practice
hr instruction in training and teaching techniques.
that did not include the additional requirements of this
Appendix, additional training shall be required prior to
requalification if the individual has not completed the
cumulative hours of training in the ultrasonic method
VII-4200 TRAINING
required by Table VII-4220-1 for the applicable Level
VII-4210 PROGRAM, FACILITIES, AND of qualification.
MATERIALS (b) The individual’s training, including the additional
training of VII-4223(a), shall cover the topics listed in
(a) Personnel shall successfully complete the training
Supplement 1 for the applicable Level of qualification.
program outlined in Supplement 1.
(c) Prior documented training that addressed the top-
(b) Training shall be conducted by an NDE Instructor
ics covered in Supplement 1 may be credited for each
except that portions of the training may be conducted
individual. The credited training shall be subtracted from
by individuals designated by the NDE Instructor.
the requirements of Table VII-4220-1 and Supplement 1
(c) Classroom and laboratory facilities shall be pro-
to determine the hours and topics, respectively, to be
vided.
covered in the additional training. The additional training
(d) Training course materials shall be prepared and
shall be conducted by an NDE Instructor.
made available to the candidate.
VII-4230 EVALUATION OF INITIAL

VII-4220 TRAINING COURSE CONTENT TRAINING EFFECTIVENESS
AND DURATION
(a) If the qualification examination for certification
VII-4221 Training Course Content (VII-4300) is not given at the conclusion of training,
Training course content shall be in accordance with a final course examination shall be given. A grade of
Supplement 1. 70% is necessary to receive credit for the training
hours.
(b) When an individual fails a final course examina-
tion, additional training shall be required prior to reex-
VII-4222 Initial Training Hours
amination. The additional training shall address the
The initial training hours shall be as specified in areas of weakness exhibited by the individual and shall
Table VII-4220-1. be documented by the NDE Instructor.
346
VII-4240 APPENDIX VII — MANDATORY VII-4330
A99 VII-4240 ANNUAL PRACTICE VII-4320 LEVEL I AND II QUALIFICATION

EXAMINATIONS
Supplemental practice shall be used to maintain UT
personnel examination skills. Personnel shall practice VII-4321 Level I and II General Examinations
UT techniques by examining or by analyzing prere-
The General Examination shall be a written, closed
corded data from material or welds containing flaws
book examination containing a minimum of 40 ques-
similar to those that may be encountered during inservice
tions. The examination shall cover the technical princi-
examinations. This practice shall be at least 8 hr per
ples relative to the ultrasonic (UT) method.
year and shall be administered by an NDE Instructor
or Level III. No examination is required.
VII-4322 Level I and II Specific Examinations
(a) The Specific Examination shall be a written
examination containing a minimum of 40 questions.
Necessary data, such as graphs, tables, specifications,
VII-4300 EXAMINATIONS procedures, and Codes shall be furnished.
To be considered for examination, the Level I, II, (b) Forty to 60% of the specific examination ques-
and III candidates shall have successfully completed tions shall cover Section XI NDE requirements. The
the training required in VII-4200. remaining questions shall cover procedures and specifi-
cations applicable to the UT method.
VII-4323 Level I and II Practical Examinations
VII-4310 EXAMINATION QUESTIONS AND (a) Candidates shall demonstrate to the satisfaction
TEST SPECIMENS of a Level III that they are familiar with and can
perform the applicable UT examinations using suitable
(a) For each written examination administered as calibration blocks and written UT procedures prepared
part of the qualification examination, a “question bank” for examination of plant components.
containing at least twice the minimum number of (b) The Practical Examination shall include examina-
questions required per examination shall be available. tion of a specimen set that complies with VII-4310(b).
Qualification examinations shall be assembled from the Alternately, successful completion of a UT performance
question bank using a random selection process. The demonstration in accordance with Appendix VIII may
random selection process shall be controlled by the serve as this Practical Examination.
employer’s written practice, such that no individual (c) An assessment report containing at least ten
takes the same examination more than once. check points shall be used to evaluate the candidate’s
(b) For each Practical Examination that does not use performance using longitudinal and shear wave tech-
specimens prepared for UT performance demonstrations niques. The following check points shall be included:
(i.e., Appendix VIII) and is administered as part of (1) scanning technique;
the qualification examination, a “specimen bank” con- (2) equipment set-up and calibration;
taining at least five flaws shall be available. Grading (3) selection of search unit;
units, as defined in Appendix VIII, may be used to (4) data recording (Level I and II);
produce the specimen bank. The flaws in the specimen (5) NDE report (Level II); and
bank shall be simulated flaws not exceeding the stan- (6) evaluation in terms of the recording criteria.
dards of IWB-3500, actual flaws, or a mixture of both. (d) A description of the specimens and the calibration
The specimen or grading unit set for each Practical blocks, the procedures used, the assessment report, and
Examination shall be assembled from the specimen the examination report prepared by the candidate shall
bank using a random selection process. Blank (sound) be retained as part of the certification records.
test specimens or grading units shall be included in
the specimen set so that no more than one-third of the
specimens or grading units in the set contain flaws
VII-4330 LEVEL III QUALIFICATION
required to be detected. The specimens or grading units
EXAMINATIONS
shall be masked such that flawed and blank specimens
or grading units cannot be identified and the flaw (a) Level III Examinations shall be in accordance
locations are not visible. with IWA-2300, except that the Demonstration Exami-
347

nation shall meet VII-4323 Level II Practical Examina- VII-4350 GRADING OF EXAMINATIONS
tion rules. In addition, the Specific Examination shall
(a) A passing grade of 80% is required for each
be a written examination containing at least 30 questions.
examination. When the examinations are graded by an
Forty to 60% of the questions shall cover Section XI
outside agency, a grade of 80% shall be assigned for
UT examination, evaluation, and acceptance criteria.
those examinations the candidate passed unless actual
Necessary data such as graphs, tables, specifications,
numerical grades are provided, in which case the numeri-
procedures, and Codes shall be furnished.
cal grades shall be recorded.
(b) Level III personnel shall be recertified using the
(b) The Level I and II Practical Examinations and
written Method, Specific, and Practical Examinations
the Level III Demonstration Examinations shall be
and the Demonstration Examination. Alternatively,
graded such that failure to accurately detect, locate,
Level III personnel may be recertified using only the interpret, evaluate, or record, as applicable for the
written Method and Specific Examinations provided the examination, 80% of the known conditions in the test
following conditions are met: specimen set shall cause the candidate to fail the
(1) The Level III candidate was previously certified examination. In addition, a maximum false call rate of
or recertified using all the written examinations and 10% shall be imposed (i.e., no more than 10% of the
the Demonstration Examination. blank test specimens shall be reported as flawed).
(2) The Level III candidate is not being recertified
due to interrupted service as defined in the Employer’s
written practice. VII-4360 REEXAMINATION
(3) The Level III candidate is not being recertified
by a new Employer. (a) Those individuals failing to pass a qualification
examination must receive additional training as deter-
mined by a Level III. This determination shall be based
on the topics or subjects on which the individual failed
to attain a passing grade.
VII-4340 ADMINISTRATION OF (b) The reexamination questions shall be assembled
EXAMINATIONS by a random selection process or the examination shall
contain at least 30% different or reworded questions.
VII-4341 Level I and II General, Specific, and
The Practical or Demonstration Examination test speci-
Practical Examinations
men set shall contain at least 50% different flaws
The General, Specific, and Practical Examinations from those used during the most recent Practical or
shall be approved, administered, and graded by a Level Demonstration Examination that was not passed by the
III. The candidate shall perform the Practical Examina- candidate.
tions using procedures, techniques, and equipment com- (c) No individual shall be reexamined more than
plying with Section XI requirements on specimens not twice within any consecutive 12 month period.
used for training.
VII-4400 INTERRUPTED SERVICE

VII-4342 Level III Basic, Method, Specific, Personnel who have not performed the duties associ-
Practical, and Demonstration ated with their certification level during any consecutive
Examinations 12 month period shall be considered to have interrupted
service and shall be required to successfully complete
(a) Level III Basic and Method Examinations shall a Practical Examination (Level I and II personnel), or
be administered and graded by an outside agency. a Specific Examination (Level III personnel), to assure
(b) The Specific, Practical, and Demonstration Exam- continued proficiency prior to further assignment to
inations shall be approved, administered, and graded perform NDE. The results of this examination shall be
by a Level III employed by an outside agency or the documented and maintained as part of the individual’s
Employer. certification records.
348

ARTICLE VII-5000
QUALIFICATION RECORDS
VII-5100 PRE-CERTIFICATION VII-5200 CERTIFICATION RECORDS

RECORDS In addition to the records required in VII-5100,
the records of certified individuals shall include the
following:
Prior to certification or recertification, the records of
(a) date of current certification and expiration date;
the individual shall include the following:
(b) name and signature of certifying Employer repre-
(a) name of the individual;
sentative; and
(b) qualification level;
(c) evidence of continued proficiency (VII-4400).
(c) educational background and experience;
(d) statement indicating satisfactory completion of
training, including training hours, dates attended, and
training institution;
VII-5300 MAINTENANCE OF RECORDS
(e) record of annual supplemental training;
(f) results of vision examinations; The qualification records shall be maintained by the
(g) current qualification examination results, with Employer. In addition, outside agencies that perform
traceability to the actual examination; and training and qualification activities shall maintain the
(h) grade assigned to each qualification examination. qualification records specified in VII-3300.
349
APPENDIX VII — SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 1 — MINIMUM CONTENT OF (a) Straight beam

INITIAL TRAINING COURSES FOR THE (b) Angle beam
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION METHOD (c) Through transmission
4.3 Modified immersion testing
1.0 FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF
(a) Tests employing special devices
SOUND
4.4 Resonance testing
1.1 Frequency, velocity, and wavelength 4.5 Geometric indications, flaw indications, and methods
1.2 Definition of ultrasonic vibrations of discrimination
1.3 General application of ultrasonic vibrations 4.6 law sizing
2.0 PRINCIPLES OF WAVE

PROPAGATION 5.0 ULTRASONIC TESTING
EQUIPMENT
2.1 Modes of vibration
2.2 Acoustic impedance 5.1 Description of basic pulse-echo instrument
2.3 Reflection (a) Time-base (synchronizer) circuit
2.4 Refraction and mode conversion (b) Pulser circuit
2.5 Diffraction, dispersion, and attenuation (c) A-scan display circuit
2.6 Fresnel and Fraunhofer effects 5.2 Special instruments
(a) B-scan display
(b) C-scan display
3.0 GENERATION OF ULTRASONIC (c) Monitors and recording devices
WAVES 5.3 Scanning equipment
3.1 Piezoelectricity and types of crystals (a) Manipulators
3.2 Construction of ultrasonic search units (b) Bridges
3.3 Characteristics of search units (c) Special scanning devices
(a) Frequency-crystal thickness relationships
(b) Conversion efficiencies of various crystals
(c) Damping and resolution 6.0 OPERATION OF SPECIFIC
(d) Beam intensity characteristics EQUIPMENT
(e) Divergence 6.1 General operating characteristics
3.4 Care of search units 6.2 Functional block diagram of circuits
6.3 Purpose and adjustment of external controls
4.0 ULTRASONIC TESTING 6.4 Care of equipment and calibration blocks
TECHNIQUES
4.1 Contact testing
7.0 SPECIFIC TESTING PROCEDURES
(a) Straight beam
(b) Angle beam 7.1 Selection of test parameters
(c) Surface wave (a) Frequency
(d) Lamb wave (b) Search unit size and type
(e) Through transmission (c) Water distance (immersed test)
4.2 Immersion testing (d) Scanning speed and index
350
Supplement 1 APPENDIX VII — MANDATORY Supplement 1
7.2 Test standardization 8.3 Inspected parts variations

(a) Ultrasonic reference blocks (a) Entry surface condition
(b) Adjustment of test sensitivity (b) Part size and geometry
7.3 Interpretation of results (c) Metallurgical structure
(a) Acceptance standards 8.4 Discontinuity variations
(b) Comparison between responses from discontinu- (a) Size and geometry
ities to those from ultrasonic reference standards (b) Distance from entry point
(c) Estimated length of discontinuities (c) Orientation to entry surface
(d) Location of discontinuities (d) Discontinuity types and reflecting characteristics
(e) Zoning
7.4 Test records 9.0 ADDITIONAL TRAINING FOR
(a) Data sheets LEVEL III CANDIDATES
(b) Maps
(c) Identification stamps and certification 9.1 Nuclear power plant design, function, and system
7.5 Equipment performance variations operation
9.2 Materials, metal processing, fabrication technology,
failure mechanisms, and fracture mechanics techniques
8.0 VARIABLES AFFECTING TEST 9.3 Review of NDE methods commonly used during ISI
9.4 Administration of NDE personnel qualification and
RESULTS
certification practices and instructional techniques
8.1 Instrument performance variations 9.5 Code, standard, and regulatory requirements
8.2 Search unit performance variations 9.6 Procedure preparation
351
APPENDIX VIII
PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION FOR
ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION SYSTEMS
353
ARTICLE VIII-1000
SCOPE
VIII-1100 GENERAL (d) The performance demonstration requirements

specified in this Appendix do not apply to personnel
(a) This Appendix provides requirements for per-
whose involvement is limited to mounting a scanner
formance demonstration for ultrasonic examination pro-
device, marking pipe, or other situations where knowl-
cedures, equipment, and personnel used to detect and
size flaws. edge of ultrasonics is not important.
(b) Each organization (e.g., Owner or vendor) shall (e) Any procedure qualified in accordance with this
have a written program that insures compliance with this Appendix is acceptable.
Appendix. Each organization that performs ultrasonic (f) Instrument characterization described in Supple-
examinations shall qualify its procedures, equipment, ment 1 is optional. When Supplement 1 is selected,
and personnel in accordance with this Appendix. The both the original and substituted equipment shall be
organization may contract implementation of the characterized.
program.
(c) Performance demonstration requirements apply
to personnel who detect, record, or interpret indications
or size flaws in welds or components.
355
ARTICLE VIII-2000
GENERAL EXAMINATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
VIII-2100 PROCEDURE REQUIREMENTS (b) maximum scan speed;

(c) minimum and maximum pulse repetition
(a) The examination procedure shall contain a state-
rate;
ment of scope that specifically defines the limits of
(d) minimum sampling rate (automatic recording
procedure applicability (e.g., materials, thickness, diam-
systems);
eter, product form).
(e) extent of scanning and action to be taken
(b) The examination procedure shall specify a single
for access restrictions;
value or a range of values for the variables listed in
(5) methods of calibration for detection and sizing
VIII-2100(d).
(e.g., actions required to insure that the sensitivity and
(c) Any calibration method may be used provided
accuracy of the signal amplitude and time outputs of
it is described and complies with VIII-2100(d)(5).
(d) The examination procedure shall specify the fol- the examination system, whether displayed, recorded,
lowing essential variables: or automatically processed, are repeated from examina-
(1) instrument or system, including manufacturer tion to examination);
and model or series of pulser, receiver, and amplifier; (6) inspection and calibration data to be recorded;
(2) search units, including: (7) method of data recording;
(a) center frequency and either bandwidth or (8) recording equipment (e.g., strip chart, analog
waveform duration as defined in VIII-4000; tape, digitizing) when used;
(b) mode of propagation and nominal inspection (9) method and criteria for the discrimination of
angles; indications (e.g., geometric versus flaw indications and
(c) number, size, shape, and configuration of for length and depth sizing of flaws);
active elements and wedges or shoes; (10) surface preparation requirements.
(3) search unit cable, including:
(a) type;
(b) maximum length;
VIII-2200 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
(c) maximum number of connectors;
(4) detection and sizing techniques, including: Personnel shall meet the requirements of Appendix
(a) scan pattern and beam directions; VII and shall be qualified in accordance with VIII-3000.
356
ARTICLE VIII-3000
VIII-3100 QUALIFICATION TEST TABLE VIII-3110-1

REQUIREMENTS COMPONENT QUALIFICATION SUPPLEMENTS
VIII-3110 DETECTION Applicable

Component Type Supplement
(a) Qualification test specimens shall meet the re-
quirements of the appropriate Supplement listed in Piping Welds
Wrought Austenitic 2
Table VIII-3110-1. Ferritic 3
(b) The examination procedure, equipment, and per- Cast Austenitic [Note (1)]
sonnel are qualified for detecting flaws upon successful Dissimilar Metal 10
completion of the performance demonstration specified in Overlay 11
the appropriate Supplement listed in Table VIII-3110-1. Coordinated Implementation 12
(c) For piping welds whose requirements are in Vessels

course of preparation, the requirements of Appendix Clad/Base Metal Interface Region 4
III, as supplemented by Table I-2000-1, shall be met. Nozzle Inside Radius Section 5
Reactor Vessel Welds Other
Than Clad/Base Metal Interface 6
Nozzle-to-Vessel Weld 7
Coordinated Implementation 13
VIII-3120 SIZING
Bolts and Studs 8
(a) Qualification test specimens shall meet the re-
NOTE:
quirements of the appropriate Supplement listed in (1) In the course of preparation.
Table VIII-3110-1.
(b) The examination procedure, equipment, and per-
sonnel are qualified for sizing flaws upon successful com-
pletion of the performance demonstration specified in the VIII-3130 ESSENTIAL VARIABLE RANGES
appropriate Supplement listed in Table VIII-3110-1.
(c) For piping welds whose requirements are in (a) Any two procedures with the same essential
course of preparation, the requirements of Appendix variables [VIII-2100(d)] are considered equivalent.
III, as supplemented by Table I-2000-1, shall be met. Pulsers, search units, and receivers that vary within
(d) RMS error shall be calculated as follows: the tolerances specified in VIII-4100 are considered
equivalent. When the pulsers, search units, and receivers
n vary beyond the tolerances of VIII-4100, or when the
o (mi − ti)2 1/2
3 4
examination procedure allows more than one value or
ip1
RMS p range for an essential variable, the qualification test
n shall be repeated at the minimum and maximum value
for each essential variable with all other variables
remaining at nominal values. Changing the essential
where variable may be accomplished during successive person-
mi p measured flaw size nel performance demonstrations. Each examiner need
ti p true flaw size not demonstrate qualification over the entire range of
n p number of flaws measured every essential variable.
357
VIII-3130 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 VIII-3140
(b) When the procedure does not specify a range for

essential variables and establishes criteria for selecting
values, the criteria shall be demonstrated.
VIII-3140 REQUALIFICATION
When a change in an examination procedure causes
an essential variable to exceed a qualified range, the
examination procedure shall be requalified for the re-
vised range.
358
ARTICLE VIII-4000
ESSENTIAL VARIABLE TOLERANCES
VIII-4100 PROCEDURE MODIFICATIONS following tolerances of the original equipment as mea-

sured into a 50 ohm, noninductive, noncapacitive, re-
VIII-4110 PULSERS, RECEIVERS, AND
sistive load:
SEARCH UNITS
(1) pulse amplitude, 610%;
The qualified procedure may be modified to replace (2) pulse rise time, 610%;
pulsers, receivers, or search units without requalification (3) pulse duration, 610%;
when the following conditions are met. (f) Replacements of the instrument or the receiver
(a) Instruments with reject, damping, or pulse tuning section of the instrument system shall be within the
controls, have discrete settings specified in the pro- following tolerances of the original equipment:
cedure. (1) lower and upper frequency limits at the –6
(b) Pulsers and receivers shall be evaluated using dB point, 60.2 MHz;
ASTM E 1324, Guide for Measuring Some Electronic (2) center frequency for instrument receivers with
Characteristics of Ultrasonic Instruments, with the fol- bandwidths less than 30%, 65%;
lowing exceptions: (3) center frequency for instrument receivers with
(1) The lower (FL ) and upper (FU) limits for bandwidths equal to or greater than 30%, 610%.
receivers shall be determined between frequencies that (g) Replacement search units of the same manufactur-
are 6 dB below the peak frequency. er’s model, size, and nominal frequency may be used
(2) The receiver center frequency (FC) shall be without requalification.
determined by: (h) Replacement search units not of the same manu-
facturer’s model, size, and nominal frequency shall be
within the following tolerances of the original search
F L + FU units:
FC p (1) propagation mode is the same
2
(2) measured angle, 6 3 deg.
(3) center frequency for search units with band-
widths less than 30%, 65%
(3) The receiver band width (BW) shall be deter-
(4) center frequency for search units with band-
mined by:
widths equal to or greater than 30%, 610%
(5) waveform duration, 61⁄2 cycle or 20%, which-
ever is greater (measured at −20 dB), or bandwidth,
F U − FL 610%
BW p × 100
FC (i) As an alternative to (e) through (h) above, equip-
ment replacement is acceptable if the examination sys-
tem is within the following tolerances of the original
(c) Search units shall be evaluated using ASTM E system:
1065, Evaluation of the Characteristics of Ultrasonic (1) system center frequency for examination sys-
Search Units. tems with bandwidths less than 30%, 65%
(d) Examination systems shall be evaluated using (2) system center frequency for examination sys-
Supplement 1. tems with bandwidths equal to or greater than 30%,
(e) Replacements of the instrument or the pulser 610%
section of the instrument system shall be within the (3) system bandwidth, 610%
359
VIII-4120 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 VIII-4300
VIII-4120 SEARCH UNIT ments of VIII-3000, the algorithm shall be considered

CHARACTERIZATION qualified.
Characterization measurements of the search unit
shall be made using either a sinusoidal tone burst
VIII-4300 CALIBRATION METHODS
technique or shock excitation. When using shock excita-
tion, the characterization pulser and UT instrumentpulser Alternative calibration methods may be demonstrated
shall be the same within the limits of VIII-4110(e). equivalent to those described in the qualified procedure
without requalification. This demonstration of equiva-
lence shall be conducted for each beam angle and
VIII-4200 COMPUTERIZED SYSTEM mode of propagation to which it applies, as follows.
(a) Calibrate the examination system in accordance
ALGORITHMS
with the alternative methods.
When the performance demonstration uses prere- (b) Compare the sensitivity of the alternative calibra-
corded data, algorithms for automated decisions may tion method to that of the qualified calibration method.
be altered when the altered algorithms are demonstrated (c) The alternative calibration method is acceptable
to be equivalent to those qualified. When the perform- when the system sensitivity is no more than 2 dB
ance demonstration results meet the acceptance require- below that obtained by the qualified method.
360
ARTICLE VIII-5000
RECORD OF QUALIFICATION
VIII-5100 GENERAL
The organization’s performance demonstration pro-
gram shall specify the documentation that shall be
maintained as qualification records. Documentation shall
include identification of personnel, NDE procedures,
and equipment and specimens used during qualification,
and results of the performance demonstration.
361
APPENDIX VIII — SUPPLEMENTS
SUPPLEMENT 1 — EVALUATING sound field is perpendicular to the block. Adjust the

ELECTRONIC CHARACTERISTICS OF receiver section gain controls until the ultrasonic signal
ULTRASONIC SYSTEMS amplitude from the block is 80% of full scale without
saturating the ultrasonic signal. Plot the frequency spec-
1.0 SYSTEM FREQUENCY
trum of the ultrasonic signal as shown in Fig. VIII-
CHARACTERISTICS
S1-2A.
1.1 The frequency response, also known as the (2) Determination of the frequency response for
frequency spectrum, shall be determined by measuring focused search units shall follow the same procedure
of the amplitude of the pulse echo response from a for flat search units, except that the distance Zo shall
target as a function of frequency. This response shall be adjusted to maximize echo from the glass target.
be used as a basis for establishing the center frequency
and bandwidth of the ultrasonic system. 1.3 System Frequency Response Results
(a) Lower Frequency Limit (FL ) — The lower fre-
CAUTION: The required output signal test point from
quency limit (MHz) at a specific frequency control
the ultrasonic instrument may require access to ultra-
setting is the lowest frequency on the frequency response
sonic circuitry inside the instrument chassis. The use
curve that is 6 dB below the maximum amplitude as
of high impedance test probes may also be required
shown in Fig. VIII-S1-2A.
if the signal of interest is not buffered.
(b) Upper Frequency Limit (FU) — The upper fre-
1.2 Connect the ultrasonic instrument including the quency limit (MHz) at a specific frequency control
search unit and, if applicable, the wedge, as shown in setting is the highest frequency on the frequency re-
Fig. VIII-S1-1A. The output signal from the ultrasonic sponse curve that is 6 dB below the maximum amplitude
instrument that is used in data analysis for flaw detection as shown in Fig. VIII-S1-2A.
or flaw sizing (i.e., the output signal after amplification, (c) Center Frequency (FC) — The center frequency
filtering, and video detection) shall be input to a device (MHz) at a specific frequency control setting shall be
that is capable of measuring the frequency spectrum calculated as follows:
(e.g., a spectrum analyzer or a digitizing circuit with
a software package that determines the frequency re- FL + FU
sponse of waveforms). If a digitizing circuit is used, FC p
2
the rate of digitizing shall be at least five times the
nominal (labeled) frequency of the search unit.
(a) If the receiver or transmitter provides variable (d) Bandwidth (BW) — The bandwidth (%) at a
signal filtering or frequency control, the signal controls specific frequency control setting shall be calculated
shall be set as specified in the examination procedure. as follows:
Check all connections in the test setup to ensure that
it is safe to turn on the ultrasonic system. F U − FL
(1) Flat or nonfocused search units shall be ad- BW p × 100
FC
justed so that the distance (Zo) from the face of the
search unit to the target is 2 in. (51 mm) (see Fig.
VIII-S1-1B). A smooth glass block with dimensions 2 (e) The system frequency response results, (a)
in. × 2 in. × 1 in. (51 mm × 51 mm × 25 mm) thick through (d) above, shall be obtained for the remaining
is recommended as the target. Using a manipulator, receiver and transmitter control module setting combina-
adjust the search unit angle with respect to the block tions used in the performance demonstration. These
until the return echo is maximized indicating that the values shall be recorded.
362
APPENDIX VIII — MANDATORY Fig. VIII-S1-1A
FIG. VIII-S1-1A SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
363
Fig. VIII-S1-1B 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. VIII-S1-1B TEST CONFIGURATION
364
APPENDIX VIII — MANDATORY Fig. VIII-S1-2A
FIG. VIII-S1-2A FREQUENCY RESPONSE CURVE
365
SUPPLEMENT 2 — QUALIFICATION TABLE VIII-S2-1

REQUIREMENTS FOR WROUGHT PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION DETECTION TEST
AUSTENITIC PIPING WELDS ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS Detection Test False Call Test

Acceptance Critera Acceptance Criteria
Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
ments listed herein, unless a set of specimens is designed No. of No. of Maximum
to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope Flawed Minimum Unflawed Number
Grading Detection Grading of False
of the examination procedure (e.g., pipe size, access Units Criteria Units Calls
limitations). The same specimens may be used to
demonstrate both detection and sizing qualification. 5 5 10 0
6 6 12 1
1.1 General. The specimen set shall conform to the 7 6 14 1
following requirements. 8 7 16 2
9 7 18 2
(a) Specimens shall have sufficient volume to mini- 10 8 20 3
mize spurious reflections that may interfere with the 11 9 22 3
interpretation process. 12 9 24 3
(b) The specimen set shall consist of at least four 13 10 26 4
specimens having different nominal pipe diameters and 14 10 28 5
15 11 30 5
thicknesses. The set shall include pipe specimens not 16 12 32 6
thicker than 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) more than the minimum 17 12 34 6
thickness, nor thinner than 0.5 in. (13 mm) less than 18 13 36 7
the maximum thickness for which the examination 19 13 38 7
procedure is applicable. It shall include the minimum 20 14 40 8
and maximum pipe diameters and thicknesses for which
the examination procedure is applicable. If the procedure
is applicable to pipe diameters of 24 in. (610 mm) or
larger, the specimen set must include at least one
specimen 24 in. (610 mm) or larger in diameter but of weld length. If a grading unit is designed to be
need not include the maximum diameter. unflawed, at least 1 in. (25 mm) of unflawed material
(c) The specimen set shall include examples of the shall exist on either side of the grading unit. The
following fabrication condition: segment of weld length used in one grading unit shall
(1) unground weld reinforcement (crowns); not be used in another grading unit. Grading units need
(2) wide crowns, such that the total crown width not be uniformly spaced around the pipe specimen.
is 11 ⁄ 2 to 2 times the nominal pipe wall thickness; (b) Detection sets shall be selected from Table VIII-
(3) geometric conditions that normally require S2-1. The number of unflawed grading units shall be
discrimination from flaws (e.g., counterbore, weld root at least twice the number of flawed grading units.
conditions such as excessive I.D. reinforcement); (c) Flawed grading units shall meet the following
(4) typical limited scanning surface conditions criteria for flaw depth, orientation, and type.
(e.g., diametrical shrink, single-side access due to safe (1) A minimum of 1 ⁄ 3 of the flaws, rounded to
ends or fittings). the next higher whole number, shall have depths be-
(d) All flaws in the specimen set shall be cracks. tween 5% and 30% of the nominal pipe wall thickness.
(1) Mechanical fatigue cracks and either IGSCC At least 1 ⁄ 3 of the flaws, rounded to the next higher
or thermal fatigue cracks shall be used. At least 75% whole number, shall have depths greater than 30% of
of the cracks shall be either IGSCC or thermal fatigue the nominal pipe wall thickness.
cracks. (2) At least one and a maximum of 10% of the
(2) At least 50% of the cracks shall be coincident flaws, rounded to the next higher whole number, shall
with fabricated conditions described in (c) above. be oriented axially. The remainder of the flaws shall
be oriented circumferentially.
1.2 Detection Specimens. The specimen set shall
(3) Service-induced flaws shall be included when
include detection specimens that meet the following
available.
requirements.
(a) Specimens shall be divided into grading units. 1.3 Sizing Specimens. The specimen set shall contain
Each grading unit shall include at least 3 in. (76 mm) sizing specimens that meet the following requirements.
366
Supplement 2 APPENDIX VIII — MANDATORY Supplement 4
(a) The minimum number of flaws shall be ten. if the results of the performance demonstration satisfy
(b) Flaws in length sizing sample sets shall meet the following criteria:
the requirements of para 1.2(c)(1), when given in (a) The RMS error of the flaw lengths estimated by
conjunction with a detection test. When the length ultrasonics, as compared with the true lengths, shall
sizing test is administered independently, the flaw depth not exceed 0.75 in. (19 mm);
requirements do not apply. (b) The RMS error of the flaw depths estimated by
(c) Flaws in the depth sizing sample set shall be ultrasonics, as compared with the true depths, shall not
distributed as follows: exceed 0.125 in. (3.2 mm).
Flaw Depth Minimum
(% Wall Thickness) Number of Flaws
5–30% 20% SUPPLEMENT 3 — QUALIFICATION
31–60% 20%
REQUIREMENTS FOR FERRITIC
61–100% 20%
PIPING WELDS
The remaining flaws shall be in any of the above Qualification of examination procedures, equipment,
categories. and personnel for ferritic pipe examination shall be
accomplished by satisfying the requirements of Supple-
2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE ment 2, except that the sample material shall be ferritic
DEMONSTRATIONS and 75% of the sample set defects shall be mechanically
or thermally induced fatigue cracks. In addition, the
The specimen inside surface and identification shall set shall include pipe specimens not thicker than 0.1
be concealed from the candidate. All examinations shall in. (2.5 mm) more than the minimum thickness, nor
be completed prior to grading the results and presenting thinner than 1.0 in. (25 mm) less than the maximum
the results to the candidate. Divulgence of particular thickness for which the examination procedure is appli-
specimen results or candidate viewing of unmasked cable.
specimens after the performance demonstration is pro-
hibited.
2.1 Detection Test. Flawed and unflawed grading SUPPLEMENT 4 — QUALIFICATION
units shall be randomly mixed. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CLAD /BASE
METAL INTERFACE OF REACTOR VESSEL
2.2 Length and Depth Sizing Test
(a) For the length sizing test, the regions of each 1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS
specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the ments listed herein unless a set of specimens is designed
length of the flaw in each region. to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope
(b) For the depth sizing test, 80% of the flaws shall of the examination procedure. The same specimens
be sized at a specific location on the surface of the may be used to demonstrate both detection and sizing
specimen identified to the candidate. For the remaining qualifications.
flaws, the regions of each specimen containing a flaw
to be sized shall be identified to the candidate. The 1.1 Detection Specimens. Detection specimens,
candidate shall determine the maximum depth of the which may be full-scale mock-ups, shall conform to
flaw in each region. the following requirements.
(a) Specimens shall have sufficient volume to mini-
mize spurious reflections. Specimen length and width
3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA shall be at least 12 in. (305 mm). There shall be at
3.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria. Examination pro- least 10 sq ft (0.9 m2) of clad surface in the specimen set.
cedures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for (b)(1) When the examination procedure requires the
detection when the results of the performance demon- examination to be performed from the vessel I.D. (clad
stration satisfy the acceptance criteria of Table VIII- surface), the specimen minimum thickness shall be 3
S2-1 for both detection and false calls. in. (76 mm) or the maximum thickness of the vessel
(whichever is less).
3.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria. Examination proce- (2) When the examination procedure requires the
dures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for sizing examination to be performed from the vessel O.D.
367
surface, the specimen shall be at least 90% of the TABLE VIII-S4-1

maximum thickness to be examined. PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION DETECTION TEST
(c) The performance demonstration shall be on the ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
same type cladding as that to be examined, with the
Detection Test
following exceptions: Acceptance Criteria
(1) demonstration on shielded metal arc weld
(SWAW) single-wire cladding is transferable to multi- Minimum
ple-wire or strip-clad processes; No. of Detection
Flaws Criteria
(2) demonstration of multiple-wire or strip-clad is
considered equivalent but is not transferable to SMAW- 7 7
8 8
type clad.
9 9
(d) The surface condition of the test specimens shall 10 10
be representative of the general condition of the vessel 11 11
scanning surface. 12 11
(e) The detection test matrix shall include flaws with 13 12
14 13
the following description. 15 14
(1) Flaw Type. At least 50% of the flaws shall be 16 14
cracks. The balance of flaws may be cracks, fabrication 17 15
defects (e.g., slag inclusions), or machined notches. 18 16
19 17
Machined notches shall meet the following require- 20 18
ments:
(a) notches shall be perpendicular to the surface
within 62 deg.;
(b) notches shall have a maximum width of
0.010 in. and shall be plugged to their full depth with
an insert of the parent material prior to cladding.
(2) All flaws shall emanate from the clad base 2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
metal interface and shall propagate predominantly into DEMONSTRATIONS
the base metal. A minimum of 40% of the flaws shall 2.1 Detection Test
be oriented parallel to the clad direction (within 610 (a) Flaw locations shall be obscured so as to maintain
deg.) and a minimum of 40% shall be oriented perpen- a “blind test.” All examinations shall be completed
dicular to the clad direction (within 610 deg.). prior to grading and presenting the results to the
(3) The flaw sizes shall be uniformly distributed candidate. Divulging particular specimen results or can-
in through-wall depths (inches) among the ranges: didate viewing of unmasked specimens is prohibited.
(a) 0.075–0.200 (1.90 mm–5.08 mm) (b) When a flaw is reported within 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
(b) 0.201–0.350 (5.10 mm–8.89 mm) of its true location (x and y) it shall be considered
(c) 0.351–0.550 (8.31 mm–13.97 mm) detected. All other reported flaws shall be considered
(d) 0.551–0.750 (14.00 mm–19.05 mm) false calls.
No flaw shall have an aspect ratio (depth /length) less
than 0.1.
(f) The number of flaws in the detection test matrix 2.2 Length and Depth Sizing Test
shall be selected from Table VIII-S4-1. The rules of (a) For the length sizing test, the regions of each
IWA-3000 shall be used for determining whether closely specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified
spaced flaws should be treated as separate flaws. to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the
length of the flaw in each region.
(b) For the depth sizing test, 80% of the flaws shall
be sized at a specific location on the surface of the
1.2 Sizing Specimens specimen identified to the candidate. For the remaining
(a) The sizing test matrix shall contain a minimum flaws, the regions of each specimen containing a flaw
of ten flaws, at least half of which shall be cracks. to be sized shall be identified to the candidate. The
(b) Sizing specimens shall conform with the require- candidate shall determine the maximum depth of the
ments of 1.1(b), 1.1(c), 1.1(d), and 1.1(e). flaw in each region.
368
3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA that ratio for the vessel nozzles to be examined. If
the examination procedure requires the examination be
3.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria. Examination pro-
performed from the inside surface, the specimen shall
cedures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for
have the minimum nozzle diameter covered by the
detection if the results of the performance demonstration
procedure. Each of the flaws presented for demonstration
satisfy the acceptance criteria of Table VIII-S4-1. Addi-
shall be correctly identified in accordance with Supple-
tionally, the number of false calls shall not exceed
ment 4, 2.1 with no false calls. Demonstrations on
A /10 rounded to the next whole number where A is
clad nozzle mockups may be used for examination of
the total scan area of specimens in the test measured
unclad nozzles. Demonstrations performed on unclad
in square feet.
nozzle mockups shall not be used for examinations of
3.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria. Examination proce- clad nozzles.
dures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for sizing (b) For depth sizing, a minimum of three additional
if the results of the performance demonstration satisfy flaws as in (a) above shall be added to the test set.
the following criteria: Their depths shall be evenly distributed over the ranges
(a) no flaw is undersized for depth by more than of Supplement 4, 1.1(e)(3)(a), 1.1(e)(3)(b), and
0.2 in.; 1.1(e)(3)(c). The sizing results from these flaws shall
(b) flaw lengths estimated by ultrasonics shall be the be combined with the sizing results from Clad /Base
true length −1⁄4 in. (−6 mm), +1 in. (+25 mm); Metal Interface qualification, and combined results shall
(c) performance demonstration results reported by meet the acceptance criteria of Supplement 4, 3.2.
the candidate, when plotted on a two-dimensional plot
(Fig. VIII-S4-1) with the depth estimated by ultrasonics
plotted along the ordinate and the true depth plotted
along the abscissa, satisfy the following statistical pa- SUPPLEMENT 6 — QUALIFICATION
rameters: REQUIREMENTS FOR REACTOR VESSEL
(1) slope of the linear regression line is not less WELDS OTHER THAN CLAD /BASE METAL
than 0.7; INTERFACE
(2) the mean deviation of flaw depth is less than
0.25 in.; 1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS
(3) correlation coefficient is not less than 0.70. Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
ments listed herein unless a set of specimens is designed
to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope
SUPPLEMENT 5 — QUALIFICATION of the examination procedure. The same specimens
REQUIREMENTS FOR NOZZLE INSIDE may be used to demonstrate both detection and sizing
RADIUS SECTION qualification.
Demonstration on clad /base metal interface of reactor 1.1 Detection Specimens. Detection specimens,
vessel plate specimens (Supplement 4) qualifies exami- which may be full-scale mock-ups, shall conform to
nation procedures, equipment, and personnel for nozzle the following requirements.
inside radius section examination when the following (a) Specimens shall have sufficient volume to mini-
requirements are met. mize spurious reflections. Specimen length and width
(a) For detection, a minimum of three additional shall be at least 12 in. (305 mm). There shall be
flaws at the inside radius section in one or more full- at least 10 sq ft (0.93 m) of scan surface in the
scale nozzle mock-ups (Supplement 7) shall be added specimen set.
to the test set. The specimens shall comply with Supple- (b) The specimen set shall contain at least one sample
ment 4, 1.1, but flaws may be either notches or cracks. that is at least 90% of the maximum thickness to be
Flaws shall be located in the radial axial plane of the examined. The specimen set shall contain one or more
nozzle inside radius section as shown in Fig. IWB- flaws in each of the locations and size ranges shown
2500-7. If the examination procedure requires the exami- in Table VIII-S6-1.
nation to be performed from the vessel O.D. surface, (c) When the examination procedure requires the
at least one nozzle in the specimen set shall be at examination to be performed from the vessel I.D. (clad
least 90% of the maximum thickness, tn2 in Fig. IWB- surface), the cladding on the mockup shall be of the
2500-7, to be examined and the ratio of the nozzle same type as the cladding on the component to be
thickness to shell thickness shall be within 630% of examined, with the following exceptions:
369
(1) demonstration on shielded metal arc weld prior to grading and presenting the results to the
(SMAW) single-wire cladding is transferable to multi- candidate. Divulging particular specimen results or can-
ple-wire or strip-clad processes; didate viewing of unmasked specimens is prohibited.
(2) demonstration on multiple-wire or strip-clad is (b) When a flaw is reported within 1⁄2 in. (13 mm)
considered equivalent but is not transferable to SMAW- of its true location (x and y), it shall be considered
type clad. detected. All other reported flaws shall be considered
(d) The surface condition of the test specimens shall false calls.
be representative of the general condition of the vessel
scanning surface. 2.2 Length and Depth Sizing Test
(e) The detection test matrix shall include flaws with (a) For the length sizing test, the regions of each
the following description. specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified
(1) Flaw Type. At least 50% of the flaws shall be to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the
cracks. The balance of flaws may be cracks, fabrication length of the flaw in each region.
defects (e.g., slag inclusions), or machined notches. (b) For the depth sizing test, 80% of the flaws shall
Machined notches shall meet the following require- be sized at a specific location on the surface of the
ments: specimen identified to the candidate. For the remaining
(a) notches shall be perpendicular to the surface flaws, the regions of each specimen containing a flaw
within 62 deg.; to be sized shall be identified to the candidate. The
(b) notches shall have a maximum width of candidate shall determine the maximum depth of the
0.010 in. and shall be plugged to their full depth with flaw in each region.
an insert of the parent material prior to cladding.
(2) No more than 10% of the flaws shall emanate
from the outer (unclad) surface. A weld direction shall
be established whether or not the specimen contains a
3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
weld. A minimum of 40% of the flaws shall be oriented
parallel to the weld direction (within 610 deg.) and 3.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria. Examination pro-
a minimum of 40% shall be oriented perpendicular to cedures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for
the weld direction (within 610 deg.). detection if the results of the performance demonstration
(3) Flaws for the detection test matrix shall be satisfy the acceptance criteria of Table VIII-S6-2. Addi-
selected from the detection test flaws included in Table tionally, the number of false calls shall not exceed
VIII-S6-1. The flaws selected shall provide a demonstra- A /10 rounded to the next whole number where A is
tion of the minimum and maximum metal path ranges the total scan area of specimens in the test measured
to be demonstrated as well as a uniform distribution in square feet.
of flaw sizes and locations.
(4) The number of flaws in the detection test 3.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria. Examination proce-
matrix shall be selected from Table VIII-S6-2. The dures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for sizing
rules of IWA-3000 shall be used for determining if the results of the performance demonstration satisfy
whether closely spaced flaws should be treated as the following criteria:
separate flaws. (a) no flaw is undersized for depth by more than
1.2 Sizing Specimens 0.2 in.;
(a) The sizing test matrix shall contain a minimum (b) flaw lengths estimated by ultrasonics shall be the
of ten flaws, at least half of which shall be cracks. true flaw length −1⁄4 in. (−6 mm), +1 in. (+25 mm);
(b) Sizing specimens shall conform with the require- (c) performance demonstration results reported by
ments of 1.1(b), 1.1(c), 1.1(d), and 1.1(e), except that the candidate, when plotted on a two-dimensional plot
the test matrix shall be selected from the sizing and (Fig. VIII-S4-1) with the depth estimated by ultrasonics
detection test flaws included in Table VIII-S6-1. plotted along the ordinate and the true depth plotted
along the abscissa, satisfy the following statistical pa-
rameters:
2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
(1) slope of the linear regression line is not less
DEMONSTRATIONS
than 0.70;
2.1 Detection Test (2) the mean deviation of flaw depth is less than
(a) Flaw locations shall be obscured so as to maintain 0.25 in.;
a “blind test.” All examinations shall be completed (3) correlation coefficient is not less than 0.70.
370
APPENDIX VIII — MANDATORY Fig. VIII-S4-1
FIG. VIII-S4-1 DEFINITION OF STATISTICAL PARAMETERS
371
TABLE VIII-S6-1
DETECTION AND SIZING TEST FLAWS AND LOCATIONS
Flaw Through-Wall Dimension, in.
Flaw Location 0.075–0.200 0.201–0.350 0.351–0.550 0.551–0.750 0.751–2.00
Inner 10% [Note (1)] X X S S ...

Outer 10% X X S S ...
11–30% T ... ... X X S
31–60% T ... ... X X S
61–89% T ... ... X X S
NOTE:
(1) Does not apply to clad vessels (see Supplement 4).
LEGEND:
X Applies to detection and sizing flaws.
S Applies only to sizing flaws.
T Thickness of the thickest specimen in the specimen set.
SUPPLEMENT 7 — QUALIFICATION flaws shall be combined with the sizing results from
REQUIREMENTS FOR NOZZLE-TO-VESSEL the reactor vessel weld qualification and the combined
WELD results shall meet the acceptance criteria of Supplement
6, 3.2.
Demonstration on reactor vessel plate specimens
(Supplement 6) qualifies examination procedures, equip-
ment, and personnel for nozzle-to-vessel weld examina-
tion when the following requirements are met. SUPPLEMENT 8 — QUALIFICATION
(a) For detection, a minimum of three additional REQUIREMENTS FOR BOLTS AND STUDS
flaws in one or more full-scale nozzle mock-ups shall
1.0 SPECIMEN REQUIREMENTS
be added to the test set. The specimens shall comply
with Supplement 6, 1.1, but flaws may be either notches Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
or cracks. Flaw locations and orientations shall be ments listed herein, unless a set of specimens is designed
selected from the choices shown in Table VIII-S7-1. to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope
At least one subsurface flaw shall be included and of the examination procedure.
there shall be no more than one flaw from each category. 1.1 Specimens shall conform to the following require-
(1) For demonstrations performed from the vessel ments.
shell, the specimen shall be at least 90% of the maximum (a) The qualification process shall be performed with
thickness to be examined. a full-scale section bolt or stud that is sufficient to
(2) For examinations performed from the bore of contain the beam path and demonstrate the scanning
the nozzle, at least one flaw parallel to the weld technique.
shall provide a metal path distance within 10% of the (b) The qualification specimen shall be of similar
equivalent path length to the weld centerline of the chemical composition, tensile properties, and metallurgi-
thickest component to be examined. cal structure as the bolt or stud to be examined. The
(3) Each of the flaws presented for demonstration scan surface of the qualification specimen shall have
shall be correctly identified, in accordance with Supple- a configuration similar to the bolt or stud to be examined.
ment 6, 2.1, with no false calls. (c) Circumferentially oriented notches shall be lo-
(b) For length sizing, a minimum of three additional cated in the qualification specimen at the minimum
flaws as in (a) above shall be added to the test set. and maximum qualified metal paths. Notches located
All flaws shall be sized to the acceptance standards of within one diameter of the end of the bolt or stud
Supplement 6. opposite the search unit are suitable for demonstrating
(c) For depth sizing, a minimum of three additional the maximum metal path distance. These notches are
flaws as in (a) above shall be added to the test set. required on the outside threaded surface and the inner
Their depths shall be evenly distributed over the ranges bore hole surface of bored studs with maximum depths
of Supplement 6, 1.1. The sizing results from these and reflective areas as specified in Table VIII-S8-1.
372
TABLE VIII-S6-2 TABLE VIII-S8-1

PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION DETECTION TEST MAXIMUM NOTCH DIMENSIONS
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Depth, in. Reflective Area,
Detection Test Acceptance Criteria Bolt or Stud Size [Note (1)] sq. in.
Minimum Greater than 4

No. of Flaws Detection Criteria inches diameter 0.157 0.059
2 in. diameter and
7 7 greater, but not
8 8 over 4 in. di-
9 9 ameter 0.107 0.027
10 10
11 11 NOTE:
12 11 (1) For threaded surfaces, depth is measured from the bottom of the
13 12 thread root to bottom of notch.
14 13
15 14
16 14
17 15
18 16
19 17 fied in the procedure. The notch response shall have
20 18 a minimum peak signal to peak noise ratio of 2:1.
SUPPLEMENT 9 — QUALIFICATION
REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST AUSTENITIC
TABLE VIII-S7-1 PIPING WELDS
FLAW LOCATIONS AND ORIENTATIONS
(In the course of preparation)
Parallel to Weld Perpendicular to Weld
ID Surface X X
OD Surface X X SUPPLEMENT 10 — QUALIFICATION
Subsurface X X REQUIREMENTS FOR DISSIMILAR
METAL PIPING WELDS
Qualification test specimens shall meet the require-
(d) Additional notches may be located within the
ments listed herein, unless a set of specimens is designed
range specified in (c) above, provided they do not
to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope
interfere with the detection of other notches.
of the examination procedure (e.g., pipe size, weld
joint configuration, access limitations). The same speci-
2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE mens may be used to demonstrate both detection and
DEMONSTRATIONS sizing qualification.
Specimen identification and notch locations shall be 1.1 General. The specimen set shall conform to the
obscured so as to maintain a “blind test.” A flaw shall following requirements.
be considered detected when the notch, as defined in (a) Specimens shall have sufficient volume to mini-
1.1, is found. The notch axial location correlation shall mize spurious reflections that may interfere with the
be 61⁄2 in. (613 mm) or 65% of the bolt or stud interpretation process.
length, whichever is greater. (b) The specimen set shall include the minimum and
maximum pipe diameters and thicknesses for which
the examination procedure is applicable. Pipe diameters
within a range of 0.9 to 1.5 times a nominal diameter
3.1 Examination procedures, equipment, and person- shall be considered equivalent. Pipe diameters larger
nel are qualified for detection when each qualification than 24 in. (610 mm) shall be considered to be flat.
notch (as described in 1.1) has been detected and its When a range of thicknesses is to be examined, a
response equals or exceeds the reporting criteria speci- thickness tolerance of 625% is acceptable.
373
(c) The specimen set shall include examples of the 1.3 Length Sizing Specimens. The specimen set
following fabrication condition: shall include length sizing specimens that meet the
(1) geometric conditions that normally require dis- following requirements.
crimination from flaws (e.g., counterbore or weld root (a) All length sizing flaws shall be oriented circumfer-
conditions, cladding, weld buttering, remnants of previ- entially.
ous welds, adjacent welds in close proximity); (b) The minimum number of flaws shall be ten.
(2) typical limited scanning surface conditions (c) All flaw depths shall be greater than 10% of the
(e.g., diametrical shrink, single-side access due to nozzle nominal pipe wall thickness. At least 1⁄3 of the flaws,
and safe end external tapers). rounded to the next higher whole number, shall have
(d) All flaws in the specimen set shall be cracks. depths between 10% and 30% of the nominal pipe
(1) At least 50% of the cracks shall be in austenitic wall thickness. However, flaw depth shall exceed the
material. At least 50% of the cracks in austenitic nominal clad thickness when placed in cladding. At
material shall be contained wholly in weld or buttering least 1⁄3 of the flaws, rounded to the next whole number,
material. At least 10% of the cracks shall be in ferritic shall have depths greater than 30% of the nominal
material. The remainder of the cracks may be in either pipe wall thickness.
austenitic or ferritic material.
1.4 Depth Sizing Specimens. The specimen set shall
(2) At least 50% of the cracks in austenitic base
include depth sizing specimens that meet the following
material shall be either IGSCC or thermal fatigue cracks.
requirements.
At least 50% of the cracks in ferritic material shall
(a) The minimum number of flaws shall be ten.
be mechanically or thermally induced fatigue cracks.
(b) Flaws in the sample set shall not be wholly
(3) At least 50% of the cracks shall be coincident
contained within cladding and shall be distributed as
with areas described in (c) above.
follows:
Flaw Depth Minimum
1.2 Detection Specimens. The specimen set shall (% Wall Thickness) Number of Flaws
include detection specimens that meet the following 10–30% 20%
31–60% 20%
requirements. 61–100% 20%
(a) Specimens shall be divided into grading units.
Each grading unit shall include at least 3 in. (76 mm) The remaining flaws shall be in any of the above
of weld length. If a grading unit is designed to be categories.
unflawed, at least 1 in. (25 mm) of unflawed material
shall exist on either side of the grading unit. The
2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
segment of weld length used in one grading unit shall
DEMONSTRATION
not be used in another grading unit. Grading units need
not be uniformly spaced around the pipe specimen. The specimen inside surface and identification shall
(b) Detection sets shall be selected from Table VIII- be concealed from the candidate. All examinations shall
S2-1. The number of unflawed grading units shall be be completed prior to grading the results and presenting
at least twice the number of flawed grading units. the results to the candidate. Divulgence of particular
(c) Flawed grading units shall meet the following specimen results or candidate viewing of unmasked
criteria for flaw depth, orientation, and type. specimens after the performance demonstration is pro-
(1) All flaw depths shall be greater than 10% of hibited.
the nominal pipe wall thickness. At least 1⁄3 of the
2.1 Detection Test. Flawed and unflawed grading
flaws, rounded to the next higher whole number, shall
units shall be randomly mixed.
have depths between 10% and 30% of the nominal
pipe wall thickness. However, flaw depths shall exceed 2.2 Length Sizing Test
the nominal clad thickness when placed in cladding. (a) The length sizing test may be conducted sepa-
At least 1⁄3 of the flaws, rounded to the next whole rately or in conjunction with the detection test.
number, shall have depths greater than 30% of the (b) When the length sizing test is conducted in
nominal pipe wall thickness. conjunction with the detection test, and less than ten
(2) At least 30% and no more than 70% of the circumferential flaws are detected, additional specimens
flaws, rounded to the next higher whole number, shall shall be provided to the candidate such that at least
be oriented axially. The remainder of the flaws shall ten flaws are sized. The regions containing a flaw to
be oriented circumferentially. be sized shall be identified to the candidate. The
374
candidate shall determine the length of the flaw in 1.1 General. The specimen set shall conform to the
each region. following requirements.
(c) For a separate length sizing test, the regions of (a) Specimens shall have sufficient volume to mini-
each specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be mize spurious reflections that may interfere with the
identified to the candidate. The candidate shall determine interpretation process.
the length of the flaw in each region. (b) The specimen set shall consist of at least three
specimens having different nominal pipe diameters and
2.3 Depth Sizing Test overlay thicknesses. They shall include the minimum
(a) For the depth sizing test, 80% of the flaws shall and maximum nominal pipe diameters for which the
be sized at a specific location on the surface of the examination procedure is applicable. Pipe diameters
specimen identified to the candidate. within a range of 0.9 to 1.5 times a nominal diameter
(b) For the remaining flaws, the regions of each shall be considered equivalent. If the procedure is
specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified applicable to pipe diameters of 24 in. (610 mm) or
to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the larger, the specimen set must include at least one
maximum depth of the flaw in each region. specimen 24 in. (610 mm) or larger but need not
include the maximum diameter. The specimen set must
include at least one specimen with overlay thickness
within −0.1 in. to +0.25 in. (−2.5 mm to +6 mm) of
3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA the maximum nominal overlay thickness for which the
procedure is applicable.
3.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria. Examination pro- (c) The surface condition of at least two specimens
cedures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for shall approximate the roughest surface condition for
detection when the results of the performance demon- which the examination procedure is applicable.
stration satisfy the acceptance criteria of Table VIII- (d) Flaw Conditions
S2-1 for both detection and false calls. (1) Base metal flaws. All flaws must be cracks in
or near the butt weld heat-affected zone, open to the
3.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria inside surface, and extending at least 75% through the
(a) Examination procedures, equipment, and person- base metal wall. Flaws may extend 100% through the
nel are qualified for length sizing the RMS error of base metal and into the overlay material; in this case,
the flaw length measurements, as compared to the true intentional overlay fabrication flaws shall not interfere
flaw lengths, is less than or equal to 0.75 inch. with ultrasonic detection or characterization of the
(b) Examination procedures, equipment, and person- cracking. Specimens containing IGSCC shall be used
nel are qualified for depth sizing when the RMS error when available.
of the flaw depth measurements, as compared to the (2) Overlay fabrication flaws. At least 40% of the
true flaw depths, is less than or equal to 0.125 in. flaws shall be non-crack fabrication flaws (e.g., sidewall
(3.2 mm). lack of fusion or laminar lack of bond) in the overlay
or the pipe-to-overlay interface. At least 20% of the
flaws shall be cracks. The balance of the flaws shall
be of either type.
(e) Detection Specimens
SUPPLEMENT 11 — QUALIFICATION (1) At least 20% but less than 40% of the flaws
REQUIREMENTS FOR FULL STRUCTURAL shall be oriented within 620 deg. of the pipe axial
OVERLAID WROUGHT AUSTENITIC direction. The remainder shall be oriented circumferen-
PIPING WELDS tially. Flaws shall not be open to any surface to which
the candidate has physical or visual access. The rules
of IWA-3300 shall be used to determine whether closely
Qualification test specimens shall meet the require- spaced flaws should be treated as single or multiple
ments listed herein, unless a set of specimens is designed flaws.
to accommodate specific limitations stated in the scope (2) Specimens shall be divided into base and over-
of the examination procedure (e.g., pipe size, weld lay grading units. Each specimen shall contain one or
joint configuration, access limitations). The same speci- both types of grading units.
mens may be used to demonstrate both detection and (a)(1) A base grading unit shall include at least
sizing qualification. 3 in. of the length of the overlaid weld. The base
375
grading unit includes the outer 25% of the overlaid 2.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
weld and base metal on both sides. The base grading DEMONSTRATIONS
unit shall not include the inner 75% of the overlaid
The specimen inside surface and identification shall
weld and base metal overlay material, or base metal-
be concealed from the candidate. All examinations shall
to-overlay interface.
be completed prior to grading the results and presenting
(2) When base metal cracking penetrates into the results to the candidate. Divulgence of particular
the overlay material, the base grading unit shall include specimen results or candidate viewing of unmasked
the overlay metal within 1 in. (25 mm) of the crack specimens after the performance demonstration is pro-
location. This portion of the overlay material shall not hibited.
be used as part of any overlay grading unit.
(3) When a base grading unit is designed to be 2.1 Detection Test. Flawed and unflawed grading
unflawed, at least 1 in. (25 mm) of unflawed overlaid units shall be randomly mixed. Although the boundaries
weld and base metal shall exist on either side of the of specific grading units shall not be revealed to the
base grading unit. The segment of weld length used candidate, the candidate shall be made aware of the
in one base grading unit shall not be used in another type or types of grading units (base or overlay) that
base grading unit. Base grading units need not be are present for each specimen.
uniformly spaced around the specimen.
(b)(1) An overlay grading unit shall include the 2.2 Length Sizing Test
overlay material and the base metal-to-overlay interface (a) The length sizing test may be conducted sepa-
of at least 6 sq in. (3871 mm2). The overlay grading rately or in conjunction with the detection test.
unit shall be rectangular, with minimum dimensions of (b) When the length sizing test is conducted in
2 in. (51 mm). conjunction with the detection test and the detected
(2) An overlay grading unit designed to be flaws do not satisfy the requirements of 1.1(f), additional
unflawed shall be surrounded by unflawed overlay specimens shall be provided to the candidate. The
material and unflawed base metal-to-overlay interface regions containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified
for at least 1 in. (25 mm) around its entire perimeter. to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the
The specific area used in one overlay grading unit shall length of the flaw in each region.
not be used in another overlay grading unit. Overlay (c) For a separate length sizing test, the regions of
grading units need not be spaced uniformly about the each specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be
specimen. identified to the candidate. The candidate shall determine
(3) Detection sets shall be selected from Table the length of the flaw in each region.
VIII-S2-1. The minimum detection sample set is five (d) For flaws in base grading units, the candidate
flawed base grading units, ten unflawed base grading shall estimate the length of that part of the flaw that
units, five flawed overlay grading units, and ten unflawed is in the outer 25% of the base wall thickness.
overlay grading units. For each type of grading unit,
2.3 Depth Sizing Test. For the depth sizing test,
the set shall contain at least twice as many unflawed 80% of the flaws shall be sized at a specific location
as flawed grading units. on the surface of the specimen identified to the candi-
(f) Sizing Specimen date. For the remaining flaws, the regions of each
(1) The minimum number of flaws shall be ten. specimen containing a flaw to be sized shall be identified
At least 30% of the flaws shall be overlay fabrication to the candidate. The candidate shall determine the
flaws. At least 40% of the flaws shall be cracks open maximum depth of the flaw in each region.
to the inside surface.
(2) At least 20% but less than 40% of the flaws
shall be oriented axially. The remainder shall be oriented
circumferentially. Flaws shall not be open to any surface 3.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
to which the candidate has physical or visual access. 3.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria. Examination pro-
(3) Base metal cracking used for length sizing cedures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for
demonstrations shall be oriented circumferentially. detection when the results of the performance demon-
(4) Depth sizing specimen sets shall include at stration satisfy the acceptance criteria of Table VIII-
least two distinct locations where cracking in the base S2-1 for both detection and false calls. The criteria
metal extends into the overlay material by at least 0.1 shall be satisfied separately by the demonstration results
in. in the through-wall direction. for base grading units and for overlay grading units.
376
3.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria. Examination proce- or, when appropriate, the same criteria for selecting
dures, equipment, and personnel are qualified for sizing values, as the examinations performed on the ferritic
when the results of the performance demonstration specimens.
satisfy the following criteria. (b) Austenitic Piping. Examinations of specimens
(a) The RMS error of the flaw length measurements, during a successful detection or length sizing demonstra-
as compared to the true flaw lengths, is less than or tion on dissimilar metal welded piping may be applied
equal to 0.75 inch (19 mm). The length of base metal toward a Supplement 2 demonstration when the follow-
cracking is measured at the 75% through-base-metal ing requirements are met.
position. (1) Grading units shall be defined as at least 6
(b) All extensions of base metal cracking into the in. (152 mm) continuous weld length. The grading unit
overlay material by at least 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) are reported shall contain only the austenitic-side base metal. The
as being intrusions into the overlay material. ferritic base metal, butt weld, and weld preparation
(c) The RMS error of the flaw depth measurements, buttering shall not be a part of the grading unit.
as compared to the true flaw depths, is less than or (2) The examinations performed on the austenitic
equal to 0.125 in. (3.2 mm). side of the dissimilar metal weld specimens shall use
the same ultrasonic procedure essential variable values,
or, when appropriate, the same criteria for selecting
SUPPLEMENT 12 — REQUIREMENTS FOR values, as the examinations performed on the austenitic
COORDINATED IMPLEMENTATION OF specimens.
SELECTED ASPECTS OF SUPPLEMENTS 2, 3,
10, AND 11
1.0 DETECTION AND LENGTH SIZING
(a) Ferritic Piping
(1) Examination personnel, equipment, and proce-
dure qualification requirements for detection and length
sizing for Supplements 2 and 3 are satisfied when the
2.0 DEPTH SIZING
following requirements are met.
(a) For detection qualification, at least three Examination personnel, equipment, and procedure
additional flawed grading units and six additional un- qualification requirements for depth sizing for more
flawed units in ferritic piping shall be added to the than one of Supplements 2, 3, 10, and 11 are met by
test set. A grading unit shall include at least 3 in. the following demonstration.
continuous weld length. All nine ferritic grading units (a) Specimens
shall be correctly identified. (1) The minimum number of flaws shall be ten.
(b) The demonstration shall meet the require- (2) The specimen set shall include at least four
ments of Supplement 2, except that for length sizing flaws from specimens specific to each of the Supple-
qualification, the minimum number of flaws shall be ments addressed by the demonstration. If Supplement
ten, and the specimen set shall include at least three, 3 is being addressed, the specimen set shall include
but not more than four, flaws in ferritic material. no more than five Supplement 3 flaws.
(2) Examinations of specimens during a successful (3) The overall flaw depth distribution shall meet
detection or length sizing demonstration on dissimilar the requirements of Supplement 2, 1.3(b).
metal welded piping may be applied toward a Supple- (4) Of the flaws specific to each of the Supplements
ment 3 demonstration when the following requirements addressed by the demonstration, no more than half,
are met. rounded to the next higher whole number, may be in
(a) Grading units shall include at least 6 in. any one of the depth categories of Supplement 2, 1.3(b).
(152 mm) continuous weld length. The grading unit (b) The demonstration shall be conducted in accord-
shall contain only the ferritic-side base metal and inside ance with the requirements of Supplement 2, 2.2(b).
surface clad. The austenitic base metal, butt weld, and (c) The examination procedure, equipment, and per-
weld preparation buttering shall not be a part of the sonnel are qualified for depth sizing under each of the
grading unit. Supplements addressed by the demonstration when the
(b) The examinations performed on the ferritic RMS error of the flaw depth measurements, as compared
side of the dissimilar metal weld specimens shall use to the true flaw depths, does not exceed 0.125 in.
the same ultrasonic procedure essential variable values, (3.2 mm).
377
SUPPLEMENT 13 — REQUIREMENTS FOR (c) If near surface techniques applied from the outside
COORDINATED IMPLEMENTATION OF surface have not been demonstrated from the inside
SELECTED ASPECTS OF SUPPLEMENTS 4, surface in accordance with Supplement 4, three addi-
5, 6, AND 7 tional near-surface flaws shall be added for detection
and sizing from the outside surface.
1.0 GENERAL
(d) For detection and sizing, three additional flaws
(a) Candidates meeting the requirements of this Sup- shall be added to the test set for nozzle-to-vessel weld
plement in its entirety are considered qualified to Supple- examinations conducted from the nozzle bore.
ments 4, 5, 6, and 7. Detecting and sizing may be
performed separately.
(b) Demonstration from the inside surface of the 3.0 CONDUCT OF PERFORMANCE
vessel shall be performed first. DEMONSTRATIONS
Demonstrations on clad nozzle mock-ups may be
used to qualify the candidate for examination of unclad
2.0 SPECIMEN RULES nozzles. Demonstrations on unclad nozzle mock-ups
Specimens shall meet the following rules unless a shall not be used to qualify the candidate for examination
set of test specimens is designed to accommodate of clad nozzles.
specific limitations stated in the scope of the examination
3.1 Detection Test
procedure. The same specimens may be used to demon-
(a) Specimen identification and flaw locations shall
strate both detection and sizing qualification.
be concealed to maintain a “blind test.” All examinations
2.1 Clad /Base Metal Interface and Nozzle Inside shall be completed before grading and presenting the
Radius Section. Examinations from both the inside results to the candidate. Disclosure of specimen results
and outside surfaces of the vessel shall be qualified and viewing of unmasked specimens by the candidate
by demonstration on one combined sample set meeting are prohibited.
the rules of Supplement 4, 1.0, and the following: (b) A flaw is considered detected when it is reported
(a) For detection and sizing, a minimum of three within 1⁄2 in. (13 mm) of its true location (x and y).
additional clad /base metal interface flaws shall be added All other reported flaws shall be considered false calls.
to the test set for examination from the outside surface
3.2 Length and Depth Sizing Test
of the vessel. All three flaws shall be detected and
(a) For the length sizing test, the inside surface and
meet the sizing criteria of Supplement 4, 3.2.
specimen identification shall be concealed. The location
(b) Nozzle inside radius examinations from the out-
of each flaw shall be identified to the candidate. The
side surface of the vessel or nozzle shall be demonstrated
candidate shall determine the length of each flaw.
on an additional seven flaws for detection and ten flaws
(b) For the depth sizing test, 80% of the flaws shall
for sizing at the inside radius section in at least two
be sized at specific locations identified to the candidate.
full-scale mock-ups (Supplement 7). The mock-ups shall
The remaining flaws shall be identified to the candidate.
have different geometries (ratio of nozzle thickness to
The candidate shall determine the maximum depth of
vessel thickness) with at least two flaws each. The
each flaw.
specimens shall conform to Supplement 4, 1.1, except
that the flaws may be either notches or cracks. Flaws
shall be located in the radial axial plane of the nozzle
inside radius section as shown in Fig. IWB-2500-7.
4.1 Detection Acceptance Criteria
2.2 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds and Vessel Welds Other
than Clad /Base Metal Interface. Examinations for 4.1.1 Clad /Base Metal Interface and Nozzle
both the inside and outside surfaces of the vessel shall Inside Radius Section
be qualified by demonstration on one combined sample (a) Examination procedures, equipment, and person-
set selected from Table VIII-S6-1 and meeting the nel are qualified for detection when the results of
following: the performance demonstration satisfy the acceptance
(a) The number of flaws in the detection test set criteria of Table VIII-S4-1. Additionally, the number
shall be selected from Table VIII-S6-2. of false calls shall not exceed one-tenth of the total
(b) At least three flaws shall be contained in at least scan area of specimens in the test measured in square
one full-scale nozzle mock-up. feet, rounded to the next whole number.
378
(b) All clad /base metal interface flaws shall be de- (c) Performance demonstration results reported by
tected when the examination is conducted from the the candidate, when plotted on a two-dimensional plot
vessel’s outside surface. (Fig. VIII-S2-1) with the depth estimated by ultrasonics
(c) All nozzle inside radius flaws shall be detected plotted along the ordinate and the true depth plotted
with no false calls when the examination is conducted along the abscissa, satisfy the following statistical pa-
from the vessel’s outside surface. rameters:
(1) slope of the linear regression line is not less
4.1.2 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds and Vessel Welds
than 0.7;
Other than Clad /Base Metal Interface
(2) the mean deviation of flaw depth is less than
(a) Examination procedures, equipment, and person-
0.25 in. (6 mm);
nel are qualified for detection when the results of
(3) correlation coefficient is not less than 0.70.
the performance demonstration satisfy the acceptance
criteria of Table VIII-S6-2. Additionally, the number 4.2.2 Nozzle-to-Vessel Welds and Vessel Welds
of false calls shall not exceed one-tenth of the total Other than Clad /Base Metal Interface. Examination
scan area of specimens in the test measured in square procedures, equipment, and personnel shall be consid-
feet, rounded to the next whole number. ered qualified for sizing if the results of the performance
(b) All nozzle-to-vessel flaws shall be detected when demonstration satisfy the following criteria:
the examination is conducted from the nozzle bore. (a) No flaw is undersized for depth by more than
(c) All near surface flaws shall be detected with no 0.2 in.
false calls when the examination from the outside (b) Flaw lengths estimated by ultrasonics shall be
surface is being demonstrated. the true length −1⁄4 in., +1 in. (−6 mm, +25 mm).
(c) Performance demonstration results reported by
4.2 Sizing Acceptance Criteria
the candidate, when plotted on a two-dimensional plot
4.2.1 Clad /Base Metal Interface and Nozzle (Fig. VIII-S2-1) with the depth estimated by ultrasonics
Inside Radius Section. Examination procedures, equip- plotted along the ordinate and the true depth plotted
ment, and personnel are qualified for sizing when the along the abscissa, satisfy the following statistical pa-
results of the performance demonstration satisfy the rameters:
following: (1) slope of the linear regression line is not less
(a) No flaw is undersized for depth by more than than 0.7;
0.2 in. (2) the mean deviation of flaw depth is less than
(b) Flaw lengths estimated by ultrasonics shall be 0.25 in.;
the true length −1⁄4 in., +1 in. (−6 mm, +25 mm). (3) correlation coefficient is not less than 0.70.
379
APPENDIX IX
MECHANICAL CLAMPING DEVICES FOR CLASS 2
AND 3 PIPING PRESSURE BOUNDARY
381
ARTICLE IX-1000
GENERAL
(a) Mechanical clamping devices used as piping pres- (4) piping larger than NPS 6 (DN150).
sure boundary may remain in service only until the (d) A Repair/Replacement plan shall be developed
next refueling outage, at which time the defect shall in accordance with IWA-4150, and shall identify the
be removed or reduced to an acceptable size. defect characterization method, design requirements,
(b) These clamping devices may be used on piping and monitoring requirements.
and tubing, and their associated fittings and flanges, (e) Welding performed as part of the fabrication and
and the welding ends of pumps, valves, and pressure installation of the clamping device shall be in accordance
vessels, except as prohibited by (c) below. with the requirements of IWA-4400. Welding shall be
(c) Clamping devices shall not be used on the fol- documented on an NIS-2 Form.
lowing: (f) The records required by IWA-4180 and the Re-
(1) Class 1 piping;
pair/Replacement plan shall be maintained by the Owner
(2) portions of a piping system that forms the
until the clamping device is removed.
containment boundary;
(3) piping larger than NPS 2 (DN50) when the
nominal operating temperature or pressure exceeds
200°F (93°C) or 275 psig (1900 kPa);
383
ARTICLE IX-2000
DEFECT CHARACTERIZATION
The size, location, and apparent cause of the defect

shall be determined. The defect size shall be bounded
to account for nondestructive examination limitations.
If the defect size cannot be directly determined, a
conservative bound of the defect size shall be determined
and documented.
384
ARTICLE IX-3000
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
IX-3100 GENERAL DESIGN TABLE IX-3200-1

REQUIREMENTS STRESS LIMITS FOR DESIGN AND SERVICE
LOADINGS
The following design requirements shall be included
in a Repair/Replacement plan and shall be considered Service Limits Stress Limits(1)
in the analyses of the clamping device (IX-3200) and Design and Level A (Normal) sm < 1.0 S
piping (IX-3300). sm + sb < 1.5 S
(a) Requirements to address environmental and corro- Level B (Upset) sm < 1.10 S
sive effects of seal composition, seal installation, and sm + sb < 1.65 S
system fluid on piping, clamping device, and bolting.
Level C (Emergency) sm < 1.5 S
(b) The defect size used in the design of the clamping sm + sb < 1.8 S
device shall include any projected growth.
(c) If additional supports are required to satisfy IX- Level D (Faulted) sm < 2.0 S
sm + sb < 2.4 S
3200 or IX-3300, they shall be considered non-pressure-
retaining items and shall be designed in accordance NOTES:
(1) The symbols used in Table IX-3200-1 are defined as follows:
with the requirements of the Construction Code for the sm p general membrane stress, psi. Average stress across the
system or as permitted by IWA-4220. solid cross section produced by mechanical loads; ex-
cludes effects of discontinuities and concentrations.
sb p bending stress, psi. Linearly varying portion of stress
produced by mechanical loads; excludes effects of discon-
tinuities and concentrations.
IX-3200 CLAMPING DEVICE S p allowable stress value, psi., at temperature, provided in
the Construction Code.
The following additional requirements apply to the
design of the clamping device.
(a) No credit shall be taken for structural capability
of the seal.
(b) Pressure retaining clamping device items shall a coefficient of friction greater than 0.3 is used for
be designed based on a stress analysis using the stress friction-type connections, the coefficient of friction for
limits identified in Table IX-3200-1 for the loading each interface design (e.g., serrated or nonserrated),
conditions specified in the Owner’s requirements for and each combination of interface material P-Numbers,
the system. shall be experimentally determined.
(c) The clamping device shall be mechanically con-
nected to the piping. Seal welds may be added to prevent
leakage. Serrated contact surfaces of the clamping device
IX-3300 PIPING SYSTEM
are acceptable, provided they do not affect the structural
integrity of the piping. The following additional requirements apply to the
(d) If the clamping device is designed to carry, by evaluation of the piping system.
friction, longitudinal loads normally transmitted by the (a) Piping system vibration shall be considered when
piping, including postulated full circumferential sever- vibration is the apparent cause of the defect or the
ance of the piping at the defect location, it shall be defect can be propagated by vibration.
designed to produce clamping friction of at least five (b) The piping system configuration with the clamp-
times the friction load required to prevent slippage. If ing device shall be evaluated in accordance with the
385
IX-3300 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 IX-3300
Owner’s requirements, and either the Construction Code

or Section III.
(c) Effects of the stiffness and weight of the clamping
device shall be considered in the evaluation of the
piping systems. When the defect is caused by erosion
or corrosion, the base material thickness at the load
transfer area shall be determined and projected to the
time of removal of the clamping device. The projected
wall thickness shall be used when evaluating the piping
system.
(d) Constraining effects of the clamping device shall
be considered when evaluating effects of thermal expan-
sion of the piping system.
(e) The Owner shall consider the effect of the defect
and its expected growth, in the piping system evaluation.
386
ARTICLE IX-4000
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Material shall meet the technical requirements of

IWA-4220 and shall be furnished with certified material
test reports.
387
ARTICLE IX-5000
PRESSURE TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A system leakage test in accordance with IWA-5000

shall be performed on the portion of the piping system
containing the clamping device.
388
ARTICLE IX-6000
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
The Owner shall prepare a plan for monitoring defect be specified in the Repair/Replacement Plan. When the
growth in the area immediately adjacent to the clamping examination reveals defect growth to a size that exceeds
device. The plan shall include the following activities the projected size determined by IX-3100(b), the defect
and requirements. shall be removed or reduced to an acceptable size.
(a) Except as permitted by (b) below, or where (b) Monitoring of the defect size need not be per-
precluded by the clamping device configuration, the formed for a circumferential crack.
area immediately adjacent to the clamping device shall (c) The clamping device shall be monitored for
be examined using a volumetric method. The examina- leakage at least weekly. Any leakage at any time shall
tion frequency shall not exceed three months, and shall be dispositioned.
389
NONMANDATORY APPENDICES A99
APPENDIX A ANALYSIS OF FLAWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
A-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

A-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
A-2000 Flaw Model for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

A-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
A-2200 Flaw Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
A-2300 Proximity to Closest Flaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
A-2400 Flaw Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
A-2500 Flaw Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
A-3000 Method for KI Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

A-3100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
A-3200 Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
A-3300 Stress Intensity Factor Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
A-3310 Subsurface Flaw Equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
A-3320 Surface Flaw Equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
A-4000 Material Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

A-4100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
A-4200 Fracture Toughness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
A-4300 Fatigue Crack Growth Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
A-4400 Irradiation Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
A-5000 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

A-5100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
A-5200 End-of-Period Flaw Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
A-5300 Normal Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
A-5400 Emergency and Faulted Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
A-9000 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
APPENDIX B FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Form NIS-BA Record of Welding Operator Qualification Tests for Tube Welding by Explosives . 425
Form NIS-BB Example of Tube Examination Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
391

APPENDIX C EVALUATION OF FLAWS IN AUSTENITIC PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
C-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

C-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
C-1200 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
C-2000 Flaw Model for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

C-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
C-2200 Flaw Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
C-2300 Proximity to Closest Flaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
C-2400 Flaw Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
C-2500 Flaw Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
C-3000 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

C-3100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
C-3200 Flaw Growth Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
C-3210 Flaw Growth Due to Fatigue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
C-3220 Flaw Growth Due to Stress Corrosion Cracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
C-3230 Flaw Growth Due to a Combination of Fatigue and SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
C-3300 Circumferential Flaw Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
C-3310 Evaluation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
C-3320 Formulas for Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
C-3400 Axial Flaw Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
C-3410 Evaluation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
C-3420 Formulas for Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
APPENDIX D CONDITIONING OF CLASSES 1 AND 2 PIPING WELDS WHICH

REQUIRE EXAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
D-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

D-1100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
D-2000 Ultrasonic and Surface Examination Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

D-2100 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
D-2200 Ferritic Welds With Adequate Access — Generally at Least 2T Plus 2 in.
(51 mm) of Access From One Side of the Weld — and Any Installed
Counterbore at Least 2T From the Weld Root (See Fig. D-2000-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
D-2300 All Other Welds Not Addressed in D-2200 (See Fig. D-2000-2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
D-2400 Surface Examination Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
APPENDIX E EVALUATION OF UNANTICIPATED OPERATING EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
E-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

E-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
E-1200 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
392

E-1300 Evaluation by Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
APPENDIX G FRACTURE TOUGHNESS CRITERIA FOR PROTECTION

AGAINST FAILURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
G-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
G-2000 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

G-2100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2110 Reference Critical Stress Intensity Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2120 Maximum Postulated Defect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2200 Level A and Level B Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2210 Shells and Heads Remote from Discontinuities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2211 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
G-2212 Material Fracture Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
G-2213 Maximum Postulated Defect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
G-2214 Calculated Stress Intensity Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
G-2215 Allowable Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
G-2220 Nozzles, Flanges, and Shell Regions Near Geometric Discontinuities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-2222 Consideration of Membrane and Bending Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-2223 Toughness Requirements for Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-2300 Level C and Level D Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-2310 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-2400 Hydrostatic Test Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
G-3000 Piping, Pumps, and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

393

G-4000 Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
APPENDIX H EVALUATION OF FLAWS IN FERRITIC PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
H-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

H-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
H-1200 Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
H-1300 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
H-2000 Flaw Model for Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

H-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
H-2200 Flaw Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
H-2300 Proximity to Closest Flaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
H-2400 Flaw Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
H-2500 Flaw Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
H-3000 Flaw Growth Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

H-3100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
H-3200 Subcritical Flaw Growth Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
H-3210 Subcritical Flaw Growth Due to Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
H-3220 Flaw Growth Due to Stress Corrosion Cracking (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
H-4000 Screening Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

H-4100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4200 Screening Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4210 Material Flaw Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4211 Material Properties for Circumferentially Oriented Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4212 Material Properties to Axially Oriented Flaws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4220 Analysis Method Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H-4221 Screening Criteria Computations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H-5000 Allowable Flaw Depths Using Limit Load Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

H-5100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H-5200 Evaluation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H-5300 Circumferential Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H-5310 Allowable Flaw Depths (Tabular Solution). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H-5320 Allowable Applied Stresses (Analytical Solution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H-5400 Axial Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
H-5420 Allowable Flaw Depths (Analytical Solutions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
H-6000 Allowable Flaw Depths for Flawed Pipe Meeting the EPFM Criteria . . . . . . . . . 490
H-6100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
394

H-6320 Allowable Applied Stress (Analytical Solution). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
H-6400 Axial Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
H-6420 Allowable Flaw Depths (Analytical Solutions). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
H-7000 Allowable Flaw Depths for Flawed Pipe Meeting the LEFM Criteria . . . . . . . . . 494
H-7100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
H-7400 Axial Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
APPENDIX J GUIDE TO PLANT MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES AND SECTION XI

REPAIR /REPLACEMENT ACTIVITIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
J-1000 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
J-2000 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
J-3000 Maintenance Requiring Subsequent Section XI Test or Examination . . . . . . . . . . 502
J-4000 Maintenance not Requiring Subsequent Section XI Test or Examination . . . . . . 503
APPENDIX K ASSESSMENT OF REACTOR VESSELS WITH LOW UPPER SHELF

CHARPY IMPACT ENERGY LEVELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
K-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

K-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
K-1200 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
K-1300 General Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
K-2000 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

K-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
K-2200 Levels A and B Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
K-2300 Level C Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
K-2400 Level D Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
K-3000 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

K-3100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
K-3200 Applied J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
K-3300 Selection of the J-Integral Resistance Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
K-3400 Flaw Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
K-3500 Evaluation Method for Levels A and B Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
K-4000 Evaluation Procedures for Levels A and B Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
395
K-4100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
K-4200 Evaluation Procedure for the Applied J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
K-4210 Calculation of the Applied J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
K-4220 Evaluation Using Criterion for Flaw Extension of 0.1 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
K-4300 Evaluation Procedures for Flaw Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
K-4310 J-R Curve — Crack Driving Force Diagram Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
K-4320 Failure Assessment Diagram Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
K-4321 Failure Assessment Diagram Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
K-4322 Failure Assessment Point Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
K-4323 Evaluation Using Criterion for Flaw Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
K-4330 J-Integral /Tearing Modulus Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
K-4331 J-Integral at Flaw Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
K-4332 Internal Pressure at Flaw Instability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
K-4333 Evaluation Using Criteria for Flaw Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
K-5000 Evaluation Procedures for Level C and D Service Loadings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

K-5100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
K-5200 Evaluation Procedure for the Applied J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
K-5210 Calculation of the Applied J-Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
K-5220 Evaluation Using Criterion for Flaw Extension of 0.1 in. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
K-5300 Evaluation Procedure for Flaw Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
K-5400 Time-Dependent Level C and D Service Loadings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
APPENDIX L OPERATING PLANT FATIGUE ASSESSMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
L-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

L-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
L-1200 Evaluation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
L-1300 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
L-2000 Fatigue Usage Evaluation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

L-2100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
L-2200 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
L-2210 Evaluation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
L-2220 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
L-3000 Flaw Tolerance Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

L-3100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
L-3110 General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
L-3200 Flaw Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
L-3210 Flaw Size and Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
L-3220 Flaw Location and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L-3300 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L-3310 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Steel Components 4 in.
or Greater in Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
396
L-3320 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Steel Components Less
Than 4 in. Thick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L-3330 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Austenitic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L-3340 Evaluation Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Ferritic Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
L-3400 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
L-3410 Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
L-3420 Successive Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
L-3430 Personnel Qualifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
L-4000 Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

L-4100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
L-4200 Evaluation Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
L-4300 Examination Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
APPENDIX M APPLYING MATHEMATICAL MODELING TO ULTRASONIC

EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE RETAINING COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . 529
M-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

M-1100 Scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
M-2000 Validation of Mathematical Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

M-2100 Applicability of Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
M-2200 Model Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
M-2300 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
M-2400 Verification Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
M-2500 Mathematical Model Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Figures
A-3200-1 Linearized Representation of Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
A-3300-1 Elliptical Flaw Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
A-3310-1 Membrane Stress Correction Factor for Subsurface Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
A-3310-2 Bending Stress Correction Factor for Subsurface Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
A-4200-1 Lower Bound KIa and KIc Test Data for SA-533 Grade B Class 1, SA-508 Class
2, and SA-508 Class 3 Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
A-4300-1 Reference Fatigue Crack Growth Curves for Carbon and Low Alloy Ferritic
Steels Exposed to Air Environments (Subsurface Flaws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
A-4300-2 Reference Fatigue Crack Growth Curves for Carbon and Low Alloy Ferritic
Steels Exposed to Water Environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
A-5300-1 Determination of Critical Flaw Sizes for Postulated Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
C-2200-1 Flaw Characterization — Circumferential Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
C-2200-2 Flaw Characterization — Axial Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
C-2400-1 Flaw Characterization — Skewed Axial Flaws Projected Into
Axial Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
397
C-2400-2 Flaw Characterization — Skewed Circumferential Flaws Projected Into
Circumferential Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
C-2400-3 Flaw Characterization — Compound Skewed Flaw Projected Into Circumferential
and Axial Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
C-3210-1 Reference Fatigue Crack Growth Curves for Austenitic Stainless Steels in Air
Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
C-3320-1 Cross Section of Flawed Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
D-2000-1 Flat-Top Ground Weld Crown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
D-2000-2 Smoothly Ground Weld Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
G-2210-1 ........................................................................... 463
G-2214-1 ........................................................................... 465
G-2214-2 ........................................................................... 466
H-2200-1 Flaw Characterization — Circumferential Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
H-2200-2 Flaw Characterization — Axial Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
H-2400-1 Flaw Characterization — Skewed Axial Flaws Projected Into Axial Plane . . . . . . . . 477
H-2400-2 Flaw Characterization — Skewed Circumferential Flaws Projected Into
Circumferential Plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
H-2400-3 Flaw Characterization — Compound Skewed Flaw Projected Into Circumferential
and Axial Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
H-4200-1 Flow Chart for Screening Criteria to Establish the Analysis Method . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
H-4221-1 Circumferential Flaw Geometry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H-4221-2 Axial Flaw Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H-5200-1 Flow Chart for Materials Meeting the Load Limit Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
H-6200-1 Flow Chart for Materials for Which Ductile Flaw Extension May Occur Prior to
Limit Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
H-7200-1 Flow Chart for Materials Meeting the Linear Elastic Fracture Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
J-1000-1 Decision Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
K-4310-1 Comparison of the Slopes of the Applied J-Integral Curve and the J-R Curve . . . . 514
K-4320-1 Failure Assessment Diagram for the One-Quarter Wall Thickness Flaw . . . . . . . . . . . 515
K-4330-1 Illustration of the J-Integral /Tearing Modulus Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Tables
A-3320-1 Coefficients G0 through G3 for Surface Crack at Point 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
A-3320-2 Coefficients G0 through G3 for Surface Crack at Point 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
E-1 Maximum Allowable Pressure as a Function of Tc−RTNDT for Isothermal Pressure
Transients (DTc /Dt <10°F /hr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
E-2 Evaluation Input for Plant and Event Specific Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
H-4211-1 Material Properties for Carbon Steel Base Metals and Weldments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
H-4212-1 Material Properties for Carbon Steel Base Metals and Weldments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H-5310-1 Allowable End-of-Evaluation Period Flaw Depth-to-Thickness Ratio for
Circumferential Flaws, Normal Operating (Including Upset and Test) Conditions
(Limit Load Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
H-5310-2 Allowable End-of-Evaluation Period Flaw Depth-to-Thickness Ratio for
Circumferential Flaws, Emergency and Faulted Conditions (Limit Load
Analysis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
H-5410-1 Allowable End-of-Evaluation Period Flaw Depth-to-Thickness Ratio for Axial
Flaws, Normal Operating (Including Upset and Test) Conditions (Limit Load
Analysis). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Flaws, Emergency and Faulted Conditions (Limit Load Analysis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
H-6310-1 Load Multipliers for Carbon Steel Base Metals and Weldments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
398
H-6310-2 Load Multipliers for Carbon Steel Base Metals and Weldments for User-Specified
Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Flaws, Normal (Including Upset and Test) Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Flaws, (Emergency and Faulted Conditions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
K-4320-1 Coordinates of the Failure Assessment Diagram Curve of Fig. K-4320-1 . . . . . . . . . 516
L-3210-1 Postulated Surface Flaw Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
L-3420-1 Successive Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
399
APPENDIX A
ANALYSIS OF FLAWS
401
ARTICLE A-1000
INTRODUCTION
A-1100 SCOPE (b) Characterize the flaw in accordance with IWB-

3610.
This Appendix provides a procedure1
for determining
the acceptability of flaws that have been detected during (c) Using A-2000, resolve the actual flaw into a
inservice inspection (excluding preservice inspection) simple shape that can be analyzed.
that exceed the allowable flaw indication standards of (d) Determine the stresses at the location of the
IWB-3500. The procedure is based upon the principles observed flaw for normal (including upset), emergency,
of linear elastic fracture mechanics. This procedure and faulted conditions.
applies to ferritic materials 4 in. and greater in thickness (e) Calculate stress intensity factors for each condi-
with specified minimum yield strengths of 50.0 ksi or tion using the methods outlined in A-3000.
less in components having simple geometries and stress
distributions. The basic concepts of the procedure may (f) Using the methods outlined in A-4000, determine
be extended to other ferritic materials (including clad the necessary material properties, including the effects
ferritic materials) and more complex geometries; how- of irradiation if applicable.
ever, they are not intended to apply to austenitic or (g) Using the analytical procedures described in A-
high nickel alloys. For purposes of analysis, indications 5000, determine the following critical flaw parameters:
that exceed the standards of IWB-3500 are considered af p expected end-of-life flaw size
flaws. The following is a summary of the analytical
procedure. acp minimum critical flaw size for normal condi-
(a) Determine the actual flaw configuration from the tions
measured flaw in accordance with IWA-3000. aip minimum critical initiation flaw size for emer-
gency and faulted conditions
(h) Using the critical flaw parameters af , ac, and ai,
1 Referto report listed under 8(f)(2) of the Organization of Section apply the flaw evaluation criteria of IWB-3600 to
XI for example problems which apply the evaluation procedures
with various assumptions using the Summer 1976 Addenda to the determine whether the observed flaw is acceptable for
1974 Edition of the Code. continued service.
403
ARTICLE A-2000
FLAW MODEL FOR ANALYSIS
A-2100 SCOPE A-2400 FLAW ORIENTATION

This Article provides the rules for flaw shape, proxim- Flaws that do not lie in a plane perpendicular to
ity to closest flaw, flaw orientation, and flaw location, the maximum principal stress direction should be pro-
which are used in the analytical model for linear elastic jected into that plane following the rules in IWA-3340.
fracture mechanics.
A-2200 FLAW SHAPE

A-2500 FLAW LOCATION
The flaw indication should be completely circum-
scribed by an elliptical or circular planar area according (a) For purposes of analysis, the flaw is to be consid-
to the methods outlined in IWA-3300. ered in its actual location. The stresses due to system
loading should be computed at this location. Surface
flaw or subsurface flaw expressions should be used
A-2300 PROXIMITY TO CLOSEST depending upon the type of flaw. Where the flaw is
a subsurface flaw, but is within the proximity limit in
FLAW
IWA-3340 of the surface of the component, the flaw
In the case of multiple neighboring flaws, if the should be considered to be a surface flaw and should
shortest distance between the boundaries of two neigh- be circumscribed by a semiellipse, with its major axis
boring flaws is within the proximity limits described on the surface.
in IWA-3300, the neighboring flaws should be circum- (b) For clad components, flaw depth should be deter-
scribed by a single ellipse as described in IWA-3300. mined in accordance with IWB-3610.
404
ARTICLE A-3000
METHOD FOR KI DETERMINATION
A-3100 SCOPE Coefficients A0 through A3 shall provide an accurate

representation of stress over the flaw plane for all
This Article provides a method for calculating stress
values of flaw depths, 0 ≤ x /a ≤ 1, covered by the
intensity factors, KI, using the representative stresses
analysis. Stresses from all sources identified in A-
at the flaw location determined by stress analysis. The
3200(a) shall be considered. Alternatively, the actual
solutions for KI are based on flat plate geometry and
stress distribution may be approximated by a linear
can be used for subsurface flaws and internal and
distribution that accurately represents or bounds the
external surface flaws in cylinders for all values of
stress field over the flaw depth. An example of lineariza-
R /t (the ratio of mean radius to thickness).
tion of a concave upward stress field is illustrated in
Fig. A-3200-1(b).
A-3200 STRESSES
A-3300 STRESS INTENSITY FACTOR
(a) For a surface or a subsurface flaw, the stresses EQUATIONS
at the flaw location shall be resolved into membrane
and bending stresses. Residual stresses and applied The detected flaw shall be represented by an ellipse
stresses from all forms of loading, including pressure or a semiellipse as illustrated in Fig. A-3300-1. The
stresses and cladding-induced stresses, shall be consid- stress intensity factors for the flaw model shall be
ered. For nonlinear stress variations through the wall, determined using the stresses and flaw geometry de-
the actual stress distribution may be approximated by scribed in A-3310 for subsurface flaws or A-3320 for
a linear distribution that accurately represents or bounds surface flaws.
the stress field over the flaw depth. An example of
linearization of a concave upward stress field is illus-
trated in Fig. A-3200-1. The linearized stress distribution A-3310 SUBSURFACE FLAW EQUATIONS
may then be characterized by the membrane stress, sm, Stress intensity factors for subsurface flaws shall be
and the bending stress, sb, as shown in Fig. A-3200-1. calculated using the membrane and bending stresses at
(b) For a surface flaw, the stresses normal to the the flaw location by the following equation.1
plane of the flaw at the flaw location may be represented
by a polynomial fit over the flaw depth by the following KI p [sm Mm + sb Mb]√ p a /Q (2)
relationship:
where
2 3
12 12 12 sm, sbpmembrane and bending stresses, psi, in ac-

x x x
s p A 0 + A1 + A2 +A3 (1)
a a a cordance with A-3200(a)
apone-half the axis of elliptical flaw
Mmpcorrection factor for membrane stress from
where
Fig. A-3310-1
xpdistance through the wall measured from
the flawed surface
1 Use of Equation (2) is only a recommendation for determination
apcrack depth
of KI. For some complex geometries and stress distributions, this
A0, A1, A2, approach may not be adequate. Other techniques may be used,
A3pconstants provided the methods and analyses are documented.
405
A-3310 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 A-3320
Mbpcorrection factor for bending stress from A0, A1, A2,

Fig. A-3310-2 A3pcoefficients from Equation (1) that represent
The flaw shape parameter Q is calculated using the the stress distribution over the flaw depth,
following equation: 0 ≤ x /a ≤ 1. When calculating KI as a
function of flaw depth, a new set of coeffi-
Q p 1 + 4.593 (a /ø)1.65 − qy (3) cients A0 through A3 shall be determined
for each new value of flaw depth.
where Appthe internal vessel pressure, p, for internal
øpthe major axis of the flaw surface flaws. App 0 for other flaws.
a /øpthe flaw aspect ration 0 ≤ a /ø ≤ 0.5 G0, G1,
qypthe plastic zone correction factor calculated G2, G3pfree surface correction factors from Tables
using the following equation: A-3320-1 and A-3320-2
Qpflaw shape parameter using Equation (3)
qy p [(sm Mm + sb Mb) / sys]2 / 6 (4) In the calculation of Q using Equation (3), qy is
calculated using Equation (6):
where sys is the material yield strength.
qy p [(A0 G0 + A1 G1 + A2 G2 + A3 G3) / sys]2 / 6 (6)
A-3320 SURFACE FLAW EQUATIONS

(a) Stress intensity factors for surface flaws should (b) When the linearization method is used to convert
be calculated using the cubic polynomial stress relation the actual stress field into sm and sb stresses as
by the following equation.2 illustrated in Fig. A-3200-1(b), Equation (2) shall be
used to calculate KI with the following equations for
KI p [(A0 + Ap) G0 + A1 G1 + A2G2 (5) Mm, Mb, and Q:
+A3 G3] √ p a /Q MmpG0
MbpG0 − 2 (a /t)G1
where Qpflaw shape parameter using Equation (3)
apflaw depth
In the calculation of Q using Equation (3), qy is
2 Use
calculated using Equation (7):
of Equation (5) is only a recommendation for determination
of KI. For some complex geometries and stress distributions, this
approach may not be adequate. Other techniques may be used,
provided the methods and analyses are documented. qy p [(sm Mm + Ap Mm + sb Mb) / sys]2 / 6 (7)
406
APPENDIX A — NONMANDATORY Fig. A-3200-1
FIG. A-3200-1 LINEARIZED REPRESENTATION OF STRESSES
407
Fig. A-3300-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. A-3300-1 ELLIPTICAL FLAW MODEL
408
FIG. A-3310-1 MEMBRANE STRESS CORRECTION FACTOR FOR SUBSURFACE FLAWS
409
FIG. A-3310-2 BENDING STRESS CORRECTION FACTOR FOR SUBSURFACE FLAWS

(For Definitions of Nomenclature, See Fig. A-3310-1)
410
APPENDIX A — NONMANDATORY Table A-3320-1
TABLE A-3320-1
COEFFICIENTS G0 THROUGH G3 FOR SURFACE CRACK AT POINT 1
Flaw Aspect Ratio

a/ ø
a/t 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
UNIFORM 0.00 1.1208 1.0969 1.0856 1.0727 1.0564 1.0366

G0 0.05 1.1461 1.1000 1.0879 1.0740 1.0575 1.0373
0.10 1.1945 1.1152 1.0947 1.0779 1.0609 1.0396
0.15 1.2670 1.1402 1.1058 1.0842 1.0664 1.0432
0.20 1.3654 1.1744 1.1210 1.0928 1.0739 1.0482
0.25 1.4929 1.2170 1.1399 1.1035 1.0832 1.0543
0.30 1.6539 1.2670 1.1621 1.1160 1.0960 1.0614
0.40 2.1068 1.3840 1.2135 1.1448 1.1190 1.0772
0.50 2.8254 1.5128 1.2693 1.1757 1.1457 1.0931
0.60 4.0420 1.6372 1.3216 1.2039 1.1699 1.1058
0.70 6.3743 1.7373 1.3610 1.2237 1.1868 1.1112
0.80 11.991 1.7899 1.3761 1.2285 1.1902 1.1045
LINEAR 0.00 0.7622 0.6635 0.6826 0.7019 0.7214 0.7411

G1 0.05 0.7624 0.6651 0.6833 0.7022 0.7216 0.7413
0.10 0.7732 0.6700 0.6855 0.7031 0.7221 0.7418
0.15 0.7945 0.6780 0.6890 0.7046 0.7230 0.7426
0.20 0.8267 0.6891 0.6939 0.7067 0.7243 0.7420
0.25 0.8706 0.7029 0.7000 0.7094 0.7260 0.7451
0.30 0.9276 0.7193 0.7073 0.7126 0.7282 0.7468
0.40 1.0907 0.7584 0.7249 0.7209 0.7338 0.7511
0.50 1.3501 0.8029 0.7454 0.7314 0.7417 0.7566
0.60 1.7863 0.8488 0.7671 0.7441 0.7520 0.7631
0.70 2.6125 0.8908 0.7882 0.7588 0.7653 0.7707
0.80 4.5727 0.9288 0.8063 0.7753 0.7822 0.7792
QUADRATIC 0.00 0.6009 0.5078 0.5310 0.5556 0.5815 0.6084

G2 0.05 0.5969 0.5086 0.5313 0.5557 0.5815 0.6084
0.10 0.5996 0.5109 0.5323 0.5560 0.5815 0.6085
0.15 0.6088 0.5148 0.5340 0.5564 0.5815 0.6087
0.20 0.6247 0.5202 0.5364 0.5571 0.5815 0.6089
0.25 0.6475 0.5269 0.5394 0.5580 0.5817 0.6093
0.30 0.6775 0.5350 0.5430 0.5592 0.5820 0.6099
0.40 0.7651 0.5545 0.5520 0.5627 0.5835 0.6115
0.50 0.9048 0.5776 0.5632 0.5680 0.5869 0.6144
0.60 1.1382 0.6027 0.5762 0.5760 0.5931 0.6188
0.70 1.5757 0.6281 0.5907 0.5874 0.6037 0.6255
0.80 2.5997 0.6513 0.6063 0.6031 0.6200 0.6351
CUBIC 0.00 0.5060 0.4246 0.4480 0.4735 0.5006 0.5290

G3 0.05 0.5012 0.4250 0.4482 0.4736 0.5006 0.5290
0.10 0.5012 0.4264 0.4488 0.4736 0.5004 0.5290
0.15 0.5059 0.4286 0.4498 0.4737 0.5001 0.5289
0.20 0.5152 0.4317 0.4511 0.4738 0.4998 0.5289
0.25 0.5292 0.4357 0.4528 0.4741 0.4994 0.5289
0.30 0.5483 0.4404 0.4550 0.4746 0.4992 0.5291
0.40 0.6045 0.4522 0.4605 0.4763 0.4993 0.5298
0.50 0.6943 0.4665 0.4678 0.4795 0.5010 0.5316
0.60 0.8435 0.4829 0.4769 0.4853 0.5054 0.5349
0.70 1.1207 0.5007 0.4880 0.4945 0.5141 0.5407
0.80 1.7614 0.5190 0.5013 0.5085 0.5286 0.5487
NOTE: Interpolations in a/ t and a/ ø are permitted.
411
Table A-3320-2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
TABLE A-3320-2
COEFFICIENTS G0 THROUGH G3 FOR SURFACE CRACK AT POINT 2
Flaw Aspect Ratio

a/ ø
a/t 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
UNIFORM 0.00 — 0.5450 0.7492 0.9024 1.0297 1.1406

G0 0.05 — 0.5514 0.7549 0.9070 1.0330 1.1427
0.10 — 0.5610 0.7636 0.9144 1.0391 1.1473
0.15 — 0.5738 0.7756 0.9249 1.0479 1.1545
0.20 — 0.5900 0.7908 0.9385 1.0596 1.1641
0.25 — 0.6099 0.8095 0.9551 1.0740 1.1763
0.30 — 0.6338 0.8318 0.9750 1.0913 1.1909
0.40 — 0.6949 0.8881 1.0250 1.1347 1.2278
0.50 — 0.7772 0.9619 1.0896 1.1902 1.2746
0.60 — 0.8859 1.0560 1.1701 1.2585 1.3315
0.70 — 1.0283 1.1740 1.2686 1.3401 1.3984
0.80 — 1.2144 1.3208 1.3871 1.4361 1.4753
LINEAR 0.00 — 0.0725 0.1038 0.1280 0.1484 0.1665

G1 0.05 — 0.0744 0.1075 0.1331 0.1548 0.1740
0.10 — 0.0771 0.1119 0.1387 0.1615 0.1816
0.15 — 0.0807 0.1169 0.1449 0.1685 0.1893
0.20 — 0.0852 0.1227 0.1515 0.1757 0.1971
0.25 — 0.0907 0.1293 0.1587 0.1833 0.2049
0.30 — 0.0973 0.1367 0.1664 0.1912 0.2128
0.40 — 0.1141 0.1544 0.1839 0.2081 0.2289
0.50 — 0.1373 0.1765 0.2042 0.2265 0.2453
0.60 — 0.1689 0.2041 0.2280 0.2466 0.2620
0.70 — 0.2121 0.2388 0.2558 0.2687 0.2791
0.80 — 0.2714 0.2824 0.2887 0.2931 0.2965
QUADRATIC 0.00 — 0.0254 0.0344 0.0423 0.0495 0.0563

G2 0.05 — 0.0264 0.0367 0.0456 0.0538 0.0615
0.10 — 0.0276 0.0392 0.0491 0.0582 0.0666
0.15 — 0.0293 0.0419 0.0527 0.0625 0.0716
0.20 — 0.0313 0.0450 0.0565 0.0669 0.0764
0.25 — 0.0338 0.0484 0.0605 0.0713 0.0812
0.30 — 0.0368 0.0521 0.0646 0.0757 0.0858
0.40 — 0.0445 0.0607 0.0735 0.0846 0.0946
0.50 — 0.0552 0.0712 0.0834 0.0938 0.1030
0.60 — 0.0700 0.0842 0.0946 0.1033 0.1109
0.70 — 0.0907 0.1005 0.1075 0.1132 0.1183
0.80 — 0.1197 0.1212 0.1225 0.1238 0.1252
CUBIC 0.00 — 0.0125 0.0158 0.0192 0.0226 0.0261

G3 0.05 — 0.0131 0.0172 0.0214 0.0256 0.0297
0.10 — 0.0138 0.0188 0.0237 0.0285 0.0332
0.15 — 0.0147 0.0206 0.0261 0.0314 0.0365
0.20 — 0.0159 0.0225 0.0285 0.0343 0.0398
0.25 — 0.0173 0.0245 0.0310 0.0371 0.0429
0.30 — 0.0190 0.0267 0.0336 0.0399 0.0459
0.40 — 0.0234 0.0318 0.0390 0.0454 0.0515
0.50 — 0.0295 0.0379 0.0448 0.0509 0.0565
0.60 — 0.0380 0.0455 0.0513 0.0564 0.0611
0.70 — 0.0501 0.0549 0.0587 0.0621 0.0652
0.80 — 0.0673 0.0670 0.0672 0.0679 0.0687
NOTE: Interpolations in a/ t and a/ ø are permitted.
412
ARTICLE A-4000
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A-4100 SCOPE where KIc and KIa are in units of ksi√ in. and T and
RTNDT are in units of °F.
This Article provides the rules and equations for
determining the material properties that are utilized in
the analyses.
A-4300 FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH
RATE
A-4200 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS
(a) The fatigue crack growth rate da /dN of the
(a) The fracture toughness of the material is deter- material is characterized in terms of the range of applied
mined by two properties KIa and KIc, which represent stress intensity factor DKI. This characterization is
critical values of the stress intensity factor KI. KIa is generally of the form:
based on the lower bound of crack arrest critical KI
values measured as a function of temperature. KIc is
based on the lower bound of static initiation critical da / dN p Co (DKI )n (1)
KI values measured as a function of temperature. The
KIa and KIc values used in the analysis should represent where
conservative values obtained preferably from the specific np the slope of the log (da /dN) versus log (D KI)
material and product form involved. The values so used Cop a scaling constant
should be justified on the basis of current technology and
should take into account material variability, testing Data should be obtained from specimens of the actual
techniques, and any other variables which may lower material and product form, considering material variabil-
these toughness values. ity, environment, test frequency, and other variables
(b) Lower bound KIa and KIc versus temperature that affect the data.
curves from tests of SA-533 Grade B Class 1, SA- (b) The fatigue crack growth behavior of the material
508 Class 2, and SA-508 Class 3 steel are provided is affected by the R ratio (Kmin /Kmax) and the environ-
in Fig. A-4200-1 for use if data from the actual product ment. Reference fatigue crack growth rates for carbon
form are not available. The temperature scale of this and low alloy ferritic steels for both air and light-
data should be related to the reference nil-ductility water reactor environments are given below.
temperature RTNDT , as determined for the material prior (1) Reference fatigue crack growth behavior of
to irradiation, according to the rules of NB-2331. The the material exposed to air environments (subsurface
curves in Fig. A-4200-1 are intended to be very conser- flaws) is given by Eq. (1) with n p 3.07 and
vative since the recommended procedure is to determine
the material fracture toughness from specimens of the
Co p 1.99 × 10−10S (2)
actual material and product form in question. Analytical
approximations for these curves are as follows:
S is a scaling parameter to account for the R ratio
KIc p 33.2 + 20.734 exp[0.02 (T − RTNDT)] and is given by S p 25.72 (2.88 − R)−3.07, where 0
≤ R ≤ 1 and DKI p Kmax − Kmin. For R < 0, DKI
depends on the crack depth, a, and the flow stress, sf.
KIa p 26.8 + 12.445 exp[0.0145 (T − RTNDT)] The flow stress is defined by sf p 1⁄2(sys + sult),
413
where sys is the yield strength and sult is the ultimate A-4400 IRRADIATION EFFECTS
tensile strength. For −2 ≤ R ≤ 0 and Kmax − Kmin ≤
(a) For materials that are subjected to fast neutron
1.12 sf √ pa, S p 1 and DKI p Kmax. For R < −2 fluence, the degradation of the material fracture tough-
and Kmax − Kmin ≤ 1.12 sf √ pa, S p 1 and DKI p ness due to irradiation must be accounted for. The
(1 − R) Kmax/3. For R < 0 and Kmax − Kmin > 1.12 degree of degradation depends upon the neutron fluence,
sf √ pa, S p 1 and DK p Kmax − Kmin. the irradiation temperature, and the relative sensitivity
The scaling constant Co from Eq. (2) produces fatigue of the particular steel. Radiation induced changes in
crack growth rates in units of in. /cycle where DKI is fracture toughness should be determined from surveil-
in units of ksi√ in. and is intended for use when data lance specimens of the actual material and product
form, irradiated according to the surveillance techniques
from the actual product form are not available. Reference
of ASTM E 185, Standard Practice for Conducting
fatigue crack growth rate curves given by Eqs. (1) and
Surveillance Test for Light-Water Cooled Nuclear
(2) are provided in Fig. A-4300-1.
Power Reactor Vessels.
(2) Reference fatigue crack growth behavior of
material exposed to light-water reactor environments is
given by Eq. (1) using DKI p Kmax − Kmin. If Kmin
is equal to or less than zero, use R p 0. Co and n (b) Where surveillance data are not available, the
are given by whichever of the following results in the effects of neutron irradiation should be considered
higher fatigue crack growth rate, da /dN: (1) n and Co for both KIa and KIc by shifting the reference
in A-4300(b)(1) for air environments, or (2) either of nil-ductility temperature RTNDT as a function of irradi-
the following, as applicable. ation.
414
FIG. A-4200-1 LOWER BOUND KIa AND KIc TEST DATA FOR SA-533 GRADE B CLASS 1, SA-508 CLASS 2,
AND SA-508 CLASS 3 STEELS
415
FIG. A-4300-1 REFERENCE FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH CURVES FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY FERRITIC
STEELS EXPOSED TO AIR ENVIRONMENTS (SUBSURFACE FLAWS)
416
FIG. A-4300-2 REFERENCE FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH CURVES FOR CARBON AND LOW ALLOY FERRITIC
STEELS EXPOSED TO WATER ENVIRONMENTS
417
ARTICLE A-5000
ANALYSIS
A-5100 SCOPE A-5300 NORMAL CONDITIONS

This Article provides the method to be used in (a) Normal conditions include all transients expected
applying the analyses to the normal (including upset to occur during the course of system testing and opera-
and test), emergency, and faulted conditions. tion, as well as upset conditions anticipated to occur
frequently enough that the system should be designed
to accommodate them.
(b) The minimum critical flaw size for normal condi-
tions ac should be established. The procedure for de-
termining critical flaw size for each transient is as
A-5200 END-OF-PERIOD FLAW SIZE follows.
In order to determine the maximum potential for (1) Determine the maximum end-of-period irradia-
fatigue flaw growth of the observed flaw indication tion level at the flaw location.
during normal operation, a cumulative fatigue flaw (2) Using irradiated fracture toughness data, deter-
growth study of the component should be performed mine the crack arrest fracture toughness KIa as a function
using appropriate fatigue crack growth rates given in of temperature.
A-4300. The design transients prescribed in the system (3) Calculate stress intensity factors (using the
Design Specification that apply to the remainder of the methods outlined in A-3000 or some other documented
evaluation period for the component should be included. procedure) for various penetration depths of an assumed
Cumulative fatigue crack growth analysis of components flaw, geometrically similar to the ellipse or semiellipse
need not include emergency and faulted conditions. defined by the shape af /øf.
Stress intensity factors should be determined for each (4) Compare the calculated stress intensity factors
transient using the bounding elliptical or semielliptical to the material fracture toughness KIa for the appropriate
flaw model described in A-2000 and consistent with temperature to determine the critical flaw size ac corres-
the methods for KI determination outlined in A-3000. ponding to KI p KIa for the transient.
The plastic zone correction need not be taken into (5) Proceed to the next transient.
account in calculating KI. KI can be determined using (c) The smallest value of ac determined by the above
the (sm + sb) / sys p 0 curve in Fig. A-3300-1. Each procedure, after all transients have been considered,
transient should be considered in approximate chrono- represents the minimum critical flaw size for normal
logical order in the following manner. conditions at the location of the observed flaw.
(1) Determine the range of KI fluctuation associated
with the transient, DKI.
(2) Find the incremental flaw growth Da and Dø
corresponding to DKI from the fatigue flaw growth
rate data. A-5400 EMERGENCY AND FAULTED
(3) Update the flaw dimensions a and ø. CONDITIONS
(4) Repeat these calculations for the next transient (a) Emergency and faulted conditions refer to very
using the updated flaw dimensions. low probability postulated incidents whose conse-
The above procedure, after all transients have been quences are such that subsequent plant operation is
considered, yields the expected end-of-period flaw size not required and safe system shutdown is the only
af and øf. consideration.
418
A-5400 APPENDIX A — NONMANDATORY A-5400
(b) The minimum critical flaw size for emergency (5) The flaw penetration at which the calculated
and faulted conditions ai should be established using stress intensity factor exceeds the KIc profile corresponds
KIc data for flaw initiation considerations and KIa data to the critical flaw size for initiation ai , and the
for flaw arrest considerations. Each postulated incident penetration at which the stress intensity factor goes
should be considered for critical flaw size as follows. below the KIa curve corresponds to the critical flaw
(1) Determine the maximum end-of-period irradia- size for arrest aa. This comparison is illustrated in Fig.
tion profile through the thickness of the component at A-5300-1 for both an arrest and a nonarrest situation.
the observed flaw location. (6) Curves such as in Fig. A-5300-1 should be
(2) Determine temperature and stress profiles prepared for a number of selected times following each
through the thickness of the component at the observed postulated accident to establish the critical time.
flaw location as a function of time following the (7) For those transients where KI is monotonically
postulated incident. decreasing with time (e.g., where system repressuriza-
(3) Using the irradiated fracture toughness data, tion is limited), warm prestressing may be credited to
determine the flaw arrest KIa and flaw initiation KIc preclude flaw initiation or reinitiation at times in the
fracture toughness profiles through the thickness of the transient beyond the time of the peak stress intensity
component as a function of time following the postulated factor.
incident. (c) The smallest value of ai determined by the above
(4) Calculate stress intensity factors (using the procedure (and for which the flaw arrest penetration p
methods outlined in A-3000 or some other documented is greater than 0.75) after all postulated accidents
procedure) for various penetration depths of an assumed have been considered represents the minimum critical
flaw, geometrically similar to the ellipse or semiellipse initiation flaw size for emergency and faulted conditions
defined by the shape af /øf. at the location of the observed flaw.
419
FIG. A-5300-1 DETERMINATION OF CRITICAL FLAW SIZES FOR POSTULATED CONDITIONS
420
ARTICLE A-9000
GLOSSARY
bending stress correction factor (Mb) — a factor used flaw acceptance standards — specified values of flaw
in the stress intensity factor equation derived from length, depth, depth-to-component thickness ratio, or
relationships between flaw eccentricity ratio, ratio of areas as specified in IWA-3100
flaw depth to wall thickness, and flaw depth to wall flaw characterization — the process of circumscribing
thickness as a function of flaw depth to length ratios a flaw in a rectangle parallel to the component surface
(Figs. A-3300-4 and A-3300-5) or in the plane of the wall perpendicular to the compo-
clad or cladding — a layer, usually an austenitic alloy, nent surface for comparison with flaw acceptance stan-
on the surface of a component to minimize corrosion dards
flaw eccentricity (e) — the distance of the center line
coplanar flaws — two or more flaws which are oriented
of a flaw from the neutral axis, usually the center line
in the through-wall direction of a component lying in
of the wall of a component
the same plane. The flaws may be defined as surface
or subsurface, continuous or discontinuous, depending flaw eccentricity ratio (2e/t) — the ratio of twice the
on their proximity. (See Fig. IWA-3380-1.) flaw eccentricity to the component wall thickness
crack initiation — the onset of flaw extension due to flaw evaluation — the analytical process based on
an increase in component loading fracture mechanics used to determine whether a compo-
nent is or is not acceptable for continued service when
crack penetration (P) — the ratio of crack depth to it contains a flaw exceeding the specified acceptance
component thickness — 2a/t for subsurface flaws and standards
a/t for surface flaws
flaw length — the length (ø) of the rectangle circum-
cumulative fatigue crack growth — the total incremental scribing the flaw when drawn parallel to the surface
growth of a flaw over a period of time determined of the component
through use of the design transients flaw location — the site of a flaw in the wall of a
discontinuity stress — the stress distribution through component
a component wall resulting from gross structural discon- flaw major axis (ø or c) — the long dimension (length)
tinuities such as head-to-shell junctions where net bend- of a flaw
ing and membrane forces are produced
flaw minor axis (a, 2a) — the short dimension (depth)
end-of-life irradiation — the predicted fluence at the of a flaw
end of component life flaw orientation — the position of the plane of the
end-of-period flaw size — the maximum size (depth, flaw with respect to the plane perpendicular to the
af, and length, øf) to which a detected flaw is calculated maximum principal stress direction. For purpose of
to grow in a specified time period, such as the next analysis, the flaw plane is projected onto the perpendicu-
scheduled examination of the component or until end lar plane.
of component life flaw shape factor — the relationship between flaw
fatigue crack growth rate (da/dN) — the rate of flaw aspect ratio (a/ø) and the stress ratio [(sm + sb)/sy]
growth due to fatigue in terms of the range of the providing values of the flaw shape parameter (Q)
applied stress intensity factor flaw shape parameter (Q) — a value obtained from
flaw acceptance criteria — the equations or bases for the flaw shape factor and stress ratio
acceptance by fracture mechanics evaluations of flaws irradiation effect — the change in material properties
of a size exceeding the flaw acceptance standards due to neutron fluence
421
linear elastic fracture mechanics — the analytical proce- normal stress — the component of stress normal to
dure that relates the stress-field magnitude and distribu- the plane of reference, also referred to as direct stress
tion in the vicinity of a crack tip, resulting from the primary stress — any normal stress or shear stress
nominal stress applied to the structure, to the size of developed by an imposed loading that is necessary to
a crack that would cause nonductile failure. satisfy the laws of equilibrium of external and internal
membrane stress correction factor (Mm) — a factor used forces and moments
in the stress intensity equation derived from relationships R ratio (Kmin /Kmax) — the algebraic ratio of calculated
between flaw eccentricity ratio, ratio of flaw depth to stress intensity factor (minimum and maximum) in a
wall thickness, and flaw depth to wall thickness as a stress cycle
function of flaw depth to length ratios. (See Figs. A- residual stress — remaining tensile or compressive
3300-2 and A-3300-3.) stresses within a material under unloaded conditions
nonlinear stress distribution — the curvilinear stress secondary stress — the normal or shear stress developed
distribution across a component wall, resulting from the by the constraint of adjacent material or by self-
algebraic addition of stresses (e.g., bending, membrane, constraint of the structure. The basic characteristic of
residual). (See Fig. A-3200-1.) a secondary stress is that it is self-limiting.
422
APPENDIX B
FORMS
423
APPENDIX B — NONMANDATORY Form NIS-BA
425
Form NIS-BB 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
426
APPENDIX C
EVALUATION OF FLAWS IN AUSTENITIC
PIPING
427
ARTICLE C-1000
INTRODUCTION
C-1100 SCOPE C-1200 PROCEDURE

(a) This Appendix provides a method for determining The following is a summary of the analytical pro-
the acceptability for continued service of austenitic cedure.
piping containing flaws that exceed the allowable flaw (a) Determine the actual flaw configuration from the
standards of IWB-3514.3. The evaluation methodology measured flaw in accordance with IWA-3000.
is based on a limit load evaluation of the pipe section (b) Using C-2000, resolve the actual flaw into circum-
reduced by the flaw area for flaws in ductile material ferential and axial flaw components.
where the ability to reach limit load is assured, and (c) Determine the stresses at the location of the
on elastic–plastic fracture mechanics evaluations for detected flaw for normal operating (including upset and
flaws in or near less ductile material where limit load test) conditions and emergency and faulted conditions.
action is not assured. Flaws are evaluated by comparing
(d) Using the analytical procedures described in C-
the maximum flaw dimensions determined by flaw
3000, determine the following critical flaw parameters
growth analysis with the maximum allowable flaw
where
dimensions at the end of a selected evaluation period.
af , øf p the maximum flaw dimensions at the end of the
(b) This Appendix provides rules for flaw modeling
and evaluation. Flaw growth analysis is based on growth evaluation period
due to fatigue or stress corrosion cracking (SCC), or an p the maximum allowable flaw depth for normal
both, as appropriate to the flaw under evaluation. The conditions
flaw acceptance criteria of IWB-3640 provide a safety ao p the maximum allowable flaw depth for emer-
margin on failure for either plastic limit load or fracture. gency and faulted conditions
The acceptance criteria may be used to determine the (e) Using the critical flaw parameters af and øf , apply
acceptability of the flawed piping for continued service the flaw evaluation criteria of IWB-3640 to determine
until the next inspection (or until the end of its service the acceptability of the piping containing the detected
lifetime) or, conversely, to determine the time interval flaw for continued service.
until a subsequent inspection.
429
ARTICLE C-2000
C-2100 SCOPE C-2400 FLAW ORIENTATION

This Article provides the rules for flaw shape, consid- Flaws that do not lie in either an axial1 or a circumfer-
eration of multiple flaws, flaw orientation, and flaw ential2 plane should be projected into these planes in
location, which are used in the comparison with the accordance with the rules of IWA-3340. The axial
allowable flaw size. and circumferential flaws obtained by these projections
should be evaluated separately in accordance with
C-3000.
Figures C-2400-1, C-2400-2, and C-2400-3 illustrate
C-2200 FLAW SHAPE flaw characterization for skewed flaws.
The flaw should be completely bounded by a rectan-
gular or circumferential planar area in accordance with
the methods described in IWA-3300. Figures C-2200- C-2500 FLAW LOCATION
1 and C-2200-2 illustrate flaw characterization for cir- For the purpose of analysis, the flaw is to be consid-
cumferential and axial pipe flaws. ered in its actual location. The stresses due to system
loading should be computed at this location. Surface
or subsurface flaw characterizations should be used
depending on the type of flaw. Where the flaw is
C-2300 PROXIMITY TO CLOSEST subsurface but within the proximity limit of IWA-3340
FLAW of the surface of the component, the flaw should be
In the case of multiple neighboring flaws, if the considered a surface flaw and bounded by a rectangular
shortest distance between the boundaries of two neigh- or circumferential planar area with the base on the
boring flaws is within the proximity limits specified surface.
in IWA-3300, the neighboring flaws should be bounded
by a single rectangular or circumferential planar area 1A plane containing the pipe axis.
in accordance with IWA-3300. 2A plane perpendicular to the pipe axis.
430
Fig. C-2200-1 APPENDIX C — MANDATORY Fig. C-2200-2
FIG. C-2200-1 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION — FIG. C-2200-2 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION —

CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS AXIAL FLAWS
431
Fig. C-2400-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. C-2400-1 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION — SKEWED AXIAL FLAWS PROJECTED INTO AXIAL PLANE
432
APPENDIX C — MANDATORY Fig. C-2400-2
FIG. C-2400-2 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION — SKEWED CIRCUMFERENTIAL

FLAWS PROJECTED INTO CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
433
FIG. C-2400-3 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION — COMPOUND SKEWED FLAW

PROJECTED INTO CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND AXIAL PLANES
434
ARTICLE C-3000
ANALYSIS
C-3100 SCOPE test frequency, mean stress, and other variables that
affect the data should be considered.
This Article provides the methodology for flaw evalu-
(b) The fatigue crack growth behavior of austenitic
ation and describes the procedures to determine the
stainless steels is affected by temperature, R ratio
flaw size at the end of the evaluation period.
(Kmin /Kmax), and environment. Reference fatigue crack
growth rates for air and water environments are given
by the following.
C-3200 FLAW GROWTH ANALYSIS (1) Reference fatigue crack growth behavior of
cast and wrought austenitic stainless steels and their
(a) Having characterized the flaw in terms of an welds exposed to air environments (subsurface flaws)
equivalent axial and circumferential flaw, it is necessary are given by Eq. (1) with n p 3.3 and
to determine the maximum depth af and the maximum
length øf to which the detected flaw will grow by the
Co p C ( S ) (2)
end of the evaluation period. This Article describes
the procedures for the flaw growth analysis.
(b) Crack growth in austenitic piping can be due to where C is a scaling parameter to account for tempera-
cyclic fatigue flaw growth, SCC under sustained load, ture and is given by
or a combination of both. Flaw growth analysis should −4 T − 1.13 × 10−6 T 2 + 1.02 × 10−9 T 3]
be performed for normal operating conditions as defined C p 10 [−10.009 + 8.12 × 10
in A-5200 of Appendix A. Flaw growth is governed
by the applied stress intensity factor. The procedures where T is themetal temperature in °F (T ≤ 800°F). S
described in A-3000 can be used to calculate the stress is a scaling parameter to account for R ratio and is
intensity factor. given by
S p 1.0 when R ≤ 0
C-3210 FLAW GROWTH DUE TO
p 1.0 + 1.8R when 0 < R ≤ 0.79
FATIGUE
(a) Fatigue flaw growth rate in austenitic piping can p − 43.35 + 57.97R when 0.79 < R < 1.0
be characterized in terms of the range of the applied
stress intensity factor, KI. This characterization is of The scaling constant Co from Eq. (2) produces fatigue
the form: crack growth rates in the units of inches /cycle when
DK is in the units of ksi√ in. and is intended for use
da when data from actual product form is not available.
p Co (DKI )n (1)
dN Reference fatigue crack growth rate curves using Eqs.
(1) and (2) are provided in Fig. C-3210-1.
where n and Co are constants dependent on the material (2) Reference fatigue crack growth rates for austen-
and environmental conditions. These parameters should itic stainless steels exposed to water environments are
be based on flaw growth data obtained from specimens in the course of preparation.
of the same material specification and product form, (c) In order to determine the maximum potential for
or suitable alternative. Material variability, environment, fatigue flaw growth of the detected flaw during normal
435
FIG. C-3210-1 REFERENCE FATIGUE CRACK GROWTH CURVES

FOR AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS IN AIR
ENVIRONMENTS
436
C-3210 APPENDIX C — NONMANDATORY C-3310
operating conditions, a cumulative fatigue flaw growth C-3230 FLAW GROWTH DUE TO A
study of the piping should be performed. The design COMBINATION OF FATIGUE AND
transients prescribed in the system Design Specification SCC
that apply during the evaluation period should be in-
When the service loading and the material and envi-
cluded. Each transient should be considered in approxi-
ronmental conditions are such that the flaw is subjected
mate chronological order as follows.
to both fatigue and SCC growth, the final flaw size af
(1) Determine DKI , the maximum range of KI
and øf are obtained by adding the increments in flaw
fluctuation associated with the transient.
size due to fatigue and SCC computed in accordance
(2) Find the incremental flaw growth corresponding
with the procedures described above. The cyclic and
to DKI from the fatigue flaw growth rate data.
sustained loads should be considered in approximately
(3) Update the flaw size and proceed to the next
chronological order.
transient.
(d) The above procedure, after all transients have
been considered, yields the final flaw size af and øf at
the end of the evaluation period considering fatigue C-3300 CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAW
flaw growth alone. EVALUATION
The allowable end-of-evaluation period flaw sizes
for circumferential flaws are provided in Tables IWB-
3641-1 and IWB-3641-2. The allowable flaw sizes
specified in these tables are dependent on the applied
C-3220 FLAW GROWTH DUE TO STRESS stress level and the local piping material.
CORROSION CRACKING
(a) Flaw growth due to SCC is a function of the
material condition, environment, the stress intensity
C-3310 EVALUATION PARAMETERS
factor due to sustained loading, and the total time that
the flaw is exposed to the environment under sustained The applied stress levels to be used to determine
loading. The procedure for computing SCC flaw growth the allowable flaw sizes are the stresses defined in the
is based on experimental data relating the flaw growth ASME Code Piping Stress Reports. For example, for
rate (da /dt) to the sustained load stress intensity factor normal operating conditions, the value of Pm + Pb
KI. Sustained loads resulting from pressure and steady corresponds to the primary stress intensity value speci-
state thermal stresses as well as weld residual stresses fied on the left-hand side of Eq. (9) in NB-3652 and
should be included. Appropriate experimental data on the value of Pe corresponds to the thermal expansion
residual stress distribution for different pipe sizes and stress (bending or membrane or both, but without
flaw growth rate as a function of sustained KI should geometric stress concentrations) including the effects
be used. The procedure employed for determining the of weld shrinkage from a weld overlay repair. The
cumulative flaw growth is as follows. allowable design stress intensity Sm should be deter-
(1) Determine sustained stress intensity factor KI mined from Table I-1.0 of Section III, Division 1 or
for a given steady stress state condition. obtained from the Stress Report. The multiplier Z, when
(2) Find the incremental growth of the flaw depth applicable, is determined from Table IWB-3641-1 or
and length corresponding to the period for which the IWB-3641-2. With these parameters, for normal op-
steady state stress is applied. This can be obtained erating conditions the allowable flaw depth an corres-
from the relationship between da /dt and KI. A suffi- ponding to the flaw length øf should be determined
ciently small time interval should be selected to ensure from Table IWB-3641-1 using the appropriate material.
that the flaw size and the associated KI value do not Similarly, for emergency and faulted conditions, the
change significantly during this interval. parameters for Level C and D conditions described in
(3) Update the flaw size. NB-3655 and NB-3656 should be used to determine
(4) Continue the flaw growth analysis for the the allowable flaw depth ao from Table IWB-3641-2.
period during which the sustained stress exists until The use of Tables IWB-3641-1 and IWB-3641-2 is
the end of the evaluation period. determined by the material at the flaw location (local
(b) The above procedure yields the final flaw size, piping material). If the flaw is located in wrought base
af and øf at the end of the evaluation period considering metals, cast stainless steels meeting the requirements
SCC flaw growth alone. of IWB-3641(c), or any welds, Tables IWB-3641-1 and
437
C-3310 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 C-3320
IWB-3641-2 are to be used. The definition of the weld

material boundaries is in Fig. IWB-3641-1.
C-3320 FORMULAS FOR EVALUATION

(a) The formulas for obtaining the allowable flaw
depths an and ao in Tables IWB-3641-1 and IWB-
3641-2 are given here.
For circumferential flaws not penetrating the compres-
sive side of the pipe such that (u + b) ≤ p (see Fig.
C-3320-1), the relation between the applied loads and
flaw depth at incipient plastic collapse is given by
1 2
6 Sm a
P ′b p 2 sin b − sin u (3)
p t
where FIG. C-3320-1 CROSS SECTION OF FLAWED PIPE
1 2
1 a P
bp p− u−p m
2 t 3 Sm
the results in Tables IWB-3641-1 and IWB-3641-2 can
be reproduced by taking
u p half flawangle
P ′b p SF (Pm + Pb ) − Pm (5)
P ′b is the failure bending stress as defined in paragraphs
(b) and (c) below.
where
For longer flaws penetrating the compressive bending
region where (u + b) >p (see Fig. C-3320-1), the For normal operating conditions
relation between the applied loads and the flaw depth
at incipient plastic collapse is given by
Pm p 0.5 Sm
1 2
6 Sm a
P ′b p 2− sin b (4)
p t (Pm + Pb) p table ordinate value × Sm
where SF p 2.77
p
11 − t − 3 S 2
a Pm For emergency and faulted conditions
bp
a m
2−
t
Pm p 1.0 Sm
up half flaw angle
(Pm + Pb ) p table ordinate value × Sm
P ′b is the failure bending stress as defined in C-3320(b)
and (c).
SF p 1.39
Equations (3) and (4) are solved by trial and error
for the allowable flaw depth using the measured flaw When using the actual piping stresses to determine
length and the applied loads with the appropriate factor an allowable flaw size, the values in Eq. (5) are given by:
of safety given in C-3320(b) or (c). Pmp piping membrane stress
(b) For wrought base metals, cast stainless steels Pbp piping bending stress
meeting the requirements of IWB-3641(c), gas tungsten- SFp 2.77 for normal operating conditions
arc welds (GTAW) and gas metal-arc welds (GMAW), SFp 1.39 for emergency and faulted conditions
438
C-3320 APPENDIX C — NONMANDATORY C-3420
(c) For shielded metal-arc welds (SMAW) and sub- C-3410 EVALUATION PARAMETERS
merged arc welds (SAW), the results in Tables IWB-
The stress ratio used in these tables is the ratio of
3641-1 and IWB-3641-2 can be closely approximated
the hoop stress PD /2t to the allowable design stress
by taking
intensity Sm, where P is the maximum pressure, D is
the nominal outside diameter of the pipe, and t is the
P ′b p Z1 (SF ) (Pm + Pb + Pe / SF ) − Pm (6) nominal thickness of the pipe. The maximum allowable
flaw depth for normal operating conditions an and the
where for normal operatingconditions maximum allowable flaw depth for emergency and
faulted conditions ao are determined as follows.
(a) Determine the nondimensional flaw length
Pm p 0.5 Sm øf√ Rt where øf is the end-of-evaluation period flaw
length, R is the mean radius of the pipe, and t is the
nominal thickness of the pipe.
(Pm + Pb + Pe / SF ) p table ordinate value × Sm /Z1 (b) Calculate the hoop stress ratio (PD /2t) /Sm corres-
ponding to the maximum pressure for normal operating
conditions and the hoop stress ratio corresponding
SF p 2.77 to the maximum pressure for emergency and faulted
conditions.
or for emergency and faulted conditions (c) Determine the maximum allowable flaw depth
an for normal conditions from the value of an /t specified
in Table IWB-3641-3. Similarly, the maximum allow-
Pm p 1.0 Sm able flaw depth ao for emergency and faulted conditions
should be determined from Table IWB-3641-4.
(Pm + Pb + Pe / SF ) p table ordinate value × Sm /Z1
SF p 1.39 C-3420 FORMULAS FOR EVALUATION

(a) The tabular values of allowable flaw depths given
Use the actual piping stresses to determine an allow- in Tables IWB-3641-3 and IWB-3641-4 were deter-
able flaw size. The values in Eq. (6) are given by mined for a limit load criterion using the following
Pmp piping membrane stress expression for part-through axial flaws:
Pbp piping bending stress
Pep piping expansion stress
3 4
3 Sm t/a − 1
SFp 2.77 for normal operating conditions sh p (7)
SF t / a −1 / M2
p 1.39 for emergency and faulted conditions
Z1p 1.15 [1 + 0.013 (D-4)] for SMAW
p 1.30 [1 + 0.010 (D-4)] for SAW where
D is the nominal outside diameter, in.
1⁄
(d) The limits of applicability of the above equations M2 p[1 + 1.61 ø 2 / (4 Rt)] 2
are such that in no case shall the resulting flaw depth sh pnominal hoop stress p PD / 2t
be less than the value given in IWB-3514.3 nor greater Dpnominal outside diameter of the pipe
than a p 0.75t for materials in C-3320(b) or (c). øptotal flaw length
apflaw depth
Rpmean radius of the pipe
C-3400 AXIAL FLAW EVALUATION tpnominal thickness
SFpSafety Factor; 3.0 for Level A and B Service
The allowable end-of-evaluation period flaw sizes Loadings, 1.5 for Level C and D Service
for axial flaws are provided in Tables IWB-3641-3 and Loadings
IWB-3641-4. The allowable flaw sizes specified in these
tables are dependent on the applied stress level but (b) Upper bounds on the applicability of Eq. (7) are
are not dependent on the local piping material. set at flaw depths of 75% of the wall thickness. Equation
439
C-3420 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 C-3420
(7) is applicable only for flaws with length ø < øcrit

where øcrit is given by the condition
3 Sm
sh p (8)
M2
This limit insures that surface flaws will remain below

critical size (based on the plastic collapse condition) if
they should grow through the wall. For flaw lengths
greater than øcrit , IWB-3514.3 shall be used.
440
APPENDIX D
CONDITIONING OF CLASS 1 AND 2 PIPING WELDS
WHICH REQUIRE EXAMINATION
441
ARTICLE D-1000
INTRODUCTION
D-1100 GENERAL
(a) Piping weld joints should be designed (including
counterbores and surface conditions) and provided with
access to enable the performance of the required preser-
vice and inservice examinations. This applies to shop
fabrication, construction, and repair /replacement activi-
ties. Particular attention should be given to austenitic
and dissimilar metal welds that require ultrasonic exami-
nation.
(b) Workmanship samples or plastic replicas may be
used as references to facilitate the implementation of
surface conditioning requirements in a shop or field
environment.
443
ARTICLE D-2000
ULTRASONIC AND SURFACE EXAMINATION
CONDITIONING
D-2100 GENERAL (b) The flattened surface should have an overall slope
1⁄ of less than 6:1, or 10 deg., relative to the adjacent
(a) Undercut should not be greater than 32 in.
piping surface and should not exceed 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm)
(0.8 mm) and should not entrap penetrant or magnetic
in height.
particles which could mask unacceptable indications.
(b) The surface finish should be 250 rms or better
for a distance of at least 2T1 plus 2 in. (25 mm) from
the edge of the weld crown on at least one side of
the weld where an ultrasonic examination is required.
This surface finish should not apply to the edges of
D-2300 ALL OTHER WELDS NOT
the weld crown when a flat-topped weld condition is ADDRESSED IN D-2200 (SEE
adequate to perform the required examination. Those FIG. D-2000-2)
edges should only not entrap penetrant which could (a) The weld should be blended flush with the adja-
mask unacceptable indications. cent base material.
(c) Caution should be used during surface condition- (b) If the weld cannot be blended flush then the
ing to avoid violating the minimum wall thickness conditions of D-2200 should apply, except the edge of
requirement. the weld crown should be blended smoothly and gradu-
ally to the adjacent base metal.
D-2200 FERRITIC WELDS WITH
ADEQUATE ACCESS —
GENERALLY AT LEAST 2T
PLUS 2 in. (51 mm) OF ACCESS D-2400 SURFACE EXAMINATION
FROM ONE SIDE OF THE CONDITIONS
WELD — AND ANY
INSTALLED COUNTERBORE Where a surface examination is required without an
ultrasonic examination, then the conditions in D-2200
AT LEAST 2T FROM THE
and D-2300 do not apply. However, the Owner may
WELD ROOT (SEE FIG. D-2000-
desire to have all applicable welds prepared similar to
1) the conditions in D-2200 and D-2300 in order to
(a) As a minimum, the weld should have an essen- minimize personnel radiation exposure during inservice
tially flat-topped crown with the unprepared edges of examination. As a minimum, the surface condition for
the weld less than 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) wide. at least 1⁄2 in. from each edge of the weld should
not entrap penetrant which could mask unacceptable
1T p nominal wall thickness indications.
444
Fig. D-2000-1 APPENDIX D — NONMANDATORY Fig. D-2000-2
FIG. D-2000-1 FLAT-TOP GROUND WELD CROWN
FIG. D-2000-2 SMOOTHLY GROUND WELD CROWN
445
APPENDIX E
EVALUATION OF UNANTICIPATED OPERATING
EVENTS
447
ARTICLE E-1000
INTRODUCTION
E-1100 SCOPE TABLE E-1

MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PRESSURE AS A FUNCTION
This Appendix provides acceptance criteria and guid- OF Tc – RTNDT FOR ISOTHERMAL PRESSURE
ance for performing an engineering evaluation of the TRANSIENTS (DTc / Dt < 10°F/hr)
effects of an out-of-limit condition on the structural For design pressures greater than 2400 psig.
integrity of the reactor vessel beltline region. Showing
compliance with the criteria in either E-1200 or E- Tc – RTNDT Maximum Allowable
1300 assures that the beltline region has adequate (°F) Pressure (psig)
structural integrity for the unit to return to service. +25 and greater 1.1 × Design
+15 2400
+10 2250
0 2000
−10 1750
−25 1500
−50 1200
−75 1000
E-1200 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA1,2 −105 850
−130 800
Adequate structural integrity of the reactor vessel −200 750
beltline region is assured if the following applicable GENERAL NOTE: Linear interpolation is permitted.
criterion is satisfied throughout the event:
(a) For isothermal pressure transients (i.e., DTc /Dt
<10°F /hr) (5.6°C/hr), the maximum pressure does not
exceed the allowable values of Table E-1 at any value E-1300 EVALUATION BY ANALYSIS
of Tc − RTNDT.
(b) For pressurized thermal transients (i.e., DTc /Dt (a) Adequate structural integrity of the reactor vessel
≥ 10°F /hr), the maximum pressure does not exceed beltline region is assured if it can be shown by analysis
the design pressure and Tc − RTNDT is not less than using the input of Table E-2 that the following criterion
55°F (31°C). is met throughout the event:
If compliance with the above applicable criterion is
1.4 (KIm + KIt ) + KIr ≤ KIc
not shown, adequate structural integrity can be assured
by satisfying the guidelines and criteria specified in
where
E-1300.
KImp stress intensity factor due to membrane stress
KItp stress intensity factor due to thermal stress
KIrp stress intensity factor due to residual stress
KIcp fracture toughness per Article A-9000
1T
c is the bulk reactor coolant temperature, and DTc /Dt is the (b) If compliance with the above criterion cannot be
maximum variation of temperature Tc in any one hour period.
2 RT shown, additional analyses or other actions shall be
NDT is the highest adjusted reference temperature (for weld or
base material) at the inside surface of the reactor vessel as determined taken to assure that acceptable margins of safety will
by Regulatory Guide 1.99 Rev. 2. be maintained during subsequent operation.
449
E-1300 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 E-1300
TABLE E-2
EVALUATION INPUT FOR PLANT AND
EVENT SPECIFIC LINEAR
ELASTIC FRACTURE MECHANICS ANALYSIS
Variable Value
Pressure Event pressure time history

Temperature Event temperature time history
Heat transfer Event/plant specific flow/mixing
conditions
Crack type Semi-elliptical surface flaw
Minimum initiation 0.0 < a ≤ 1.0 in. [Note (1)]
crack size
Crack orientation Longitudinal
KIc /KI location Surface and maximum depth
Clad effects Clad to be considered in the thermal,
stress, and fracture mechanics
analyses [Note (2)]
Transition toughness KIc per Article A-9000
Upper shelf toughness (In course of preparation)
Fluence Fluence at the time of the transient
Shift curve Regulatory Guide 1.99 Rev. 2
Residual stress Appropriate distribution for the fab-
rication process, or linear distribu-
tion with +10 ksi at the inside sur-
face and −10 ksi at the outside
surface
NOTES:
(1) a p the maximum crack depth in the base metal
(2) The stresses due to the difference between the base metal and
cladding thermal expansion coefficients need not be considered
in the isothermal pressure transient evaluation (i.e., DTc / Dt <
10°F/hr).
450
APPENDIX F A99
PREPARATION OF INSPECTION PLANS

DELETED
451-458

APPENDIX G
FRACTURE TOUGHNESS CRITERIA FOR
PROTECTION AGAINST FAILURE
459
ARTICLE G-1000 A99
INTRODUCTION
This Appendix presents a procedure for obtaining

the allowable loadings for ferritic pressure retaining
materials in components. This procedure is based on
the principles of linear elastic fracture mechanics. At
each location being investigated a maximum postulated
flaw is assumed. At the same location the mode I stress
intensity factor1 KI is produced by each of the specified
loadings as calculated and the summation of the KI
values is compared to a reference value KIc which is
the highest critical value of KI that can be ensured
for the material and temperature involved. Different
procedures are recommended for different components
and operating conditions.
1 The stress intensity factor as used in fracture mechanics has no

relation to and must not be confused with the stress intensity used
in Section III, Division 1. Furthermore, stresses referred to in this
Appendix are calculated normal tensile stresses not stress intensities
in a defect free stress model at the surface nearest the location of
the assumed defect.
461

ARTICLE G-2000
VESSELS
G-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS the material. This information shall be documented by

the Owner.
A99 G-2110 REFERENCE CRITICAL STRESS
INTENSITY FACTOR
(a) Figure G-2210-1 is a curve showing the relation- G-2120 MAXIMUM POSTULATED DEFECT 98
ship that can be conservatively expected between the The postulated defects used in this recommended
critical, or reference, stress intensity factor KIc, ksi procedure are sharp, surface defects oriented axially
√ in., and a temperature which is related to the for plates, forgings, and axial welds, and circumferen-
reference nil-ductility temperature RTNDT determined in tially for circumferential welds. For section thicknesses
NB-2331. This curve is based on the lower bound of of 4 in. to 12 in. (102 mm to 305 mm), the postulated
static critical KI values measured as a function of defects have a depth of one-fourth of the section
temperature on specimens of SA-533 Grade B Class thickness and a length of 11⁄2 times the section thickness.
1, and SA-508-1, SA-508-2, and SA-508-3 steel. No Defects are postulated at both the inside and outside
available data points for static tests fall below the surfaces. For sections greater than 12 in. (305 mm)
curve. An analytical approximation to the curve is: thick, the postulated defect for the 12 in. section is
used. For sections less than 4 in. (102 mm) thick, the
KIc p 32.2 + 2⌬ x 734[0.02(T − RTNDT)] 1 in. (25 mm) deep defect is conservatively postulated.
Smaller defect sizes1 may be used on an individual
case basis if a smaller size of maximum postulated
Unless higher KIc values can be justified for the particu- defect can be ensured. Due to the safety factors recom-
lar material and circumstances being considered, Fig. mended here, the prevention of nonductile fracture is
G-2210-1 may be used for ferritic steels which meet ensured for some of the most important situations even
the requirements of NB-2331 and which have a specified if the defects were to be about twice as large in linear
minimum yield strength at room temperature of 50.0 dimensions as this postulated maximum defect.
ksi or less.
(b) For materials which have specified minimum
yield strengths at room temperature greater than 50.0 G-2200 LEVEL A AND LEVEL B
ksi but not exceeding 90.0 ksi, Fig. G-2210-1 may be SERVICE LIMITS
used provided fracture mechanics data are obtained on
at least three heats of the material on a sufficient G-2210 SHELLS AND HEADS REMOTE
number of specimens to cover the temperature range FROM DISCONTINUITIES
of interest, including the weld metal and heat-affected G-2211 Recommendations
zone, and provided that the data are equal to or
above the curve of Fig. G-2210-1. These data shall be The assumptions of this Subarticle are recommended
documented by the Owner. Where these materials of for shell and head regions during Level A and B
higher yield strengths (specified minimum yield strength Service Limits.
greater than 50.0 ksi (345 MPa) but not exceeding
1 WRCB 175 (Welding Research Council Bulletin 175) “PVRC
90.0 ksi (620 MPa) are to be used in conditions where
Recommendations on Toughness Requirements for Ferritic Materials”
radiation may affect the material properties, the effect provides procedures in Paragraph 5(c)(2) for considering maximum
of radiation on the KIc curve shall be determined for postulated defects smaller than those described.
462

G-2212 APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY G-2214.2
FIG. G-2210-1 A99
G-2212 Material Fracture Toughness Mm p 3.21 for √ t > 3.464

A99 G-2212.1 Reference Critical Stress Intensity Factor Similarly, Mm for an outside axial surface flaw is
for Material. The KIc values of Fig. G-2210-1 are given by
recommended. Mm p 1.77 for √ t < 2
Mm p 0.893 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464
G-2212.2 Irradiation Effects. Subarticle A-4400 of
Mm p 3.09 for √ t > 3.464
Appendix A is recommended to define the change in
reference critical stress intensity factor due to irradiation. where
p p internal pressure (ksi)
Ri p vessel inner radius (in.)
98 G-2213 Maximum Postulated Defects t p vessel wall thickness (in.)
The KI corresponding to membrane tension for the
The recommended maximum postulated defects are postulated circumferential defect of G-2120 is KIM Mm
described in G-2120. × (pRi /t), where Mm, for an inside or an outside
circumferential surface defect is given by
Mm p 0.89 for √ t < 2
G-2214 Calculated Stress Intensity Factors Mm p 0.443 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464
Mm p 1.53 for √ t > 3.464
98 G-2214.1 Membrane Tension. The KI correspond-
ing to membrane tension for the postulated axial defect
of G-2120 is KIm p Mm × (pRi /t), where Mm for an
inside axial surface flaw is given by G-2214.2 Bending Stress. The KI corresponding to 98
Mm p 1.85 for √ t < 2 bending stress for postulated axial or circumferential
Mm p 0.926 √ t for 2 ≤ √ t ≤ 3.464 defect of G-2120 is KIb p Mb × maximum bending
463

G-2214.2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 G-2215
stress, where Mb is two-thirds of Mm for the axial 1⁄ -thickness outside surface defect, and (3) the calcu-
4
defect. lated results for the maximum allowable heatup rate
using a 1⁄4-thickness outside surface defect.
98 G-2214.3 Radial Thermal Gradient. The maximum
KI produced by a radial thermal gradient for a postulated
axial or circumferential inside surface defect of G-2120 G-2215 Allowable Pressure 98
is KIt p 0.953 × 10−3 × CR × t 2.5, where CR is the A99
The equations given in this Subarticle provide the
cooldown rate in F/hr., or, for a postulated axial or
basis for determination of the allowable pressure at
circumferential outside surface defect, KIt p 0.753 ×
any temperature at the depth of the postulated defect
10−3 × HU × t2.5, where HU is the heatup rate in F/hr.
during Service Conditions for which Level A and Level
The through-wall temperature difference associated
B Service Limits are specified. In addition to the
with the maximum thermal KI can be determined from
conservatism of these assumptions, it is recommended
Fig. G-2214-1. The temperature at any radial distance
that a factor of 2 be applied to the calculated KI values
from the vessel surface can be determined from Fig.
produced by primary stresses. In shell and head regions
G-2214-2 for the maximum thermal KI.
remote from discontinuities, the only significant loadings
(a) The maximum thermal KI and the temperature
are: (1) general primary membrane stress due to pres-
relationship in Fig. G-2214-1 are applicable only for
sure; and (2) thermal stress due to thermal gradient
the conditions in G-2214.3(a)(1) and (2).
through the thickness during startup and shutdown.
(1) An assumed shape of the temperature gradient
Therefore, the requirement to be satisfied and from
is approximately as shown in Fig. G-2214-2.
which the allowable pressure for any assumed rate of
(2) The temperature change starts from a steady
temperature change can be determined is:
state condition and has a rate, associated with startup
and shutdown, less than about 100°F /hr (56°C/hr. The
results would be overly conservative if applied to rapid 2KIm + KIt < KIc (1)
temperature changes.
(b) Alternatively, the KI for radial thermal gradient throughout the life of the component at each temperature
can be calculated for any thermal stress distribution at with KIm from G-2214.1, KIt from G-2214.3, and KIc
any specified time during cooldown for a 1⁄4-thickness from Fig. G-2210-1.
axial or circumferential surface defect. The allowable pressure at any temperature shall be
For an inside surface defect during cooldown determined as follows.
(a) For the startup condition,
KIt p (1.0359C0 + 0.6322C1 + 0.4753C2 + 0.3855C3) √ ␲a (1) consider postulated defects in accordance with
G-2120;
(2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity
For an outside surface defect during heatup factors due to the specified range of heat-up rates from
G-2214.3;
KIt p (1.043C0 + 0.630C1 + 0.481C2 + (0.401C3) √ ␲a (3) calculate the KIa toughness for all vessel belt-
line materials from G-2212 using temperatures and
RTNDT values for the corresponding locations of inter-
The coefficients C0, C1, C2, and C3 are determined est; and
from the thermal stress distribution at any specified (4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant
time during the heatup or cooldown using inlet temperature for each material and location. The
allowable pressure-temperature relationship is the mini-
␴ (x) p C0 + C1 (x/a) + C2 (x/a)2 + C3 (x/a)3 mum pressure at any temperature determined from
(a) the calculated steady-state (KIt p 0) results
for the 1⁄4-thickness inside surface postulated defects
where x is a dummy variable that representsthe radial
using the equation
distance, in., from the appropriate (i.e., inside or outside)
冢冣
surface and a is the maximum crack depth, in.
KIa t⁄
(c) For the startup condition, the allowable pressure Pp Ri
2Mm
vs. temperature relationship is the minimum pressure
at any temperature, determined from (1) the calculated
steady state results for the 1⁄4-thickness inside surface (b) the calculated results from all vessel beltline
defect, (2) the calculated steady state results for the materials for the heatup stress intensity factors using the
464

APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY Fig. G-2214-1
FIG. G-2214-1
465
G-2215 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 G-2215
FIG. G-2214-2
corresponding 1⁄4-thickness outside-surface postulated

defects and the equation
Pp
KIa - KIt
2Mm 1⁄ 2
t
Ri
The allowable pressure-temperature relationship is
1⁄ 2
KIa - KIt t the minimum pressure at any temperature, determined
Pp Ri from all vessel beltline materials for the cooldown
2Mm
stress intensity factors using the corresponding 1⁄4-
thickness inside-surface postulated defects.
Those plants having low temperature overpressure
protection (LTOP) systems can use the following load
(b) For the cooldown condition, and temperature conditions to provide protection against
(1) consider postulated defects in accordance with failure during reactor start-up and shutdown operation
G-2120; due to low temperature overpressure events that have
(2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity been classified as Service Level A or B events. LTOP
factors due to the specified range of cooldown rates systems shall be effective at coolant temperatures less
from G-2214.3; than 200°F or at coolant temperatures corresponding
(3) calculate the KIa toughness for all vessel belt- to a reactor vessel metal temperature less than RTNDT
line materials from G-2212 using temperatures and + 50°F, whichever is greater.2,3 LTOP systems shall
RTNDT values for the corresponding location of inter-
est; and 2 The coolant temperature is the reactor coolant inlet temperature.
(4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant 3 The vessel metal temperature is the temperature at a distance one
inlet temperature for each material and location using fourth of the vessel section thickness from the inside wetted surface
the equation. in the vessel beltline region. RTNDT is the highest adjusted reference
466
G-2215 APPENDIX G — NONMANDATORY G-2400
limit the maximum pressure in the vessel to 110% of G-2223 Toughness Requirements for Nozzles
the pressure determined to satisfy Eq. (1).
(a) A quantitative evaluation of the fracture toughness
requirements for nozzles is not feasible at this time,
but preliminary data indicate that the design defect size
for nozzles, considering the combined effects of internal
G-2220 NOZZLES, FLANGES, AND SHELL pressure, external loading and thermal stresses, may
REGIONS NEAR GEOMETRIC be a fraction of that postulated for the vessel shell.
DISCONTINUITIES Nondestructive examination methods shall be suffi-
G-2221 General Requirements ciently reliable and sensitive to detect these smaller
defects.
The same general procedure as was used for the (b) WRCB 175 provides an approximate method in
shell and head regions in G-2210 may be used for Paragraph 5C(2) for analyzing the inside corner of a
areas where more complicated stress distributions occur, nozzle and cylindrical shell for elastic stresses due to
but certain modifications of the procedures for determin- internal pressure stress.
ing allowable applied loads shall be followed in order (c) Fracture toughness analysis to demonstrate protec-
to meet special situations, as stipulated in G-2222 and tion against nonductile failure is not required for portions
G-2223. of nozzles and appurtenances having a thickness of 2.5
in. or less, provided the lowest service temperature is
not lower than RTNDT plus 60°F (+33°C).
G-2222 Consideration of Membrane and
Bending Stresses
(a) Equation (1) of G-2215 requires modification to
include the bending stresses which may be important
contributors to the calculated KI value at a point near G-2300 LEVEL C AND LEVEL D
a flange or nozzle. The terms whose sum must be <KIa SERVICE LIMITS
for normal and upset operating conditions are: G-2310 RECOMMENDATIONS
(1) 2KIm from G-2214.1 for primary membrane
stress; The possible combinations of loadings, defect sizes,
(2) 2KIb from G-2214.2 for primary bending stress; and material properties which may be encountered
(3) KIm from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane during Level C and Level D Service Limits are too
stress; diverse to allow the application of definitive rules, and
(4) KIb from G-2214.2 for secondary bending it is recommended that each situation be studied on
stress. an individual case basis. The principles given in this
(b) For purposes of this evaluation, stresses which Appendix may be applied, where applicable, with any
result from bolt preloading shall be considered as postulated loadings, defect sizes, and material toughness
primary. which can be justified for the situation involved.
(c) It is recommended that when the flange and
adjacent shell region are stressed by the full intended
bolt preload and by pressure not exceeding 20% of
the preoperational system hydrostatic test pressure, mini-
mum metal temperature in the stressed region should G-2400 HYDROSTATIC TEST A99
be at least the initial RTNDT temperature for the material TEMPERATURE
in the stressed regions plus any effects of irradiation
at the stressed regions. (a) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
(d) Thermal stresses shall be considered as secondary formed prior to loading fuel in the reactor vessel, it
except as provided in NB-3213.13(b). The KI of G- is recommended that hydrostatic tests be performed at
2214.3(b) is recommended for the evaluation of thermal a temperature not lower than RTNDT plus 60°F. The
stress. 60°F margin is intended to provide protection against
nonductile failure at the test pressure.
(b) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
temperature (for weld or base metal in the beltline region) at a
distance one fourth of the vessel section thickness from the vessel formed subsequent to loading fuel in the reactor vessel,
wetted inner surface as determined by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Rev. 2. the minimum test temperature should be determined
467

G-2400 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 G-2400
by evaluating KI. The terms given in (1) through (4)

below should be summed in determining KI :
(1) 1.5KIm from G-2214.1 for primary membrane
stress;
(2) 1.5KIb from G-2214.2 for primary bending
stress;
(3) KIm from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane
stress;
(4) KIb from G-2214.2 for secondary bending
stress.
KI, calculated by summing the four values given in
(1) through (4) above, shall not exceed the applicable
KIc value.
(c) The system hydrostatic test to satisfy G-2400(a)
or (b) should be performed at a temperature not lower
than the highest required temperature for any component
in the system.
468

ARTICLE G-3000
PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES
G-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

In the case of the materials other than bolting used
for piping, pumps, and valves for which impact tests
are required (NB-2311), the tests and acceptance stan-
dards of Section III, Division 1 are considered to be
adequate to prevent nonductile failure under the loadings
and with the defect sizes encountered under normal,
upset, and testing conditions. Level C and Level D
Service Limits should be evaluated on an individual
case basis (G-2300).
469
ARTICLE G-4000
BOLTING
G-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

In the case of bolting materials for which impact
tests are required, the tests and acceptance standards
of Section III, Division 1 are considered to be adequate
to prevent nonductile failure under the loadings and
with the defect sizes encountered under normal, upset,
and testing conditions. Level C and Level D Service
Limits should be evaluated on an individual case basis
(G-2300). Welding Research Council Bulletin 175
(WRCB 175) “PVRC Recommendations on Toughness
Requirements for Ferritic Materials,” provides proce-
dures in Paragraph 7 for evaluating various defect sizes
and associated toughness levels in bolting materials.
470
APPENDIX H
EVALUATION OF FLAWS IN FERRITIC PIPING
471
ARTICLE H-1000
INTRODUCTION
H-1100 SCOPE (a) Determine the actual flaw configuration from the
measured flaw in accordance with IWA-3000 using
(a) This Appendix provides a method for determining
H-2000.
the acceptability for continued service of ferritic piping
(b) Resolve the actual flaw into circumferential and
containing flaws that exceed the acceptance standards of
axial flaw components using H-2000.
IWB-3514.2. The evaluation methodology is based on:
(c) Determine the stresses normal to the flaw at the
(1) limit load failure of the pipe cross section
location of the detected flaw for normal operating
(which is reduced by the flaw area) for ductile materials
(including upset and test) conditions and emergency
where the limit load is assured;
and faulted conditions.
(2) elastic-plastic fracture mechanics where ductile
(d) Perform a flaw growth analysis (described in H-
flaw extension may occur prior to reaching limit load;
3000) to establish the end of evaluation period flaw
and
dimensions a f and øl f .
(3) brittle fracture described by linear elastic frac-
(e) Obtain actual pipe material properties at the
ture mechanics.
temperature required for analysis, sy and JIc . When
(b) This Appendix provides a screening procedure
actual material properties are not available, minimum
to determine the failure mechanism based on metal
properties are given in Table H-4211-1 and Table H-
temperature, applied loads, flaw size, and the material
4212-1.
properties. Flaws are evaluated by comparing the maxi-
(f) Using the screening procedure described in
mum flaw dimensions at the end of the evaluation
H-4000, determine the failure mechanism for the mate-
period with the allowable flaw size, or by comparing
rial and temperature.
the actual pipe applied stress with the allowable stress
(g) Using the procedures described in either H-5000,
for the flaw size at the end of the evaluation period.
H-6000, or H-7000 for the three failure modes, deter-
(c) This Appendix provides rules for flaw modeling
mine the allowable flaw depths an and ao , or the
and evaluation. Flaw growth analysis is based on fatigue.
allowable applied stress Sc or Sa .
When stress corrosion cracking (SCC) is active, the
(h) Using the critical flaw parameters af and øf , or
growth shall be added to the growth from fatigue. Flaw
the piping stresses Pb or sh , apply the flaw evaluation
acceptance criteria of IWB-3652 include safety margins
criteria of IWB-3652 to determine the acceptability of
on failure for the three failure mechanisms described
the pipe for continued service.
above. The acceptance criteria shall be used to determine
acceptability of the flawed piping for continued service
until the next inspection (or until the end of service
lifetime) or to determine the time interval until a H-1300 NOMENCLATURE
subsequent inspection.
The following nomenclature is used.
apthe general depth dimension for a flaw, in.
afpthe maximum depth to which the detected
flaw is calculated to grow by the end of
the evaluation period, in.
anpthe maximum allowable flaw depth corres-
H-1200 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW
ponding to the flaw length øf for normal
The following is a summary of the analytical pro- operating (including upset and test) condi-
cedure. tions, in.
473
H-1300 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 H-1300
aopthe maximum allowable flaw depth corres- M2pparameter for circumferential collapse stress
ponding to the flaw length øf for postulated npmaterial constant in flaw growth equation
emergency and faulted conditions, in. NPSpnominal pipe size, in.
Apparameter to establish the Z-factor of Table ppinternal pressure, ksi
H-6310-1, dimensionless Pptotal axial load on pipe including pres-
Copmaterial constant in flaw growth equation sure, kips
CLporientation of a test specimen in the circum- Pmpthe primary membrane stress in the pipe at
ferential direction with longitudinal crack the flaw, ksi
plane orientation Pbpthe primary bending stress in the pipe at
CVNpCharpy V-notched absorbed energy, ft-lb the flaw, ksi
Dppipe outside diameter, in. P′bpbending stress at limit load for any combina-
da /dNpflaw growth rate, in. /cycle tion of primary and expansion stresses, ksi
EpYoungs modulus, ksi Peppipe expansion stress, ksi
E′pE /(1-m2), ksi Qpflaw shape parameter, dimensionless
Fpparameter for axial flaw stress intensity Rpmean radius of pipe, in.
factor R1pinside radius of pipe, in.
Fmpparameter for circumferential flaw mem- R2poutside radius of pipe, in.
brane stress intensity factor Scpallowable bending stress for a circumferen-
Fbpparameter for circumferential flaw bending tially flawed pipe, ksi
stress intensity factor Sapallowable hoop membrane stress for an axi-
J1mmpmeasure of toughness at 1 mm of crack ally flawed pipe, ksi
growth at upper-shelf temperature, in.- Sr′pa component of the screening criteria (SC),
lb /in.2 the ratio of the sum of the primary bending
JIcpmeasure of toughness due to crack extension and expansion stresses to the bending stress
at upper shelf, transition, and lower shelf at limit load, dimensionless
temperatures, in.-lb /in.2 Smpthe design stress intensity value as given
in Table I-1.1 of Section III, ksi
KIpmode I stress intensity factor, ksi √ in.
(SC)pscreening criteria parameter for determining
DKIpthe maximum range of KI fluctuation during
the analysis method, dimensionless
a transient, ksi√ in. (SF)psafety factor, dimensionless
K r′pa component of the screening criteria (SC), tppipe wall thickness, in.
the ratio of the stress intensity factor to the xpparameter a /t, dimensionless
material toughness, dimensionless Zpload multiplier for ductile flaw extension,
KImpmode I stress intensity factor for membrane dimensionless
loading, ksi√ in. apparameter (a /t) /(a /ø), dimensionless
KIbpmode I stress intensity factor for bending bpangle to neutral axis of flawed pipe, radians
loading, ksi√ in.
upone-half of the final flaw angle (see Fig.
H-4221-1), radians
KIrpstress intensity factor for residual stress,
mpPoisson’s ratio
ksi√ in. sf pflow stress as defined in Articles H-5320
øpgeneral flaw length dimension, in. and H-5420, ksi
øf pthe maximum length to which the detected sb′ preference limit load bending stress, ksi
flaw is calculated to grow by the end of søpreference limit load hoop stress, ksi
the evaluation period, in. shphoop stress in pipe at the flaw, ksi
øcritpcritical flaw length for stability of an axial sypmaterial yield stress at temperature as speci-
through-the-wall flaw, in. fied in Table H-4211-1, Table H-4212-1,
Mpapplied moment on the pipe, in.-kips or Table H-6310-2, ksi
474
ARTICLE H-2000
H-2100 SCOPE H-2400 FLAW ORIENTATION

This Article provides the rules for flaw shape, multiple Flaws that do not lie in either an axial1 or a circumfer-
flaws, flaw orientation, and flaw location that are used ential2 plane shall be projected onto these planes in
to compare the flaw with the allowable flaw size. accordance with the rules of IWA-3340. The axial and
circumferential flaws obtained by these projections shall
be evaluated separately in accordance with this Appen-
dix. Figures H-2400-1, H-2400-2, and H-2400-3 illus-
H-2200 FLAW SHAPE trate flaw characterization for skewed flaws.
The flaw shall be completely bounded by a rectangular
or circumferential planar area in accordance with the
methods described in IWA-3300. Figures H-2200-1 and H-2500 FLAW LOCATION
H-2200-2 illustrate flaw characterization for circumfer-
ential and axial pipe flaws. For the purpose of analysis, the flaw shall be consid-
ered in its actual location. The stresses due to system
loading shall be computed at this location. Surface or
subsurface flaw characterizations shall be used de-
H-2300 PROXIMITY TO CLOSEST pending on the type of flaw. When the flaw is subsurface,
FLAW but within the proximity limit of IWA-3340 of the
surface of the component, the flaw shall be considered
For multiple neighboring flaws, when the shortest
a surface flaw and bounded by a rectangular or circum-
distance between the boundaries of two neighboring
ferential planar area with the base on the surface.
flaws is within the proximity limits specified in IWA-
3300, the neighboring flaws shall be bounded by a
single rectangular or circumferential planar area in 1A plane containing the pipe axis.
accordance with IWA-3300. 2A plane perpendicular to the pipe axis.
475
Fig. H-2200-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 Fig. H-2200-2
FIG. H-2200-1 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION — FIG. H-2200-2 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION —

CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS AXIAL FLAWS
476
APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY Fig. H-2400-1
FIG. H-2400-1 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION—SKEWED AXIAL FLAWS PROJECTED INTO AXIAL PLANE
477
Fig. H-2400-2 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. H-2400-2 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION—SKEWED CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS PROJECTED INTO

CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE
478
APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY Fig. H-2400-3
FIG. H-2400-3 FLAW CHARACTERIZATION—COMPOUND SKEWED FLAW PROJECTED INTO

CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND AXIAL PLANES
479
ARTICLE H-3000
FLAW GROWTH ANALYSIS
H-3100 SCOPE (b) A cumulative fatigue flaw growth calculation

shall be performed using operating conditions and tran-
This Article provides the methodology for determina-
sients that apply during the evaluation period. Each
tion of subcritical flaw growth during the evaluation
transient shall be considered in approximate chronologi-
interval.
cal order as follows.
(1) Determine DKI , the maximum range of KI
fluctuation associated with the transient.
H-3200 SUBCRITICAL FLAW GROWTH (2) Determine the incremental flaw growth corres-
ANALYSIS ponding to DKI from the fatigue flaw growth rate curve
When a flaw is characterized in terms of an equivalent of A-4300-1.
axial or circumferential flaw, the maximum depth af , (c) After all transients have been considered, the
and the maximum length øf , at the end of the evaluation procedure of H-3210(a) and (b) yields the final flaw
period shall be determined. Subcritical crack growth size af and øf at the end of the evaluation period
shall be considered. When SCC is determined to be considering only fatigue flaw growth.
an active flaw growth mechanism for the pipe being
evaluated, it shall also be considered. Residual stresses
shall be included for both growth mechanisms.
H-3210 SUBCRITICAL FLAW GROWTH

DUE TO FATIGUE
H-3220 FLAW GROWTH DUE TO STRESS
(a) Fatigue flaw growth can be computed by
CORROSION CRACKING (SCC)
da /dN p Co(DKI )n Subcritical flaw growth due to SCC has not been
observed to be a significant flaw growth mechanism
where KI is the applied stress intensity factor, and n in ferritic piping. When growth due to SCC is deter-
and Co are constants dependent on the material and mined to be active, characterization shall be the responsi-
environmental conditions. bility of the Owner.
480
ARTICLE H-4000
SCREENING CRITERIA
H-4100 SCOPE TABLE H-4211-1

MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR
This Article is used to determine the failure mecha- CARBON STEEL BASE METALS AND WELDMENTS
nism and analysis method for the flawed pipe. Flaw
size, temperature, available material properties, and pipe Temp. ≥ Upper Shelf Temp. < Upper Shelf
Material
loadings are considered in the screening procedure. Category sy (ksi) JIc (lb/in.) sy (ksi) JIc (lb/in.)
1 27.1 600 27.3 45
2 27.1 350 27.3 45
H-4200 SCREENING CRITERIA GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Material Category 1: Seamless or welded wrought carbon steel
The sequence used to determine the failure mode pipe and pipe fittings that have a specified minimum yield strength
and analysis method is given in Fig. H-4200-1. The not greater than 40 ksi and welds made with E7015, E7016, and
E7018 electrodes in the as-welded or postweld heat treated conditions.
upper part of the figure relates to material toughness (b) Material Category 2: All other ferritic shielded metal arc and
determination.The lower part defines the appropriate submerged arc welds with specified minimum tensile strengths not
analysis method [i.e., limit load controlled by plastic greater than 80 ksi in the as-welded or postweld heat treated condi-
tions.
collapse, elastic-plastic fracture mechanics (EPFM), or
linear elastic fracture mechanics (LEFM)]. NOTE:
(1) Applicable to flawed pipes with circumferentially oriented
flaws only.
H-4210 MATERIAL FLAW TOLERANCE

The material toughness JIc shall be determined at
the upper shelf temperature and the transition and lower
shelf temperature regions, as appropriate.
behavior when it is determined from valid heat-specific
Charpy V-notch tests.
H-4211 Material Properties for
Circumferentially Oriented Flaws
(a) JIc shall be obtained directly from heat-specific
JIc experiments, or correlations with heat-specific CVN
data or reasonable lower bound CVN data. Alternatively, H-4212 Material Properties to Axially
values for JIc are provided in Table H-4211-1. Oriented Flaws
(b) The correlation at upper shelf temperatures for
use with CVN data is JIc in the CL direction shall be obtained directly
from heat specific experiments or, if justified, from
J1mm p 10CVN correlations with heat specific CVN data or reasonable
lower bound CVN data. If heat specific or reasonable
and J1mm shall replace JIc when this Charpy correlation lower bound KIc data for ferritic piping materials with
is used. In the absence of specific data, the upper shelf specified minimum yield not greater than 40 ksi
temperature for ferritic piping steels shall be 200°F. (276 MPa) are available for the CL direction, a conserva-
A lower temperature may be used to define upper shelf tive estimate for JIc shall be determined from
481
FIG. H-4200-1 FLOW CHART FOR SCREENING CRITERIA TO ESTABLISH THE ANALYSIS METHOD
482
H-4212 APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY H-4221.1
TABLE H-4212-1
MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR
CARBON STEEL BASE METAL AND WELDMENTS
Temp. ≥ Upper Shelf Temp. < Upper Shelf

sy (ksi) JIc (lb/in.) sy (ksi) JIc (lb/in.)
27.1 300 27.3 45
NOTE:
(1) Applicable to flawed pipes with axial flaws only.
1000 (KIc )2
JIc p
E
Alternatively, values for JIc shall be obtained from FIG. H-4221-1 CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAW
Table H-4212-1. In the absence of specific data, the GEOMETRY
upper shelf temperature for ferritic piping steels shall
be 200°F (93°C). A lower temperature may be used
to define upper shelf behavior when determined from
valid heat specific Charpy V-notch tests.
H-4220 ANALYSIS METHOD

DETERMINATION
The equations necessary to calculate the components
of the screening criteria K′r and Sr′ for specified applica-
tions involving circumferential or axial flaw orientations
are given in H-4221.
H-4221 Screening Criteria Computations FIG. H-4221-2 AXIAL FLAW GEOMETRY
The equations for K′r and Sr′ as used in Fig. H-

4200-1 are
circumferential flaws and for KI and sø in H-4221.2

K ′r p [1000KI 2 / (E ′J
Ic )]0.5 for axial flaws.
H-4221.1 Circumferential Flaws
(a) Stress intensity factor KI.
S ′r p(Pb + Pe) / sb (circumferential flaws) (1)
KI p KIm + KIb
where
S ′r p(pD / 2t) / sø (axial flaws)
KImp [P /(2pRt)](pa)0.5Fm
KIbp [M / (pR 2t) + Pe](pa)0.5 Fb
The relevant crack dimensions for this computation and
are shown in Fig. H-4221-1 and Fig. H-4221-2. The Fmp 1.10 + x[0.15241 + 16.772(xu / p)0.855
equations for KI and sb′ are given in H-4221.1 for − 14.944(xu / p)]
483
H-4221.1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 H-4221.2
Fbp 1.10 + x[−0.09967 + 5.0057(xu / p)0.565 or, if (u + b ) > p

− 2.8329(xu / p)]
xp a / t
u / pp ratio of crack length to pipe inner circumference
s′b p
2sy
p 312 − at2 sin b4 (3)
The above expressions for Fm and Fb are valid for

where
ø/a ≥ 2
0.08 ≤ x ≤ 0.8
0.05 ≤ u / p ≤ 0.5 bpp 1− 1 a
−
Pm
t 2.4 Sm 2@12 − at2
for 0.5 ≤ u / p ≤ 1.0, use u / p p 0.5
(b) Reference limit load bending stress sb′
H-4221.2 Axial Flaws
The reference bending stress at limit load [sb′ in Eq.
(a) Stress intensity factor KI
(1)] can be obtained for any specific membrane stress
Pm by satisfying Eqs. (2) and (3) below. In these KI p (pR / t)(pa / Q)0.5F
equations, and those for b, sy from Table H-4211-1
shall be used. where
Qp 1 + 4.593 (a / ø)1.65
F p 1.12 + 0.053a + 0.0055a 2
s′b p
2sy
p 3 a
2 sin b − sinu
t 4 (2) + (1.0 + 0.02a + 0.0191a 2) (20 − R / t) 2 / 1400
ap (a / t) / (a / ø)
(b) Reference limit load circumferential stress sø
where sø p sy [(1 − x) / (1 − x / M2)]
where
bp
1
2
a
3 P
p− u−p m
t 2.4 Sm 4 xp a / t
M2p [1 + (1.61 / 4Rt)ø2]0.5
484
ARTICLE H-5000
ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS USING LIMIT LOAD
CRITERIA
H-5100 SCOPE a circumferential flaw under emergency and faulted

conditions shall be determined from Table H-5310-2,
This Article provides methodology for determining
using the maximum values of the applied stress for
allowable flaw depths and allowable loads for flawed
these conditions. The allowable flaw depths an and ao
ferritic piping meeting the limit load criteria of H-4000.
shall be used in the acceptance criteria of IWB-3652
to determine the acceptability of the flawed pipe for
continued service.
H-5200 EVALUATION PROCEDURES
A flow chart for the evaluation options is given in Fig.
H-5200-1 when the failure mode has been determined to H-5320 ALLOWABLE APPLIED STRESSES
be plastic collapse at limit load using the procedures (ANALYTICAL SOLUTION)
of H-4000.
The allowable bending stress Sc in the flawed pipe
for a given end-of-evaluation-period flaw size for either
normal operating (including upset and test) or emer-
H-5300 CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS gency and faulted conditions shall be determined using
Allowable flaw depths based on a flow stress of the formulas below. These formulas are valid for Pb / Pm
2.4Sm and a primary membrane stress of 0.5Sm or 1.0Sm ≥ 1.0 and Pm ≤ 0.5 Sm for normal operating (including
shall be obtained from Tables H-5310-1 and H-5310- upset and test) conditions or Pm ≤ 1.0 Sm for emergency
2, respectively. Alternatively, equations (from which and faulted conditions. For circumferential flaws not
these tables can be derived) for allowable pipe bending penetrating the compressive side of the pipe such that
stresses given in H-5320 shall be solved using specified (u + b ) ≤ p (see Fig. H-4221-1), the relation between
or actual (when available) material properties and actual the applied loads and flaw depth at incipient plastic
piping system loadings. collapse is given by
H-5310 ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS

P ′b p
2sf
p 3 a
2 sin b − sin u
t 4
(TABULAR SOLUTION)
where
Allowable flaw depths for a given final flaw length
under normal operating (including upset and test) condi-
tions are given in Table H-5310-1 and under emergency
and faulted conditions in Table H-5310-2. Using the
bp
1
21 a P
p− u−p m
t sf 2
maximum value of the normal operating condition
applied stress during the evaluation interval and the øf and the otherterms are defined in H-1300. sf shall be
flaw parameter defined in H-3210, the maximum allow- taken as the average of yield and ultimate stress, or
able flaw depth an of a circumferential flaw under these 2.4 Sm when these values are not available. For longer
conditions shall be determined from Table H-5310-1. flaws penetrating the compressive bending region when
Similarly, the maximum allowable flaw depth ao of (u + b ) > p, the relation between the applied loads
485
FIG. H-5200-1 FLOW CHART FOR MATERIALS MEETING THE LOAD LIMIT CRITERIA
486
Table H-5310-1 APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY Table H-5310-2
TABLE H-5310-1
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIO
FOR CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS, NORMAL OPERATING (INCLUDING UPSET AND
TEST) CONDITIONS (LIMIT LOAD ANALYSIS)
Ratio of Flaw Length øf to Pipe Circumference

[Note (3)]
(Pm + Pb)/ Sm 0.5 or
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Greater
≥1.3 0.75 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.2 0.75 0.21 0.11 (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.1 0.75 0.75 0.53 0.27 0.19 0.16 0.13
1.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.48 0.34 0.28 0.23
0.9 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.48 0.39 0.31
0.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.50 0.39
0.7 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.60 0.46
0.6 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.53
0.5 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.60
0.4 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.66
0.3 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.72
≤0.2 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p an for a surface flaw; (3) Circumference based on pipe outside diameter.
p 2an for subsurface flaw (4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
(2) Pm p primary longitudinal membrane stress
Pb p primary bending stress
Pb /Pm ≥ 1.0 and Pm ≤ 0.5 Sm
Sm p 18.1 ksi when the Z-factors of H-6000
are applied.
TABLE H-5310-2
ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIO
FOR CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS, EMERGENCY AND FAULTED CONDITIONS
(LIMIT LOAD ANALYSIS)
Ratio of Flaw Length øf to Pipe Circumference

[Note (3)]
(Pm + Pb)/ Sm 0.5 or
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 Greater
≥2.6 0.75 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
2.4 0.75 0.22 0.11 (4) (4) (4) (4)
2.2 0.75 0.75 0.47 0.24 0.16 0.13 (4)
2.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.42 0.29 0.23 0.18
1.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.59 0.41 0.33 0.25
1.6 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.53 0.42 0.31
1.4 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.65 0.51 0.38
1.2 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.60 0.44
1.0 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.50
≤0.8 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.56
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p ao for a surface flaw; (2) Pm p primary longitudinal membrane stress
p 2ao for subsurface flaw Pb p primary bending stress
t p nominal thickness Pm /Pb ≥ 1.0 and Pm ≤ 1.0 Sm
Linear interpolation is permissible Sm p 18.1 ksi when the Z-factors of H-6000
are applied.
(3) Circumference based on pipe outside diameter.
(4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
487
and the flaw depth at incipient plastic collapse is tions are given in Table H-5410-1 and for emergency
given by and faulted conditions in Table H-5410-2. Using the
maximum value of the normal operating condition
P′b p
2sf
p 1
2−
a
t 2
sin b
pressure circumferential stress during the evaluation
interval and the øf flaw parameter defined in H-3210,
the maximum allowable flaw depth an of an axial flaw
where under these conditions shall be determined from Table
H-5410-1. Similarly, the maximum allowable flaw depth
bp
p
a
31 − at − Ps 4
m
f
ao of an axial flaw under emergency and faulted condi-
tions shall be determined from Table H-5410-2, using
2− the maximum value of the applied circumferential stress
t
for these conditions. The allowable flaw depths an and
The allowable pipe bendingstress Sc is ao shall be used in the acceptance criteria of IWB-
3652(a) to determine the acceptability of the flawed
P ′b
3 4
1 pipe for continued service.
Sc p − Pm 1 −
(SF) (SF)
where H-5420 ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS

Scp allowable bending stress for a circumferentially (ANALYTICAL SOLUTIONS)
flawed pipe The allowable flaw depths an and ao in the flawed
P′bp bending stress at incipient plastic collapse pipe for a given end of evaluation period flaw length
(SF)p safety factor øf for normal operating (including upset and test) or
p 2.77 for normal operating (including upset and emergency and faulted conditions are determined using
test) conditions the following formula.
The limits of applicability of this equation are
0.75 ≥ a / t > values of Table IWB-3514-1
sh p
sf
3 t/a − 1
4
(SF) t / a −1 / M2
(4)
The allowable pipe bending stress shall be used in the where

acceptance criteria of IWB-3652(b) to determine the sf p 2.4Sm
acceptability of the flawed pipe for continued service. M2p [1 + (1.61 / 4Rt)ø2]1 /2
(SF)p safety factor
p 3.0 for normal operating (including upset and
test) conditions
H-5400 AXIAL FLAWS
Allowable flaw depths shall be determined in accord- The limits of applicability of this equation are
ance with H-5410. Alternatively, equations (from which 0.75 ≥ a / t > values of Table IWB-3514-1, and
these tables can be derived) for allowable flaw sizes ø<øcrit
given in H-5420 shall be solved using either specified
or actual (when available) material properties and actual where øcrit is determined by the condition for the
piping system loadings. stability of through-wall flaws
sh p sf / M 2
The allowable flaw depths an and ao, determined from
(TABULAR SOLUTION)
Eq. (4) above, shall be used in the acceptance criteria
Allowable flaw depths for a given final flaw length of IWB-3652(a) to determine the acceptability of the
under normal operating (including upset and test) condi- flawed pipe for continued service.
488
TABLE H-5410-1 ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH1-TO-THICKNESS RATIO FOR AXIAL
FLAWS, NORMAL OPERATING (INCLUDING UPSET AND TEST) CONDITIONS (LIMIT LOAD ANALYSIS
Nondimensional Flaw Length, øf / √ Rt [Note (3)]

Stress Ratio
Table H-5410-1
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0
0.40 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.65 0.61 0.57 0.56 0.55 (4)
0.45 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.67 0.63 0.59 0.55 0.51 0.50 0.49 (4)
0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.61 0.56 0.53 0.49 0.45 0.43 (4) (4)
0.55 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.62 0.54 0.49 0.38 0.42 0.38 (4) (4) (4)
0.60 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.55 0.47 0.42 0.46 0.34 0.31 (4) (4) (4)
0.65 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.60 0.46 0.38 0.33 0.30 0.27 (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.70 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.57 0.48 0.34 0.27 0.23 0.21 0.18 (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.50 0.38 0.30 0.19 0.15 0.12 0.11 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.80 0.75 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p an for a surface flaw (3) øf p end of evaluation period flaw length
2an for a subsurface flaw R p mean radius of the pipe
Linear interpolation is permissible (4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
(2) Stress Ratio p (pD /2t) Sm
489
TABLE H-5410-2 ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH1-TO-THICKNESS RATIO FOR AXIAL
FLAWS, EMERGENCY AND FAULTED CONDITIONS (LIMIT LOAD ANALYSIS)

Stress Ratio
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY
0.80 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.65 0.63 0.61 (4)
0.90 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.67 0.63 0.59 0.57 (4) (4)
1.00 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.61 0.56 0.53 (4) (4) (4)
1.10 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.62 0.54 0.49 0.46 (4) (4) (4)
1.20 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.55 0.47 0.42 (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.30 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.60 0.46 0.38 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.40 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.69 0.57 0.48 0.34 0.27 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.50 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.50 0.38 0.30 0.19 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.60 0.75 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) Flaw depth p an for a surface flaw (3) øf p end of evaluation period flow length
2an for a subsurface flaw R p mean radius of the pipe
Linear interpolation is permissible (4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
(2) Stress Ratio p (pD /2t)/ Sm
Table H-5410-2
ARTICLE H-6000
ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS FOR FLAWED PIPE
MEETING THE EPFM CRITERIA
H-6100 SCOPE TABLE H-6310-1

LOAD MULTIPLIERS FOR CARBON STEEL BASE
This Article provides the methodology for determin- METALS AND WELDMENTS
ing allowable flaw depths and loads for flawed ferritic
piping meeting the criteria of H-4000 for materials for Material Category Z Factor
which fracture by ductile flaw extension may occur 1 Z p 1.20[1 + 0.021A(NPS − 4)]
prior to reaching limit load. 2 Z p 1.35[1 + 0.0184A(NPS − 4)]
where Z is a nondimensional term and
A p [0.125(R/t) − 0.25]0.25 for 5 ≤ R/t ≤ 10
A p [0.4(R/t) − 3.0]0.25 for 10 < R/t ≤ 20
GENERAL NOTES:
A flow chart for the evaluation options is given in Fig. (a) Material Category 1: Seamless or welded wrought carbon steel
pipe and pipe fittings that have a specified minimum yield strength
H-6200-1 when the failure mode has been determined to not greater than 40 ksi and welds made with E7015, E7016, or
be ductile flaw extension prior to reaching limit load. E7018 electrodes in the as-welded or postweld heat treated conditions.
(b) Material Category 2: All other ferritic shielded metal arc and
submerged arc welds with specified minimum tensile strengths not
greater than 80 ksi in the as-welded or postweld heat treated condi-
H-6300 CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS tions.
The tabular solutions for circumferential flaws shall

be used to determine the allowable flaw depths from
the limit load solution of H-5310 with the ordinate acceptance criteria of IWB-3652(a) to determine the
stress ratio modified by Z factors given in H-6310. acceptability of the flawed pipe for continued service.
Alternatively, equations for allowable pipe bending The Z factors in Table H-6310-1 or Table H-6310-
stresses given in H-6320 shall be satisfied. 2 shall be used as load multipliers to the stress ratio
in Tables H-5310-1 and H-5310-2 to determine the
allowable flaw depth for appropriate material, pipe size,
H-6310 ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS and operating condition, as follows.
(TABULAR SOLUTION) Step 1. Determine the stress ratio for the appropriate
operating condition as follows:
shall be obtained from Table H-5310-1 for normal Stress Ratio p Z (Pm + Pb + Pe / 2.77) / Sm
operating (including upset and test) conditions and from
for normal operating (including upset and test)
Table H-5310-2 for emergency and faulted conditions
conditions, and
with the ordinate stress ratio for both tables modified
by the Z factors of Table H-6310-1 or Table H-6310- Stress Ratio p Z (Pm + Pb + Pe / 1.39) / Sm
2. The maximum allowable flaw depth, an or ao , shall
for emergency and faulted conditions. In both
be determined using the maximum value of the applied
cases, use Sm p 18.1 ksi.
stresses during the evaluation interval for the applicable
conditions and the øf flaw length determined from H- Step 2. Use Tables H-5310-1 and H-5310-2 for the
3210. The allowable flaw depths shall be used in the evaluation, using the stress ratio computed
490
H-6310 APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY H-6320
FIG. H-6200-1 FLOW CHART FOR MATERIALS FOR WHICH DUCTILE FLAW EXTENSION MAY OCCUR
PRIOR TO LIMIT LOAD
P ′b
from Step 1. Determine the allowable flaw
depth, using linear interpolation if necessary.
Sc p
1
1
(SF) Z 2 1
− Pe − Pm 1 −
1
Z(SF) 2
where
P′b p bending stress at incipient plastic collapse deter-
mined from H-5320
Zp load multiplier from Table H-6310-1 for speci-
H-6320 ALLOWABLE APPLIED STRESS fied material properties or from Table H-6310-
(ANALYTICAL SOLUTION) 2 for actual material properties
The allowable bending stress Sc in the flawed pipe (SF)p safety factor
for a given end of evaluation period flaw size for either p 2.77 for normal operating (including upset and
normal operating (including upset and test) conditions test) conditions
or emergency and faulted conditions shall be deter- p 1.39 for emergency and faulted conditions.
mined using The limits of applicability of this equation are
491
TABLE H-6310-2
LOAD MULTIPLIERS FOR CARBON STEEL BASE METALS AND WELDMENTS FOR
USER-SPECIFIED DATA
Material
Material Category Properties
[Note (1)] [Note (2)] Z Factor [Note (3)]
1 27.1 < sy ≤ 40.0
600 ≤ JIc < 1050 Z p 2.281M1 [1 + 0.0210A(NPS − 4)]/ sy0.46
JIc ≥ 1050 Z p 1.958M1 [1 + 0.0152A(NPS − 4)]/ sy0.46
2 27.1 ≤ sy ≤ 40.0
350 ≤ JIc < 600 Z p 2.566M1 [1 + 0.0184A(NPS − 4)]/ sy0.46
600 ≤ JIc < 1050 Z p 2.281M1 [1 + 0.0210A(NPS − 4)]/ sy0.46
JIc ≥ 1050 Z p 1.958M1 [1 + 0.0152A(NPS − 4)]/ sy0.46
NOTES:
(1) Material categories are defined in Table H-6310-1.
(2) sy and JIc are in units of ksi and in.-lb/in.2, respectively. sy p 0.2% offset yield strength at temperature
or the Section III, Appendix I value at temperature.
(3) M1 is the ratio of the flow stress (sf) used in the limit load calculation to the design stress (Sm). When
using Table H-5310-1 and H-5310-2 to evaluate the allowable flaw size, use M1 p 2.4 and Sm p 18.1
ksi. When a different Sm is used, the procedures of H-6320 shall be used. When Z is calculated to be
less than M1 /2.4, use Z p M1 /2.4.
A p [0.125(r/t − 0.25]0.25for 5 ≤ R/t ≤ 10
A p [0.4(R/t − 3.0]0.25 for 10 < R/t ≤ 20
0.75 ≥ a / t > values of Table IWB-3514-1 lb / in.2 or greater for normal operating (including upset
and test) conditions shall be obtained from Table H-
6410-1 and for emergency and faulted conditions in
The allowable pipe bending stress shall be used in the Table H-6410-2. Using the maximum value of the
acceptance criteria of IWB-3652(b) to determine the normal operating condition pressure circumferential
acceptability of the flawed pipe for continued service. stress during the evaluation interval and the øf flaw
parameter defined in H-3210, the maximum allowable
flaw depth, an , of an axial flaw under these conditions
shall be determined from Table H-6410-1. Similarly,
the maximum allowable flaw depth, ao , of an axial
H-6400 AXIAL FLAWS flaw under emergency and faulted conditions shall be
determined from Table H-6410-2, using the maximum
Allowable flaw depths for materials where JIc in the value of the applied circumferential stress for these
CL direction is not less than 600 in.-lb / in.2 shall be conditions. The allowable flaw depths an and ao shall
determined in accordance with H-6410. Alternatively, be used in the acceptance criteria of IWB-3652(a) to
equations for allowable flaw depths given in H-6420 determine the acceptability of the flawed pipe for
shall be satisfied using specified or actual (when avail- continued service.
able) material properties and actual piping system load-
ings. Tables of allowable flaw sizes for materials with
the specified properties given in H-4212 are in course
of preparation.

(TABULAR SOLUTION) H-6420 ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS
(ANALYTICAL SOLUTION)
in a material with JIc in the CL direction of 600 in.- In the course of preparation.
492
TABLE H-6410-1 ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIO FOR AXIAL
FLAWS, NORMAL (INCLUDING UPSET AND TEST) CONDITIONS 1

Table H-6410-1
Stress Ratio
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
0.40 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.45 (4)
0.45 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.39 (4) (4)
0.50 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.71 0.51 0.49 0.47 0.44 0.42 0.41 0.34 (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.55 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.48 0.43 0.39 0.37 0.36 0.29 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.60 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.51 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.26 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.65 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.38 0.33 0.28 0.23 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.70 0.75 0.70 0.59 0.30 0.27 0.19 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.75 0.75 0.60 0.38 0.15 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
0.80 0.75 0.50 0.12 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) JIc ≥ 600 in.-lb/in.2 in the CL direction (4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
(2) Stress Ratio = (pD /2t)/18.1
(3) øf = end of evaluation period flaw length
R = mean radius of the pipe
t = thickness
493
TABLE H-6410-2 ALLOWABLE END-OF-EVALUATION PERIOD FLAW DEPTH-TO-THICKNESS RATIO FOR AXIAL
FLAWS, (EMERGENCY AND FAULTED CONDITIONS)1

Stress Ratio
[Note (2)] 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8
APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY
0.80 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.56 0.45 (4)
0.90 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.39 (4) (4)
1.00 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.71 0.51 0.49 0.47 0.44 0.42 0.41 0.34 (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.10 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.62 0.48 0.43 0.39 0.37 0.36 0.29 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.20 0.75 0.75 0.68 0.51 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.26 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.30 0.75 0.75 0.70 0.38 0.33 0.28 0.23 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.40 0.75 0.70 0.59 0.30 0.27 0.19 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.50 0.75 0.60 0.38 0.15 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
1.60 0.75 0.50 0.12 (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4) (4)
NOTES:
(1) JIc ≥ 600 in.-lb/in.2 in the CL direction (4) Table IWB-3514-1 shall be used.
(2) Stress Ratio = (pD /2t)/18.1
(3) øf = end of evaluation period flaw length
R = mean radius of the pipe
t = thickness
Table H-6410-2
ARTICLE H-7000
ALLOWABLE FLAW DEPTHS FOR FLAWED PIPE
MEETING THE LEFM CRITERIA
H-7100 SCOPE
This Article provides the methodology for determin-
ing allowable flaw depths in flawed ferritic piping
meeting the linear elastic fracture mechanics criteria
of H-4000 when ductile crack extension does not occur
prior to fracture. Solutions are given for both axial
and circumferential flaws and are presented in the
form of equations that shall be used with the material
properties obtained in accordance with H-4211 or H-
4212, for circumferential and axial flaws, respectively.
Applied stresses shall include residual stresses.

A flow chart for the evaluation options is given in Fig.
H-7200-1 when the failure mode has been determined to
be linear elastic fracture using the procedures of H-
4000. The allowable flaw depth an or ao shall be
obtained by solving Eq. (5) for the flaw size a.
FIG. H-7200-1 FLOW CHART FOR MATERIALS
KI p (JIc E ′ / 1000)0.5 (5) MEETING THE LINEAR ELASTIC FRACTURE
CRITERIA
where KI contains the flaw size a and is defined for

a circumferential flaw in H-7300 and for an axial flaw
in H-7400. The allowable flaw depth shall be used in
the acceptance criteria of IWB-3652(a) to determine H-7300 CIRCUMFERENTIAL FLAWS
the acceptability of the flawed pipe for continued service. The stress intensity factor for a circumferential flaw
Conversely, Eq. (5) may be rewritten as an equivalent (including the appropriate safety factor) is
criteria in terms of the stress intensity factor.
KI p KIm + KIb + KIr
KI ≤ (JIc E′ / 1000)0.5
where
KImp (SF)[P /(2p Rt)](pa)0.5Fm
For this criteria, the end-of-evaluation period flaw depth KIbp [(SF)M / (pR 2t) + Pe](pa)0.5Fb
af shall be used to determine KI in H-7300 and H-7400. (SF)p safety factor
494
H-7300 APPENDIX H — NONMANDATORY H-7400

test) conditions
and the other terms are defined in H-4221.1(a). Residual
stresses shall be included with a safety factor of 1.0.
H-7400 AXIAL FLAWS

The stress intensity factor for an axial flaw (including
the appropriate safety factor) is
KI p KIm + KIr
where
pR
KImp (SF) (pa / Q)0.5F
t
(SF)p safety factor
test) conditions
and the other terms are defined in H-4221.2(a). Residual
stresses shall be included with a safety factor of 1.0.
495
APPENDIX J
GUIDE TO PLANT MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES
AND SECTION XI REPAIR /REPLACEMENT
ACTIVITIES
497
ARTICLE J-1000
SCOPE
(a) This Appendix provides assistance to determine

the applicability of IWA-4000. For the purpose of this
Appendix, repair /replacement activities are considered
separate from maintenance activities.
(b) Fig. J-1000-1 shall be used to distinguish between
repair /replacement activities and maintenance activities.
Maintenance activities may be categorized as activities
requiring subsequent Section XI tests or examinations
or as activities for which Section XI is not applicable.
(c) Fig. J-1000-1 shall be used to determine the
applicability of the following provisions.
499

Fig. J-1000-1 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1
FIG. J-1000-1 DECISION TREE
A99 500

ARTICLE J-2000
(a) Repair /replacement activities shall comply with

the requirements of IWA-4000 and shall be in accord-
ance with the Repair /Replacement Program.
(b) The following are some examples of repair /
replacement activities when performed on items within
the Section XI scope:
(1) removing weld or material defects;
(2) reducing the size of defects to a size acceptable
to the applicable flaw evaluation criteria;
(3) performing welding or brazing;
(4) adding items;
(5) system changes, such as rerouting of piping;
(6) modifying items;
(7) rerating.
501
ARTICLE J-3000
MAINTENANCE REQUIRING SUBSEQUENT
SECTION XI TEST OR EXAMINATION
(a) Maintenance activities within this category are (1) adjustment of packing, removal of bonnet, stem
not within the scope of Section XI but are performed and assembly or actuator, or disconnection of hydraulic or
controlled in accordance with the Owner’s procedures. electrical lines on valves, as required by Subsection
However, due to the nature of the work or item involved, IWV;
Section XI tests or examinations are required to be (2) changing oil, flushing the cooling system, ad-
performed subsequent to completion of the maintenance justing packing, adding packing rings or mechanical seal
work activity. maintenance on pumps, as required by Subsection IWP;
(b) The maintenance activities within this category (3) grinding or machining on valve disk seating
differ from the maintenance activities described in surfaces;
Article J-4000 in that these activities are performed on (4) removing arc strikes or weld spatter, in the
items within the Section XIx boundary and these activi-
area of previous PSI /ISI surface examinations;
ties affect the existing inspection, test, or examination
(5) preparing welds for NDE;
record required by this Division.
(6) adjustment of pressure relief device set points
(c) The following are some examples of maintenance
in accordance with the existing design requirements.
activities that may require subsequent Section XI test
or examination:
502
ARTICLE J-4000
MAINTENANCE NOT REQUIRING SUBSEQUENT
SECTION XI TEST OR EXAMINATION
(a) Work activities on items not within the classifica-

tion and boundaries of jurisdiction (IWA-1320) are not
within the scope of this Division. These activities are
performed and controlled in accordance with the Own-
er’s procedures.
(b) Work activities not defined as repair /replacement
activities that are performed on items within the classi-
fication of boundaries of jurisdiction of this Division
(IWA-1320), but which do not affect a Section XI
required test or examination, are not within the scope
of this Division. These activities are performed and
controlled in accordance with the Owner’s procedures.
Replacing hand-wheels on manually operated valves is
an example of a maintenance activity.
503
APPENDIX K
ASSESSMENT OF REACTOR VESSELS WITH
LOW UPPER SHELF CHARPY IMPACT ENERGY
LEVELS
505
ARTICLE K-1000
INTRODUCTION
K-1100 SCOPE dures for Level C and D Service Loadings are provided
in K-5000.
This Appendix provides acceptance criteria and evalu-
ation procedures for determining acceptability for opera-
tion of a reactor vessel when the vessel metal tempera-
ture is in the upper shelf range. The methodology
is based on the principles of elastic-plastic fracture K-1300 GENERAL NOMENCLATURE A99
mechanics. Flaws shall be postulated in the reactor
apflaw depth that includes ductile flaw
vessel at locations of predicted low upper shelf Charpy
extension (in.)
impact energy, and the applied J-integral for these flaws aepeffective flaw depth that includes ductile
shall be calculated and compared with the J-integral
flaw extension and a plastic-zone correc-
fracture resistance of the material to determine accept-
tion (in.)
ability. All specified design transients for the reactor
ae*peffective flaw depth at onset of flaw
vessel shall be considered.
instability, including ductile flaw exten-
sion and a plastic-zone correction (in.)
aoppostulated initial flaw depth (in.)
⌬apamount of ductile flaw extension (in.)
⌬a*pamount of ductile flaw extension at onset
of flaw instability (in.)
C1, C2pmaterial constants used to describe the
power-law fit to the J-integral resistance
curve for the material, JR p C1 (⌬a)C2
Cmpmaterial coefficient for calculation of
K-1200 PROCEDURE
stress intensity factor due to radial ther-
The following analytical procedure shall be used. mal gradient [ksi-hour/(in.2-°F)]
(a) Reactor vessel flaws shall be postulated in accord- (CR)pcooldown rate (°F /hr)
ance with the criteria of K-2000. dpthermal diffusivity (in.2/hour)
(b) Loading conditions at the locations of the postu- EpYoung’s modulus (ksi)
lated flaws shall be determined for Level A, B, C, and E ′p E /(1-␯2) (ksi)
D Service Loadings. F1, F2, F3pgeometry factors used to calculate the
(c) Material properties, including E, ␴y, and the J- stress intensity factor (dimensionless)
integral resistance curve (J-R curve), shall be determined F1*, F2*, F3*pgeometry factors used to calculate the
at the locations of the postulated flaws. Requirements stress intensity factor at onset of flaw
for determining the J-R curve are provided in K-3300. instability (dimensionless)
(d) The postulated flaws shall be evaluated in accord- JpJ-integral due to the applied loads (in.-
ance with the acceptance criteria of K-2000. Require- lb /in.2)
ments for evaluating the applied J-integral are provided JRpJ-integral fracture resistance for the mate-
in K-3200, and for determining flaw stability in K-3400. rial (in.-lb /in.2)
Three permissible evaluation methods are described in J0.1p J-integral fracture resistance for the mate-
K-3500. Detailed calculation procedures for Levels A rial at a ductile flaw extension of 0.10
and B Service Loadings are provided in K-4000. Proce- in. (in.-lb /in.2)
507

K-1300 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 K-1300
J1papplied J-integral at a flaw depth of ao plant specific Overpressure Protection

+ 0.10 in. (in.-lb /in.2) Report, but not exceeding 1.1 times the
*
J pJ-integral at onset of flaw instability (in.- design pressure (ksi)
lb /in.2) Psppressure used to calculate the applied J-
KIpmode I stress intensity factor integral /tearing modulus line (ksi)
(ksi √ in.) P*pinternal pressure at onset of flaw instabil-
KIppmode I stress intensity factor due to ity (ksi)
internal pressure, calculated with no plas- Popreference limit-load internal pressure
tic-zone correction (ksi √ in.) (ksi)
K′Ipp KIp calculated with a plastic-zone correc- Rip inner radius of the vessel (in.)
tion (ksi √ in.) Srpabscissa of the failure assessment dia-
K *IppKIp at onset of flaw instability, calculated gram curve (dimensionless)
with a plastic-zone correction S r′p ratio of internal pressure to reference
(ksi √ in.) limit-load internal pressure (dimen-
KItpmode I stress intensity factor due to a sionless)
radial thermal gradient through the vessel (SF)p safety factor (dimensionless)
wall, calculated with no plastic-zone cor- tp vessel wall thickness (in.)
rection (ksi √ in.) Tp tearing modulus due to the applied loads
KIt′pKIt calculated with a plastic-zone correc- (dimensionless)
tion (ksi √ in.) TRptearing modulus resistance for the mate-
KIt*pKIt at onset of flaw instability, calculated rial (dimensionless)
with a plastic-zone correction (ksi Wpparameter used to relate the applied J-
√ in.) integral to the applied tearing modulus
Krp ordinate of the failure assessment dia- (dimensionless)
gram curve (dimensionless) ␣pcoefficient of thermal expansion (in./
Kr′p ratio of the stress intensity factor to in./°F)
the fracture toughness for the material ␯pPoisson’s ratio (dimensionless)
(dimensionless) ␴fp reference flow stress, specified as 85
ppinternal pressure (ksi) ksi (ksi)
Papaccumulation pressure as defined in the ␴ypyield strength for the material (ksi)
508

ARTICLE K-2000
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
K-2100 SCOPE K-2300 LEVEL C SERVICE LOADINGS

Adequacy of the upper shelf toughness of the reactor (a) When evaluating adequacy of the upper shelf
vessel shall be determined by analysis. The reactor toughness for the weld material for Level C Service
vessel is acceptable for continued service when the Loadings, interior semi-elliptical surface flaws with
criteria of K-2200, K-2300, and K-2400 are satisfied. depths up to 1⁄10 of the base metal wall thickness, plus
the cladding thickness, with total depths not exceeding
1 in., and a surface length six times the depth, shall
be postulated, with the flaw’s major axis oriented along
the weld of concern, and the flaw plane oriented in
K-2200 LEVELS A AND B SERVICE the radial direction. When evaluating adequacy of the
LOADINGS upper shelf toughness for the base material, both interior
axial and circumferential flaws shall be postulated, and
(a) When evaluating adequacy of the upper shelf
toughness properties for the corresponding orientation
toughness for the weld material for Levels A and B
shall be used. Flaws of various depths, ranging up to
Service Loadings, an interior semi-elliptical surface flaw
the maximum postulated depth, shall be analyzed to
with a depth one-quarter of the wall thickness and a
determine the most limiting flaw depth. Smaller maxi-
length six times the depth shall be postulated, with the
mum flaw sizes may be used when justified. Two
flaw’s major axis oriented along the weld of concern,
criteria shall be satisfied:
and the flaw plane oriented in the radial direction.
(1) The applied J-integral shall be less than the
When evaluating adequacy of the upper shelf toughness
J-integral of the material at a ductile flaw extension
for the base material, both interior axial and circumferen-
of 0.10 in., using a factor of safety of 1 on loading.
tial flaws with depths one-quarter of the wall thickness
(2) Flaw extensions shall be ductile and stable,
and lengths six times the depth shall be postulated,
using a factor of safety of 1 on loading.
and toughness properties for the corresponding orienta-
(b) The J-integral resistance versus flaw extension
tion shall be used. Smaller flaw sizes may be used
curve shall be a conservative representation for the
when justified. Two criteria shall be satisfied:
vessel material under evaluation.
(1) The applied J-integral evaluated at a pressure
1.15 times the accumulation pressure as defined in the
plant specific Overpressure Protection Report, with a
factor of safety of 1 on thermal loading for the plant
K-2400 LEVEL D SERVICE LOADINGS
specific heatup and cooldown conditions, shall be less
than the J-integral of the material at a ductile flaw (a) When evaluating adequacy of the upper shelf
extension of 0.1 in. toughness for Level D Service Loadings, flaws as
(2) Flaw extensions at pressures up to 1.25 times specified for Level C Service Loadings in K-2300
the accumulation pressure of K-2200(a)(1) shall be shall be postulated, and toughness properties for the
ductile and stable, using a factor of safety of 1 on corresponding orientation shall be used. Flaws of various
thermal loading for the plant specific heatup and cool- depths, ranging up to the maximum postulated depth,
down conditions. shall be analyzed to determine the most limiting flaw
(b) The J-integral resistance versus flaw extension depth. Smaller maximum flaw sizes may be used when
curve shall be a conservative representation for the justified. Flaw extensions shall be ductile and stable,
vessel material under evaluation. using a factor of safety of 1 on loading.
509
(b) The J-integral resistance versus flaw extension

curve shall be a best estimate representation for the
vessel material under evaluation.
(c) The total flaw depth after stable flaw extension
shall be less than or equal to 75% of the vessel wall
thickness, and the remaining ligament shall not be
subject to tensile instability.
510
ARTICLE K-3000
ANALYSIS
K-3100 SCOPE temperature, chemical composition, and fluence level.

Crack extension shall be ductile tearing with no
This Article contains a description of procedures for cleavage.
evaluating applied fracture mechanics parameters, as
(c) When K-3300(a) or (b) cannot be used, an indirect
well as requirements for determining the J-R curve for method of estimating the J-R curve shall be used
the material. provided the method is justified for the material.
K-3200 APPLIED J-INTEGRAL

K-3400 FLAW STABILITY A99
Calculation of the J-integral due to applied loads
(a) The equilibrium equation for stable flaw exten-
shall account for elastic-plastic behavior of the stress-
sion is:
strain curve for the material. When elastic fracture
mechanics with small scale yielding applies, the J-
integral may be calculated using crack-tip stress intensity J p JR
factor formulae with a plastic-zone correction. The
method of calculation shall be documented. where J is the J-integral due to applied loads for the
postulated flaw in the vessel, and JR is the J-integral
resistance to ductile tearing for the material.
(b) The inequality for flaw stability due to ductile
K-3300 SELECTION OF THE J-
tearing is:
INTEGRAL RESISTANCE
CURVE ∂J dJR
<
When evaluating the vessel for Level A, B, and C ∂a da
Service Loadings, the J-integral resistance versus crack-
extension curve (J-R curve) shall be a conservative where ∂J / ∂a is the partial derivative of the applied J-
representation of the toughness of the controlling beltline integral with respect to flaw depth, a, with constant
material at upper shelf temperatures in the operating load, and dJR / da is the slope of the J-R curve. Under
range. When evaluating the vessel for Level D Service increasing load, stable flaw extension will continue as
Loadings, the J-R curve shall be a best estimate represen- long as ∂J / ∂a remains less than d JR / da.
tation of the toughness of the controlling beltline mate-
rial at upper shelf temperatures in the operating range.
One of the following options shall be used to determine K-3500 EVALUATION METHOD FOR
the J-R curve. LEVELS A AND B SERVICE
(a) A J-R curve shall be generated for the material
LOADINGS
by following accepted test procedures. The J-R curve
shall be based on the proper combination of crack (a) The procedure provided in K-4200 shall be used
orientation, temperature, and fluence level. Crack exten- to evaluate the applied J-integral for a specified amount
sion shall be ductile tearing with no cleavage. of ductile flaw extension.
(b) A J-R curve shall be generated from a J-integral (b) There are three acceptable methods for applying
database obtained from the same class of material with flaw stability acceptance criteria in accordance with the
the same orientation using correlations for effects of governing flaw stability rules in K-3400. The first is
511

a J-R curve — crack driving force diagram method.

In this method flaw stability is evaluated by a direct
application of the flaw stability rules provided in K-
3400. Guidelines for using this method are provided
in K-4310. The second is a failure assessment diagram
method. A procedure based on this method for the
postulated initial one-quarter wall thickness flaw is
provided in K-4320. The third is a J-integral / tearing
modulus method. A procedure based on this method
for the postulated initial one-quarter wall thickness flaw
is provided in K-4330.
512

ARTICLE K-4000
EVALUATION PROCEDURES FOR
LEVELS A AND B SERVICE LOADINGS
K-4100 SCOPE lated with a safety factor (SF) on pressure using the
following:
This Article contains calculation procedures to satisfy
the acceptance criteria in K-2000 for Level A and B
Service Loadings. A procedure to satisfy the J-integral KIp p (SF) p (1 + Ri /2t) (pa) 0.5 F2 (2)
criteria for a specified amount of flaw extension of 0.1
in. is provided in K-4200. Procedures to satisfy the where
flaw stability criteria are provided in K-4300. These
procedures include axial and circumferential flaw orien- F2 p 0.885 + 0.233 (a /t) + 0.345 (a /t) 2
tations.
This equation for KIp is valid for 0.2 ≤ a /t ≤ 0.5, and
includes the effect of pressure acting on the flaw faces.
K-4200 EVALUATION PROCEDURE FOR (c) For an axial or circumferential flaw of depth a,
THE APPLIED J-INTEGRAL the stress intensity factor due to radial thermal gradients
shall be calculated using the following:
K-4210 CALCULATION OF THE APPLIED
J-INTEGRAL
KIt p Cm (CR) t 2.5 F3 (3)
Calculation of the applied J-integral consists of two
steps: Step 1 calculates effective flaw depth, including where
a plastic-zone correction; and Step 2 calculates the J-
integral for small scale yielding based on this effective
F3 p 0.1181 + 0.5353 (a /t) − 1.273 (a /t) 2 + 0.6046 (a /t) 3
flaw depth.
Step 1.
(a) For an axial flaw of depth a, the stress intensity Ea
factor due to internal pressure shall be calculated with Cm p
[(1− v) d]
a safety factor (SF ) on pressure using the following:
For SA-302 Grades A and B, SA-533 Grade B, Class
KIp p (SF) p (1 + Ri /t) (pa) 0.5 F1 (1) 1, and SA-508 Classes 2 and 3 steels, and their
associated weldments, Cm equal to 0.0051 (ksi-hr)/(in.2-
where °F) can be used. Properties given in Part D of Section
II can be used to determine Cm for other materials.
F1 p 0.982 + 1.006 (a /t)2 This equation for KIt is valid for 0.20 ≤ a /t ≤ 0.50,
and 0 ≤ (CR) ≤ 100°F /hr.
This equation for KIp is valid for 0.2 ≤ a /t ≤ 0.5, and (d) The effective flaw depth for small scale yielding,
includes the effect of pressure acting on the flaw faces. ae, shall be calculated using the following:
(b) For a circumferential flaw of depth a, the stress
intensity factor due to internal pressure shall be calcu- ae p a + [1 /(6p)] [(K Ip + K It) / sy] 2
513
FIG. K-4310-1 COMPARISON OF THE SLOPES OF THE APPLIED J-INTEGRAL CURVE AND THE J-R CURVE
Step 2. based on a ductile flaw extension of 0.10 in. in K-

(a) For an axial flaw, the stress intensity factor due 2200(a)(1) are satisfied when the following inequality
to internal pressure for small scale yielding, K Ip′ , shall is satisfied.
be calculated, substituting ae for a in Eq. (1), including
the equation for F1. For a circumferential flaw, K Ip ′ J1 < J0.1
shall be calculated, substituting ae for a in Eq. (2),
including the equation for F2. For an axial or circumfer- where
ential flaw, the stress intensity factor due to radial J1p the applied J-integral for a safety factor on pres-
thermal gradients for small scale yielding, KIt′, shall be sure of 1.15, and a safety factor of 1 on thermal
calculated, substituting ae for a in Eq. (3), including loading
the equation for F3. Eqs. (1), (2), and (3) are valid J0.1p the J-integral resistance at a ductile flaw exten-
for 0.2 ≤ ae /t ≤ 0.5. sion of 0.1 in.
(b) The J-integral due to applied loads for small
scale yielding shall be calculated using the following:
K-4300 EVALUATION PROCEDURES
J p 1000 (K ′Ip + K ′It )2 /E ′
FOR FLAW STABILITY
K-4310 J-R CURVE — CRACK DRIVING
K-4220 EVALUATION USING CRITERION FORCE DIAGRAM PROCEDURE
FOR FLAW EXTENSION OF 0.1 in.
Flaw stability shall be evaluated by direct application
The J-integral due to applied loads, J1 , shall be of the flaw stability rules in K-3400. The applied J-
calculated in accordance with K-4210. A flaw depth a integral shall be calculated for a series of flaw depths
of 0.25t + 0.1 in., a pressure p equal to the accumulation corresponding to increasing amounts of ductile flaw
pressure for Level A and B Service Loadings, Pa, and extension. The applied J-integral for Level A and B
a safety factor (SF) on pressure of 1.15 shall be used. Service Loadings shall be calculated using the proce-
Acceptance criteria for Level A and B Service Loadings dures provided in K-4210. The applied pressure p shall
514
K-4310 APPENDIX K — NONMANDATORY K-4322
FIG. K-4320-1 FAILURE ASSESSMENT DIAGRAM FOR THE ONE-QUARTER WALL THICKNESS FLAW
be equal to the accumulation pressure for Level A and 4320-1. These curves are based on material properties
B Service Loadings, Pa; and the safety factor (SF) on which are characteristic of reactor pressure vessel steels.
pressure shall be 1.25. The applied J-integral shall be
plotted against crack depth on the crack driving force
K-4322 Failure Assessment Point Coordinates
diagram to produce the applied J-integral curve, as
illustrated in Fig. K-4310-1. The J-R curve shall be The flaw depth a for ductile flaw extension ⌬a is
plotted on the crack driving force diagram, and shall given by the following:
intersect the horizontal axis at the initial flaw depth,
ao. Flaw stability at a given applied load is verified a p 0.25t + ⌬a
when the slope of the applied J-integral curve is less
than the slope of the J-R curve at the point on the J- The failure assessment point coordinates, Sr′ and Kr′,
R curve where the two curves intersect. for ductile flaw extension ⌬a shall be calculated as
follows:
K-4320 FAILURE ASSESSMENT DIAGRAM K r′ p KI (1000 /E ′JR)0.5

PROCEDURE
Use of this procedure shall be limited to a postulated where the stress intensity factor shall be calculated
initial flaw depth of one-quarter of the wall thickness. using flaw depth a without the plastic-zone correction,
and is given by the following:
K-4321 Failure Assessment Diagram Curve KI p KIp + KIt

The corresponding failure assessment diagram curve
of Fig. K-4320-1 shall be used for axial and circumferen- and
tial flaws. The coordinates Sr and Kr of the failure
assessment diagram curves are provided in Table K- S ′r p (SF) p /Po
515

TABLE K-4320-1 pressure is given by Eq. (2). The stress intensity factor
COORDINATES OF THE FAILURE ASSESSMENT due to radial thermal gradients is given by Eq. (3).
DIAGRAM CURVES OF FIG. K-4320-1 (b) The reference limit-load pressure is given by the
following:
Kr For Axial Kr For Circum-
Sr Flaw Curve ferential Flaw Curve
␴y [1 − 0.91 (0.25 + (⌬a /t))2 (t /R i)]
0.000 1.000 1.000 Po p
1 + (R i /2t)
0.050 1.000 1.000
0.100 0.999 0.999
0.150 0.998 0.998 (c) For materials with yield strength ␴y greater than
0.200 0.996 0.996 85 ksi (586 MPa), ␴y in this equation shall be 85 ksi
0.250 0.993 0.994
(586 MPa). This equation for Po is valid for 0 ≤ ⌬a /t
0.300 0.990 0.991
0.350 0.987 0.986 ≤ 0.25.
0.400 0.981 0.978
0.450 0.973 0.965
0.500 0.960 0.943 K-4323 Evaluation Using Criterion for Flaw
0.550 0.939 0.908 Stability
0.600 0.908 0.856
0.650 0.864 0.788 Assessment points shall be calculated for each loading
0.700 0.807 0.706 condition in accordance with K-4322, and shall be
0.750 0.737 0.618 plotted on Fig. K-4320-1 as follows. A series of assess-
0.800 0.660 0.532
ment points for various amounts of ductile flaw exten-
0.850 0.581 0.452
0.900 0.505 0.383 sion, ⌬a, up to the validity limit of the J-R curve shall
0.950 0.435 0.323 be plotted. Pressure p equal to the accumulation pressure
1.000 0.374 0.274 for Level A and B Service Loadings, Pa, and safety
1.050 0.321 0.232 factor (SF) on pressure of 1.25 shall be used. When
1.100 0.276 0.198
one or more assessment points lie inside the failure
assessment curve, the acceptance criteria based on flaw
stability in K-2200(a)(2) are satisfied.
where (SF) is the required safety factor on pressure. K-4330 J-INTEGRAL / TEARING MODULUS
The procedure for calculating KIp, KIt, and Po for axial PROCEDURE
flaws is provided by K-4322.1, and for circumferential
flaws by K-4322.2. Use of this procedure shall be limited to a postulated
initial flaw depth of one-quarter of the wall thickness.
K-4322.1 Axial Flaws
(a) The stress intensity factor due to internal pressure
for axial flaws with a safety factor (SF) on pressure K-4331 J-Integral at Flaw Instability A99
is given by Eq. (1). The stress intensity factor due to (a) In Fig. K-4330-1, the onset of flaw instability
radial thermal gradients is given by Eq. (3). is the point of intersection of the applied and material
(b) The reference limit-load pressure is given by the curves plotted on a graph of the J-integral versus tearing
following: modulus (J versus T). The expression for the applied
J versus T curve is given by the following:
(2 / √ 3 )␴y[0.905 − 0.379 (⌬a /t)]
Po p
[0.379 + (R i /t) + 0.379(⌬a /t)] J p (1000 W t ␴f2 /E)T (4)
(c) For materials with yield strength ␴y greater than where ␴f is a reference flow stress of 85 ksi.
85 ksi (586 MPa), ␴y in this equation shall be 85 ksi (b) For axial flaws Eq. (5) applies:
(586 MPa). This equation for Po is valid for 0 ≤ ⌬a /t
≤ 0.10. W p 0.235[1 + (0.083 × 10−3)(CR)t 2 /((SF)Ps)] (5)
A99 K-4322.2 Circumferential Flaws
(a) The stress intensity factor due to internal pressure where Ps is the pressure under evaluation. Eq. (5) is
for circumferential flaws with a safety factor (SF) on valid for 6 ≤ t ≤ 12 in., 2.25 ≤ (SF) Ps ≤ 5.00 ksi,
516

K-4331 APPENDIX K — NONMANDATORY K-4331
FIG. K-4330-1 ILLUSTRATION OF THE J-INTEGRAL /TEARING MODULUS PROCEDURE
and 0 ≤ (CR) ≤ 100°F /hr. For circumferential flaws TR p [E /(1000 ␴f2)] dJR /da (7)
Eq. (6) applies:
W p 0.21[1 + (0.257 × 10−3)(CR)t 2 /((SF)Ps)] (6) The same values for E and ␴f shall be used in Eqs.
(4) and (7). The J-integral versus tearing modulus JR
versus TR curve for the material is obtained by plotting
Eq. (6) is valid for 6 ≤ t ≤ 12 in., 2.25 ≤ (SF)Ps ≤ JR against TR for a series of increments in ductile flaw
9.00 ksi, and 0 ≤ (CR) ≤ 100°F /hr. Eqs. (4), (5), extension. Each coordinate for JR shall be evaluated
and (6) are based on material properties which are at the same ductile flaw extension as the coordinate
characteristic of reactor pressure vessel steels. for TR.
(c) The tearing modulus for the material is deter- (d) The value of the J-integral at the onset of flaw
mined by differentiation of the J-R curve with respect instability, J *, corresponds to the intersection of the
to flaw depth a. applied J versus T curve given by Eq. (4) with the
517

material JR versus TR curve, as illustrated in Fig. K- materials. This equation for K *It is valid for 0.2 ≤ a*e
4330-1. /t ≤ 0.5, and 0 ≤ (CR) ≤ 100°F /hr. The stress intensity
(e) The J-integral at the onset of flaw instability factor for small scale yielding due to internal pressure
may be determined analytically when a power-law curve at the onset of flaw instability, K *Ip, is given by the
fit to the J-R curve of the form following:
JR p C1 (⌬a)C2 K *Ip p (J *E ′ /1000) 0.5 − K *It
is available. The J-integral at the onset of flaw instability, (c) For a given value of K *Ip, the internal pressure
J *, is given by the following: at the onset of flaw instability for axial flaws is given
by the following:
J * p C1 (W t C2)C2
P * p K *Ip / [(1 + (R i ⁄ t))(␲a*e) 0.5 F *1]
A99 K-4332 Internal Pressure at Flaw Instability where

(a) Calculation of the internal pressure at the onset
of flaw instability is based on J *. Ductile flaw extension F *1 p 0.982 + 1.006(a*e /t) 2
at the onset of flaw instability, ⌬a*, is taken from the
J-R curve. The effective flaw depth at the onset of and for circumferential flaws is given by the following:
flaw instability includes ⌬a*, and is given by the
following: P* p K *Ip ⁄ [(1 + (R i / 2t)) (␲a*e) 0.5 F *2]
a*e p 0.25t + ⌬a* + [1 /(6␲)][J*E′ /(1000 ␴y2)] where
(b) The stress intensity factor due to radial thermal F *2 p 0.885 + 0.233(a*e /t) + 0.345(a*e /t) 2
gradients at the onset of flaw instability, K *It, for axial
or circumferential flaws is given by the following: These equations for P* are valid for 0.2 ≤ a*e /t ≤ 0.5,
and include the effect of pressure acting on the flaw
K *It p Cm (CR)t 2.5 F *3 faces.
where K-4333 Evaluation Using Criteria for Flaw

Stability
F *3 p 0.1181 + 0.5353(a*e /t) − 1.273(a*e /t) 2 + 0.6046(a*e /t) 3
The value of J* shall be calculated in accordance
with K-4331 using pressure Ps in Eqs. (5) and (6)
E␣ equal to the accumulation pressure for Level A and B
Cm p
[(1 − v) d] Service Loadings, Pa, and safety factor (SF) on pressure
of 1.25. The value of P* shall be calculated in accord-
For SA-302 Grades A and B, SA-533 Grade B, Class ance with K-4332. The acceptance criteria based on
1, and SA-508 Classes 2 and 3 steels, and their flaw stability in K-2200(a)(2) are satisfied when the
associated weldments, Cm equal to 0.0051 (ksi-hr)/ following inequality is satisfied:
(in.2-°F) can be used. Properties given in Part D of
Section II can be used to determine Cm for other P* > 1.25 Pa
518

ARTICLE K-5000
EVALUATION PROCEDURES FOR LEVELS C AND D
SERVICE LOADINGS
K-5100 SCOPE K-5220 EVALUATION USING CRITERION

FOR FLAW EXTENSION OF 0.1 IN.
This Article contains evaluation procedures that may
be used to satisfy the acceptance criteria in K-2000 (a) For Level C Service Loadings, the J-integral due
for Level C and D Service Loadings. A procedure to to applied loads, J1, shall be calculated in accordance
satisfy the J-integral criteria for a specified amount of with K-5210. Flaw depth a, equal to ao + 0.1 in., shall
flaw extension of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) is provided in K- be used to calculate the applied J- integral. Acceptance
5200. A procedure to satisfy the flaw stability criteria criteria for Level C Service Loadings based on a ductile
is provided in K-5300. These procedures are applicable flaw extension of 0.1 in. (2.5 mm) in K-2300(a)(1) are
to axial and circumferential flaw orientations, and shall satisfied when the following inequality is satisfied at
be used when this approach is selected. each value of J1 for the range in ao specified in K-2300.
J1 < J0.1
K-5200 EVALUATION PROCEDURE
FOR THE APPLIED (b) For time-dependent Level C Service Loadings,
J-INTEGRAL evaluation shall be in accordance with K-5400.
A99 K-5210 CALCULATION OF THE APPLIED
J-INTEGRAL
K-5300 EVALUATION PROCEDURE
(a) Stress intensity factors shall be calculated as a FOR FLAW STABILITY
function of flaw depth, a for Level C and D Service
Loadings for each applicable stress component, as fol- (a) For Level C and D Service Loadings, flaw stabil-
lows. Calculate KI due to internal pressure, radial ity shall be evaluated by direct application of the flaw
thermal gradient through the vessel wall, and cladding/ stability requirements of K-3400. The applied J-integral
base metal differential thermal expansion. for Level C and D Service Loadings shall be calculated
(b) The effective flaw depth for small-scale yielding, in accordance with K-5210 for a series of flaw depths
ae shall be calculated using corresponding to increasing amounts of ductile flaw
extension, ⌬a. A flaw depth a equal to a0 + ⌬a shall
be used to calculate the applied J-integral. The J-integral
ae p a + [1/(6␲)](KI /␴y)2 resistance at each value of ⌬a shall be determined from
the J-R curve. Flaw stability at a given applied load
(c) The stress intensity factor for small-scale yielding, is verified when K-3400(a) and K-3400(b) are satisfied.
KI′, shall be calculated by substituting ae for a in (a) Acceptance criteria based on flaw stability for Level
above. C Service Loadings in K-2300(a)(2), and for Level D
(d) The J-integral due to applied loads for small- Service Loadings in K-2400(a), are satisfied when flaw
scale yielding shall be calculated using stability is verified for the range in a0 specified in K-
2300 and K-2400.
(b) For Level D Service Loadings, for the range in
J p 1000(KI′)2 /E′ a0 specified in K-2400, demonstrate that the total flaw
519

depth after stable flaw extension is less than or equal

to 75% of the vessel wall thickness, and the remaining
ligament is not subject to tensile instability.
(c) For time-dependent Level C and D Service Load-
ings, evaluation shall be in accordance with K-5400.
K-5400 TIME-DEPENDENT LEVEL C

AND D SERVICE LOADINGS
When the applicable stress components vary with
time during Level C or D Service Loadings, evaluation
shall be performed at various times during the postulated
loading to determine the limiting conditions for the
flaw extension and flaw stability criteria. The J-integral
resistance shall be determined at each of the times the
evaluation is performed using the metal temperature
associated with each flaw depth evaluated.
520

APPENDIX L
OPERATING PLANT FATIGUE ASSESSMENT
521
ARTICLE L-1000
INTRODUCTION
L-1100 SCOPE L-1300 NOMENCLATURE

This Appendix provides methods for performing fa- The following nomenclature is used:
tigue assessments to determine acceptability for contin- a p general depth dimension for the postulated
ued service of reactor coolant system and primary flaw, in.
pressure boundary components subjected to thermal and ac p minimum critical flaw depth (size)
mechanical fatigue loads. ai p minimum critical flaw size for emergency and
faulted conditions, in.
af p maximum depth by which the postulated flaw
L-1200 EVALUATION METHODS in L-3200 is calculated to grow by the end of
(a) One or both of the following evaluation methods the evaluation period, in.
shall be used to determine acceptability for continued ao p maximum allowable flaw depth for normal (in-
service of reactor coolant system and primary pressure cluding upset and test) conditions, in.
boundary components: ø p general length dimension for the postulated
(1) The fatigue usage factor evaluation procedures flaw, in.
and acceptance criteria in L-2000. øf p maximum postulated flaw length at the end of
(2) The flaw tolerance evaluation procedures and the evaluation period, in.
acceptance criteria in L-3000. P p operating period calculated for the postulated
(b) The evaluations of L-1200(a)(1) and L- flaw in L-3200 to grow to the maximum depth
1200(a)(2) shall be documented in accordance with the allowed in L-3312, L-3320 (in the course of
requirements of L-4000. preparation), L-3332, or L-3342, yr.
523
ARTICLE L-2000
FATIGUE USAGE EVALUATION
L-2100 SCOPE cumulative fatigue usage factor (CUF) at the end of

the evaluation period.
This Article provides requirements for performing (b) Editions and Addenda of Section III later than
fatigue usage factor evaluations for reactor coolant the Construction Code may be used.
system or primary pressure boundary components in (c) The loadings in the Design Specification, plant
operating plants. specific loading cycles consistent with the plant design
and operating practices, or actual plant operating data,
shall be used, as appropriate.
L-2200 EVALUATION PROCEDURES

AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA L-2220 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The reactor coolant system or primary pressure
L-2210 EVALUATION PROCEDURES
boundary component is acceptable for continued service
(a) The Section III, Class 1 fatigue usage factor throughout the evaluation period if the CUF in L-2210
evaluation procedures shall be used to determine a is less than or equal to 1.0.
524
ARTICLE L-3000
FLAW TOLERANCE EVALUATION
L-3100 SCOPE TABLE L-3210-1

POSTULATED SURFACE FLAW DEPTH
This Article provides requirements for performing
fatigue flaw tolerance evaluations for operating plant Section
components. It includes requirements for shape, location, Thickness, Postulated Surface Flaw
and orientation of the postulated flaw used in the t, in. Depth, a/t, %
evaluation; the methodology for determination of the 0.5 30.0
growth of the postulated flaw during the evaluation 1 20.0
period; end-of-evaluation-period acceptance criteria; and 2 15.0
3 11.7
examination.
4–12 10.0
NOTES:
(1) For intermediate section thickness, t, linear interpolation is per-
mitted. Refer to IWA-3200.
L-3110 GENERAL PROCEDURE (2) For section thickness t < 0.5 in., the postulated flaw depth a p
0.15 in.
(a) Using the examination requirements in L-3410, (3) For section thickness t > 12 in., the postulated flaw depth a p
verify the absence of any flaw exceeding the applicable 1.2 in.
acceptance standard referenced in Table L-3410-1 at
the component locations of concern.
(b) Postulate the existence of a hypothetical initial
flaw in accordance with L-3200.
(c) Determine the stresses at the location of the
postulated flaw under normal operating (including upset
and test), emergency, and faulted conditions.
(b) The postulated flaw depths in Table L-3210-1
(d) Determine the postulated end-of-evaluation-pe-
shall be used for wrought and forged austenitic and
riod flaw size and critical flaw sizes using the analytical
ferritic steel base materials, and austenitic and ferritic
procedures in L-3300.
steel weld materials.
(e) Using the flaw sizes obtained in L-3300, apply
appropriate acceptance criteria in IWB-3600 to deter- (c) The postulated flaw depths in Table L-3210-1
mine acceptability of the component locations for con- may be used for dissimilar (bimetallic or trimetallic)
tinued service. welds and static or centrifugal cast austenitic steels if the
(f) Apply the successive examination requirements absence of a flaw exceeding the applicable acceptance
of L-3420 at the evaluated component locations. standard referenced in Table L-3410-1 is verified by
a volumetric examination technique demonstrated in
accordance with IWA-2230 for the applicable flaw
depth in Table L-3210-1 or confirmed by a surface
L-3200 FLAW MODEL examination in accordance with L-3410.
(d) Flaw depths smaller than those specified in Table
L-3210 FLAW SIZE AND SHAPE L-3210-1 may be used on an individual case basis if
(a) The postulated flaw used in this evaluation is a the smaller postulated flaw size is consistent with
planar, semi-elliptical surface flaw with an aspect ratio volumetric inspection capabilities demonstrated in ac-
of 6 to 1. cordance with IWA-2230.
525
L-3220 1998 SECTION XI — DIVISION 1 L-3341
L-3220 FLAW LOCATION AND L-3320 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND

ORIENTATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
FERRITIC STEEL COMPONENTS
(a) The postulated flaw used in this evaluation shall
LESS THAN 4 IN. (102 mm) THICK
be located on the surface of the component where the
fatigue usage limits are exceeded. These procedures and criteria are in the course of
(b) The plane of the postulated flaw shall be oriented preparation. The procedures and criteria of L-3310 may
perpendicular to the maximum principal stress. When be applied.
the direction of the maximum principal stress varies
throughout the stress cycle, the perpendicular direction
corresponding to the point in the cycle where the
L-3330 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND
maximum principal stress is greatest shall be chosen,
and maximum principal stresses throughout the cycle
AUSTENITIC PIPING
shall be assumed to act in this direction.
L-3331 Evaluation Procedures
(a) Appendix C provides analytical procedures for
evaluating the postulated flaw in L-3200 for austenitic
L-3300 EVALUATION PROCEDURES stainless steel piping and piping components.
AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (b) The procedures in C-3200 shall be used to calcu-
The loadings in the Design Specification, plant spe- late the maximum flaw depth, af, and the maximum
cific loading cycles consistent with the plant design flaw length, øf , to which the postulated flaw in L-3200
and operating practices, or actual plant operating data, will grow when subject to normal, upset, and test
shall be used, as appropriate, for evaluations in this conditions during the evaluation period.
Subarticle. (c) The procedures in C-3300 and C-3400 shall be
used to determine the allowable end-of-evaluation-pe-
riod flaw sizes for circumferential flaws and axial flaws,
respectively.
L-3310 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND
FERRITIC STEEL COMPONENTS 4 L-3332 Acceptance Criteria
IN. OR GREATER IN THICKNESS The austenitic piping or piping component is accept-
L-3311 Evaluation Procedures able for continued service during the evaluation period
if the postulated end-of-evaluation-period flaw size in
(a) Appendix A provides analytical procedures to L-3331 satisfies the acceptance criteria of IWB-3641.3.
evaluate the postulated flaw in L-3200 in ferritic steel
components.
(b) The procedures in A-5000 shall be used to calcu-
late af associated with the growth of the postulated L-3340 EVALUATION PROCEDURES AND
fatigue flaw in L-3200 subject to normal, upset, and ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR
test conditions expected to occur during the evaluation FERRITIC PIPING
period. L-3341 Evaluation Procedures
(c) The procedures in A-5000 shall be used to calcu-
late the minimum ai and ac at the end of the evaluation (a) Appendix H provides analytical procedures for
period. evaluating the postulated flaw in L-3200 for carbon
and low alloy ferritic piping and piping components.
(b) The procedures in H-3000 shall be used to calcu-
late the maximum flaw depth, af, and the maximum
L-3312 Acceptance Criteria
flaw length, øf , to which the postulated flaw in L-3200
The ferritic steel component is acceptable for contin- will grow when subject to normal, upset, and test
ued service during the evaluation period if the postulated conditions during the evaluation period.
end-of-evaluation-period flaw sizes of L-3311 satisfy (c) The allowable end-of-evaluation-period flaw size
the acceptance requirements of IWB-3610(d) or IWB- shall be determined using the procedures in H-5000,
3613, as appropriate. H-6000, or H-7000, as appropriate.
526
L-3342 APPENDIX L — NONMANDATORY L-3430
L-3342 Acceptance Criteria TABLE L-3420-1

SUCCESSIVE INSPECTION SCHEDULE
The carbon or low alloy ferritic piping or piping
component is acceptable for continued service during Allowable
the evaluation period if the postulated end-of-evaluation- Operating
period flaw in L-3341 satisfies the acceptance criteria Period,
P 1, yr. Successive Inspection Requirements
of IWB-3652.
≥20 Component locations of concern shall be
examined at the end of each inspection interval
listed in the schedule of inspection programs in
IWB-2410.
<20 Component locations of concern shall be
examined at the end of P/2 operating years or at
the end of each operating cycle (i.e., refueling
outage), whichever is later.
NOTE:
(1) See L-1300.
L-3400 EXAMINATION
REQUIREMENTS
L-3420 SUCCESSIVE EXAMINATIONS
L-3410 EXAMINATIONS
Component locations of concern shall be examined
(a) The absence of any flaw exceeding the applicable in accordance with the successive inspection schedule
acceptance standard referenced in Table IWB-3410-1, requirements in Table L-3420-1.
at the component location of concern, shall be verified
by surface or volumetric examination. Otherwise, this
Appendix is not applicable, and the flaw shall be L-3430 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
evaluated in accordance with IWB-3400. Personnel performing surface or volumetric examina-
(b) Examinations shall be conducted in accordance tions required by L-3410 and L-3420 shall be qualified
with IWA-2220, IWA-2230, or IWA-2240, as appli- and certified in accordance with the applicable require-
cable. ments of IWA-2300.
527
ARTICLE L-4000
RECORDS AND REPORTS
L-4100 SCOPE
This Article provides record and report requirements
for evaluations and examinations required by L-2000
and L-3000.
L-4200 EVALUATION RECORDS AND

REPORTS
The evaluations required by L-2000 and L-3000 shall
be documented.
L-4300 EXAMINATION RECORDS AND

REPORTS
(a) The reporting requirements of IWA-6420(b) shall
apply to the examinations required by L-3400.
(b) The examination record retention requirements
of IWA-6300 shall apply to the examinations required
by L-3400.
528
APPENDIX M 98
APPLYING MATHEMATICAL MODELING TO

ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE
RETAINING COMPONENTS
529
ARTICLE M-1000 98
INTRODUCTION
M-1100 SCOPE
This Appendix provides criteria for validation of
mathematical models used to predict equivalence in
examination coverage and misorientation angle. This
Article will ensure that extensions of examination proce-
dures, based upon predictions of a mathematical model,
to geometries not specifically addressed in performance
demonstrations by the ultrasonic system, are valid.
531
ARTICLE M-2000
VALIDATION OF MATHEMATICAL MODELS
M-2100 APPLICABILITY OF MODEL (d) standard problems with known solutions

In addition, confirmed published data, information, and
The mathematical model shall have a statement of correlations may be used.
scope that defines the limits of applicability of the
model, e.g., the model applies to nozzle geometries
that involve a cylinder intersecting a cylinder or a M-2300 DOCUMENTATION
cylinder intersecting a hemispherical head.
The verification test problems and results developed
in accordance with M-2200 shall be documented.
M-2200 MODEL VERIFICATION

M-2400 VERIFCATION FREQUENCY
The mathematical model shall be tested to verify its
capability to produce valid results for the range of Verification testing shall be performed whenever
permitted usage defined by the Scope. The verification changes are made to the computer program or when
process shall be controlled by the Owner’s quality significant hardware or operating system configuration
changes are made.
assurance program. The verification process for the
model shall include test results from the following
testing methods:
M-2500 MATHEMATICAL MODEL
(a) analysis without computer assistance, e.g., hand
calculations
ACCEPTANCE
(b) calculations using other validated, proven com- The mathematical model shall be considered accept-
puter programs, if available able when the test problems included in the verification
(c) experiments and tests process agree with known solutions with +/-10%.
532

Division 1 Rules For Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water Cooled Plants

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 1 Rules For Inspection and Testing of Components of Light-Water Cooled Plants

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DIVISION 1

RULES FOR INSPECTION AND

IWA-1000 Scope and Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

IWA-2000 Examination and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-3000 Standards for Examination Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

IWA-4000 Repair /Replacement Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-6000 Records and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

ASME B&PVC sec11$$$u5 05-12-99 05:21:02 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

A99 IWA-1100 SCOPE subject to review by the regulatory and enforcement

IWA-1100 SCOPE tanks, including their respective supports. The selection

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u10 04-15-99 08:36:58 pd: sec11

Standard or Revision Date

ACI 201.1 R-68 1984

ANSI/ASNT CP-189 1995

ANSI/AWS D 3.6 1989

APHA 427 1981, 15th Edition

APHA 4500-S2− 19th Edition

ASME QAI-1 1995

ASME NQA-1 1989

ASME/ANSI OM (Part 1) 1987

ASME/ANSI OM (Part 4) 1987 with OMa-1988

ASME/ANSI OM (Part 6) 1987 with OMa-1988

ASME/ANSI OM (Part 10) 1987 with OMa-1988

ASNT SNT-TC-1A 1984

ASTM D 512 1981

ASTM D 974 1987

ASTM D 992 1978

ASTM D 3867 1979

ASTM D 4327 1988

ASTM E 185 1982

ASTM E 380 1972

ASTM E 1065 1987A

ASTM E 1324 1990

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u10 04-15-99 08:36:58 pd: sec11

IWA-2100 GENERAL performed in accordance with written qualified proce-

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

TABLE IWA-2210-1 VISUAL EXAMINATIONS

98 IWA-2240 ALTERNATIVE EXAMINATIONS (b) Training, qualification, and certification of ultra-

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

(1) at least 40 hr plant walkdown experience, such TABLE IWA-2322-1

IWA-2323 Level III Personnel A99

The qualifications of Level III NDE personnel shall

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-2425 INSPECTION PLAN AND A99

IWA-2410 APPLICATION OF CODE EDITION

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

ASME B&PVC sec11$$u15 05-12-99 05:32:11 pd: sec11 Rev 14.04

IWA-2432 Inspection Program B

IWA-2441 Section XI Code Cases

IWA-2640 OTHER COMPONENTS (b) Longitudinal (Vertical) Welds. Longitudinal welds

FIG. IWA-3310-1 SURFACE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

FIG. IWA-3320-1 SUBSURFACE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

FIG. IWA-3330-1 MULTIPLE PLANAR FLAWS ORIENTED IN PLANE NORMAL TO

FIG. IWA-3340-1 NONPLANAR ELLIPTICAL SUBSURFACE FLAWS

FIG. IWA-3350-1 PARALLEL PLANAR FLAWS

FIG. IWA-3360-1 LAMINAR FLAWS

FIG. IWA-3380-1 NONALIGNED COPLANAR FLAWS IN PLANE NORMAL TO